0
|
1 |
/****************************************************************************
|
|
2 |
**
|
|
3 |
** Copyright (C) 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).
|
|
4 |
** All rights reserved.
|
|
5 |
** Contact: Nokia Corporation (qt-info@nokia.com)
|
|
6 |
**
|
|
7 |
** This file is part of the QtGui module of the Qt Toolkit.
|
|
8 |
**
|
|
9 |
** $QT_BEGIN_LICENSE:LGPL$
|
|
10 |
** No Commercial Usage
|
|
11 |
** This file contains pre-release code and may not be distributed.
|
|
12 |
** You may use this file in accordance with the terms and conditions
|
|
13 |
** contained in the Technology Preview License Agreement accompanying
|
|
14 |
** this package.
|
|
15 |
**
|
|
16 |
** GNU Lesser General Public License Usage
|
|
17 |
** Alternatively, this file may be used under the terms of the GNU Lesser
|
|
18 |
** General Public License version 2.1 as published by the Free Software
|
|
19 |
** Foundation and appearing in the file LICENSE.LGPL included in the
|
|
20 |
** packaging of this file. Please review the following information to
|
|
21 |
** ensure the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 requirements
|
|
22 |
** will be met: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
|
|
23 |
**
|
|
24 |
** In addition, as a special exception, Nokia gives you certain additional
|
|
25 |
** rights. These rights are described in the Nokia Qt LGPL Exception
|
|
26 |
** version 1.1, included in the file LGPL_EXCEPTION.txt in this package.
|
|
27 |
**
|
|
28 |
** If you have questions regarding the use of this file, please contact
|
|
29 |
** Nokia at qt-info@nokia.com.
|
|
30 |
**
|
|
31 |
**
|
|
32 |
**
|
|
33 |
**
|
|
34 |
**
|
|
35 |
**
|
|
36 |
**
|
|
37 |
**
|
|
38 |
** $QT_END_LICENSE$
|
|
39 |
**
|
|
40 |
****************************************************************************/
|
|
41 |
|
|
42 |
#include "qapplication.h"
|
|
43 |
#include "qapplication_p.h"
|
|
44 |
#include "qbrush.h"
|
|
45 |
#include "qcursor.h"
|
|
46 |
#include "qdesktopwidget.h"
|
|
47 |
#include "qevent.h"
|
|
48 |
#include "qhash.h"
|
|
49 |
#include "qlayout.h"
|
|
50 |
#include "qmenu.h"
|
|
51 |
#include "qmetaobject.h"
|
|
52 |
#include "qpixmap.h"
|
|
53 |
#include "qpointer.h"
|
|
54 |
#include "qstack.h"
|
|
55 |
#include "qstyle.h"
|
|
56 |
#include "qstylefactory.h"
|
|
57 |
#include "qvariant.h"
|
|
58 |
#include "qwidget.h"
|
|
59 |
#include "qstyleoption.h"
|
|
60 |
#ifndef QT_NO_ACCESSIBILITY
|
|
61 |
# include "qaccessible.h"
|
|
62 |
#endif
|
|
63 |
#if defined(Q_WS_WIN)
|
|
64 |
# include "qt_windows.h"
|
|
65 |
#endif
|
|
66 |
#ifdef Q_WS_MAC
|
|
67 |
# include "qt_mac_p.h"
|
|
68 |
# include "qt_cocoa_helpers_mac_p.h"
|
|
69 |
# include "qmainwindow.h"
|
|
70 |
#endif
|
|
71 |
#if defined(Q_WS_QWS)
|
|
72 |
# include "qwsdisplay_qws.h"
|
|
73 |
# include "qwsmanager_qws.h"
|
|
74 |
# include "qpaintengine.h" // for PorterDuff
|
|
75 |
# include "private/qwindowsurface_qws_p.h"
|
|
76 |
#endif
|
|
77 |
#include "qpainter.h"
|
|
78 |
#include "qtooltip.h"
|
|
79 |
#include "qwhatsthis.h"
|
|
80 |
#include "qdebug.h"
|
|
81 |
#include "private/qstylesheetstyle_p.h"
|
|
82 |
#include "private/qstyle_p.h"
|
|
83 |
#include "private/qinputcontext_p.h"
|
|
84 |
#include "qfileinfo.h"
|
|
85 |
#include "private/qsoftkeymanager_p.h"
|
|
86 |
|
|
87 |
#if defined (Q_WS_WIN)
|
|
88 |
# include <private/qwininputcontext_p.h>
|
|
89 |
#endif
|
|
90 |
|
|
91 |
#if defined(Q_WS_X11)
|
|
92 |
# include <private/qpaintengine_x11_p.h>
|
|
93 |
# include "qx11info_x11.h"
|
|
94 |
#endif
|
|
95 |
|
|
96 |
#include <private/qgraphicseffect_p.h>
|
|
97 |
#include <private/qwindowsurface_p.h>
|
|
98 |
#include <private/qbackingstore_p.h>
|
|
99 |
#ifdef Q_WS_MAC
|
|
100 |
# include <private/qpaintengine_mac_p.h>
|
|
101 |
#endif
|
|
102 |
#include <private/qpaintengine_raster_p.h>
|
|
103 |
|
|
104 |
#if defined(Q_OS_SYMBIAN)
|
|
105 |
#include "private/qt_s60_p.h"
|
|
106 |
#endif
|
|
107 |
|
|
108 |
#include "qwidget_p.h"
|
|
109 |
#include "qaction_p.h"
|
|
110 |
#include "qlayout_p.h"
|
|
111 |
#include "QtGui/qgraphicsproxywidget.h"
|
|
112 |
#include "QtGui/qgraphicsscene.h"
|
|
113 |
#include "private/qgraphicsproxywidget_p.h"
|
|
114 |
#include "QtGui/qabstractscrollarea.h"
|
|
115 |
#include "private/qabstractscrollarea_p.h"
|
|
116 |
#include "private/qevent_p.h"
|
|
117 |
|
|
118 |
#include "private/qgraphicssystem_p.h"
|
|
119 |
#include "private/qgesturemanager_p.h"
|
|
120 |
|
|
121 |
// widget/widget data creation count
|
|
122 |
//#define QWIDGET_EXTRA_DEBUG
|
|
123 |
//#define ALIEN_DEBUG
|
|
124 |
|
|
125 |
QT_BEGIN_NAMESPACE
|
|
126 |
|
|
127 |
#if !defined(Q_WS_QWS)
|
|
128 |
static bool qt_enable_backingstore = true;
|
|
129 |
#endif
|
|
130 |
#ifdef Q_WS_X11
|
|
131 |
// for compatibility with Qt 4.0
|
|
132 |
Q_GUI_EXPORT void qt_x11_set_global_double_buffer(bool enable)
|
|
133 |
{
|
|
134 |
qt_enable_backingstore = enable;
|
|
135 |
}
|
|
136 |
#endif
|
|
137 |
|
|
138 |
static inline bool qRectIntersects(const QRect &r1, const QRect &r2)
|
|
139 |
{
|
|
140 |
return (qMax(r1.left(), r2.left()) <= qMin(r1.right(), r2.right()) &&
|
|
141 |
qMax(r1.top(), r2.top()) <= qMin(r1.bottom(), r2.bottom()));
|
|
142 |
}
|
|
143 |
|
|
144 |
static inline bool hasBackingStoreSupport()
|
|
145 |
{
|
|
146 |
#ifdef Q_WS_MAC
|
|
147 |
return QApplicationPrivate::graphicsSystem() != 0;
|
|
148 |
#else
|
|
149 |
return true;
|
|
150 |
#endif
|
|
151 |
}
|
|
152 |
|
|
153 |
#ifdef Q_WS_MAC
|
|
154 |
# define QT_NO_PAINT_DEBUG
|
|
155 |
#endif
|
|
156 |
|
|
157 |
extern bool qt_sendSpontaneousEvent(QObject*, QEvent*); // qapplication.cpp
|
|
158 |
extern QDesktopWidget *qt_desktopWidget; // qapplication.cpp
|
|
159 |
|
|
160 |
QWidgetPrivate::QWidgetPrivate(int version)
|
|
161 |
: QObjectPrivate(version)
|
|
162 |
, extra(0)
|
|
163 |
, focus_next(0)
|
|
164 |
, focus_prev(0)
|
|
165 |
, focus_child(0)
|
|
166 |
, layout(0)
|
|
167 |
, needsFlush(0)
|
|
168 |
, redirectDev(0)
|
|
169 |
, widgetItem(0)
|
|
170 |
, extraPaintEngine(0)
|
|
171 |
, polished(0)
|
|
172 |
, graphicsEffect(0)
|
|
173 |
#if !defined(QT_NO_IM)
|
|
174 |
, imHints(Qt::ImhNone)
|
|
175 |
#endif
|
|
176 |
, inheritedFontResolveMask(0)
|
|
177 |
, inheritedPaletteResolveMask(0)
|
|
178 |
, leftmargin(0)
|
|
179 |
, topmargin(0)
|
|
180 |
, rightmargin(0)
|
|
181 |
, bottommargin(0)
|
|
182 |
, leftLayoutItemMargin(0)
|
|
183 |
, topLayoutItemMargin(0)
|
|
184 |
, rightLayoutItemMargin(0)
|
|
185 |
, bottomLayoutItemMargin(0)
|
|
186 |
, hd(0)
|
|
187 |
, size_policy(QSizePolicy::Preferred, QSizePolicy::Preferred)
|
|
188 |
, fg_role(QPalette::NoRole)
|
|
189 |
, bg_role(QPalette::NoRole)
|
|
190 |
, dirtyOpaqueChildren(1)
|
|
191 |
, isOpaque(0)
|
|
192 |
, inDirtyList(0)
|
|
193 |
, isScrolled(0)
|
|
194 |
, isMoved(0)
|
|
195 |
, usesDoubleBufferedGLContext(0)
|
|
196 |
#if defined(Q_WS_X11)
|
|
197 |
, picture(0)
|
|
198 |
#elif defined(Q_WS_WIN)
|
|
199 |
, noPaintOnScreen(0)
|
|
200 |
#elif defined(Q_WS_MAC)
|
|
201 |
, needWindowChange(0)
|
|
202 |
, isGLWidget(0)
|
|
203 |
, window_event(0)
|
|
204 |
, qd_hd(0)
|
|
205 |
#endif
|
|
206 |
{
|
|
207 |
if (!qApp) {
|
|
208 |
qFatal("QWidget: Must construct a QApplication before a QPaintDevice");
|
|
209 |
return;
|
|
210 |
}
|
|
211 |
|
|
212 |
if (version != QObjectPrivateVersion)
|
|
213 |
qFatal("Cannot mix incompatible Qt libraries");
|
|
214 |
|
|
215 |
isWidget = true;
|
|
216 |
memset(high_attributes, 0, sizeof(high_attributes));
|
|
217 |
#ifdef QWIDGET_EXTRA_DEBUG
|
|
218 |
static int count = 0;
|
|
219 |
qDebug() << "widgets" << ++count;
|
|
220 |
#endif
|
|
221 |
}
|
|
222 |
|
|
223 |
|
|
224 |
QWidgetPrivate::~QWidgetPrivate()
|
|
225 |
{
|
|
226 |
if (widgetItem)
|
|
227 |
widgetItem->wid = 0;
|
|
228 |
|
|
229 |
if (extra)
|
|
230 |
deleteExtra();
|
|
231 |
|
|
232 |
delete graphicsEffect;
|
|
233 |
}
|
|
234 |
|
|
235 |
QWindowSurface *QWidgetPrivate::createDefaultWindowSurface()
|
|
236 |
{
|
|
237 |
Q_Q(QWidget);
|
|
238 |
if (QApplicationPrivate::graphicsSystem())
|
|
239 |
return QApplicationPrivate::graphicsSystem()->createWindowSurface(q);
|
|
240 |
return createDefaultWindowSurface_sys();
|
|
241 |
}
|
|
242 |
|
|
243 |
/*!
|
|
244 |
\internal
|
|
245 |
*/
|
|
246 |
void QWidgetPrivate::scrollChildren(int dx, int dy)
|
|
247 |
{
|
|
248 |
Q_Q(QWidget);
|
|
249 |
if (q->children().size() > 0) { // scroll children
|
|
250 |
QPoint pd(dx, dy);
|
|
251 |
QObjectList childObjects = q->children();
|
|
252 |
for (int i = 0; i < childObjects.size(); ++i) { // move all children
|
|
253 |
QWidget *w = qobject_cast<QWidget*>(childObjects.at(i));
|
|
254 |
if (w && !w->isWindow()) {
|
|
255 |
QPoint oldp = w->pos();
|
|
256 |
QRect r(w->pos() + pd, w->size());
|
|
257 |
w->data->crect = r;
|
|
258 |
#ifndef Q_WS_QWS
|
|
259 |
if (w->testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Created))
|
|
260 |
w->d_func()->setWSGeometry();
|
|
261 |
#endif
|
|
262 |
w->d_func()->setDirtyOpaqueRegion();
|
|
263 |
QMoveEvent e(r.topLeft(), oldp);
|
|
264 |
QApplication::sendEvent(w, &e);
|
|
265 |
}
|
|
266 |
}
|
|
267 |
}
|
|
268 |
}
|
|
269 |
|
|
270 |
QInputContext *QWidgetPrivate::inputContext() const
|
|
271 |
{
|
|
272 |
#ifndef QT_NO_IM
|
|
273 |
if (ic)
|
|
274 |
return ic;
|
|
275 |
#endif
|
|
276 |
return qApp->inputContext();
|
|
277 |
}
|
|
278 |
|
|
279 |
/*!
|
|
280 |
This function returns the QInputContext for this widget. By
|
|
281 |
default the input context is inherited from the widgets
|
|
282 |
parent. For toplevels it is inherited from QApplication.
|
|
283 |
|
|
284 |
You can override this and set a special input context for this
|
|
285 |
widget by using the setInputContext() method.
|
|
286 |
|
|
287 |
\sa setInputContext()
|
|
288 |
*/
|
|
289 |
QInputContext *QWidget::inputContext()
|
|
290 |
{
|
|
291 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
292 |
if (!testAttribute(Qt::WA_InputMethodEnabled))
|
|
293 |
return 0;
|
|
294 |
|
|
295 |
return d->inputContext();
|
|
296 |
}
|
|
297 |
|
|
298 |
/*!
|
|
299 |
This function sets the input context \a context
|
|
300 |
on this widget.
|
|
301 |
|
|
302 |
\sa inputContext()
|
|
303 |
*/
|
|
304 |
void QWidget::setInputContext(QInputContext *context)
|
|
305 |
{
|
|
306 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
307 |
if (!testAttribute(Qt::WA_InputMethodEnabled))
|
|
308 |
return;
|
|
309 |
#ifndef QT_NO_IM
|
|
310 |
if (d->ic)
|
|
311 |
delete d->ic;
|
|
312 |
d->ic = context;
|
|
313 |
#endif
|
|
314 |
}
|
|
315 |
|
|
316 |
|
|
317 |
/*!
|
|
318 |
\obsolete
|
|
319 |
|
|
320 |
This function can be called on the widget that currently has focus
|
|
321 |
to reset the input method operating on it.
|
|
322 |
|
|
323 |
This function is providing for convenience, instead you should use
|
|
324 |
\l{QInputContext::}{reset()} on the input context that was
|
|
325 |
returned by inputContext().
|
|
326 |
|
|
327 |
\sa QInputContext, inputContext(), QInputContext::reset()
|
|
328 |
*/
|
|
329 |
void QWidget::resetInputContext()
|
|
330 |
{
|
|
331 |
if (!hasFocus())
|
|
332 |
return;
|
|
333 |
#ifndef QT_NO_IM
|
|
334 |
QInputContext *qic = this->inputContext();
|
|
335 |
if(qic)
|
|
336 |
qic->reset();
|
|
337 |
#endif // QT_NO_IM
|
|
338 |
}
|
|
339 |
|
|
340 |
#ifdef QT_KEYPAD_NAVIGATION
|
|
341 |
QPointer<QWidget> QWidgetPrivate::editingWidget;
|
|
342 |
|
|
343 |
/*!
|
|
344 |
Returns true if this widget currently has edit focus; otherwise false.
|
|
345 |
|
|
346 |
This feature is only available in Qt for Embedded Linux.
|
|
347 |
|
|
348 |
\sa setEditFocus(), QApplication::keypadNavigationEnabled()
|
|
349 |
*/
|
|
350 |
bool QWidget::hasEditFocus() const
|
|
351 |
{
|
|
352 |
const QWidget* w = this;
|
|
353 |
while (w->d_func()->extra && w->d_func()->extra->focus_proxy)
|
|
354 |
w = w->d_func()->extra->focus_proxy;
|
|
355 |
return QWidgetPrivate::editingWidget == w;
|
|
356 |
}
|
|
357 |
|
|
358 |
/*!
|
|
359 |
\fn void QWidget::setEditFocus(bool enable)
|
|
360 |
|
|
361 |
If \a enable is true, make this widget have edit focus, in which
|
|
362 |
case Qt::Key_Up and Qt::Key_Down will be delivered to the widget
|
|
363 |
normally; otherwise, Qt::Key_Up and Qt::Key_Down are used to
|
|
364 |
change focus.
|
|
365 |
|
|
366 |
This feature is only available in Qt for Embedded Linux.
|
|
367 |
|
|
368 |
\sa hasEditFocus(), QApplication::keypadNavigationEnabled()
|
|
369 |
*/
|
|
370 |
void QWidget::setEditFocus(bool on)
|
|
371 |
{
|
|
372 |
QWidget *f = this;
|
|
373 |
while (f->d_func()->extra && f->d_func()->extra->focus_proxy)
|
|
374 |
f = f->d_func()->extra->focus_proxy;
|
|
375 |
|
|
376 |
if (QWidgetPrivate::editingWidget && QWidgetPrivate::editingWidget != f)
|
|
377 |
QWidgetPrivate::editingWidget->setEditFocus(false);
|
|
378 |
|
|
379 |
if (on && !f->hasFocus())
|
|
380 |
f->setFocus();
|
|
381 |
|
|
382 |
if ((!on && !QWidgetPrivate::editingWidget)
|
|
383 |
|| (on && QWidgetPrivate::editingWidget == f)) {
|
|
384 |
return;
|
|
385 |
}
|
|
386 |
|
|
387 |
if (!on && QWidgetPrivate::editingWidget == f) {
|
|
388 |
QWidgetPrivate::editingWidget = 0;
|
|
389 |
QEvent event(QEvent::LeaveEditFocus);
|
|
390 |
QApplication::sendEvent(f, &event);
|
|
391 |
QApplication::sendEvent(f->style(), &event);
|
|
392 |
} else if (on) {
|
|
393 |
QWidgetPrivate::editingWidget = f;
|
|
394 |
QEvent event(QEvent::EnterEditFocus);
|
|
395 |
QApplication::sendEvent(f, &event);
|
|
396 |
QApplication::sendEvent(f->style(), &event);
|
|
397 |
}
|
|
398 |
}
|
|
399 |
#endif
|
|
400 |
|
|
401 |
/*!
|
|
402 |
\property QWidget::autoFillBackground
|
|
403 |
\brief whether the widget background is filled automatically
|
|
404 |
\since 4.1
|
|
405 |
|
|
406 |
If enabled, this property will cause Qt to fill the background of the
|
|
407 |
widget before invoking the paint event. The color used is defined by the
|
|
408 |
QPalette::Window color role from the widget's \l{QPalette}{palette}.
|
|
409 |
|
|
410 |
In addition, Windows are always filled with QPalette::Window, unless the
|
|
411 |
WA_OpaquePaintEvent or WA_NoSystemBackground attributes are set.
|
|
412 |
|
|
413 |
This property cannot be turned off (i.e., set to false) if a widget's
|
|
414 |
parent has a static gradient for its background.
|
|
415 |
|
|
416 |
\warning Use this property with caution in conjunction with
|
|
417 |
\l{Qt Style Sheets}. When a widget has a style sheet with a valid
|
|
418 |
background or a border-image, this property is automatically disabled.
|
|
419 |
|
|
420 |
By default, this property is false.
|
|
421 |
|
|
422 |
\sa Qt::WA_OpaquePaintEvent, Qt::WA_NoSystemBackground,
|
|
423 |
{QWidget#Transparency and Double Buffering}{Transparency and Double Buffering}
|
|
424 |
*/
|
|
425 |
bool QWidget::autoFillBackground() const
|
|
426 |
{
|
|
427 |
Q_D(const QWidget);
|
|
428 |
return d->extra && d->extra->autoFillBackground;
|
|
429 |
}
|
|
430 |
|
|
431 |
void QWidget::setAutoFillBackground(bool enabled)
|
|
432 |
{
|
|
433 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
434 |
if (!d->extra)
|
|
435 |
d->createExtra();
|
|
436 |
if (d->extra->autoFillBackground == enabled)
|
|
437 |
return;
|
|
438 |
|
|
439 |
d->extra->autoFillBackground = enabled;
|
|
440 |
d->updateIsOpaque();
|
|
441 |
update();
|
|
442 |
d->updateIsOpaque();
|
|
443 |
}
|
|
444 |
|
|
445 |
/*!
|
|
446 |
\class QWidget
|
|
447 |
\brief The QWidget class is the base class of all user interface objects.
|
|
448 |
|
|
449 |
\ingroup basicwidgets
|
|
450 |
|
|
451 |
|
|
452 |
The widget is the atom of the user interface: it receives mouse, keyboard
|
|
453 |
and other events from the window system, and paints a representation of
|
|
454 |
itself on the screen. Every widget is rectangular, and they are sorted in a
|
|
455 |
Z-order. A widget is clipped by its parent and by the widgets in front of
|
|
456 |
it.
|
|
457 |
|
|
458 |
A widget that is not embedded in a parent widget is called a window.
|
|
459 |
Usually, windows have a frame and a title bar, although it is also possible
|
|
460 |
to create windows without such decoration using suitable
|
|
461 |
\l{Qt::WindowFlags}{window flags}). In Qt, QMainWindow and the various
|
|
462 |
subclasses of QDialog are the most common window types.
|
|
463 |
|
|
464 |
Every widget's constructor accepts one or two standard arguments:
|
|
465 |
|
|
466 |
\list 1
|
|
467 |
\i \c{QWidget *parent = 0} is the parent of the new widget. If it is 0
|
|
468 |
(the default), the new widget will be a window. If not, it will be
|
|
469 |
a child of \e parent, and be constrained by \e parent's geometry
|
|
470 |
(unless you specify Qt::Window as window flag).
|
|
471 |
\i \c{Qt::WindowFlags f = 0} (where available) sets the window flags;
|
|
472 |
the default is suitable for almost all widgets, but to get, for
|
|
473 |
example, a window without a window system frame, you must use
|
|
474 |
special flags.
|
|
475 |
\endlist
|
|
476 |
|
|
477 |
QWidget has many member functions, but some of them have little direct
|
|
478 |
functionality; for example, QWidget has a font property, but never uses
|
|
479 |
this itself. There are many subclasses which provide real functionality,
|
|
480 |
such as QLabel, QPushButton, QListWidget, and QTabWidget.
|
|
481 |
|
|
482 |
|
|
483 |
\section1 Top-Level and Child Widgets
|
|
484 |
|
|
485 |
A widget without a parent widget is always an independent window (top-level
|
|
486 |
widget). For these widgets, setWindowTitle() and setWindowIcon() set the
|
|
487 |
title bar and icon respectively.
|
|
488 |
|
|
489 |
Non-window widgets are child widgets, displayed within their parent
|
|
490 |
widgets. Most widgets in Qt are mainly useful as child widgets. For
|
|
491 |
example, it is possible to display a button as a top-level window, but most
|
|
492 |
people prefer to put their buttons inside other widgets, such as QDialog.
|
|
493 |
|
|
494 |
\image parent-child-widgets.png A parent widget containing various child widgets.
|
|
495 |
|
|
496 |
The diagram above shows a QGroupBox widget being used to hold various child
|
|
497 |
widgets in a layout provided by QGridLayout. The QLabel child widgets have
|
|
498 |
been outlined to indicate their full sizes.
|
|
499 |
|
|
500 |
If you want to use a QWidget to hold child widgets you will usually want to
|
|
501 |
add a layout to the parent QWidget. See \l{Layout Management} for more
|
|
502 |
information.
|
|
503 |
|
|
504 |
|
|
505 |
\section1 Composite Widgets
|
|
506 |
|
|
507 |
When a widget is used as a container to group a number of child widgets, it
|
|
508 |
is known as a composite widget. These can be created by constructing a
|
|
509 |
widget with the required visual properties - a QFrame, for example - and
|
|
510 |
adding child widgets to it, usually managed by a layout. The above diagram
|
|
511 |
shows such a composite widget that was created using \l{Qt Designer}.
|
|
512 |
|
|
513 |
Composite widgets can also be created by subclassing a standard widget,
|
|
514 |
such as QWidget or QFrame, and adding the necessary layout and child
|
|
515 |
widgets in the constructor of the subclass. Many of the \l{Qt Examples}
|
|
516 |
{examples provided with Qt} use this approach, and it is also covered in
|
|
517 |
the Qt \l{Tutorials}.
|
|
518 |
|
|
519 |
|
|
520 |
\section1 Custom Widgets and Painting
|
|
521 |
|
|
522 |
Since QWidget is a subclass of QPaintDevice, subclasses can be used to
|
|
523 |
display custom content that is composed using a series of painting
|
|
524 |
operations with an instance of the QPainter class. This approach contrasts
|
|
525 |
with the canvas-style approach used by the \l{Graphics View}
|
|
526 |
{Graphics View Framework} where items are added to a scene by the
|
|
527 |
application and are rendered by the framework itself.
|
|
528 |
|
|
529 |
Each widget performs all painting operations from within its paintEvent()
|
|
530 |
function. This is called whenever the widget needs to be redrawn, either
|
|
531 |
as a result of some external change or when requested by the application.
|
|
532 |
|
|
533 |
The \l{widgets/analogclock}{Analog Clock example} shows how a simple widget
|
|
534 |
can handle paint events.
|
|
535 |
|
|
536 |
|
|
537 |
\section1 Size Hints and Size Policies
|
|
538 |
|
|
539 |
When implementing a new widget, it is almost always useful to reimplement
|
|
540 |
sizeHint() to provide a reasonable default size for the widget and to set
|
|
541 |
the correct size policy with setSizePolicy().
|
|
542 |
|
|
543 |
By default, composite widgets which do not provide a size hint will be
|
|
544 |
sized according to the space requirements of their child widgets.
|
|
545 |
|
|
546 |
The size policy lets you supply good default behavior for the layout
|
|
547 |
management system, so that other widgets can contain and manage yours
|
|
548 |
easily. The default size policy indicates that the size hint represents
|
|
549 |
the preferred size of the widget, and this is often good enough for many
|
|
550 |
widgets.
|
|
551 |
|
|
552 |
\note The size of top-level widgets are constrained to 2/3 of the desktop's
|
|
553 |
height and width. You can resize() the widget manually if these bounds are
|
|
554 |
inadequate.
|
|
555 |
|
|
556 |
|
|
557 |
\section1 Events
|
|
558 |
|
|
559 |
Widgets respond to events that are typically caused by user actions. Qt
|
|
560 |
delivers events to widgets by calling specific event handler functions with
|
|
561 |
instances of QEvent subclasses containing information about each event.
|
|
562 |
|
|
563 |
If your widget only contains child widgets, you probably do not need to
|
|
564 |
implement any event handlers. If you want to detect a mouse click in a
|
|
565 |
child widget call the child's underMouse() function inside the widget's
|
|
566 |
mousePressEvent().
|
|
567 |
|
|
568 |
The \l{widgets/scribble}{Scribble example} implements a wider set of
|
|
569 |
events to handle mouse movement, button presses, and window resizing.
|
|
570 |
|
|
571 |
You will need to supply the behavior and content for your own widgets, but
|
|
572 |
here is a brief overview of the events that are relevant to QWidget,
|
|
573 |
starting with the most common ones:
|
|
574 |
|
|
575 |
\list
|
|
576 |
\i paintEvent() is called whenever the widget needs to be repainted.
|
|
577 |
Every widget displaying custom content must implement it. Painting
|
|
578 |
using a QPainter can only take place in a paintEvent() or a
|
|
579 |
function called by a paintEvent().
|
|
580 |
\i resizeEvent() is called when the widget has been resized.
|
|
581 |
\i mousePressEvent() is called when a mouse button is pressed while
|
|
582 |
the mouse cursor is inside the widget, or when the widget has
|
|
583 |
grabbed the mouse using grabMouse(). Pressing the mouse without
|
|
584 |
releasing it is effectively the same as calling grabMouse().
|
|
585 |
\i mouseReleaseEvent() is called when a mouse button is released. A
|
|
586 |
widget receives mouse release events when it has received the
|
|
587 |
corresponding mouse press event. This means that if the user
|
|
588 |
presses the mouse inside \e your widget, then drags the mouse
|
|
589 |
somewhere else before releasing the mouse button, \e your widget
|
|
590 |
receives the release event. There is one exception: if a popup menu
|
|
591 |
appears while the mouse button is held down, this popup immediately
|
|
592 |
steals the mouse events.
|
|
593 |
\i mouseDoubleClickEvent() is called when the user double-clicks in
|
|
594 |
the widget. If the user double-clicks, the widget receives a mouse
|
|
595 |
press event, a mouse release event and finally this event instead
|
|
596 |
of a second mouse press event. (Some mouse move events may also be
|
|
597 |
received if the mouse is not held steady during this operation.) It
|
|
598 |
is \e{not possible} to distinguish a click from a double-click
|
|
599 |
until the second click arrives. (This is one reason why most GUI
|
|
600 |
books recommend that double-clicks be an extension of
|
|
601 |
single-clicks, rather than trigger a different action.)
|
|
602 |
\endlist
|
|
603 |
|
|
604 |
Widgets that accept keyboard input need to reimplement a few more event
|
|
605 |
handlers:
|
|
606 |
|
|
607 |
\list
|
|
608 |
\i keyPressEvent() is called whenever a key is pressed, and again when
|
|
609 |
a key has been held down long enough for it to auto-repeat. The
|
|
610 |
\key Tab and \key Shift+Tab keys are only passed to the widget if
|
|
611 |
they are not used by the focus-change mechanisms. To force those
|
|
612 |
keys to be processed by your widget, you must reimplement
|
|
613 |
QWidget::event().
|
|
614 |
\i focusInEvent() is called when the widget gains keyboard focus
|
|
615 |
(assuming you have called setFocusPolicy()). Well-behaved widgets
|
|
616 |
indicate that they own the keyboard focus in a clear but discreet
|
|
617 |
way.
|
|
618 |
\i focusOutEvent() is called when the widget loses keyboard focus.
|
|
619 |
\endlist
|
|
620 |
|
|
621 |
You may be required to also reimplement some of the less common event
|
|
622 |
handlers:
|
|
623 |
|
|
624 |
\list
|
|
625 |
\i mouseMoveEvent() is called whenever the mouse moves while a mouse
|
|
626 |
button is held down. This can be useful during drag and drop
|
|
627 |
operations. If you call setMouseTracking(true), you get mouse move
|
|
628 |
events even when no buttons are held down. (See also the \l{Drag
|
|
629 |
and Drop} guide.)
|
|
630 |
\i keyReleaseEvent() is called whenever a key is released and while it
|
|
631 |
is held down (if the key is auto-repeating). In that case, the
|
|
632 |
widget will receive a pair of key release and key press event for
|
|
633 |
every repeat. The \key Tab and \key Shift+Tab keys are only passed
|
|
634 |
to the widget if they are not used by the focus-change mechanisms.
|
|
635 |
To force those keys to be processed by your widget, you must
|
|
636 |
reimplement QWidget::event().
|
|
637 |
\i wheelEvent() is called whenever the user turns the mouse wheel
|
|
638 |
while the widget has the focus.
|
|
639 |
\i enterEvent() is called when the mouse enters the widget's screen
|
|
640 |
space. (This excludes screen space owned by any of the widget's
|
|
641 |
children.)
|
|
642 |
\i leaveEvent() is called when the mouse leaves the widget's screen
|
|
643 |
space. If the mouse enters a child widget it will not cause a
|
|
644 |
leaveEvent().
|
|
645 |
\i moveEvent() is called when the widget has been moved relative to
|
|
646 |
its parent.
|
|
647 |
\i closeEvent() is called when the user closes the widget (or when
|
|
648 |
close() is called).
|
|
649 |
\endlist
|
|
650 |
|
|
651 |
There are also some rather obscure events described in the documentation
|
|
652 |
for QEvent::Type. To handle these events, you need to reimplement event()
|
|
653 |
directly.
|
|
654 |
|
|
655 |
The default implementation of event() handles \key Tab and \key Shift+Tab
|
|
656 |
(to move the keyboard focus), and passes on most of the other events to
|
|
657 |
one of the more specialized handlers above.
|
|
658 |
|
|
659 |
Events and the mechanism used to deliver them are covered in the
|
|
660 |
\l{Events and Event Filters} document.
|
|
661 |
|
|
662 |
\section1 Groups of Functions and Properties
|
|
663 |
|
|
664 |
\table
|
|
665 |
\header \i Context \i Functions and Properties
|
|
666 |
|
|
667 |
\row \i Window functions \i
|
|
668 |
show(),
|
|
669 |
hide(),
|
|
670 |
raise(),
|
|
671 |
lower(),
|
|
672 |
close().
|
|
673 |
|
|
674 |
\row \i Top-level windows \i
|
|
675 |
\l windowModified, \l windowTitle, \l windowIcon, \l windowIconText,
|
|
676 |
\l isActiveWindow, activateWindow(), \l minimized, showMinimized(),
|
|
677 |
\l maximized, showMaximized(), \l fullScreen, showFullScreen(),
|
|
678 |
showNormal().
|
|
679 |
|
|
680 |
\row \i Window contents \i
|
|
681 |
update(),
|
|
682 |
repaint(),
|
|
683 |
scroll().
|
|
684 |
|
|
685 |
\row \i Geometry \i
|
|
686 |
\l pos, x(), y(), \l rect, \l size, width(), height(), move(), resize(),
|
|
687 |
\l sizePolicy, sizeHint(), minimumSizeHint(),
|
|
688 |
updateGeometry(), layout(),
|
|
689 |
\l frameGeometry, \l geometry, \l childrenRect, \l childrenRegion,
|
|
690 |
adjustSize(),
|
|
691 |
mapFromGlobal(), mapToGlobal(),
|
|
692 |
mapFromParent(), mapToParent(),
|
|
693 |
\l maximumSize, \l minimumSize, \l sizeIncrement,
|
|
694 |
\l baseSize, setFixedSize()
|
|
695 |
|
|
696 |
\row \i Mode \i
|
|
697 |
\l visible, isVisibleTo(),
|
|
698 |
\l enabled, isEnabledTo(),
|
|
699 |
\l modal,
|
|
700 |
isWindow(),
|
|
701 |
\l mouseTracking,
|
|
702 |
\l updatesEnabled,
|
|
703 |
visibleRegion().
|
|
704 |
|
|
705 |
\row \i Look and feel \i
|
|
706 |
style(),
|
|
707 |
setStyle(),
|
|
708 |
\l styleSheet,
|
|
709 |
\l cursor,
|
|
710 |
\l font,
|
|
711 |
\l palette,
|
|
712 |
backgroundRole(), setBackgroundRole(),
|
|
713 |
fontInfo(), fontMetrics().
|
|
714 |
|
|
715 |
\row \i Keyboard focus functions \i
|
|
716 |
\l focus, \l focusPolicy,
|
|
717 |
setFocus(), clearFocus(), setTabOrder(), setFocusProxy(),
|
|
718 |
focusNextChild(), focusPreviousChild().
|
|
719 |
|
|
720 |
\row \i Mouse and keyboard grabbing \i
|
|
721 |
grabMouse(), releaseMouse(),
|
|
722 |
grabKeyboard(), releaseKeyboard(),
|
|
723 |
mouseGrabber(), keyboardGrabber().
|
|
724 |
|
|
725 |
\row \i Event handlers \i
|
|
726 |
event(),
|
|
727 |
mousePressEvent(),
|
|
728 |
mouseReleaseEvent(),
|
|
729 |
mouseDoubleClickEvent(),
|
|
730 |
mouseMoveEvent(),
|
|
731 |
keyPressEvent(),
|
|
732 |
keyReleaseEvent(),
|
|
733 |
focusInEvent(),
|
|
734 |
focusOutEvent(),
|
|
735 |
wheelEvent(),
|
|
736 |
enterEvent(),
|
|
737 |
leaveEvent(),
|
|
738 |
paintEvent(),
|
|
739 |
moveEvent(),
|
|
740 |
resizeEvent(),
|
|
741 |
closeEvent(),
|
|
742 |
dragEnterEvent(),
|
|
743 |
dragMoveEvent(),
|
|
744 |
dragLeaveEvent(),
|
|
745 |
dropEvent(),
|
|
746 |
childEvent(),
|
|
747 |
showEvent(),
|
|
748 |
hideEvent(),
|
|
749 |
customEvent().
|
|
750 |
changeEvent(),
|
|
751 |
|
|
752 |
\row \i System functions \i
|
|
753 |
parentWidget(), window(), setParent(), winId(),
|
|
754 |
find(), metric().
|
|
755 |
|
|
756 |
\row \i Interactive help \i
|
|
757 |
setToolTip(), setWhatsThis()
|
|
758 |
|
|
759 |
\endtable
|
|
760 |
|
|
761 |
|
|
762 |
\section1 Widget Style Sheets
|
|
763 |
|
|
764 |
In addition to the standard widget styles for each platform, widgets can
|
|
765 |
also be styled according to rules specified in a \l{styleSheet}
|
|
766 |
{style sheet}. This feature enables you to customize the appearance of
|
|
767 |
specific widgets to provide visual cues to users about their purpose. For
|
|
768 |
example, a button could be styled in a particular way to indicate that it
|
|
769 |
performs a destructive action.
|
|
770 |
|
|
771 |
The use of widget style sheets is described in more detail in the
|
|
772 |
\l{Qt Style Sheets} document.
|
|
773 |
|
|
774 |
|
|
775 |
\section1 Transparency and Double Buffering
|
|
776 |
|
|
777 |
Since Qt 4.0, QWidget automatically double-buffers its painting, so there
|
|
778 |
is no need to write double-buffering code in paintEvent() to avoid
|
|
779 |
flicker.
|
|
780 |
|
|
781 |
Since Qt 4.1, the Qt::WA_ContentsPropagated widget attribute has been
|
|
782 |
deprecated. Instead, the contents of parent widgets are propagated by
|
|
783 |
default to each of their children as long as Qt::WA_PaintOnScreen is not
|
|
784 |
set. Custom widgets can be written to take advantage of this feature by
|
|
785 |
updating irregular regions (to create non-rectangular child widgets), or
|
|
786 |
painting with colors that have less than full alpha component. The
|
|
787 |
following diagram shows how attributes and properties of a custom widget
|
|
788 |
can be fine-tuned to achieve different effects.
|
|
789 |
|
|
790 |
\image propagation-custom.png
|
|
791 |
|
|
792 |
In the above diagram, a semi-transparent rectangular child widget with an
|
|
793 |
area removed is constructed and added to a parent widget (a QLabel showing
|
|
794 |
a pixmap). Then, different properties and widget attributes are set to
|
|
795 |
achieve different effects:
|
|
796 |
|
|
797 |
\list
|
|
798 |
\i The left widget has no additional properties or widget attributes
|
|
799 |
set. This default state suits most custom widgets using
|
|
800 |
transparency, are irregularly-shaped, or do not paint over their
|
|
801 |
entire area with an opaque brush.
|
|
802 |
\i The center widget has the \l autoFillBackground property set. This
|
|
803 |
property is used with custom widgets that rely on the widget to
|
|
804 |
supply a default background, and do not paint over their entire
|
|
805 |
area with an opaque brush.
|
|
806 |
\i The right widget has the Qt::WA_OpaquePaintEvent widget attribute
|
|
807 |
set. This indicates that the widget will paint over its entire area
|
|
808 |
with opaque colors. The widget's area will initially be
|
|
809 |
\e{uninitialized}, represented in the diagram with a red diagonal
|
|
810 |
grid pattern that shines through the overpainted area. The
|
|
811 |
Qt::WA_OpaquePaintArea attribute is useful for widgets that need to
|
|
812 |
paint their own specialized contents quickly and do not need a
|
|
813 |
default filled background.
|
|
814 |
\endlist
|
|
815 |
|
|
816 |
To rapidly update custom widgets with simple background colors, such as
|
|
817 |
real-time plotting or graphing widgets, it is better to define a suitable
|
|
818 |
background color (using setBackgroundRole() with the
|
|
819 |
QPalette::Window role), set the \l autoFillBackground property, and only
|
|
820 |
implement the necessary drawing functionality in the widget's paintEvent().
|
|
821 |
|
|
822 |
To rapidly update custom widgets that constantly paint over their entire
|
|
823 |
areas with opaque content, e.g., video streaming widgets, it is better to
|
|
824 |
set the widget's Qt::WA_OpaquePaintEvent, avoiding any unnecessary overhead
|
|
825 |
associated with repainting the widget's background.
|
|
826 |
|
|
827 |
If a widget has both the Qt::WA_OpaquePaintEvent widget attribute \e{and}
|
|
828 |
the \l autoFillBackground property set, the Qt::WA_OpaquePaintEvent
|
|
829 |
attribute takes precedence. Depending on your requirements, you should
|
|
830 |
choose either one of them.
|
|
831 |
|
|
832 |
Since Qt 4.1, the contents of parent widgets are also propagated to
|
|
833 |
standard Qt widgets. This can lead to some unexpected results if the
|
|
834 |
parent widget is decorated in a non-standard way, as shown in the diagram
|
|
835 |
below.
|
|
836 |
|
|
837 |
\image propagation-standard.png
|
|
838 |
|
|
839 |
The scope for customizing the painting behavior of standard Qt widgets,
|
|
840 |
without resorting to subclassing, is slightly less than that possible for
|
|
841 |
custom widgets. Usually, the desired appearance of a standard widget can be
|
|
842 |
achieved by setting its \l autoFillBackground property.
|
|
843 |
|
|
844 |
|
|
845 |
\section1 Creating Translucent Windows
|
|
846 |
|
|
847 |
Since Qt 4.5, it has been possible to create windows with translucent regions
|
|
848 |
on window systems that support compositing.
|
|
849 |
|
|
850 |
To enable this feature in a top-level widget, set its Qt::WA_TranslucentBackground
|
|
851 |
attribute with setAttribute() and ensure that its background is painted with
|
|
852 |
non-opaque colors in the regions you want to be partially transparent.
|
|
853 |
|
|
854 |
Platform notes:
|
|
855 |
|
|
856 |
\list
|
|
857 |
\o X11: This feature relies on the use of an X server that supports ARGB visuals
|
|
858 |
and a compositing window manager.
|
|
859 |
\o Windows: The widget needs to have the Qt::FramelessWindowHint window flag set
|
|
860 |
for the translucency to work.
|
|
861 |
\endlist
|
|
862 |
|
|
863 |
|
|
864 |
\section1 Native Widgets vs Alien Widgets
|
|
865 |
|
|
866 |
Introduced in Qt 4.4, alien widgets are widgets unknown to the windowing
|
|
867 |
system. They do not have a native window handle associated with them. This
|
|
868 |
feature significantly speeds up widget painting, resizing, and removes flicker.
|
|
869 |
|
|
870 |
Should you require the old behavior with native windows, you can choose
|
|
871 |
one of the following options:
|
|
872 |
|
|
873 |
\list 1
|
|
874 |
\i Use the \c{QT_USE_NATIVE_WINDOWS=1} in your environment.
|
|
875 |
\i Set the Qt::AA_NativeWindows attribute on your application. All
|
|
876 |
widgets will be native widgets.
|
|
877 |
\i Set the Qt::WA_NativeWindow attribute on widgets: The widget itself
|
|
878 |
and all of its ancestors will become native (unless
|
|
879 |
Qt::WA_DontCreateNativeAncestors is set).
|
|
880 |
\i Call QWidget::winId to enforce a native window (this implies 3).
|
|
881 |
\i Set the Qt::WA_PaintOnScreen attribute to enforce a native window
|
|
882 |
(this implies 3).
|
|
883 |
\endlist
|
|
884 |
|
|
885 |
\sa QEvent, QPainter, QGridLayout, QBoxLayout
|
|
886 |
|
|
887 |
\section1 Softkeys
|
|
888 |
|
|
889 |
Since Qt 4.6, Softkeys are usually physical keys on a device that have a corresponding label or
|
|
890 |
other visual representation on the screen that is generally located next to its
|
|
891 |
physical counterpart. They are most often found on mobile phone platforms. In
|
|
892 |
modern touch based user interfaces it is also possible to have softkeys that do
|
|
893 |
not correspond to any physical keys. Softkeys differ from other onscreen labels
|
|
894 |
in that they are contextual.
|
|
895 |
|
|
896 |
In Qt, contextual softkeys are added to a widget by calling addAction() and
|
|
897 |
passing a \c QAction with a softkey role set on it. When the widget
|
|
898 |
containing the softkey actions has focus, its softkeys should appear in
|
|
899 |
the user interface. Softkeys are discovered by traversing the widget
|
|
900 |
heirarchy so it is possible to define a single set of softkeys that are
|
|
901 |
present at all times by calling addAction() for a given top level widget.
|
|
902 |
|
|
903 |
On some platforms, this concept overlaps with \c QMenuBar such that if no
|
|
904 |
other softkeys are found and the top level widget is a QMainWindow containing
|
|
905 |
a QMenuBar, the menubar actions may appear on one of the softkeys.
|
|
906 |
|
|
907 |
Note: Currently softkeys are only supported on the Symbian Platform.
|
|
908 |
|
|
909 |
\sa addAction(), QAction, QMenuBar
|
|
910 |
|
|
911 |
*/
|
|
912 |
|
|
913 |
QWidgetMapper *QWidgetPrivate::mapper = 0; // widget with wid
|
|
914 |
QWidgetSet *QWidgetPrivate::allWidgets = 0; // widgets with no wid
|
|
915 |
|
|
916 |
|
|
917 |
/*****************************************************************************
|
|
918 |
QWidget utility functions
|
|
919 |
*****************************************************************************/
|
|
920 |
|
|
921 |
QRegion qt_dirtyRegion(QWidget *widget)
|
|
922 |
{
|
|
923 |
if (!widget)
|
|
924 |
return QRegion();
|
|
925 |
|
|
926 |
QWidgetBackingStore *bs = qt_widget_private(widget)->maybeBackingStore();
|
|
927 |
if (!bs)
|
|
928 |
return QRegion();
|
|
929 |
|
|
930 |
return bs->dirtyRegion(widget);
|
|
931 |
}
|
|
932 |
|
|
933 |
/*****************************************************************************
|
|
934 |
QWidget member functions
|
|
935 |
*****************************************************************************/
|
|
936 |
|
|
937 |
/*
|
|
938 |
Widget state flags:
|
|
939 |
\list
|
|
940 |
\i Qt::WA_WState_Created The widget has a valid winId().
|
|
941 |
\i Qt::WA_WState_Visible The widget is currently visible.
|
|
942 |
\i Qt::WA_WState_Hidden The widget is hidden, i.e. it won't
|
|
943 |
become visible unless you call show() on it. Qt::WA_WState_Hidden
|
|
944 |
implies !Qt::WA_WState_Visible.
|
|
945 |
\i Qt::WA_WState_CompressKeys Compress keyboard events.
|
|
946 |
\i Qt::WA_WState_BlockUpdates Repaints and updates are disabled.
|
|
947 |
\i Qt::WA_WState_InPaintEvent Currently processing a paint event.
|
|
948 |
\i Qt::WA_WState_Reparented The widget has been reparented.
|
|
949 |
\i Qt::WA_WState_ConfigPending A configuration (resize/move) event is pending.
|
|
950 |
\i Qt::WA_WState_DND (Deprecated) The widget supports drag and drop, see setAcceptDrops().
|
|
951 |
\endlist
|
|
952 |
*/
|
|
953 |
|
|
954 |
struct QWidgetExceptionCleaner
|
|
955 |
{
|
|
956 |
/* this cleans up when the constructor throws an exception */
|
|
957 |
static inline void cleanup(QWidget *that, QWidgetPrivate *d)
|
|
958 |
{
|
|
959 |
#ifdef QT_NO_EXCEPTIONS
|
|
960 |
Q_UNUSED(that);
|
|
961 |
Q_UNUSED(d);
|
|
962 |
#else
|
|
963 |
QWidgetPrivate::allWidgets->remove(that);
|
|
964 |
if (d->focus_next != that) {
|
|
965 |
if (d->focus_next)
|
|
966 |
d->focus_next->d_func()->focus_prev = d->focus_prev;
|
|
967 |
if (d->focus_prev)
|
|
968 |
d->focus_prev->d_func()->focus_next = d->focus_next;
|
|
969 |
}
|
|
970 |
#endif
|
|
971 |
}
|
|
972 |
};
|
|
973 |
|
|
974 |
/*!
|
|
975 |
Constructs a widget which is a child of \a parent, with widget
|
|
976 |
flags set to \a f.
|
|
977 |
|
|
978 |
If \a parent is 0, the new widget becomes a window. If
|
|
979 |
\a parent is another widget, this widget becomes a child window
|
|
980 |
inside \a parent. The new widget is deleted when its \a parent is
|
|
981 |
deleted.
|
|
982 |
|
|
983 |
The widget flags argument, \a f, is normally 0, but it can be set
|
|
984 |
to customize the frame of a window (i.e. \a
|
|
985 |
parent must be 0). To customize the frame, use a value composed
|
|
986 |
from the bitwise OR of any of the \l{Qt::WindowFlags}{window flags}.
|
|
987 |
|
|
988 |
If you add a child widget to an already visible widget you must
|
|
989 |
explicitly show the child to make it visible.
|
|
990 |
|
|
991 |
Note that the X11 version of Qt may not be able to deliver all
|
|
992 |
combinations of style flags on all systems. This is because on
|
|
993 |
X11, Qt can only ask the window manager, and the window manager
|
|
994 |
can override the application's settings. On Windows, Qt can set
|
|
995 |
whatever flags you want.
|
|
996 |
|
|
997 |
\sa windowFlags
|
|
998 |
*/
|
|
999 |
|
|
1000 |
QWidget::QWidget(QWidget *parent, Qt::WindowFlags f)
|
|
1001 |
: QObject(*new QWidgetPrivate, 0), QPaintDevice()
|
|
1002 |
{
|
|
1003 |
QT_TRY {
|
|
1004 |
d_func()->init(parent, f);
|
|
1005 |
} QT_CATCH(...) {
|
|
1006 |
QWidgetExceptionCleaner::cleanup(this, d_func());
|
|
1007 |
QT_RETHROW;
|
|
1008 |
}
|
|
1009 |
}
|
|
1010 |
|
|
1011 |
#ifdef QT3_SUPPORT
|
|
1012 |
/*!
|
|
1013 |
\overload
|
|
1014 |
\obsolete
|
|
1015 |
*/
|
|
1016 |
QWidget::QWidget(QWidget *parent, const char *name, Qt::WindowFlags f)
|
|
1017 |
: QObject(*new QWidgetPrivate, 0), QPaintDevice()
|
|
1018 |
{
|
|
1019 |
QT_TRY {
|
|
1020 |
d_func()->init(parent , f);
|
|
1021 |
setObjectName(QString::fromAscii(name));
|
|
1022 |
} QT_CATCH(...) {
|
|
1023 |
QWidgetExceptionCleaner::cleanup(this, d_func());
|
|
1024 |
QT_RETHROW;
|
|
1025 |
}
|
|
1026 |
}
|
|
1027 |
#endif
|
|
1028 |
|
|
1029 |
/*! \internal
|
|
1030 |
*/
|
|
1031 |
QWidget::QWidget(QWidgetPrivate &dd, QWidget* parent, Qt::WindowFlags f)
|
|
1032 |
: QObject(dd, 0), QPaintDevice()
|
|
1033 |
{
|
|
1034 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
1035 |
QT_TRY {
|
|
1036 |
d->init(parent, f);
|
|
1037 |
} QT_CATCH(...) {
|
|
1038 |
QWidgetExceptionCleaner::cleanup(this, d_func());
|
|
1039 |
QT_RETHROW;
|
|
1040 |
}
|
|
1041 |
}
|
|
1042 |
|
|
1043 |
/*!
|
|
1044 |
\internal
|
|
1045 |
*/
|
|
1046 |
int QWidget::devType() const
|
|
1047 |
{
|
|
1048 |
return QInternal::Widget;
|
|
1049 |
}
|
|
1050 |
|
|
1051 |
|
|
1052 |
//### w is a "this" ptr, passed as a param because QWorkspace needs special logic
|
|
1053 |
void QWidgetPrivate::adjustFlags(Qt::WindowFlags &flags, QWidget *w)
|
|
1054 |
{
|
|
1055 |
bool customize = (flags & (Qt::CustomizeWindowHint
|
|
1056 |
| Qt::FramelessWindowHint
|
|
1057 |
| Qt::WindowTitleHint
|
|
1058 |
| Qt::WindowSystemMenuHint
|
|
1059 |
| Qt::WindowMinimizeButtonHint
|
|
1060 |
| Qt::WindowMaximizeButtonHint
|
|
1061 |
| Qt::WindowCloseButtonHint
|
|
1062 |
| Qt::WindowContextHelpButtonHint));
|
|
1063 |
|
|
1064 |
uint type = (flags & Qt::WindowType_Mask);
|
|
1065 |
|
|
1066 |
if ((type == Qt::Widget || type == Qt::SubWindow) && w && !w->parent()) {
|
|
1067 |
type = Qt::Window;
|
|
1068 |
flags |= Qt::Window;
|
|
1069 |
}
|
|
1070 |
|
|
1071 |
if (flags & Qt::CustomizeWindowHint) {
|
|
1072 |
// modify window flags to make them consistent.
|
|
1073 |
// Only enable this on non-Mac platforms. Since the old way of doing this would
|
|
1074 |
// interpret WindowSystemMenuHint as a close button and we can't change that behavior
|
|
1075 |
// we can't just add this in.
|
|
1076 |
#ifndef Q_WS_MAC
|
|
1077 |
if (flags & (Qt::WindowMinMaxButtonsHint | Qt::WindowCloseButtonHint | Qt::WindowContextHelpButtonHint)) {
|
|
1078 |
flags |= Qt::WindowSystemMenuHint;
|
|
1079 |
#else
|
|
1080 |
if (flags & (Qt::WindowMinMaxButtonsHint | Qt::WindowCloseButtonHint
|
|
1081 |
| Qt::WindowSystemMenuHint)) {
|
|
1082 |
#endif
|
|
1083 |
flags |= Qt::WindowTitleHint;
|
|
1084 |
flags &= ~Qt::FramelessWindowHint;
|
|
1085 |
}
|
|
1086 |
} else if (customize && !(flags & Qt::FramelessWindowHint)) {
|
|
1087 |
// if any of the window hints that affect the titlebar are set
|
|
1088 |
// and the window is supposed to have frame, we add a titlebar
|
|
1089 |
// and system menu by default.
|
|
1090 |
flags |= Qt::WindowSystemMenuHint;
|
|
1091 |
flags |= Qt::WindowTitleHint;
|
|
1092 |
}
|
|
1093 |
if (customize)
|
|
1094 |
; // don't modify window flags if the user explicitely set them.
|
|
1095 |
else if (type == Qt::Dialog || type == Qt::Sheet)
|
|
1096 |
#ifndef Q_WS_WINCE
|
|
1097 |
flags |= Qt::WindowTitleHint | Qt::WindowSystemMenuHint | Qt::WindowContextHelpButtonHint | Qt::WindowCloseButtonHint;
|
|
1098 |
#else
|
|
1099 |
flags |= Qt::WindowTitleHint | Qt::WindowSystemMenuHint | Qt::WindowCloseButtonHint;
|
|
1100 |
#endif
|
|
1101 |
else if (type == Qt::Tool)
|
|
1102 |
flags |= Qt::WindowTitleHint | Qt::WindowSystemMenuHint | Qt::WindowCloseButtonHint;
|
|
1103 |
else
|
|
1104 |
flags |= Qt::WindowTitleHint | Qt::WindowSystemMenuHint | Qt::WindowMinimizeButtonHint | Qt::WindowMaximizeButtonHint | Qt::WindowCloseButtonHint;
|
|
1105 |
|
|
1106 |
|
|
1107 |
}
|
|
1108 |
|
|
1109 |
void QWidgetPrivate::init(QWidget *parentWidget, Qt::WindowFlags f)
|
|
1110 |
{
|
|
1111 |
Q_Q(QWidget);
|
|
1112 |
if (QApplication::type() == QApplication::Tty)
|
|
1113 |
qFatal("QWidget: Cannot create a QWidget when no GUI is being used");
|
|
1114 |
|
|
1115 |
Q_ASSERT(allWidgets);
|
|
1116 |
allWidgets->insert(q);
|
|
1117 |
|
|
1118 |
QWidget *desktopWidget = 0;
|
|
1119 |
if (parentWidget && parentWidget->windowType() == Qt::Desktop) {
|
|
1120 |
desktopWidget = parentWidget;
|
|
1121 |
parentWidget = 0;
|
|
1122 |
}
|
|
1123 |
|
|
1124 |
q->data = &data;
|
|
1125 |
|
|
1126 |
#ifndef QT_NO_THREAD
|
|
1127 |
if (!parent) {
|
|
1128 |
Q_ASSERT_X(q->thread() == qApp->thread(), "QWidget",
|
|
1129 |
"Widgets must be created in the GUI thread.");
|
|
1130 |
}
|
|
1131 |
#endif
|
|
1132 |
|
|
1133 |
#if defined(Q_WS_X11)
|
|
1134 |
if (desktopWidget) {
|
|
1135 |
// make sure the widget is created on the same screen as the
|
|
1136 |
// programmer specified desktop widget
|
|
1137 |
xinfo = desktopWidget->d_func()->xinfo;
|
|
1138 |
}
|
|
1139 |
#else
|
|
1140 |
Q_UNUSED(desktopWidget);
|
|
1141 |
#endif
|
|
1142 |
|
|
1143 |
data.fstrut_dirty = true;
|
|
1144 |
|
|
1145 |
data.winid = 0;
|
|
1146 |
data.widget_attributes = 0;
|
|
1147 |
data.window_flags = f;
|
|
1148 |
data.window_state = 0;
|
|
1149 |
data.focus_policy = 0;
|
|
1150 |
data.context_menu_policy = Qt::DefaultContextMenu;
|
|
1151 |
data.window_modality = Qt::NonModal;
|
|
1152 |
|
|
1153 |
data.sizehint_forced = 0;
|
|
1154 |
data.is_closing = 0;
|
|
1155 |
data.in_show = 0;
|
|
1156 |
data.in_set_window_state = 0;
|
|
1157 |
data.in_destructor = false;
|
|
1158 |
|
|
1159 |
// Widgets with Qt::MSWindowsOwnDC (typically QGLWidget) must have a window handle.
|
|
1160 |
if (f & Qt::MSWindowsOwnDC)
|
|
1161 |
q->setAttribute(Qt::WA_NativeWindow);
|
|
1162 |
|
|
1163 |
q->setAttribute(Qt::WA_QuitOnClose); // might be cleared in adjustQuitOnCloseAttribute()
|
|
1164 |
adjustQuitOnCloseAttribute();
|
|
1165 |
|
|
1166 |
q->setAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Hidden);
|
|
1167 |
|
|
1168 |
//give potential windows a bigger "pre-initial" size; create_sys() will give them a new size later
|
|
1169 |
data.crect = parentWidget ? QRect(0,0,100,30) : QRect(0,0,640,480);
|
|
1170 |
|
|
1171 |
focus_next = focus_prev = q;
|
|
1172 |
|
|
1173 |
if ((f & Qt::WindowType_Mask) == Qt::Desktop)
|
|
1174 |
q->create();
|
|
1175 |
else if (parentWidget)
|
|
1176 |
q->setParent(parentWidget, data.window_flags);
|
|
1177 |
else {
|
|
1178 |
adjustFlags(data.window_flags, q);
|
|
1179 |
resolveLayoutDirection();
|
|
1180 |
// opaque system background?
|
|
1181 |
const QBrush &background = q->palette().brush(QPalette::Window);
|
|
1182 |
setOpaque(q->isWindow() && background.style() != Qt::NoBrush && background.isOpaque());
|
|
1183 |
}
|
|
1184 |
data.fnt = QFont(data.fnt, q);
|
|
1185 |
#if defined(Q_WS_X11)
|
|
1186 |
data.fnt.x11SetScreen(xinfo.screen());
|
|
1187 |
#endif // Q_WS_X11
|
|
1188 |
|
|
1189 |
q->setAttribute(Qt::WA_PendingMoveEvent);
|
|
1190 |
q->setAttribute(Qt::WA_PendingResizeEvent);
|
|
1191 |
|
|
1192 |
if (++QWidgetPrivate::instanceCounter > QWidgetPrivate::maxInstances)
|
|
1193 |
QWidgetPrivate::maxInstances = QWidgetPrivate::instanceCounter;
|
|
1194 |
|
|
1195 |
if (QApplicationPrivate::app_compile_version < 0x040200
|
|
1196 |
|| QApplicationPrivate::testAttribute(Qt::AA_ImmediateWidgetCreation))
|
|
1197 |
q->create();
|
|
1198 |
|
|
1199 |
|
|
1200 |
QEvent e(QEvent::Create);
|
|
1201 |
QApplication::sendEvent(q, &e);
|
|
1202 |
QApplication::postEvent(q, new QEvent(QEvent::PolishRequest));
|
|
1203 |
|
|
1204 |
extraPaintEngine = 0;
|
|
1205 |
}
|
|
1206 |
|
|
1207 |
|
|
1208 |
|
|
1209 |
void QWidgetPrivate::createRecursively()
|
|
1210 |
{
|
|
1211 |
Q_Q(QWidget);
|
|
1212 |
q->create(0, true, true);
|
|
1213 |
for (int i = 0; i < children.size(); ++i) {
|
|
1214 |
QWidget *child = qobject_cast<QWidget *>(children.at(i));
|
|
1215 |
if (child && !child->isHidden() && !child->isWindow() && !child->testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Created))
|
|
1216 |
child->d_func()->createRecursively();
|
|
1217 |
}
|
|
1218 |
}
|
|
1219 |
|
|
1220 |
|
|
1221 |
|
|
1222 |
|
|
1223 |
/*!
|
|
1224 |
Creates a new widget window if \a window is 0, otherwise sets the
|
|
1225 |
widget's window to \a window.
|
|
1226 |
|
|
1227 |
Initializes the window (sets the geometry etc.) if \a
|
|
1228 |
initializeWindow is true. If \a initializeWindow is false, no
|
|
1229 |
initialization is performed. This parameter only makes sense if \a
|
|
1230 |
window is a valid window.
|
|
1231 |
|
|
1232 |
Destroys the old window if \a destroyOldWindow is true. If \a
|
|
1233 |
destroyOldWindow is false, you are responsible for destroying the
|
|
1234 |
window yourself (using platform native code).
|
|
1235 |
|
|
1236 |
The QWidget constructor calls create(0,true,true) to create a
|
|
1237 |
window for this widget.
|
|
1238 |
*/
|
|
1239 |
|
|
1240 |
void QWidget::create(WId window, bool initializeWindow, bool destroyOldWindow)
|
|
1241 |
{
|
|
1242 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
1243 |
if (testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Created) && window == 0 && internalWinId())
|
|
1244 |
return;
|
|
1245 |
|
|
1246 |
if (d->data.in_destructor)
|
|
1247 |
return;
|
|
1248 |
|
|
1249 |
Qt::WindowType type = windowType();
|
|
1250 |
Qt::WindowFlags &flags = data->window_flags;
|
|
1251 |
|
|
1252 |
if ((type == Qt::Widget || type == Qt::SubWindow) && !parentWidget()) {
|
|
1253 |
type = Qt::Window;
|
|
1254 |
flags |= Qt::Window;
|
|
1255 |
}
|
|
1256 |
|
|
1257 |
if (QWidget *parent = parentWidget()) {
|
|
1258 |
if (type & Qt::Window) {
|
|
1259 |
if (!parent->testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Created))
|
|
1260 |
parent->createWinId();
|
|
1261 |
} else if (testAttribute(Qt::WA_NativeWindow) && !parent->internalWinId()
|
|
1262 |
&& !testAttribute(Qt::WA_DontCreateNativeAncestors)) {
|
|
1263 |
// We're about to create a native child widget that doesn't have a native parent;
|
|
1264 |
// enforce a native handle for the parent unless the Qt::WA_DontCreateNativeAncestors
|
|
1265 |
// attribute is set.
|
|
1266 |
d->createWinId(window);
|
|
1267 |
// Nothing more to do.
|
|
1268 |
Q_ASSERT(testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Created));
|
|
1269 |
Q_ASSERT(internalWinId());
|
|
1270 |
return;
|
|
1271 |
}
|
|
1272 |
}
|
|
1273 |
|
|
1274 |
#ifdef QT3_SUPPORT
|
|
1275 |
if (flags & Qt::WStaticContents)
|
|
1276 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_StaticContents);
|
|
1277 |
if (flags & Qt::WDestructiveClose)
|
|
1278 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_DeleteOnClose);
|
|
1279 |
if (flags & Qt::WShowModal)
|
|
1280 |
setWindowModality(Qt::ApplicationModal);
|
|
1281 |
if (flags & Qt::WMouseNoMask)
|
|
1282 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_MouseNoMask);
|
|
1283 |
if (flags & Qt::WGroupLeader)
|
|
1284 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_GroupLeader);
|
|
1285 |
if (flags & Qt::WNoMousePropagation)
|
|
1286 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_NoMousePropagation);
|
|
1287 |
#endif
|
|
1288 |
|
|
1289 |
static int paintOnScreenEnv = -1;
|
|
1290 |
if (paintOnScreenEnv == -1)
|
|
1291 |
paintOnScreenEnv = qgetenv("QT_ONSCREEN_PAINT").toInt() > 0 ? 1 : 0;
|
|
1292 |
if (paintOnScreenEnv == 1)
|
|
1293 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_PaintOnScreen);
|
|
1294 |
|
|
1295 |
if (QApplicationPrivate::testAttribute(Qt::AA_NativeWindows))
|
|
1296 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_NativeWindow);
|
|
1297 |
|
|
1298 |
#ifdef ALIEN_DEBUG
|
|
1299 |
qDebug() << "QWidget::create:" << this << "parent:" << parentWidget()
|
|
1300 |
<< "Alien?" << !testAttribute(Qt::WA_NativeWindow);
|
|
1301 |
#endif
|
|
1302 |
|
|
1303 |
#if defined (Q_WS_WIN) && !defined(QT_NO_DRAGANDDROP)
|
|
1304 |
// Unregister the dropsite (if already registered) before we
|
|
1305 |
// re-create the widget with a native window.
|
|
1306 |
if (testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Created) && !internalWinId() && testAttribute(Qt::WA_NativeWindow)
|
|
1307 |
&& d->extra && d->extra->dropTarget) {
|
|
1308 |
d->registerDropSite(false);
|
|
1309 |
}
|
|
1310 |
#endif // defined (Q_WS_WIN) && !defined(QT_NO_DRAGANDDROP)
|
|
1311 |
|
|
1312 |
d->updateIsOpaque();
|
|
1313 |
|
|
1314 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Created); // set created flag
|
|
1315 |
d->create_sys(window, initializeWindow, destroyOldWindow);
|
|
1316 |
|
|
1317 |
// a real toplevel window needs a backing store
|
|
1318 |
if (isWindow() && windowType() != Qt::Desktop) {
|
|
1319 |
delete d->topData()->backingStore;
|
|
1320 |
// QWidgetBackingStore will check this variable, hence it must be 0
|
|
1321 |
d->topData()->backingStore = 0;
|
|
1322 |
if (hasBackingStoreSupport())
|
|
1323 |
d->topData()->backingStore = new QWidgetBackingStore(this);
|
|
1324 |
}
|
|
1325 |
|
|
1326 |
d->setModal_sys();
|
|
1327 |
|
|
1328 |
if (!isWindow() && parentWidget() && parentWidget()->testAttribute(Qt::WA_DropSiteRegistered))
|
|
1329 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_DropSiteRegistered, true);
|
|
1330 |
|
|
1331 |
#ifdef QT_EVAL
|
|
1332 |
extern void qt_eval_init_widget(QWidget *w);
|
|
1333 |
qt_eval_init_widget(this);
|
|
1334 |
#endif
|
|
1335 |
|
|
1336 |
// need to force the resting of the icon after changing parents
|
|
1337 |
if (testAttribute(Qt::WA_SetWindowIcon))
|
|
1338 |
d->setWindowIcon_sys(true);
|
|
1339 |
if (isWindow() && !d->topData()->iconText.isEmpty())
|
|
1340 |
d->setWindowIconText_helper(d->topData()->iconText);
|
|
1341 |
if (isWindow() && !d->topData()->caption.isEmpty())
|
|
1342 |
d->setWindowTitle_helper(d->topData()->caption);
|
|
1343 |
if (windowType() != Qt::Desktop) {
|
|
1344 |
d->updateSystemBackground();
|
|
1345 |
|
|
1346 |
if (isWindow() && !testAttribute(Qt::WA_SetWindowIcon))
|
|
1347 |
d->setWindowIcon_sys();
|
|
1348 |
}
|
|
1349 |
}
|
|
1350 |
|
|
1351 |
/*!
|
|
1352 |
Destroys the widget.
|
|
1353 |
|
|
1354 |
All this widget's children are deleted first. The application
|
|
1355 |
exits if this widget is the main widget.
|
|
1356 |
*/
|
|
1357 |
|
|
1358 |
QWidget::~QWidget()
|
|
1359 |
{
|
|
1360 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
1361 |
d->data.in_destructor = true;
|
|
1362 |
|
|
1363 |
#if defined (QT_CHECK_STATE)
|
|
1364 |
if (paintingActive())
|
|
1365 |
qWarning("QWidget: %s (%s) deleted while being painted", className(), name());
|
|
1366 |
#endif
|
|
1367 |
|
|
1368 |
// force acceptDrops false before winId is destroyed.
|
|
1369 |
d->registerDropSite(false);
|
|
1370 |
|
|
1371 |
#ifndef QT_NO_ACTION
|
|
1372 |
// remove all actions from this widget
|
|
1373 |
for (int i = 0; i < d->actions.size(); ++i) {
|
|
1374 |
QActionPrivate *apriv = d->actions.at(i)->d_func();
|
|
1375 |
apriv->widgets.removeAll(this);
|
|
1376 |
}
|
|
1377 |
d->actions.clear();
|
|
1378 |
#endif
|
|
1379 |
|
|
1380 |
#ifndef QT_NO_SHORTCUT
|
|
1381 |
// Remove all shortcuts grabbed by this
|
|
1382 |
// widget, unless application is closing
|
|
1383 |
if (!QApplicationPrivate::is_app_closing && testAttribute(Qt::WA_GrabbedShortcut))
|
|
1384 |
qApp->d_func()->shortcutMap.removeShortcut(0, this, QKeySequence());
|
|
1385 |
#endif
|
|
1386 |
|
|
1387 |
// delete layout while we still are a valid widget
|
|
1388 |
delete d->layout;
|
|
1389 |
// Remove myself from focus list
|
|
1390 |
|
|
1391 |
Q_ASSERT(d->focus_next->d_func()->focus_prev == this);
|
|
1392 |
Q_ASSERT(d->focus_prev->d_func()->focus_next == this);
|
|
1393 |
|
|
1394 |
if (d->focus_next != this) {
|
|
1395 |
d->focus_next->d_func()->focus_prev = d->focus_prev;
|
|
1396 |
d->focus_prev->d_func()->focus_next = d->focus_next;
|
|
1397 |
d->focus_next = d->focus_prev = 0;
|
|
1398 |
}
|
|
1399 |
|
|
1400 |
#ifdef QT3_SUPPORT
|
|
1401 |
if (QApplicationPrivate::main_widget == this) { // reset main widget
|
|
1402 |
QApplicationPrivate::main_widget = 0;
|
|
1403 |
QApplication::quit();
|
|
1404 |
}
|
|
1405 |
#endif
|
|
1406 |
|
|
1407 |
QT_TRY {
|
|
1408 |
clearFocus();
|
|
1409 |
} QT_CATCH(...) {
|
|
1410 |
// swallow this problem because we are in a destructor
|
|
1411 |
}
|
|
1412 |
|
|
1413 |
d->setDirtyOpaqueRegion();
|
|
1414 |
|
|
1415 |
if (isWindow() && isVisible() && internalWinId()) {
|
|
1416 |
QT_TRY {
|
|
1417 |
d->close_helper(QWidgetPrivate::CloseNoEvent);
|
|
1418 |
} QT_CATCH(...) {
|
|
1419 |
// if we're out of memory, at least hide the window.
|
|
1420 |
QT_TRY {
|
|
1421 |
hide();
|
|
1422 |
} QT_CATCH(...) {
|
|
1423 |
// and if that also doesn't work, then give up
|
|
1424 |
}
|
|
1425 |
}
|
|
1426 |
}
|
|
1427 |
|
|
1428 |
#if defined(Q_WS_WIN) || defined(Q_WS_X11) || defined (Q_WS_QWS)
|
|
1429 |
else if (!internalWinId() && isVisible()) {
|
|
1430 |
qApp->d_func()->sendSyntheticEnterLeave(this);
|
|
1431 |
#ifdef Q_WS_QWS
|
|
1432 |
} else if (isVisible()) {
|
|
1433 |
qApp->d_func()->sendSyntheticEnterLeave(this);
|
|
1434 |
#endif
|
|
1435 |
}
|
|
1436 |
#endif
|
|
1437 |
|
|
1438 |
if (QWidgetBackingStore *bs = d->maybeBackingStore()) {
|
|
1439 |
bs->removeDirtyWidget(this);
|
|
1440 |
if (testAttribute(Qt::WA_StaticContents))
|
|
1441 |
bs->removeStaticWidget(this);
|
|
1442 |
}
|
|
1443 |
|
|
1444 |
delete d->needsFlush;
|
|
1445 |
d->needsFlush = 0;
|
|
1446 |
|
|
1447 |
// set all QPointers for this object to zero
|
|
1448 |
QObjectPrivate::clearGuards(this);
|
|
1449 |
|
|
1450 |
if (d->declarativeData) {
|
|
1451 |
d->declarativeData->destroyed(this);
|
|
1452 |
d->declarativeData = 0; // don't activate again in ~QObject
|
|
1453 |
}
|
|
1454 |
|
|
1455 |
if (!d->children.isEmpty())
|
|
1456 |
d->deleteChildren();
|
|
1457 |
|
|
1458 |
QApplication::removePostedEvents(this);
|
|
1459 |
|
|
1460 |
QT_TRY {
|
|
1461 |
destroy(); // platform-dependent cleanup
|
|
1462 |
} QT_CATCH(...) {
|
|
1463 |
// if this fails we can't do anything about it but at least we are not allowed to throw.
|
|
1464 |
}
|
|
1465 |
--QWidgetPrivate::instanceCounter;
|
|
1466 |
|
|
1467 |
if (QWidgetPrivate::allWidgets) // might have been deleted by ~QApplication
|
|
1468 |
QWidgetPrivate::allWidgets->remove(this);
|
|
1469 |
|
|
1470 |
QEvent e(QEvent::Destroy);
|
|
1471 |
QCoreApplication::sendEvent(this, &e);
|
|
1472 |
}
|
|
1473 |
|
|
1474 |
int QWidgetPrivate::instanceCounter = 0; // Current number of widget instances
|
|
1475 |
int QWidgetPrivate::maxInstances = 0; // Maximum number of widget instances
|
|
1476 |
|
|
1477 |
void QWidgetPrivate::setWinId(WId id) // set widget identifier
|
|
1478 |
{
|
|
1479 |
Q_Q(QWidget);
|
|
1480 |
// the user might create a widget with Qt::Desktop window
|
|
1481 |
// attribute (or create another QDesktopWidget instance), which
|
|
1482 |
// will have the same windowid (the root window id) as the
|
|
1483 |
// qt_desktopWidget. We should not add the second desktop widget
|
|
1484 |
// to the mapper.
|
|
1485 |
bool userDesktopWidget = qt_desktopWidget != 0 && qt_desktopWidget != q && q->windowType() == Qt::Desktop;
|
|
1486 |
if (mapper && data.winid && !userDesktopWidget) {
|
|
1487 |
mapper->remove(data.winid);
|
|
1488 |
}
|
|
1489 |
|
|
1490 |
const WId oldWinId = data.winid;
|
|
1491 |
|
|
1492 |
data.winid = id;
|
|
1493 |
#if defined(Q_WS_X11)
|
|
1494 |
hd = id; // X11: hd == ident
|
|
1495 |
#endif
|
|
1496 |
if (mapper && id && !userDesktopWidget) {
|
|
1497 |
mapper->insert(data.winid, q);
|
|
1498 |
}
|
|
1499 |
|
|
1500 |
if(oldWinId != id) {
|
|
1501 |
// Do not emit an event when the old winId is destroyed. This only
|
|
1502 |
// happens (a) during widget destruction, and (b) immediately prior
|
|
1503 |
// to creation of a new winId, for example as a result of re-parenting.
|
|
1504 |
if(id != 0) {
|
|
1505 |
QEvent e(QEvent::WinIdChange);
|
|
1506 |
QCoreApplication::sendEvent(q, &e);
|
|
1507 |
}
|
|
1508 |
}
|
|
1509 |
}
|
|
1510 |
|
|
1511 |
void QWidgetPrivate::createTLExtra()
|
|
1512 |
{
|
|
1513 |
if (!extra)
|
|
1514 |
createExtra();
|
|
1515 |
if (!extra->topextra) {
|
|
1516 |
QTLWExtra* x = extra->topextra = new QTLWExtra;
|
|
1517 |
x->icon = 0;
|
|
1518 |
x->iconPixmap = 0;
|
|
1519 |
x->backingStore = 0;
|
|
1520 |
x->windowSurface = 0;
|
|
1521 |
x->sharedPainter = 0;
|
|
1522 |
x->incw = x->inch = 0;
|
|
1523 |
x->basew = x->baseh = 0;
|
|
1524 |
x->frameStrut.setCoords(0, 0, 0, 0);
|
|
1525 |
x->normalGeometry = QRect(0,0,-1,-1);
|
|
1526 |
x->savedFlags = 0;
|
|
1527 |
x->opacity = 255;
|
|
1528 |
x->posFromMove = false;
|
|
1529 |
x->sizeAdjusted = false;
|
|
1530 |
x->inTopLevelResize = false;
|
|
1531 |
x->inRepaint = false;
|
|
1532 |
x->embedded = 0;
|
|
1533 |
createTLSysExtra();
|
|
1534 |
#ifdef QWIDGET_EXTRA_DEBUG
|
|
1535 |
static int count = 0;
|
|
1536 |
qDebug() << "tlextra" << ++count;
|
|
1537 |
#endif
|
|
1538 |
}
|
|
1539 |
}
|
|
1540 |
|
|
1541 |
/*!
|
|
1542 |
\internal
|
|
1543 |
Creates the widget extra data.
|
|
1544 |
*/
|
|
1545 |
|
|
1546 |
void QWidgetPrivate::createExtra()
|
|
1547 |
{
|
|
1548 |
if (!extra) { // if not exists
|
|
1549 |
extra = new QWExtra;
|
|
1550 |
extra->glContext = 0;
|
|
1551 |
extra->topextra = 0;
|
|
1552 |
extra->proxyWidget = 0;
|
|
1553 |
#ifndef QT_NO_CURSOR
|
|
1554 |
extra->curs = 0;
|
|
1555 |
#endif
|
|
1556 |
extra->minw = 0;
|
|
1557 |
extra->minh = 0;
|
|
1558 |
extra->maxw = QWIDGETSIZE_MAX;
|
|
1559 |
extra->maxh = QWIDGETSIZE_MAX;
|
|
1560 |
extra->customDpiX = 0;
|
|
1561 |
extra->customDpiY = 0;
|
|
1562 |
extra->explicitMinSize = 0;
|
|
1563 |
extra->explicitMaxSize = 0;
|
|
1564 |
extra->autoFillBackground = 0;
|
|
1565 |
extra->nativeChildrenForced = 0;
|
|
1566 |
extra->inRenderWithPainter = 0;
|
|
1567 |
extra->hasMask = 0;
|
|
1568 |
createSysExtra();
|
|
1569 |
#ifdef QWIDGET_EXTRA_DEBUG
|
|
1570 |
static int count = 0;
|
|
1571 |
qDebug() << "extra" << ++count;
|
|
1572 |
#endif
|
|
1573 |
}
|
|
1574 |
}
|
|
1575 |
|
|
1576 |
|
|
1577 |
/*!
|
|
1578 |
\internal
|
|
1579 |
Deletes the widget extra data.
|
|
1580 |
*/
|
|
1581 |
|
|
1582 |
void QWidgetPrivate::deleteExtra()
|
|
1583 |
{
|
|
1584 |
if (extra) { // if exists
|
|
1585 |
#ifndef QT_NO_CURSOR
|
|
1586 |
delete extra->curs;
|
|
1587 |
#endif
|
|
1588 |
deleteSysExtra();
|
|
1589 |
#ifndef QT_NO_STYLE_STYLESHEET
|
|
1590 |
// dereference the stylesheet style
|
|
1591 |
if (QStyleSheetStyle *proxy = qobject_cast<QStyleSheetStyle *>(extra->style))
|
|
1592 |
proxy->deref();
|
|
1593 |
#endif
|
|
1594 |
if (extra->topextra) {
|
|
1595 |
deleteTLSysExtra();
|
|
1596 |
delete extra->topextra->backingStore;
|
|
1597 |
delete extra->topextra->icon;
|
|
1598 |
delete extra->topextra->iconPixmap;
|
|
1599 |
#if defined(Q_WS_QWS) && !defined(QT_NO_QWS_MANAGER)
|
|
1600 |
delete extra->topextra->qwsManager;
|
|
1601 |
#endif
|
|
1602 |
delete extra->topextra->windowSurface;
|
|
1603 |
delete extra->topextra;
|
|
1604 |
}
|
|
1605 |
delete extra;
|
|
1606 |
// extra->xic destroyed in QWidget::destroy()
|
|
1607 |
extra = 0;
|
|
1608 |
}
|
|
1609 |
}
|
|
1610 |
|
|
1611 |
/*
|
|
1612 |
Returns true if there are widgets above this which overlap with
|
|
1613 |
\a rect, which is in parent's coordinate system (same as crect).
|
|
1614 |
*/
|
|
1615 |
|
|
1616 |
bool QWidgetPrivate::isOverlapped(const QRect &rect) const
|
|
1617 |
{
|
|
1618 |
Q_Q(const QWidget);
|
|
1619 |
|
|
1620 |
const QWidget *w = q;
|
|
1621 |
QRect r = rect;
|
|
1622 |
while (w) {
|
|
1623 |
if (w->isWindow())
|
|
1624 |
return false;
|
|
1625 |
QWidgetPrivate *pd = w->parentWidget()->d_func();
|
|
1626 |
bool above = false;
|
|
1627 |
for (int i = 0; i < pd->children.size(); ++i) {
|
|
1628 |
QWidget *sibling = qobject_cast<QWidget *>(pd->children.at(i));
|
|
1629 |
if (!sibling || !sibling->isVisible() || sibling->isWindow())
|
|
1630 |
continue;
|
|
1631 |
if (!above) {
|
|
1632 |
above = (sibling == w);
|
|
1633 |
continue;
|
|
1634 |
}
|
|
1635 |
|
|
1636 |
if (qRectIntersects(sibling->d_func()->effectiveRectFor(sibling->data->crect), r)) {
|
|
1637 |
const QWExtra *siblingExtra = sibling->d_func()->extra;
|
|
1638 |
if (siblingExtra && siblingExtra->hasMask && !sibling->d_func()->graphicsEffect
|
|
1639 |
&& !siblingExtra->mask.translated(sibling->data->crect.topLeft()).intersects(r)) {
|
|
1640 |
continue;
|
|
1641 |
}
|
|
1642 |
return true;
|
|
1643 |
}
|
|
1644 |
}
|
|
1645 |
w = w->parentWidget();
|
|
1646 |
r.translate(pd->data.crect.topLeft());
|
|
1647 |
}
|
|
1648 |
return false;
|
|
1649 |
}
|
|
1650 |
|
|
1651 |
void QWidgetPrivate::syncBackingStore()
|
|
1652 |
{
|
|
1653 |
if (paintOnScreen()) {
|
|
1654 |
repaint_sys(dirty);
|
|
1655 |
dirty = QRegion();
|
|
1656 |
} else if (QWidgetBackingStore *bs = maybeBackingStore()) {
|
|
1657 |
bs->sync();
|
|
1658 |
}
|
|
1659 |
}
|
|
1660 |
|
|
1661 |
void QWidgetPrivate::syncBackingStore(const QRegion ®ion)
|
|
1662 |
{
|
|
1663 |
if (paintOnScreen())
|
|
1664 |
repaint_sys(region);
|
|
1665 |
else if (QWidgetBackingStore *bs = maybeBackingStore())
|
|
1666 |
bs->sync(q_func(), region);
|
|
1667 |
}
|
|
1668 |
|
|
1669 |
void QWidgetPrivate::setUpdatesEnabled_helper(bool enable)
|
|
1670 |
{
|
|
1671 |
Q_Q(QWidget);
|
|
1672 |
|
|
1673 |
if (enable && !q->isWindow() && q->parentWidget() && !q->parentWidget()->updatesEnabled())
|
|
1674 |
return; // nothing we can do
|
|
1675 |
|
|
1676 |
if (enable != q->testAttribute(Qt::WA_UpdatesDisabled))
|
|
1677 |
return; // nothing to do
|
|
1678 |
|
|
1679 |
q->setAttribute(Qt::WA_UpdatesDisabled, !enable);
|
|
1680 |
if (enable)
|
|
1681 |
q->update();
|
|
1682 |
|
|
1683 |
Qt::WidgetAttribute attribute = enable ? Qt::WA_ForceUpdatesDisabled : Qt::WA_UpdatesDisabled;
|
|
1684 |
for (int i = 0; i < children.size(); ++i) {
|
|
1685 |
QWidget *w = qobject_cast<QWidget *>(children.at(i));
|
|
1686 |
if (w && !w->isWindow() && !w->testAttribute(attribute))
|
|
1687 |
w->d_func()->setUpdatesEnabled_helper(enable);
|
|
1688 |
}
|
|
1689 |
}
|
|
1690 |
|
|
1691 |
/*!
|
|
1692 |
\internal
|
|
1693 |
|
|
1694 |
Propagate this widget's palette to all children, except style sheet
|
|
1695 |
widgets, and windows that don't enable window propagation (palettes don't
|
|
1696 |
normally propagate to windows).
|
|
1697 |
*/
|
|
1698 |
void QWidgetPrivate::propagatePaletteChange()
|
|
1699 |
{
|
|
1700 |
Q_Q(QWidget);
|
|
1701 |
// Propagate a new inherited mask to all children.
|
|
1702 |
if (!q->parentWidget() && extra && extra->proxyWidget) {
|
|
1703 |
#ifndef QT_NO_GRAPHICSVIEW
|
|
1704 |
QGraphicsProxyWidget *p = extra->proxyWidget;
|
|
1705 |
inheritedPaletteResolveMask = p->d_func()->inheritedPaletteResolveMask | p->palette().resolve();
|
|
1706 |
#endif //QT_NO_GRAPHICSVIEW
|
|
1707 |
} else if (q->isWindow() && !q->testAttribute(Qt::WA_WindowPropagation)) {
|
|
1708 |
inheritedPaletteResolveMask = 0;
|
|
1709 |
}
|
|
1710 |
int mask = data.pal.resolve() | inheritedPaletteResolveMask;
|
|
1711 |
|
|
1712 |
QEvent pc(QEvent::PaletteChange);
|
|
1713 |
QApplication::sendEvent(q, &pc);
|
|
1714 |
for (int i = 0; i < children.size(); ++i) {
|
|
1715 |
QWidget *w = qobject_cast<QWidget*>(children.at(i));
|
|
1716 |
if (w && !w->testAttribute(Qt::WA_StyleSheet)
|
|
1717 |
&& (!w->isWindow() || w->testAttribute(Qt::WA_WindowPropagation))) {
|
|
1718 |
QWidgetPrivate *wd = w->d_func();
|
|
1719 |
wd->inheritedPaletteResolveMask = mask;
|
|
1720 |
wd->resolvePalette();
|
|
1721 |
}
|
|
1722 |
}
|
|
1723 |
#if defined(QT3_SUPPORT)
|
|
1724 |
q->paletteChange(q->palette()); // compatibility
|
|
1725 |
#endif
|
|
1726 |
}
|
|
1727 |
|
|
1728 |
/*
|
|
1729 |
Returns the widget's clipping rectangle.
|
|
1730 |
*/
|
|
1731 |
QRect QWidgetPrivate::clipRect() const
|
|
1732 |
{
|
|
1733 |
Q_Q(const QWidget);
|
|
1734 |
const QWidget * w = q;
|
|
1735 |
if (!w->isVisible())
|
|
1736 |
return QRect();
|
|
1737 |
QRect r = effectiveRectFor(q->rect());
|
|
1738 |
int ox = 0;
|
|
1739 |
int oy = 0;
|
|
1740 |
while (w
|
|
1741 |
&& w->isVisible()
|
|
1742 |
&& !w->isWindow()
|
|
1743 |
&& w->parentWidget()) {
|
|
1744 |
ox -= w->x();
|
|
1745 |
oy -= w->y();
|
|
1746 |
w = w->parentWidget();
|
|
1747 |
r &= QRect(ox, oy, w->width(), w->height());
|
|
1748 |
}
|
|
1749 |
return r;
|
|
1750 |
}
|
|
1751 |
|
|
1752 |
/*
|
|
1753 |
Returns the widget's clipping region (without siblings).
|
|
1754 |
*/
|
|
1755 |
QRegion QWidgetPrivate::clipRegion() const
|
|
1756 |
{
|
|
1757 |
Q_Q(const QWidget);
|
|
1758 |
if (!q->isVisible())
|
|
1759 |
return QRegion();
|
|
1760 |
QRegion r(q->rect());
|
|
1761 |
const QWidget * w = q;
|
|
1762 |
const QWidget *ignoreUpTo;
|
|
1763 |
int ox = 0;
|
|
1764 |
int oy = 0;
|
|
1765 |
while (w
|
|
1766 |
&& w->isVisible()
|
|
1767 |
&& !w->isWindow()
|
|
1768 |
&& w->parentWidget()) {
|
|
1769 |
ox -= w->x();
|
|
1770 |
oy -= w->y();
|
|
1771 |
ignoreUpTo = w;
|
|
1772 |
w = w->parentWidget();
|
|
1773 |
r &= QRegion(ox, oy, w->width(), w->height());
|
|
1774 |
|
|
1775 |
int i = 0;
|
|
1776 |
while(w->d_func()->children.at(i++) != static_cast<const QObject *>(ignoreUpTo))
|
|
1777 |
;
|
|
1778 |
for ( ; i < w->d_func()->children.size(); ++i) {
|
|
1779 |
if(QWidget *sibling = qobject_cast<QWidget *>(w->d_func()->children.at(i))) {
|
|
1780 |
if(sibling->isVisible() && !sibling->isWindow()) {
|
|
1781 |
QRect siblingRect(ox+sibling->x(), oy+sibling->y(),
|
|
1782 |
sibling->width(), sibling->height());
|
|
1783 |
if (qRectIntersects(siblingRect, q->rect()))
|
|
1784 |
r -= QRegion(siblingRect);
|
|
1785 |
}
|
|
1786 |
}
|
|
1787 |
}
|
|
1788 |
}
|
|
1789 |
return r;
|
|
1790 |
}
|
|
1791 |
|
|
1792 |
void QWidgetPrivate::invalidateGraphicsEffectsRecursively()
|
|
1793 |
{
|
|
1794 |
Q_Q(QWidget);
|
|
1795 |
QWidget *w = q;
|
|
1796 |
do {
|
|
1797 |
if (w->graphicsEffect()) {
|
|
1798 |
QWidgetEffectSourcePrivate *sourced =
|
|
1799 |
static_cast<QWidgetEffectSourcePrivate *>(w->graphicsEffect()->source()->d_func());
|
|
1800 |
if (!sourced->updateDueToGraphicsEffect)
|
|
1801 |
w->graphicsEffect()->source()->d_func()->invalidateCache();
|
|
1802 |
}
|
|
1803 |
w = w->parentWidget();
|
|
1804 |
} while (w);
|
|
1805 |
}
|
|
1806 |
|
|
1807 |
void QWidgetPrivate::setDirtyOpaqueRegion()
|
|
1808 |
{
|
|
1809 |
Q_Q(QWidget);
|
|
1810 |
|
|
1811 |
dirtyOpaqueChildren = true;
|
|
1812 |
|
|
1813 |
invalidateGraphicsEffectsRecursively();
|
|
1814 |
|
|
1815 |
if (q->isWindow())
|
|
1816 |
return;
|
|
1817 |
|
|
1818 |
QWidget *parent = q->parentWidget();
|
|
1819 |
if (!parent)
|
|
1820 |
return;
|
|
1821 |
|
|
1822 |
// TODO: instead of setting dirtyflag, manipulate the dirtyregion directly?
|
|
1823 |
QWidgetPrivate *pd = parent->d_func();
|
|
1824 |
if (!pd->dirtyOpaqueChildren)
|
|
1825 |
pd->setDirtyOpaqueRegion();
|
|
1826 |
}
|
|
1827 |
|
|
1828 |
QRegion QWidgetPrivate::getOpaqueRegion() const
|
|
1829 |
{
|
|
1830 |
Q_Q(const QWidget);
|
|
1831 |
|
|
1832 |
QRegion r = isOpaque ? q->rect() : getOpaqueChildren();
|
|
1833 |
if (extra && extra->hasMask)
|
|
1834 |
r &= extra->mask;
|
|
1835 |
if (r.isEmpty())
|
|
1836 |
return r;
|
|
1837 |
return r & clipRect();
|
|
1838 |
}
|
|
1839 |
|
|
1840 |
const QRegion &QWidgetPrivate::getOpaqueChildren() const
|
|
1841 |
{
|
|
1842 |
if (!dirtyOpaqueChildren)
|
|
1843 |
return opaqueChildren;
|
|
1844 |
|
|
1845 |
QWidgetPrivate *that = const_cast<QWidgetPrivate*>(this);
|
|
1846 |
that->opaqueChildren = QRegion();
|
|
1847 |
|
|
1848 |
for (int i = 0; i < children.size(); ++i) {
|
|
1849 |
QWidget *child = qobject_cast<QWidget *>(children.at(i));
|
|
1850 |
if (!child || !child->isVisible() || child->isWindow())
|
|
1851 |
continue;
|
|
1852 |
|
|
1853 |
const QPoint offset = child->geometry().topLeft();
|
|
1854 |
that->opaqueChildren += child->d_func()->getOpaqueRegion().translated(offset);
|
|
1855 |
}
|
|
1856 |
|
|
1857 |
that->dirtyOpaqueChildren = false;
|
|
1858 |
|
|
1859 |
return that->opaqueChildren;
|
|
1860 |
}
|
|
1861 |
|
|
1862 |
void QWidgetPrivate::subtractOpaqueChildren(QRegion &source, const QRect &clipRect) const
|
|
1863 |
{
|
|
1864 |
if (children.isEmpty() || clipRect.isEmpty())
|
|
1865 |
return;
|
|
1866 |
|
|
1867 |
const QRegion &r = getOpaqueChildren();
|
|
1868 |
if (!r.isEmpty())
|
|
1869 |
source -= (r & clipRect);
|
|
1870 |
}
|
|
1871 |
|
|
1872 |
//subtract any relatives that are higher up than me --- this is too expensive !!!
|
|
1873 |
void QWidgetPrivate::subtractOpaqueSiblings(QRegion &sourceRegion, bool *hasDirtySiblingsAbove,
|
|
1874 |
bool alsoNonOpaque) const
|
|
1875 |
{
|
|
1876 |
Q_Q(const QWidget);
|
|
1877 |
static int disableSubtractOpaqueSiblings = qgetenv("QT_NO_SUBTRACTOPAQUESIBLINGS").toInt();
|
|
1878 |
if (disableSubtractOpaqueSiblings || q->isWindow())
|
|
1879 |
return;
|
|
1880 |
|
|
1881 |
QRect clipBoundingRect;
|
|
1882 |
bool dirtyClipBoundingRect = true;
|
|
1883 |
|
|
1884 |
QRegion parentClip;
|
|
1885 |
bool dirtyParentClip = true;
|
|
1886 |
|
|
1887 |
QPoint parentOffset = data.crect.topLeft();
|
|
1888 |
|
|
1889 |
const QWidget *w = q;
|
|
1890 |
|
|
1891 |
while (w) {
|
|
1892 |
if (w->isWindow())
|
|
1893 |
break;
|
|
1894 |
QWidgetPrivate *pd = w->parentWidget()->d_func();
|
|
1895 |
const int myIndex = pd->children.indexOf(const_cast<QWidget *>(w));
|
|
1896 |
const QRect widgetGeometry = w->d_func()->effectiveRectFor(w->data->crect);
|
|
1897 |
for (int i = myIndex + 1; i < pd->children.size(); ++i) {
|
|
1898 |
QWidget *sibling = qobject_cast<QWidget *>(pd->children.at(i));
|
|
1899 |
if (!sibling || !sibling->isVisible() || sibling->isWindow())
|
|
1900 |
continue;
|
|
1901 |
|
|
1902 |
const QRect siblingGeometry = sibling->d_func()->effectiveRectFor(sibling->data->crect);
|
|
1903 |
if (!qRectIntersects(siblingGeometry, widgetGeometry))
|
|
1904 |
continue;
|
|
1905 |
|
|
1906 |
if (dirtyClipBoundingRect) {
|
|
1907 |
clipBoundingRect = sourceRegion.boundingRect();
|
|
1908 |
dirtyClipBoundingRect = false;
|
|
1909 |
}
|
|
1910 |
|
|
1911 |
if (!qRectIntersects(siblingGeometry, clipBoundingRect.translated(parentOffset)))
|
|
1912 |
continue;
|
|
1913 |
|
|
1914 |
if (dirtyParentClip) {
|
|
1915 |
parentClip = sourceRegion.translated(parentOffset);
|
|
1916 |
dirtyParentClip = false;
|
|
1917 |
}
|
|
1918 |
|
|
1919 |
const QPoint siblingPos(sibling->data->crect.topLeft());
|
|
1920 |
const QRect siblingClipRect(sibling->d_func()->clipRect());
|
|
1921 |
QRegion siblingDirty(parentClip);
|
|
1922 |
siblingDirty &= (siblingClipRect.translated(siblingPos));
|
|
1923 |
const bool hasMask = sibling->d_func()->extra && sibling->d_func()->extra->hasMask
|
|
1924 |
&& !sibling->d_func()->graphicsEffect;
|
|
1925 |
if (hasMask)
|
|
1926 |
siblingDirty &= sibling->d_func()->extra->mask.translated(siblingPos);
|
|
1927 |
if (siblingDirty.isEmpty())
|
|
1928 |
continue;
|
|
1929 |
|
|
1930 |
if (sibling->d_func()->isOpaque || alsoNonOpaque) {
|
|
1931 |
if (hasMask) {
|
|
1932 |
siblingDirty.translate(-parentOffset);
|
|
1933 |
sourceRegion -= siblingDirty;
|
|
1934 |
} else {
|
|
1935 |
sourceRegion -= siblingGeometry.translated(-parentOffset);
|
|
1936 |
}
|
|
1937 |
} else {
|
|
1938 |
if (hasDirtySiblingsAbove)
|
|
1939 |
*hasDirtySiblingsAbove = true;
|
|
1940 |
if (sibling->d_func()->children.isEmpty())
|
|
1941 |
continue;
|
|
1942 |
QRegion opaqueSiblingChildren(sibling->d_func()->getOpaqueChildren());
|
|
1943 |
opaqueSiblingChildren.translate(-parentOffset + siblingPos);
|
|
1944 |
sourceRegion -= opaqueSiblingChildren;
|
|
1945 |
}
|
|
1946 |
if (sourceRegion.isEmpty())
|
|
1947 |
return;
|
|
1948 |
|
|
1949 |
dirtyClipBoundingRect = true;
|
|
1950 |
dirtyParentClip = true;
|
|
1951 |
}
|
|
1952 |
|
|
1953 |
w = w->parentWidget();
|
|
1954 |
parentOffset += pd->data.crect.topLeft();
|
|
1955 |
dirtyParentClip = true;
|
|
1956 |
}
|
|
1957 |
}
|
|
1958 |
|
|
1959 |
void QWidgetPrivate::clipToEffectiveMask(QRegion ®ion) const
|
|
1960 |
{
|
|
1961 |
Q_Q(const QWidget);
|
|
1962 |
|
|
1963 |
const QWidget *w = q;
|
|
1964 |
QPoint offset;
|
|
1965 |
|
|
1966 |
if (graphicsEffect) {
|
|
1967 |
w = q->parentWidget();
|
|
1968 |
offset -= data.crect.topLeft();
|
|
1969 |
}
|
|
1970 |
|
|
1971 |
while (w) {
|
|
1972 |
const QWidgetPrivate *wd = w->d_func();
|
|
1973 |
if (wd->extra && wd->extra->hasMask)
|
|
1974 |
region &= (w != q) ? wd->extra->mask.translated(offset) : wd->extra->mask;
|
|
1975 |
if (w->isWindow())
|
|
1976 |
return;
|
|
1977 |
offset -= wd->data.crect.topLeft();
|
|
1978 |
w = w->parentWidget();
|
|
1979 |
}
|
|
1980 |
}
|
|
1981 |
|
|
1982 |
bool QWidgetPrivate::paintOnScreen() const
|
|
1983 |
{
|
|
1984 |
#if defined(Q_WS_QWS)
|
|
1985 |
return false;
|
|
1986 |
#elif defined(QT_NO_BACKINGSTORE)
|
|
1987 |
return true;
|
|
1988 |
#else
|
|
1989 |
Q_Q(const QWidget);
|
|
1990 |
if (q->testAttribute(Qt::WA_PaintOnScreen)
|
|
1991 |
|| (!q->isWindow() && q->window()->testAttribute(Qt::WA_PaintOnScreen))) {
|
|
1992 |
return true;
|
|
1993 |
}
|
|
1994 |
|
|
1995 |
return !qt_enable_backingstore;
|
|
1996 |
#endif
|
|
1997 |
}
|
|
1998 |
|
|
1999 |
void QWidgetPrivate::updateIsOpaque()
|
|
2000 |
{
|
|
2001 |
// hw: todo: only needed if opacity actually changed
|
|
2002 |
setDirtyOpaqueRegion();
|
|
2003 |
|
|
2004 |
if (graphicsEffect) {
|
|
2005 |
// ### We should probably add QGraphicsEffect::isOpaque at some point.
|
|
2006 |
setOpaque(false);
|
|
2007 |
return;
|
|
2008 |
}
|
|
2009 |
|
|
2010 |
Q_Q(QWidget);
|
|
2011 |
#ifdef Q_WS_X11
|
|
2012 |
if (q->testAttribute(Qt::WA_X11OpenGLOverlay)) {
|
|
2013 |
setOpaque(false);
|
|
2014 |
return;
|
|
2015 |
}
|
|
2016 |
#endif
|
|
2017 |
|
|
2018 |
if (q->testAttribute(Qt::WA_OpaquePaintEvent) || q->testAttribute(Qt::WA_PaintOnScreen)) {
|
|
2019 |
setOpaque(true);
|
|
2020 |
return;
|
|
2021 |
}
|
|
2022 |
|
|
2023 |
const QPalette &pal = q->palette();
|
|
2024 |
|
|
2025 |
if (q->autoFillBackground()) {
|
|
2026 |
const QBrush &autoFillBrush = pal.brush(q->backgroundRole());
|
|
2027 |
if (autoFillBrush.style() != Qt::NoBrush && autoFillBrush.isOpaque()) {
|
|
2028 |
setOpaque(true);
|
|
2029 |
return;
|
|
2030 |
}
|
|
2031 |
}
|
|
2032 |
|
|
2033 |
if (q->isWindow() && !q->testAttribute(Qt::WA_NoSystemBackground)) {
|
|
2034 |
const QBrush &windowBrush = q->palette().brush(QPalette::Window);
|
|
2035 |
if (windowBrush.style() != Qt::NoBrush && windowBrush.isOpaque()) {
|
|
2036 |
setOpaque(true);
|
|
2037 |
return;
|
|
2038 |
}
|
|
2039 |
}
|
|
2040 |
setOpaque(false);
|
|
2041 |
}
|
|
2042 |
|
|
2043 |
void QWidgetPrivate::setOpaque(bool opaque)
|
|
2044 |
{
|
|
2045 |
if (isOpaque == opaque)
|
|
2046 |
return;
|
|
2047 |
isOpaque = opaque;
|
|
2048 |
#ifdef Q_WS_MAC
|
|
2049 |
macUpdateIsOpaque();
|
|
2050 |
#endif
|
|
2051 |
#ifdef Q_WS_X11
|
|
2052 |
x11UpdateIsOpaque();
|
|
2053 |
#endif
|
|
2054 |
#ifdef Q_WS_WIN
|
|
2055 |
winUpdateIsOpaque();
|
|
2056 |
#endif
|
|
2057 |
#ifdef Q_OS_SYMBIAN
|
|
2058 |
s60UpdateIsOpaque();
|
|
2059 |
#endif
|
|
2060 |
}
|
|
2061 |
|
|
2062 |
void QWidgetPrivate::updateIsTranslucent()
|
|
2063 |
{
|
|
2064 |
#ifdef Q_WS_MAC
|
|
2065 |
macUpdateIsOpaque();
|
|
2066 |
#endif
|
|
2067 |
#ifdef Q_WS_X11
|
|
2068 |
x11UpdateIsOpaque();
|
|
2069 |
#endif
|
|
2070 |
#ifdef Q_WS_WIN
|
|
2071 |
winUpdateIsOpaque();
|
|
2072 |
#endif
|
|
2073 |
#ifdef Q_OS_SYMBIAN
|
|
2074 |
s60UpdateIsOpaque();
|
|
2075 |
#endif
|
|
2076 |
}
|
|
2077 |
|
|
2078 |
/*!
|
|
2079 |
\fn void QPixmap::fill(const QWidget *widget, const QPoint &offset)
|
|
2080 |
|
|
2081 |
Fills the pixmap with the \a widget's background color or pixmap
|
|
2082 |
according to the given offset.
|
|
2083 |
|
|
2084 |
The QPoint \a offset defines a point in widget coordinates to
|
|
2085 |
which the pixmap's top-left pixel will be mapped to. This is only
|
|
2086 |
significant if the widget has a background pixmap; otherwise the
|
|
2087 |
pixmap will simply be filled with the background color of the
|
|
2088 |
widget.
|
|
2089 |
*/
|
|
2090 |
|
|
2091 |
void QPixmap::fill( const QWidget *widget, const QPoint &off )
|
|
2092 |
{
|
|
2093 |
QPainter p(this);
|
|
2094 |
p.translate(-off);
|
|
2095 |
widget->d_func()->paintBackground(&p, QRect(off, size()));
|
|
2096 |
}
|
|
2097 |
|
|
2098 |
static inline void fillRegion(QPainter *painter, const QRegion &rgn, const QBrush &brush)
|
|
2099 |
{
|
|
2100 |
Q_ASSERT(painter);
|
|
2101 |
|
|
2102 |
if (brush.style() == Qt::TexturePattern) {
|
|
2103 |
#ifdef Q_WS_MAC
|
|
2104 |
// Optimize pattern filling on mac by using HITheme directly
|
|
2105 |
// when filling with the standard widget background.
|
|
2106 |
// Defined in qmacstyle_mac.cpp
|
|
2107 |
extern void qt_mac_fill_background(QPainter *painter, const QRegion &rgn, const QBrush &brush);
|
|
2108 |
qt_mac_fill_background(painter, rgn, brush);
|
|
2109 |
#else
|
|
2110 |
#if !defined(QT_NO_STYLE_S60)
|
|
2111 |
// Defined in qs60style.cpp
|
|
2112 |
extern bool qt_s60_fill_background(QPainter *painter, const QRegion &rgn, const QBrush &brush);
|
|
2113 |
if (!qt_s60_fill_background(painter, rgn, brush))
|
|
2114 |
#endif // !defined(QT_NO_STYLE_S60)
|
|
2115 |
{
|
|
2116 |
const QRect rect(rgn.boundingRect());
|
|
2117 |
painter->setClipRegion(rgn);
|
|
2118 |
painter->drawTiledPixmap(rect, brush.texture(), rect.topLeft());
|
|
2119 |
}
|
|
2120 |
#endif // Q_WS_MAC
|
|
2121 |
|
|
2122 |
} else if (brush.gradient()
|
|
2123 |
&& brush.gradient()->coordinateMode() == QGradient::ObjectBoundingMode) {
|
|
2124 |
painter->save();
|
|
2125 |
painter->setClipRegion(rgn);
|
|
2126 |
painter->fillRect(0, 0, painter->device()->width(), painter->device()->height(), brush);
|
|
2127 |
painter->restore();
|
|
2128 |
} else {
|
|
2129 |
const QVector<QRect> &rects = rgn.rects();
|
|
2130 |
for (int i = 0; i < rects.size(); ++i)
|
|
2131 |
painter->fillRect(rects.at(i), brush);
|
|
2132 |
}
|
|
2133 |
}
|
|
2134 |
|
|
2135 |
void QWidgetPrivate::paintBackground(QPainter *painter, const QRegion &rgn, int flags) const
|
|
2136 |
{
|
|
2137 |
Q_Q(const QWidget);
|
|
2138 |
|
|
2139 |
#ifndef QT_NO_SCROLLAREA
|
|
2140 |
bool resetBrushOrigin = false;
|
|
2141 |
QPointF oldBrushOrigin;
|
|
2142 |
//If we are painting the viewport of a scrollarea, we must apply an offset to the brush in case we are drawing a texture
|
|
2143 |
QAbstractScrollArea *scrollArea = qobject_cast<QAbstractScrollArea *>(parent);
|
|
2144 |
if (scrollArea && scrollArea->viewport() == q) {
|
|
2145 |
QObjectData *scrollPrivate = static_cast<QWidget *>(scrollArea)->d_ptr.data();
|
|
2146 |
QAbstractScrollAreaPrivate *priv = static_cast<QAbstractScrollAreaPrivate *>(scrollPrivate);
|
|
2147 |
oldBrushOrigin = painter->brushOrigin();
|
|
2148 |
resetBrushOrigin = true;
|
|
2149 |
painter->setBrushOrigin(-priv->contentsOffset());
|
|
2150 |
|
|
2151 |
}
|
|
2152 |
#endif // QT_NO_SCROLLAREA
|
|
2153 |
|
|
2154 |
const QBrush autoFillBrush = q->palette().brush(q->backgroundRole());
|
|
2155 |
|
|
2156 |
if ((flags & DrawAsRoot) && !(q->autoFillBackground() && autoFillBrush.isOpaque())) {
|
|
2157 |
const QBrush bg = q->palette().brush(QPalette::Window);
|
|
2158 |
#ifdef Q_WS_QWS
|
|
2159 |
if (!(flags & DontSetCompositionMode) && painter->paintEngine()->hasFeature(QPaintEngine::PorterDuff))
|
|
2160 |
painter->setCompositionMode(QPainter::CompositionMode_Source); //copy alpha straight in
|
|
2161 |
#endif
|
|
2162 |
fillRegion(painter, rgn, bg);
|
|
2163 |
}
|
|
2164 |
|
|
2165 |
if (q->autoFillBackground())
|
|
2166 |
fillRegion(painter, rgn, autoFillBrush);
|
|
2167 |
|
|
2168 |
if (q->testAttribute(Qt::WA_StyledBackground)) {
|
|
2169 |
painter->setClipRegion(rgn);
|
|
2170 |
QStyleOption opt;
|
|
2171 |
opt.initFrom(q);
|
|
2172 |
q->style()->drawPrimitive(QStyle::PE_Widget, &opt, painter, q);
|
|
2173 |
}
|
|
2174 |
|
|
2175 |
#ifndef QT_NO_SCROLLAREA
|
|
2176 |
if (resetBrushOrigin)
|
|
2177 |
painter->setBrushOrigin(oldBrushOrigin);
|
|
2178 |
#endif // QT_NO_SCROLLAREA
|
|
2179 |
}
|
|
2180 |
|
|
2181 |
/*
|
|
2182 |
\internal
|
|
2183 |
This function is called when a widget is hidden or destroyed.
|
|
2184 |
It resets some application global pointers that should only refer active,
|
|
2185 |
visible widgets.
|
|
2186 |
*/
|
|
2187 |
|
|
2188 |
#ifdef Q_WS_MAC
|
|
2189 |
extern QPointer<QWidget> qt_button_down;
|
|
2190 |
#else
|
|
2191 |
extern QWidget *qt_button_down;
|
|
2192 |
#endif
|
|
2193 |
|
|
2194 |
void QWidgetPrivate::deactivateWidgetCleanup()
|
|
2195 |
{
|
|
2196 |
Q_Q(QWidget);
|
|
2197 |
// If this was the active application window, reset it
|
|
2198 |
if (QApplication::activeWindow() == q)
|
|
2199 |
QApplication::setActiveWindow(0);
|
|
2200 |
// If the is the active mouse press widget, reset it
|
|
2201 |
if (q == qt_button_down)
|
|
2202 |
qt_button_down = 0;
|
|
2203 |
}
|
|
2204 |
|
|
2205 |
|
|
2206 |
/*!
|
|
2207 |
Returns a pointer to the widget with window identifer/handle \a
|
|
2208 |
id.
|
|
2209 |
|
|
2210 |
The window identifier type depends on the underlying window
|
|
2211 |
system, see \c qwindowdefs.h for the actual definition. If there
|
|
2212 |
is no widget with this identifier, 0 is returned.
|
|
2213 |
*/
|
|
2214 |
|
|
2215 |
QWidget *QWidget::find(WId id)
|
|
2216 |
{
|
|
2217 |
return QWidgetPrivate::mapper ? QWidgetPrivate::mapper->value(id, 0) : 0;
|
|
2218 |
}
|
|
2219 |
|
|
2220 |
|
|
2221 |
|
|
2222 |
/*!
|
|
2223 |
\fn WId QWidget::internalWinId() const
|
|
2224 |
\internal
|
|
2225 |
Returns the window system identifier of the widget, or 0 if the widget is not created yet.
|
|
2226 |
|
|
2227 |
*/
|
|
2228 |
|
|
2229 |
/*!
|
|
2230 |
\fn WId QWidget::winId() const
|
|
2231 |
|
|
2232 |
Returns the window system identifier of the widget.
|
|
2233 |
|
|
2234 |
Portable in principle, but if you use it you are probably about to
|
|
2235 |
do something non-portable. Be careful.
|
|
2236 |
|
|
2237 |
If a widget is non-native (alien) and winId() is invoked on it, that widget
|
|
2238 |
will be provided a native handle.
|
|
2239 |
|
|
2240 |
On Mac OS X, the type returned depends on which framework Qt was linked
|
|
2241 |
against. If Qt is using Carbon, the {WId} is actually an HIViewRef. If Qt
|
|
2242 |
is using Cocoa, {WId} is a pointer to an NSView.
|
|
2243 |
|
|
2244 |
This value may change at run-time. An event with type QEvent::WinIdChange
|
|
2245 |
will be sent to the widget following a change in window system identifier.
|
|
2246 |
|
|
2247 |
\sa find()
|
|
2248 |
*/
|
|
2249 |
WId QWidget::winId() const
|
|
2250 |
{
|
|
2251 |
if (!testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Created) || !internalWinId()) {
|
|
2252 |
QWidget *that = const_cast<QWidget*>(this);
|
|
2253 |
that->setAttribute(Qt::WA_NativeWindow);
|
|
2254 |
that->d_func()->createWinId();
|
|
2255 |
return that->data->winid;
|
|
2256 |
}
|
|
2257 |
return data->winid;
|
|
2258 |
}
|
|
2259 |
|
|
2260 |
|
|
2261 |
void QWidgetPrivate::createWinId(WId winid)
|
|
2262 |
{
|
|
2263 |
Q_Q(QWidget);
|
|
2264 |
const bool forceNativeWindow = q->testAttribute(Qt::WA_NativeWindow);
|
|
2265 |
if (!q->testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Created) || (forceNativeWindow && !q->internalWinId())) {
|
|
2266 |
if (!q->isWindow()) {
|
|
2267 |
QWidget *parent = q->parentWidget();
|
|
2268 |
QWidgetPrivate *pd = parent->d_func();
|
|
2269 |
if (forceNativeWindow && !q->testAttribute(Qt::WA_DontCreateNativeAncestors))
|
|
2270 |
parent->setAttribute(Qt::WA_NativeWindow);
|
|
2271 |
if (!parent->internalWinId()) {
|
|
2272 |
pd->createWinId();
|
|
2273 |
}
|
|
2274 |
|
|
2275 |
for (int i = 0; i < pd->children.size(); ++i) {
|
|
2276 |
QWidget *w = qobject_cast<QWidget *>(pd->children.at(i));
|
|
2277 |
if (w && !w->isWindow() && (!w->testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Created)
|
|
2278 |
|| (!w->internalWinId() && w->testAttribute(Qt::WA_NativeWindow)))) {
|
|
2279 |
if (w!=q) {
|
|
2280 |
w->create();
|
|
2281 |
} else {
|
|
2282 |
w->create(winid);
|
|
2283 |
// if the window has already been created, we
|
|
2284 |
// need to raise it to its proper stacking position
|
|
2285 |
if (winid)
|
|
2286 |
w->raise();
|
|
2287 |
}
|
|
2288 |
}
|
|
2289 |
}
|
|
2290 |
} else {
|
|
2291 |
q->create();
|
|
2292 |
}
|
|
2293 |
}
|
|
2294 |
}
|
|
2295 |
|
|
2296 |
|
|
2297 |
/*!
|
|
2298 |
\internal
|
|
2299 |
Ensures that the widget has a window system identifier, i.e. that it is known to the windowing system.
|
|
2300 |
|
|
2301 |
*/
|
|
2302 |
|
|
2303 |
void QWidget::createWinId()
|
|
2304 |
{
|
|
2305 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
2306 |
// qWarning("QWidget::createWinId is obsolete, please fix your code.");
|
|
2307 |
d->createWinId();
|
|
2308 |
}
|
|
2309 |
|
|
2310 |
/*!
|
|
2311 |
\since 4.4
|
|
2312 |
|
|
2313 |
Returns the effective window system identifier of the widget, i.e. the
|
|
2314 |
native parent's window system identifier.
|
|
2315 |
|
|
2316 |
If the widget is native, this function returns the native widget ID.
|
|
2317 |
Otherwise, the window ID of the first native parent widget, i.e., the
|
|
2318 |
top-level widget that contains this widget, is returned.
|
|
2319 |
|
|
2320 |
\note We recommend that you do not store this value as it is likely to
|
|
2321 |
change at run-time.
|
|
2322 |
|
|
2323 |
\sa nativeParentWidget()
|
|
2324 |
*/
|
|
2325 |
WId QWidget::effectiveWinId() const
|
|
2326 |
{
|
|
2327 |
WId id = internalWinId();
|
|
2328 |
if (id || !testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Created))
|
|
2329 |
return id;
|
|
2330 |
QWidget *realParent = nativeParentWidget();
|
|
2331 |
Q_ASSERT(realParent);
|
|
2332 |
Q_ASSERT(realParent->internalWinId());
|
|
2333 |
return realParent->internalWinId();
|
|
2334 |
}
|
|
2335 |
|
|
2336 |
#ifndef QT_NO_STYLE_STYLESHEET
|
|
2337 |
|
|
2338 |
/*!
|
|
2339 |
\property QWidget::styleSheet
|
|
2340 |
\brief the widget's style sheet
|
|
2341 |
\since 4.2
|
|
2342 |
|
|
2343 |
The style sheet contains a textual description of customizations to the
|
|
2344 |
widget's style, as described in the \l{Qt Style Sheets} document.
|
|
2345 |
|
|
2346 |
Since Qt 4.5, Qt style sheets fully supports Mac OS X.
|
|
2347 |
|
|
2348 |
\warning Qt style sheets are currently not supported for custom QStyle
|
|
2349 |
subclasses. We plan to address this in some future release.
|
|
2350 |
|
|
2351 |
\sa setStyle(), QApplication::styleSheet, {Qt Style Sheets}
|
|
2352 |
*/
|
|
2353 |
QString QWidget::styleSheet() const
|
|
2354 |
{
|
|
2355 |
Q_D(const QWidget);
|
|
2356 |
if (!d->extra)
|
|
2357 |
return QString();
|
|
2358 |
return d->extra->styleSheet;
|
|
2359 |
}
|
|
2360 |
|
|
2361 |
void QWidget::setStyleSheet(const QString& styleSheet)
|
|
2362 |
{
|
|
2363 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
2364 |
d->createExtra();
|
|
2365 |
|
|
2366 |
QStyleSheetStyle *proxy = qobject_cast<QStyleSheetStyle *>(d->extra->style);
|
|
2367 |
d->extra->styleSheet = styleSheet;
|
|
2368 |
if (styleSheet.isEmpty()) { // stylesheet removed
|
|
2369 |
if (!proxy)
|
|
2370 |
return;
|
|
2371 |
|
|
2372 |
d->inheritStyle();
|
|
2373 |
return;
|
|
2374 |
}
|
|
2375 |
|
|
2376 |
if (proxy) { // style sheet update
|
|
2377 |
proxy->repolish(this);
|
|
2378 |
return;
|
|
2379 |
}
|
|
2380 |
|
|
2381 |
if (testAttribute(Qt::WA_SetStyle)) {
|
|
2382 |
d->setStyle_helper(new QStyleSheetStyle(d->extra->style), true);
|
|
2383 |
} else {
|
|
2384 |
d->setStyle_helper(new QStyleSheetStyle(0), true);
|
|
2385 |
}
|
|
2386 |
}
|
|
2387 |
|
|
2388 |
#endif // QT_NO_STYLE_STYLESHEET
|
|
2389 |
|
|
2390 |
/*!
|
|
2391 |
\sa QWidget::setStyle(), QApplication::setStyle(), QApplication::style()
|
|
2392 |
*/
|
|
2393 |
|
|
2394 |
QStyle *QWidget::style() const
|
|
2395 |
{
|
|
2396 |
Q_D(const QWidget);
|
|
2397 |
|
|
2398 |
if (d->extra && d->extra->style)
|
|
2399 |
return d->extra->style;
|
|
2400 |
return QApplication::style();
|
|
2401 |
}
|
|
2402 |
|
|
2403 |
/*!
|
|
2404 |
Sets the widget's GUI style to \a style. The ownership of the style
|
|
2405 |
object is not transferred.
|
|
2406 |
|
|
2407 |
If no style is set, the widget uses the application's style,
|
|
2408 |
QApplication::style() instead.
|
|
2409 |
|
|
2410 |
Setting a widget's style has no effect on existing or future child
|
|
2411 |
widgets.
|
|
2412 |
|
|
2413 |
\warning This function is particularly useful for demonstration
|
|
2414 |
purposes, where you want to show Qt's styling capabilities. Real
|
|
2415 |
applications should avoid it and use one consistent GUI style
|
|
2416 |
instead.
|
|
2417 |
|
|
2418 |
\warning Qt style sheets are currently not supported for custom QStyle
|
|
2419 |
subclasses. We plan to address this in some future release.
|
|
2420 |
|
|
2421 |
\sa style(), QStyle, QApplication::style(), QApplication::setStyle()
|
|
2422 |
*/
|
|
2423 |
|
|
2424 |
void QWidget::setStyle(QStyle *style)
|
|
2425 |
{
|
|
2426 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
2427 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_SetStyle, style != 0);
|
|
2428 |
d->createExtra();
|
|
2429 |
#ifndef QT_NO_STYLE_STYLESHEET
|
|
2430 |
if (QStyleSheetStyle *proxy = qobject_cast<QStyleSheetStyle *>(style)) {
|
|
2431 |
//if for some reason someone try to set a QStyleSheetStyle, ref it
|
|
2432 |
//(this may happen for exemple in QButtonDialogBox which propagates its style)
|
|
2433 |
proxy->ref();
|
|
2434 |
d->setStyle_helper(style, false);
|
|
2435 |
} else if (qobject_cast<QStyleSheetStyle *>(d->extra->style) || !qApp->styleSheet().isEmpty()) {
|
|
2436 |
// if we have an application stylesheet or have a proxy already, propagate
|
|
2437 |
d->setStyle_helper(new QStyleSheetStyle(style), true);
|
|
2438 |
} else
|
|
2439 |
#endif
|
|
2440 |
d->setStyle_helper(style, false);
|
|
2441 |
}
|
|
2442 |
|
|
2443 |
void QWidgetPrivate::setStyle_helper(QStyle *newStyle, bool propagate, bool
|
|
2444 |
#ifdef Q_WS_MAC
|
|
2445 |
metalHack
|
|
2446 |
#endif
|
|
2447 |
)
|
|
2448 |
{
|
|
2449 |
Q_Q(QWidget);
|
|
2450 |
QStyle *oldStyle = q->style();
|
|
2451 |
#ifndef QT_NO_STYLE_STYLESHEET
|
|
2452 |
QStyle *origStyle = 0;
|
|
2453 |
#endif
|
|
2454 |
|
|
2455 |
#ifdef Q_WS_MAC
|
|
2456 |
// the metalhack boolean allows Qt/Mac to do a proper re-polish depending
|
|
2457 |
// on how the Qt::WA_MacBrushedMetal attribute is set. It is only ever
|
|
2458 |
// set when changing that attribute and passes the widget's CURRENT style.
|
|
2459 |
// therefore no need to do a reassignment.
|
|
2460 |
if (!metalHack)
|
|
2461 |
#endif
|
|
2462 |
{
|
|
2463 |
createExtra();
|
|
2464 |
|
|
2465 |
#ifndef QT_NO_STYLE_STYLESHEET
|
|
2466 |
origStyle = extra->style;
|
|
2467 |
#endif
|
|
2468 |
extra->style = newStyle;
|
|
2469 |
}
|
|
2470 |
|
|
2471 |
// repolish
|
|
2472 |
if (q->windowType() != Qt::Desktop) {
|
|
2473 |
if (polished) {
|
|
2474 |
oldStyle->unpolish(q);
|
|
2475 |
#ifdef Q_WS_MAC
|
|
2476 |
if (metalHack)
|
|
2477 |
macUpdateMetalAttribute();
|
|
2478 |
#endif
|
|
2479 |
q->style()->polish(q);
|
|
2480 |
#ifdef Q_WS_MAC
|
|
2481 |
} else if (metalHack) {
|
|
2482 |
macUpdateMetalAttribute();
|
|
2483 |
#endif
|
|
2484 |
}
|
|
2485 |
}
|
|
2486 |
|
|
2487 |
if (propagate) {
|
|
2488 |
for (int i = 0; i < children.size(); ++i) {
|
|
2489 |
QWidget *c = qobject_cast<QWidget*>(children.at(i));
|
|
2490 |
if (c)
|
|
2491 |
c->d_func()->inheritStyle();
|
|
2492 |
}
|
|
2493 |
}
|
|
2494 |
|
|
2495 |
QEvent e(QEvent::StyleChange);
|
|
2496 |
QApplication::sendEvent(q, &e);
|
|
2497 |
#ifdef QT3_SUPPORT
|
|
2498 |
q->styleChange(*oldStyle);
|
|
2499 |
#endif
|
|
2500 |
|
|
2501 |
#ifndef QT_NO_STYLE_STYLESHEET
|
|
2502 |
if (!qobject_cast<QStyleSheetStyle*>(newStyle)) {
|
|
2503 |
if (const QStyleSheetStyle* cssStyle = qobject_cast<QStyleSheetStyle*>(origStyle)) {
|
|
2504 |
cssStyle->clearWidgetFont(q);
|
|
2505 |
}
|
|
2506 |
}
|
|
2507 |
#endif
|
|
2508 |
|
|
2509 |
#ifndef QT_NO_STYLE_STYLESHEET
|
|
2510 |
// dereference the old stylesheet style
|
|
2511 |
if (QStyleSheetStyle *proxy = qobject_cast<QStyleSheetStyle *>(origStyle))
|
|
2512 |
proxy->deref();
|
|
2513 |
#endif
|
|
2514 |
}
|
|
2515 |
|
|
2516 |
// Inherits style from the current parent and propagates it as necessary
|
|
2517 |
void QWidgetPrivate::inheritStyle()
|
|
2518 |
{
|
|
2519 |
#ifndef QT_NO_STYLE_STYLESHEET
|
|
2520 |
Q_Q(QWidget);
|
|
2521 |
|
|
2522 |
QStyleSheetStyle *proxy = extra ? qobject_cast<QStyleSheetStyle *>(extra->style) : 0;
|
|
2523 |
|
|
2524 |
if (!q->styleSheet().isEmpty()) {
|
|
2525 |
Q_ASSERT(proxy);
|
|
2526 |
proxy->repolish(q);
|
|
2527 |
return;
|
|
2528 |
}
|
|
2529 |
|
|
2530 |
QStyle *origStyle = proxy ? proxy->base : (extra ? (QStyle*)extra->style : 0);
|
|
2531 |
QWidget *parent = q->parentWidget();
|
|
2532 |
QStyle *parentStyle = (parent && parent->d_func()->extra) ? (QStyle*)parent->d_func()->extra->style : 0;
|
|
2533 |
// If we have stylesheet on app or parent has stylesheet style, we need
|
|
2534 |
// to be running a proxy
|
|
2535 |
if (!qApp->styleSheet().isEmpty() || qobject_cast<QStyleSheetStyle *>(parentStyle)) {
|
|
2536 |
QStyle *newStyle = parentStyle;
|
|
2537 |
if (q->testAttribute(Qt::WA_SetStyle))
|
|
2538 |
newStyle = new QStyleSheetStyle(origStyle);
|
|
2539 |
else if (QStyleSheetStyle *newProxy = qobject_cast<QStyleSheetStyle *>(parentStyle))
|
|
2540 |
newProxy->ref();
|
|
2541 |
|
|
2542 |
setStyle_helper(newStyle, true);
|
|
2543 |
return;
|
|
2544 |
}
|
|
2545 |
|
|
2546 |
// So, we have no stylesheet on parent/app and we have an empty stylesheet
|
|
2547 |
// we just need our original style back
|
|
2548 |
if (origStyle == (extra ? (QStyle*)extra->style : 0)) // is it any different?
|
|
2549 |
return;
|
|
2550 |
|
|
2551 |
// We could have inherited the proxy from our parent (which has a custom style)
|
|
2552 |
// In such a case we need to start following the application style (i.e revert
|
|
2553 |
// the propagation behavior of QStyleSheetStyle)
|
|
2554 |
if (!q->testAttribute(Qt::WA_SetStyle))
|
|
2555 |
origStyle = 0;
|
|
2556 |
|
|
2557 |
setStyle_helper(origStyle, true);
|
|
2558 |
#endif // QT_NO_STYLE_STYLESHEET
|
|
2559 |
}
|
|
2560 |
|
|
2561 |
#ifdef QT3_SUPPORT
|
|
2562 |
/*!
|
|
2563 |
\overload
|
|
2564 |
|
|
2565 |
Sets the widget's GUI style to \a style using the QStyleFactory.
|
|
2566 |
*/
|
|
2567 |
QStyle* QWidget::setStyle(const QString &style)
|
|
2568 |
{
|
|
2569 |
QStyle *s = QStyleFactory::create(style);
|
|
2570 |
setStyle(s);
|
|
2571 |
return s;
|
|
2572 |
}
|
|
2573 |
#endif
|
|
2574 |
|
|
2575 |
/*!
|
|
2576 |
\fn bool QWidget::isWindow() const
|
|
2577 |
|
|
2578 |
Returns true if the widget is an independent window, otherwise
|
|
2579 |
returns false.
|
|
2580 |
|
|
2581 |
A window is a widget that isn't visually the child of any other
|
|
2582 |
widget and that usually has a frame and a
|
|
2583 |
\l{QWidget::setWindowTitle()}{window title}.
|
|
2584 |
|
|
2585 |
A window can have a \l{QWidget::parentWidget()}{parent widget}.
|
|
2586 |
It will then be grouped with its parent and deleted when the
|
|
2587 |
parent is deleted, minimized when the parent is minimized etc. If
|
|
2588 |
supported by the window manager, it will also have a common
|
|
2589 |
taskbar entry with its parent.
|
|
2590 |
|
|
2591 |
QDialog and QMainWindow widgets are by default windows, even if a
|
|
2592 |
parent widget is specified in the constructor. This behavior is
|
|
2593 |
specified by the Qt::Window flag.
|
|
2594 |
|
|
2595 |
\sa window(), isModal(), parentWidget()
|
|
2596 |
*/
|
|
2597 |
|
|
2598 |
/*!
|
|
2599 |
\property QWidget::modal
|
|
2600 |
\brief whether the widget is a modal widget
|
|
2601 |
|
|
2602 |
This property only makes sense for windows. A modal widget
|
|
2603 |
prevents widgets in all other windows from getting any input.
|
|
2604 |
|
|
2605 |
By default, this property is false.
|
|
2606 |
|
|
2607 |
\sa isWindow(), windowModality, QDialog
|
|
2608 |
*/
|
|
2609 |
|
|
2610 |
/*!
|
|
2611 |
\property QWidget::windowModality
|
|
2612 |
\brief which windows are blocked by the modal widget
|
|
2613 |
\since 4.1
|
|
2614 |
|
|
2615 |
This property only makes sense for windows. A modal widget
|
|
2616 |
prevents widgets in other windows from getting input. The value of
|
|
2617 |
this property controls which windows are blocked when the widget
|
|
2618 |
is visible. Changing this property while the window is visible has
|
|
2619 |
no effect; you must hide() the widget first, then show() it again.
|
|
2620 |
|
|
2621 |
By default, this property is Qt::NonModal.
|
|
2622 |
|
|
2623 |
\sa isWindow(), QWidget::modal, QDialog
|
|
2624 |
*/
|
|
2625 |
|
|
2626 |
Qt::WindowModality QWidget::windowModality() const
|
|
2627 |
{
|
|
2628 |
return static_cast<Qt::WindowModality>(data->window_modality);
|
|
2629 |
}
|
|
2630 |
|
|
2631 |
void QWidget::setWindowModality(Qt::WindowModality windowModality)
|
|
2632 |
{
|
|
2633 |
data->window_modality = windowModality;
|
|
2634 |
// setModal_sys() will be called by setAttribute()
|
|
2635 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_ShowModal, (data->window_modality != Qt::NonModal));
|
|
2636 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_SetWindowModality, true);
|
|
2637 |
}
|
|
2638 |
|
|
2639 |
/*!
|
|
2640 |
\fn bool QWidget::underMouse() const
|
|
2641 |
|
|
2642 |
Returns true if the widget is under the mouse cursor; otherwise
|
|
2643 |
returns false.
|
|
2644 |
|
|
2645 |
This value is not updated properly during drag and drop
|
|
2646 |
operations.
|
|
2647 |
|
|
2648 |
\sa enterEvent(), leaveEvent()
|
|
2649 |
*/
|
|
2650 |
|
|
2651 |
/*!
|
|
2652 |
\property QWidget::minimized
|
|
2653 |
\brief whether this widget is minimized (iconified)
|
|
2654 |
|
|
2655 |
This property is only relevant for windows.
|
|
2656 |
|
|
2657 |
By default, this property is false.
|
|
2658 |
|
|
2659 |
\sa showMinimized(), visible, show(), hide(), showNormal(), maximized
|
|
2660 |
*/
|
|
2661 |
bool QWidget::isMinimized() const
|
|
2662 |
{ return data->window_state & Qt::WindowMinimized; }
|
|
2663 |
|
|
2664 |
/*!
|
|
2665 |
Shows the widget minimized, as an icon.
|
|
2666 |
|
|
2667 |
Calling this function only affects \l{isWindow()}{windows}.
|
|
2668 |
|
|
2669 |
\sa showNormal(), showMaximized(), show(), hide(), isVisible(),
|
|
2670 |
isMinimized()
|
|
2671 |
*/
|
|
2672 |
void QWidget::showMinimized()
|
|
2673 |
{
|
|
2674 |
bool isMin = isMinimized();
|
|
2675 |
if (isMin && isVisible())
|
|
2676 |
return;
|
|
2677 |
|
|
2678 |
ensurePolished();
|
|
2679 |
#ifdef QT3_SUPPORT
|
|
2680 |
if (parent())
|
|
2681 |
QApplication::sendPostedEvents(parent(), QEvent::ChildInserted);
|
|
2682 |
#endif
|
|
2683 |
|
|
2684 |
if (!isMin)
|
|
2685 |
setWindowState((windowState() & ~Qt::WindowActive) | Qt::WindowMinimized);
|
|
2686 |
show();
|
|
2687 |
}
|
|
2688 |
|
|
2689 |
/*!
|
|
2690 |
\property QWidget::maximized
|
|
2691 |
\brief whether this widget is maximized
|
|
2692 |
|
|
2693 |
This property is only relevant for windows.
|
|
2694 |
|
|
2695 |
\note Due to limitations on some window systems, this does not always
|
|
2696 |
report the expected results (e.g., if the user on X11 maximizes the
|
|
2697 |
window via the window manager, Qt has no way of distinguishing this
|
|
2698 |
from any other resize). This is expected to improve as window manager
|
|
2699 |
protocols evolve.
|
|
2700 |
|
|
2701 |
By default, this property is false.
|
|
2702 |
|
|
2703 |
\sa windowState(), showMaximized(), visible, show(), hide(), showNormal(), minimized
|
|
2704 |
*/
|
|
2705 |
bool QWidget::isMaximized() const
|
|
2706 |
{ return data->window_state & Qt::WindowMaximized; }
|
|
2707 |
|
|
2708 |
|
|
2709 |
|
|
2710 |
/*!
|
|
2711 |
Returns the current window state. The window state is a OR'ed
|
|
2712 |
combination of Qt::WindowState: Qt::WindowMinimized,
|
|
2713 |
Qt::WindowMaximized, Qt::WindowFullScreen, and Qt::WindowActive.
|
|
2714 |
|
|
2715 |
\sa Qt::WindowState setWindowState()
|
|
2716 |
*/
|
|
2717 |
Qt::WindowStates QWidget::windowState() const
|
|
2718 |
{
|
|
2719 |
return Qt::WindowStates(data->window_state);
|
|
2720 |
}
|
|
2721 |
|
|
2722 |
/*!\internal
|
|
2723 |
|
|
2724 |
The function sets the window state on child widgets similar to
|
|
2725 |
setWindowState(). The difference is that the window state changed
|
|
2726 |
event has the isOverride() flag set. It exists mainly to keep
|
|
2727 |
Q3Workspace working.
|
|
2728 |
*/
|
|
2729 |
void QWidget::overrideWindowState(Qt::WindowStates newstate)
|
|
2730 |
{
|
|
2731 |
QWindowStateChangeEvent e(Qt::WindowStates(data->window_state), true);
|
|
2732 |
data->window_state = newstate;
|
|
2733 |
QApplication::sendEvent(this, &e);
|
|
2734 |
}
|
|
2735 |
|
|
2736 |
/*!
|
|
2737 |
\fn void QWidget::setWindowState(Qt::WindowStates windowState)
|
|
2738 |
|
|
2739 |
Sets the window state to \a windowState. The window state is a OR'ed
|
|
2740 |
combination of Qt::WindowState: Qt::WindowMinimized,
|
|
2741 |
Qt::WindowMaximized, Qt::WindowFullScreen, and Qt::WindowActive.
|
|
2742 |
|
|
2743 |
If the window is not visible (i.e. isVisible() returns false), the
|
|
2744 |
window state will take effect when show() is called. For visible
|
|
2745 |
windows, the change is immediate. For example, to toggle between
|
|
2746 |
full-screen and normal mode, use the following code:
|
|
2747 |
|
|
2748 |
\snippet doc/src/snippets/code/src_gui_kernel_qwidget.cpp 0
|
|
2749 |
|
|
2750 |
In order to restore and activate a minimized window (while
|
|
2751 |
preserving its maximized and/or full-screen state), use the following:
|
|
2752 |
|
|
2753 |
\snippet doc/src/snippets/code/src_gui_kernel_qwidget.cpp 1
|
|
2754 |
|
|
2755 |
Calling this function will hide the widget. You must call show() to make
|
|
2756 |
the widget visible again.
|
|
2757 |
|
|
2758 |
\note On some window systems Qt::WindowActive is not immediate, and may be
|
|
2759 |
ignored in certain cases.
|
|
2760 |
|
|
2761 |
When the window state changes, the widget receives a changeEvent()
|
|
2762 |
of type QEvent::WindowStateChange.
|
|
2763 |
|
|
2764 |
\sa Qt::WindowState windowState()
|
|
2765 |
*/
|
|
2766 |
|
|
2767 |
/*!
|
|
2768 |
\property QWidget::fullScreen
|
|
2769 |
\brief whether the widget is shown in full screen mode
|
|
2770 |
|
|
2771 |
A widget in full screen mode occupies the whole screen area and does not
|
|
2772 |
display window decorations, such as a title bar.
|
|
2773 |
|
|
2774 |
By default, this property is false.
|
|
2775 |
|
|
2776 |
\sa windowState(), minimized, maximized
|
|
2777 |
*/
|
|
2778 |
bool QWidget::isFullScreen() const
|
|
2779 |
{ return data->window_state & Qt::WindowFullScreen; }
|
|
2780 |
|
|
2781 |
/*!
|
|
2782 |
Shows the widget in full-screen mode.
|
|
2783 |
|
|
2784 |
Calling this function only affects \l{isWindow()}{windows}.
|
|
2785 |
|
|
2786 |
To return from full-screen mode, call showNormal().
|
|
2787 |
|
|
2788 |
Full-screen mode works fine under Windows, but has certain
|
|
2789 |
problems under X. These problems are due to limitations of the
|
|
2790 |
ICCCM protocol that specifies the communication between X11
|
|
2791 |
clients and the window manager. ICCCM simply does not understand
|
|
2792 |
the concept of non-decorated full-screen windows. Therefore, the
|
|
2793 |
best we can do is to request a borderless window and place and
|
|
2794 |
resize it to fill the entire screen. Depending on the window
|
|
2795 |
manager, this may or may not work. The borderless window is
|
|
2796 |
requested using MOTIF hints, which are at least partially
|
|
2797 |
supported by virtually all modern window managers.
|
|
2798 |
|
|
2799 |
An alternative would be to bypass the window manager entirely and
|
|
2800 |
create a window with the Qt::X11BypassWindowManagerHint flag. This
|
|
2801 |
has other severe problems though, like totally broken keyboard focus
|
|
2802 |
and very strange effects on desktop changes or when the user raises
|
|
2803 |
other windows.
|
|
2804 |
|
|
2805 |
X11 window managers that follow modern post-ICCCM specifications
|
|
2806 |
support full-screen mode properly.
|
|
2807 |
|
|
2808 |
\sa showNormal(), showMaximized(), show(), hide(), isVisible()
|
|
2809 |
*/
|
|
2810 |
void QWidget::showFullScreen()
|
|
2811 |
{
|
|
2812 |
ensurePolished();
|
|
2813 |
#ifdef QT3_SUPPORT
|
|
2814 |
if (parent())
|
|
2815 |
QApplication::sendPostedEvents(parent(), QEvent::ChildInserted);
|
|
2816 |
#endif
|
|
2817 |
|
|
2818 |
setWindowState((windowState() & ~(Qt::WindowMinimized | Qt::WindowMaximized))
|
|
2819 |
| Qt::WindowFullScreen);
|
|
2820 |
show();
|
|
2821 |
activateWindow();
|
|
2822 |
}
|
|
2823 |
|
|
2824 |
/*!
|
|
2825 |
Shows the widget maximized.
|
|
2826 |
|
|
2827 |
Calling this function only affects \l{isWindow()}{windows}.
|
|
2828 |
|
|
2829 |
On X11, this function may not work properly with certain window
|
|
2830 |
managers. See the \l{Window Geometry} documentation for an explanation.
|
|
2831 |
|
|
2832 |
\sa setWindowState(), showNormal(), showMinimized(), show(), hide(), isVisible()
|
|
2833 |
*/
|
|
2834 |
void QWidget::showMaximized()
|
|
2835 |
{
|
|
2836 |
ensurePolished();
|
|
2837 |
#ifdef QT3_SUPPORT
|
|
2838 |
if (parent())
|
|
2839 |
QApplication::sendPostedEvents(parent(), QEvent::ChildInserted);
|
|
2840 |
#endif
|
|
2841 |
|
|
2842 |
setWindowState((windowState() & ~(Qt::WindowMinimized | Qt::WindowFullScreen))
|
|
2843 |
| Qt::WindowMaximized);
|
|
2844 |
show();
|
|
2845 |
}
|
|
2846 |
|
|
2847 |
/*!
|
|
2848 |
Restores the widget after it has been maximized or minimized.
|
|
2849 |
|
|
2850 |
Calling this function only affects \l{isWindow()}{windows}.
|
|
2851 |
|
|
2852 |
\sa setWindowState(), showMinimized(), showMaximized(), show(), hide(), isVisible()
|
|
2853 |
*/
|
|
2854 |
void QWidget::showNormal()
|
|
2855 |
{
|
|
2856 |
ensurePolished();
|
|
2857 |
#ifdef QT3_SUPPORT
|
|
2858 |
if (parent())
|
|
2859 |
QApplication::sendPostedEvents(parent(), QEvent::ChildInserted);
|
|
2860 |
#endif
|
|
2861 |
|
|
2862 |
setWindowState(windowState() & ~(Qt::WindowMinimized
|
|
2863 |
| Qt::WindowMaximized
|
|
2864 |
| Qt::WindowFullScreen));
|
|
2865 |
show();
|
|
2866 |
}
|
|
2867 |
|
|
2868 |
/*!
|
|
2869 |
Returns true if this widget would become enabled if \a ancestor is
|
|
2870 |
enabled; otherwise returns false.
|
|
2871 |
|
|
2872 |
|
|
2873 |
|
|
2874 |
This is the case if neither the widget itself nor every parent up
|
|
2875 |
to but excluding \a ancestor has been explicitly disabled.
|
|
2876 |
|
|
2877 |
isEnabledTo(0) is equivalent to isEnabled().
|
|
2878 |
|
|
2879 |
\sa setEnabled() enabled
|
|
2880 |
*/
|
|
2881 |
|
|
2882 |
bool QWidget::isEnabledTo(QWidget* ancestor) const
|
|
2883 |
{
|
|
2884 |
const QWidget * w = this;
|
|
2885 |
while (!w->testAttribute(Qt::WA_ForceDisabled)
|
|
2886 |
&& !w->isWindow()
|
|
2887 |
&& w->parentWidget()
|
|
2888 |
&& w->parentWidget() != ancestor)
|
|
2889 |
w = w->parentWidget();
|
|
2890 |
return !w->testAttribute(Qt::WA_ForceDisabled);
|
|
2891 |
}
|
|
2892 |
|
|
2893 |
#ifndef QT_NO_ACTION
|
|
2894 |
/*!
|
|
2895 |
Appends the action \a action to this widget's list of actions.
|
|
2896 |
|
|
2897 |
All QWidgets have a list of \l{QAction}s, however they can be
|
|
2898 |
represented graphically in many different ways. The default use of
|
|
2899 |
the QAction list (as returned by actions()) is to create a context
|
|
2900 |
QMenu.
|
|
2901 |
|
|
2902 |
A QWidget should only have one of each action and adding an action
|
|
2903 |
it already has will not cause the same action to be in the widget twice.
|
|
2904 |
|
|
2905 |
The ownership of \a action is not transferred to this QWidget.
|
|
2906 |
|
|
2907 |
\sa removeAction(), insertAction(), actions(), QMenu
|
|
2908 |
*/
|
|
2909 |
void QWidget::addAction(QAction *action)
|
|
2910 |
{
|
|
2911 |
insertAction(0, action);
|
|
2912 |
}
|
|
2913 |
|
|
2914 |
/*!
|
|
2915 |
Appends the actions \a actions to this widget's list of actions.
|
|
2916 |
|
|
2917 |
\sa removeAction(), QMenu, addAction()
|
|
2918 |
*/
|
|
2919 |
void QWidget::addActions(QList<QAction*> actions)
|
|
2920 |
{
|
|
2921 |
for(int i = 0; i < actions.count(); i++)
|
|
2922 |
insertAction(0, actions.at(i));
|
|
2923 |
}
|
|
2924 |
|
|
2925 |
/*!
|
|
2926 |
Inserts the action \a action to this widget's list of actions,
|
|
2927 |
before the action \a before. It appends the action if \a before is 0 or
|
|
2928 |
\a before is not a valid action for this widget.
|
|
2929 |
|
|
2930 |
A QWidget should only have one of each action.
|
|
2931 |
|
|
2932 |
\sa removeAction(), addAction(), QMenu, contextMenuPolicy, actions()
|
|
2933 |
*/
|
|
2934 |
void QWidget::insertAction(QAction *before, QAction *action)
|
|
2935 |
{
|
|
2936 |
if(!action) {
|
|
2937 |
qWarning("QWidget::insertAction: Attempt to insert null action");
|
|
2938 |
return;
|
|
2939 |
}
|
|
2940 |
|
|
2941 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
2942 |
if(d->actions.contains(action))
|
|
2943 |
removeAction(action);
|
|
2944 |
|
|
2945 |
int pos = d->actions.indexOf(before);
|
|
2946 |
if (pos < 0) {
|
|
2947 |
before = 0;
|
|
2948 |
pos = d->actions.size();
|
|
2949 |
}
|
|
2950 |
d->actions.insert(pos, action);
|
|
2951 |
|
|
2952 |
QActionPrivate *apriv = action->d_func();
|
|
2953 |
apriv->widgets.append(this);
|
|
2954 |
|
|
2955 |
QActionEvent e(QEvent::ActionAdded, action, before);
|
|
2956 |
QApplication::sendEvent(this, &e);
|
|
2957 |
}
|
|
2958 |
|
|
2959 |
/*!
|
|
2960 |
Inserts the actions \a actions to this widget's list of actions,
|
|
2961 |
before the action \a before. It appends the action if \a before is 0 or
|
|
2962 |
\a before is not a valid action for this widget.
|
|
2963 |
|
|
2964 |
A QWidget can have at most one of each action.
|
|
2965 |
|
|
2966 |
\sa removeAction(), QMenu, insertAction(), contextMenuPolicy
|
|
2967 |
*/
|
|
2968 |
void QWidget::insertActions(QAction *before, QList<QAction*> actions)
|
|
2969 |
{
|
|
2970 |
for(int i = 0; i < actions.count(); ++i)
|
|
2971 |
insertAction(before, actions.at(i));
|
|
2972 |
}
|
|
2973 |
|
|
2974 |
/*!
|
|
2975 |
Removes the action \a action from this widget's list of actions.
|
|
2976 |
\sa insertAction(), actions(), insertAction()
|
|
2977 |
*/
|
|
2978 |
void QWidget::removeAction(QAction *action)
|
|
2979 |
{
|
|
2980 |
if (!action)
|
|
2981 |
return;
|
|
2982 |
|
|
2983 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
2984 |
|
|
2985 |
QActionPrivate *apriv = action->d_func();
|
|
2986 |
apriv->widgets.removeAll(this);
|
|
2987 |
|
|
2988 |
if (d->actions.removeAll(action)) {
|
|
2989 |
QActionEvent e(QEvent::ActionRemoved, action);
|
|
2990 |
QApplication::sendEvent(this, &e);
|
|
2991 |
}
|
|
2992 |
}
|
|
2993 |
|
|
2994 |
/*!
|
|
2995 |
Returns the (possibly empty) list of this widget's actions.
|
|
2996 |
|
|
2997 |
\sa contextMenuPolicy, insertAction(), removeAction()
|
|
2998 |
*/
|
|
2999 |
QList<QAction*> QWidget::actions() const
|
|
3000 |
{
|
|
3001 |
Q_D(const QWidget);
|
|
3002 |
return d->actions;
|
|
3003 |
}
|
|
3004 |
#endif // QT_NO_ACTION
|
|
3005 |
|
|
3006 |
/*!
|
|
3007 |
\fn bool QWidget::isEnabledToTLW() const
|
|
3008 |
\obsolete
|
|
3009 |
|
|
3010 |
This function is deprecated. It is equivalent to isEnabled()
|
|
3011 |
*/
|
|
3012 |
|
|
3013 |
/*!
|
|
3014 |
\property QWidget::enabled
|
|
3015 |
\brief whether the widget is enabled
|
|
3016 |
|
|
3017 |
An enabled widget handles keyboard and mouse events; a disabled
|
|
3018 |
widget does not.
|
|
3019 |
|
|
3020 |
Some widgets display themselves differently when they are
|
|
3021 |
disabled. For example a button might draw its label grayed out. If
|
|
3022 |
your widget needs to know when it becomes enabled or disabled, you
|
|
3023 |
can use the changeEvent() with type QEvent::EnabledChange.
|
|
3024 |
|
|
3025 |
Disabling a widget implicitly disables all its children. Enabling
|
|
3026 |
respectively enables all child widgets unless they have been
|
|
3027 |
explicitly disabled.
|
|
3028 |
|
|
3029 |
By default, this property is true.
|
|
3030 |
|
|
3031 |
\sa isEnabledTo(), QKeyEvent, QMouseEvent, changeEvent()
|
|
3032 |
*/
|
|
3033 |
void QWidget::setEnabled(bool enable)
|
|
3034 |
{
|
|
3035 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
3036 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_ForceDisabled, !enable);
|
|
3037 |
d->setEnabled_helper(enable);
|
|
3038 |
}
|
|
3039 |
|
|
3040 |
void QWidgetPrivate::setEnabled_helper(bool enable)
|
|
3041 |
{
|
|
3042 |
Q_Q(QWidget);
|
|
3043 |
|
|
3044 |
if (enable && !q->isWindow() && q->parentWidget() && !q->parentWidget()->isEnabled())
|
|
3045 |
return; // nothing we can do
|
|
3046 |
|
|
3047 |
if (enable != q->testAttribute(Qt::WA_Disabled))
|
|
3048 |
return; // nothing to do
|
|
3049 |
|
|
3050 |
q->setAttribute(Qt::WA_Disabled, !enable);
|
|
3051 |
updateSystemBackground();
|
|
3052 |
|
|
3053 |
if (!enable && q->window()->focusWidget() == q) {
|
|
3054 |
bool parentIsEnabled = (!q->parentWidget() || q->parentWidget()->isEnabled());
|
|
3055 |
if (!parentIsEnabled || !q->focusNextChild())
|
|
3056 |
q->clearFocus();
|
|
3057 |
}
|
|
3058 |
|
|
3059 |
Qt::WidgetAttribute attribute = enable ? Qt::WA_ForceDisabled : Qt::WA_Disabled;
|
|
3060 |
for (int i = 0; i < children.size(); ++i) {
|
|
3061 |
QWidget *w = qobject_cast<QWidget *>(children.at(i));
|
|
3062 |
if (w && !w->testAttribute(attribute))
|
|
3063 |
w->d_func()->setEnabled_helper(enable);
|
|
3064 |
}
|
|
3065 |
#if defined(Q_WS_X11)
|
|
3066 |
if (q->testAttribute(Qt::WA_SetCursor) || q->isWindow()) {
|
|
3067 |
// enforce the windows behavior of clearing the cursor on
|
|
3068 |
// disabled widgets
|
|
3069 |
qt_x11_enforce_cursor(q);
|
|
3070 |
}
|
|
3071 |
#endif
|
|
3072 |
#if defined(Q_WS_MAC)
|
|
3073 |
setEnabled_helper_sys(enable);
|
|
3074 |
#endif
|
|
3075 |
if (q->testAttribute(Qt::WA_InputMethodEnabled) && q->hasFocus()) {
|
|
3076 |
QInputContext *qic = inputContext();
|
|
3077 |
if (enable) {
|
|
3078 |
qic->setFocusWidget(q);
|
|
3079 |
} else {
|
|
3080 |
qic->reset();
|
|
3081 |
qic->setFocusWidget(0);
|
|
3082 |
}
|
|
3083 |
}
|
|
3084 |
QEvent e(QEvent::EnabledChange);
|
|
3085 |
QApplication::sendEvent(q, &e);
|
|
3086 |
#ifdef QT3_SUPPORT
|
|
3087 |
q->enabledChange(!enable); // compatibility
|
|
3088 |
#endif
|
|
3089 |
}
|
|
3090 |
|
|
3091 |
/*!
|
|
3092 |
\property QWidget::acceptDrops
|
|
3093 |
\brief whether drop events are enabled for this widget
|
|
3094 |
|
|
3095 |
Setting this property to true announces to the system that this
|
|
3096 |
widget \e may be able to accept drop events.
|
|
3097 |
|
|
3098 |
If the widget is the desktop (windowType() == Qt::Desktop), this may
|
|
3099 |
fail if another application is using the desktop; you can call
|
|
3100 |
acceptDrops() to test if this occurs.
|
|
3101 |
|
|
3102 |
\warning Do not modify this property in a drag and drop event handler.
|
|
3103 |
|
|
3104 |
By default, this property is false.
|
|
3105 |
|
|
3106 |
\sa {Drag and Drop}
|
|
3107 |
*/
|
|
3108 |
bool QWidget::acceptDrops() const
|
|
3109 |
{
|
|
3110 |
return testAttribute(Qt::WA_AcceptDrops);
|
|
3111 |
}
|
|
3112 |
|
|
3113 |
void QWidget::setAcceptDrops(bool on)
|
|
3114 |
{
|
|
3115 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_AcceptDrops, on);
|
|
3116 |
|
|
3117 |
}
|
|
3118 |
|
|
3119 |
/*!
|
|
3120 |
\fn void QWidget::enabledChange(bool)
|
|
3121 |
|
|
3122 |
\internal
|
|
3123 |
\obsolete
|
|
3124 |
*/
|
|
3125 |
|
|
3126 |
/*!
|
|
3127 |
\fn void QWidget::paletteChange(const QPalette &)
|
|
3128 |
|
|
3129 |
\internal
|
|
3130 |
\obsolete
|
|
3131 |
*/
|
|
3132 |
|
|
3133 |
/*!
|
|
3134 |
\fn void QWidget::fontChange(const QFont &)
|
|
3135 |
|
|
3136 |
\internal
|
|
3137 |
\obsolete
|
|
3138 |
*/
|
|
3139 |
|
|
3140 |
/*!
|
|
3141 |
\fn void QWidget::windowActivationChange(bool)
|
|
3142 |
|
|
3143 |
\internal
|
|
3144 |
\obsolete
|
|
3145 |
*/
|
|
3146 |
|
|
3147 |
/*!
|
|
3148 |
\fn void QWidget::languageChange()
|
|
3149 |
|
|
3150 |
\obsolete
|
|
3151 |
*/
|
|
3152 |
|
|
3153 |
/*!
|
|
3154 |
\fn void QWidget::styleChange(QStyle& style)
|
|
3155 |
|
|
3156 |
\internal
|
|
3157 |
\obsolete
|
|
3158 |
*/
|
|
3159 |
|
|
3160 |
/*!
|
|
3161 |
Disables widget input events if \a disable is true; otherwise
|
|
3162 |
enables input events.
|
|
3163 |
|
|
3164 |
See the \l enabled documentation for more information.
|
|
3165 |
|
|
3166 |
\sa isEnabledTo(), QKeyEvent, QMouseEvent, changeEvent()
|
|
3167 |
*/
|
|
3168 |
void QWidget::setDisabled(bool disable)
|
|
3169 |
{
|
|
3170 |
setEnabled(!disable);
|
|
3171 |
}
|
|
3172 |
|
|
3173 |
/*!
|
|
3174 |
\property QWidget::frameGeometry
|
|
3175 |
\brief geometry of the widget relative to its parent including any
|
|
3176 |
window frame
|
|
3177 |
|
|
3178 |
See the \l{Window Geometry} documentation for an overview of geometry
|
|
3179 |
issues with windows.
|
|
3180 |
|
|
3181 |
By default, this property contains a value that depends on the user's
|
|
3182 |
platform and screen geometry.
|
|
3183 |
|
|
3184 |
\sa geometry() x() y() pos()
|
|
3185 |
*/
|
|
3186 |
QRect QWidget::frameGeometry() const
|
|
3187 |
{
|
|
3188 |
Q_D(const QWidget);
|
|
3189 |
if (isWindow() && ! (windowType() == Qt::Popup)) {
|
|
3190 |
QRect fs = d->frameStrut();
|
|
3191 |
return QRect(data->crect.x() - fs.left(),
|
|
3192 |
data->crect.y() - fs.top(),
|
|
3193 |
data->crect.width() + fs.left() + fs.right(),
|
|
3194 |
data->crect.height() + fs.top() + fs.bottom());
|
|
3195 |
}
|
|
3196 |
return data->crect;
|
|
3197 |
}
|
|
3198 |
|
|
3199 |
/*!
|
|
3200 |
\property QWidget::x
|
|
3201 |
|
|
3202 |
\brief the x coordinate of the widget relative to its parent including
|
|
3203 |
any window frame
|
|
3204 |
|
|
3205 |
See the \l{Window Geometry} documentation for an overview of geometry
|
|
3206 |
issues with windows.
|
|
3207 |
|
|
3208 |
By default, this property has a value of 0.
|
|
3209 |
|
|
3210 |
\sa frameGeometry, y, pos
|
|
3211 |
*/
|
|
3212 |
int QWidget::x() const
|
|
3213 |
{
|
|
3214 |
Q_D(const QWidget);
|
|
3215 |
if (isWindow() && ! (windowType() == Qt::Popup))
|
|
3216 |
return data->crect.x() - d->frameStrut().left();
|
|
3217 |
return data->crect.x();
|
|
3218 |
}
|
|
3219 |
|
|
3220 |
/*!
|
|
3221 |
\property QWidget::y
|
|
3222 |
\brief the y coordinate of the widget relative to its parent and
|
|
3223 |
including any window frame
|
|
3224 |
|
|
3225 |
See the \l{Window Geometry} documentation for an overview of geometry
|
|
3226 |
issues with windows.
|
|
3227 |
|
|
3228 |
By default, this property has a value of 0.
|
|
3229 |
|
|
3230 |
\sa frameGeometry, x, pos
|
|
3231 |
*/
|
|
3232 |
int QWidget::y() const
|
|
3233 |
{
|
|
3234 |
Q_D(const QWidget);
|
|
3235 |
if (isWindow() && ! (windowType() == Qt::Popup))
|
|
3236 |
return data->crect.y() - d->frameStrut().top();
|
|
3237 |
return data->crect.y();
|
|
3238 |
}
|
|
3239 |
|
|
3240 |
/*!
|
|
3241 |
\property QWidget::pos
|
|
3242 |
\brief the position of the widget within its parent widget
|
|
3243 |
|
|
3244 |
If the widget is a window, the position is that of the widget on
|
|
3245 |
the desktop, including its frame.
|
|
3246 |
|
|
3247 |
When changing the position, the widget, if visible, receives a
|
|
3248 |
move event (moveEvent()) immediately. If the widget is not
|
|
3249 |
currently visible, it is guaranteed to receive an event before it
|
|
3250 |
is shown.
|
|
3251 |
|
|
3252 |
By default, this property contains a position that refers to the
|
|
3253 |
origin.
|
|
3254 |
|
|
3255 |
\warning Calling move() or setGeometry() inside moveEvent() can
|
|
3256 |
lead to infinite recursion.
|
|
3257 |
|
|
3258 |
See the \l{Window Geometry} documentation for an overview of geometry
|
|
3259 |
issues with windows.
|
|
3260 |
|
|
3261 |
\sa frameGeometry, size x(), y()
|
|
3262 |
*/
|
|
3263 |
QPoint QWidget::pos() const
|
|
3264 |
{
|
|
3265 |
Q_D(const QWidget);
|
|
3266 |
if (isWindow() && ! (windowType() == Qt::Popup)) {
|
|
3267 |
QRect fs = d->frameStrut();
|
|
3268 |
return QPoint(data->crect.x() - fs.left(), data->crect.y() - fs.top());
|
|
3269 |
}
|
|
3270 |
return data->crect.topLeft();
|
|
3271 |
}
|
|
3272 |
|
|
3273 |
/*!
|
|
3274 |
\property QWidget::geometry
|
|
3275 |
\brief the geometry of the widget relative to its parent and
|
|
3276 |
excluding the window frame
|
|
3277 |
|
|
3278 |
When changing the geometry, the widget, if visible, receives a
|
|
3279 |
move event (moveEvent()) and/or a resize event (resizeEvent())
|
|
3280 |
immediately. If the widget is not currently visible, it is
|
|
3281 |
guaranteed to receive appropriate events before it is shown.
|
|
3282 |
|
|
3283 |
The size component is adjusted if it lies outside the range
|
|
3284 |
defined by minimumSize() and maximumSize().
|
|
3285 |
|
|
3286 |
\warning Calling setGeometry() inside resizeEvent() or moveEvent()
|
|
3287 |
can lead to infinite recursion.
|
|
3288 |
|
|
3289 |
See the \l{Window Geometry} documentation for an overview of geometry
|
|
3290 |
issues with windows.
|
|
3291 |
|
|
3292 |
By default, this property contains a value that depends on the user's
|
|
3293 |
platform and screen geometry.
|
|
3294 |
|
|
3295 |
\sa frameGeometry(), rect(), move(), resize(), moveEvent(),
|
|
3296 |
resizeEvent(), minimumSize(), maximumSize()
|
|
3297 |
*/
|
|
3298 |
|
|
3299 |
/*!
|
|
3300 |
\property QWidget::normalGeometry
|
|
3301 |
|
|
3302 |
\brief the geometry of the widget as it will appear when shown as
|
|
3303 |
a normal (not maximized or full screen) top-level widget
|
|
3304 |
|
|
3305 |
For child widgets this property always holds an empty rectangle.
|
|
3306 |
|
|
3307 |
By default, this property contains an empty rectangle.
|
|
3308 |
|
|
3309 |
\sa QWidget::windowState(), QWidget::geometry
|
|
3310 |
*/
|
|
3311 |
|
|
3312 |
/*!
|
|
3313 |
\property QWidget::size
|
|
3314 |
\brief the size of the widget excluding any window frame
|
|
3315 |
|
|
3316 |
If the widget is visible when it is being resized, it receives a resize event
|
|
3317 |
(resizeEvent()) immediately. If the widget is not currently
|
|
3318 |
visible, it is guaranteed to receive an event before it is shown.
|
|
3319 |
|
|
3320 |
The size is adjusted if it lies outside the range defined by
|
|
3321 |
minimumSize() and maximumSize().
|
|
3322 |
|
|
3323 |
By default, this property contains a value that depends on the user's
|
|
3324 |
platform and screen geometry.
|
|
3325 |
|
|
3326 |
\warning Calling resize() or setGeometry() inside resizeEvent() can
|
|
3327 |
lead to infinite recursion.
|
|
3328 |
|
|
3329 |
\note Setting the size to \c{QSize(0, 0)} will cause the widget to not
|
|
3330 |
appear on screen. This also applies to windows.
|
|
3331 |
|
|
3332 |
\sa pos, geometry, minimumSize, maximumSize, resizeEvent()
|
|
3333 |
*/
|
|
3334 |
|
|
3335 |
/*!
|
|
3336 |
\property QWidget::width
|
|
3337 |
\brief the width of the widget excluding any window frame
|
|
3338 |
|
|
3339 |
See the \l{Window Geometry} documentation for an overview of geometry
|
|
3340 |
issues with windows.
|
|
3341 |
|
|
3342 |
\note Do not use this function to find the width of a screen on
|
|
3343 |
a \l{QDesktopWidget}{multiple screen desktop}. Read
|
|
3344 |
\l{QDesktopWidget#Screen Geometry}{this note} for details.
|
|
3345 |
|
|
3346 |
By default, this property contains a value that depends on the user's
|
|
3347 |
platform and screen geometry.
|
|
3348 |
|
|
3349 |
\sa geometry, height, size
|
|
3350 |
*/
|
|
3351 |
|
|
3352 |
/*!
|
|
3353 |
\property QWidget::height
|
|
3354 |
\brief the height of the widget excluding any window frame
|
|
3355 |
|
|
3356 |
See the \l{Window Geometry} documentation for an overview of geometry
|
|
3357 |
issues with windows.
|
|
3358 |
|
|
3359 |
\note Do not use this function to find the height of a screen
|
|
3360 |
on a \l{QDesktopWidget}{multiple screen desktop}. Read
|
|
3361 |
\l{QDesktopWidget#Screen Geometry}{this note} for details.
|
|
3362 |
|
|
3363 |
By default, this property contains a value that depends on the user's
|
|
3364 |
platform and screen geometry.
|
|
3365 |
|
|
3366 |
\sa geometry, width, size
|
|
3367 |
*/
|
|
3368 |
|
|
3369 |
/*!
|
|
3370 |
\property QWidget::rect
|
|
3371 |
\brief the internal geometry of the widget excluding any window
|
|
3372 |
frame
|
|
3373 |
|
|
3374 |
The rect property equals QRect(0, 0, width(), height()).
|
|
3375 |
|
|
3376 |
See the \l{Window Geometry} documentation for an overview of geometry
|
|
3377 |
issues with windows.
|
|
3378 |
|
|
3379 |
By default, this property contains a value that depends on the user's
|
|
3380 |
platform and screen geometry.
|
|
3381 |
|
|
3382 |
\sa size
|
|
3383 |
*/
|
|
3384 |
|
|
3385 |
|
|
3386 |
QRect QWidget::normalGeometry() const
|
|
3387 |
{
|
|
3388 |
Q_D(const QWidget);
|
|
3389 |
if (!d->extra || !d->extra->topextra)
|
|
3390 |
return QRect();
|
|
3391 |
|
|
3392 |
if (!isMaximized() && !isFullScreen())
|
|
3393 |
return geometry();
|
|
3394 |
|
|
3395 |
return d->topData()->normalGeometry;
|
|
3396 |
}
|
|
3397 |
|
|
3398 |
|
|
3399 |
/*!
|
|
3400 |
\property QWidget::childrenRect
|
|
3401 |
\brief the bounding rectangle of the widget's children
|
|
3402 |
|
|
3403 |
Hidden children are excluded.
|
|
3404 |
|
|
3405 |
By default, for a widget with no children, this property contains a
|
|
3406 |
rectangle with zero width and height located at the origin.
|
|
3407 |
|
|
3408 |
\sa childrenRegion() geometry()
|
|
3409 |
*/
|
|
3410 |
|
|
3411 |
QRect QWidget::childrenRect() const
|
|
3412 |
{
|
|
3413 |
Q_D(const QWidget);
|
|
3414 |
QRect r(0, 0, 0, 0);
|
|
3415 |
for (int i = 0; i < d->children.size(); ++i) {
|
|
3416 |
QWidget *w = qobject_cast<QWidget *>(d->children.at(i));
|
|
3417 |
if (w && !w->isWindow() && !w->isHidden())
|
|
3418 |
r |= w->geometry();
|
|
3419 |
}
|
|
3420 |
return r;
|
|
3421 |
}
|
|
3422 |
|
|
3423 |
/*!
|
|
3424 |
\property QWidget::childrenRegion
|
|
3425 |
\brief the combined region occupied by the widget's children
|
|
3426 |
|
|
3427 |
Hidden children are excluded.
|
|
3428 |
|
|
3429 |
By default, for a widget with no children, this property contains an
|
|
3430 |
empty region.
|
|
3431 |
|
|
3432 |
\sa childrenRect() geometry() mask()
|
|
3433 |
*/
|
|
3434 |
|
|
3435 |
QRegion QWidget::childrenRegion() const
|
|
3436 |
{
|
|
3437 |
Q_D(const QWidget);
|
|
3438 |
QRegion r;
|
|
3439 |
for (int i = 0; i < d->children.size(); ++i) {
|
|
3440 |
QWidget *w = qobject_cast<QWidget *>(d->children.at(i));
|
|
3441 |
if (w && !w->isWindow() && !w->isHidden()) {
|
|
3442 |
QRegion mask = w->mask();
|
|
3443 |
if (mask.isEmpty())
|
|
3444 |
r |= w->geometry();
|
|
3445 |
else
|
|
3446 |
r |= mask.translated(w->pos());
|
|
3447 |
}
|
|
3448 |
}
|
|
3449 |
return r;
|
|
3450 |
}
|
|
3451 |
|
|
3452 |
|
|
3453 |
/*!
|
|
3454 |
\property QWidget::minimumSize
|
|
3455 |
\brief the widget's minimum size
|
|
3456 |
|
|
3457 |
The widget cannot be resized to a smaller size than the minimum
|
|
3458 |
widget size. The widget's size is forced to the minimum size if
|
|
3459 |
the current size is smaller.
|
|
3460 |
|
|
3461 |
The minimum size set by this function will override the minimum size
|
|
3462 |
defined by QLayout. In order to unset the minimum size, use a
|
|
3463 |
value of \c{QSize(0, 0)}.
|
|
3464 |
|
|
3465 |
By default, this property contains a size with zero width and height.
|
|
3466 |
|
|
3467 |
\sa minimumWidth, minimumHeight, maximumSize, sizeIncrement
|
|
3468 |
*/
|
|
3469 |
|
|
3470 |
QSize QWidget::minimumSize() const
|
|
3471 |
{
|
|
3472 |
Q_D(const QWidget);
|
|
3473 |
return d->extra ? QSize(d->extra->minw, d->extra->minh) : QSize(0, 0);
|
|
3474 |
}
|
|
3475 |
|
|
3476 |
/*!
|
|
3477 |
\property QWidget::maximumSize
|
|
3478 |
\brief the widget's maximum size in pixels
|
|
3479 |
|
|
3480 |
The widget cannot be resized to a larger size than the maximum
|
|
3481 |
widget size.
|
|
3482 |
|
|
3483 |
By default, this property contains a size in which both width and height
|
|
3484 |
have values of 16777215.
|
|
3485 |
|
|
3486 |
\note The definition of the \c QWIDGETSIZE_MAX macro limits the maximum size
|
|
3487 |
of widgets.
|
|
3488 |
|
|
3489 |
\sa maximumWidth, maximumHeight, minimumSize, sizeIncrement
|
|
3490 |
*/
|
|
3491 |
|
|
3492 |
QSize QWidget::maximumSize() const
|
|
3493 |
{
|
|
3494 |
Q_D(const QWidget);
|
|
3495 |
return d->extra ? QSize(d->extra->maxw, d->extra->maxh)
|
|
3496 |
: QSize(QWIDGETSIZE_MAX, QWIDGETSIZE_MAX);
|
|
3497 |
}
|
|
3498 |
|
|
3499 |
|
|
3500 |
/*!
|
|
3501 |
\property QWidget::minimumWidth
|
|
3502 |
\brief the widget's minimum width in pixels
|
|
3503 |
|
|
3504 |
This property corresponds to the width held by the \l minimumSize property.
|
|
3505 |
|
|
3506 |
By default, this property has a value of 0.
|
|
3507 |
|
|
3508 |
\sa minimumSize, minimumHeight
|
|
3509 |
*/
|
|
3510 |
|
|
3511 |
/*!
|
|
3512 |
\property QWidget::minimumHeight
|
|
3513 |
\brief the widget's minimum height in pixels
|
|
3514 |
|
|
3515 |
This property corresponds to the height held by the \l minimumSize property.
|
|
3516 |
|
|
3517 |
By default, this property has a value of 0.
|
|
3518 |
|
|
3519 |
\sa minimumSize, minimumWidth
|
|
3520 |
*/
|
|
3521 |
|
|
3522 |
/*!
|
|
3523 |
\property QWidget::maximumWidth
|
|
3524 |
\brief the widget's maximum width in pixels
|
|
3525 |
|
|
3526 |
This property corresponds to the width held by the \l maximumSize property.
|
|
3527 |
|
|
3528 |
By default, this property contains a value of 16777215.
|
|
3529 |
|
|
3530 |
\note The definition of the \c QWIDGETSIZE_MAX macro limits the maximum size
|
|
3531 |
of widgets.
|
|
3532 |
|
|
3533 |
\sa maximumSize, maximumHeight
|
|
3534 |
*/
|
|
3535 |
|
|
3536 |
/*!
|
|
3537 |
\property QWidget::maximumHeight
|
|
3538 |
\brief the widget's maximum height in pixels
|
|
3539 |
|
|
3540 |
This property corresponds to the height held by the \l maximumSize property.
|
|
3541 |
|
|
3542 |
By default, this property contains a value of 16777215.
|
|
3543 |
|
|
3544 |
\note The definition of the \c QWIDGETSIZE_MAX macro limits the maximum size
|
|
3545 |
of widgets.
|
|
3546 |
|
|
3547 |
\sa maximumSize, maximumWidth
|
|
3548 |
*/
|
|
3549 |
|
|
3550 |
/*!
|
|
3551 |
\property QWidget::sizeIncrement
|
|
3552 |
\brief the size increment of the widget
|
|
3553 |
|
|
3554 |
When the user resizes the window, the size will move in steps of
|
|
3555 |
sizeIncrement().width() pixels horizontally and
|
|
3556 |
sizeIncrement.height() pixels vertically, with baseSize() as the
|
|
3557 |
basis. Preferred widget sizes are for non-negative integers \e i
|
|
3558 |
and \e j:
|
|
3559 |
\snippet doc/src/snippets/code/src_gui_kernel_qwidget.cpp 2
|
|
3560 |
|
|
3561 |
Note that while you can set the size increment for all widgets, it
|
|
3562 |
only affects windows.
|
|
3563 |
|
|
3564 |
By default, this property contains a size with zero width and height.
|
|
3565 |
|
|
3566 |
\warning The size increment has no effect under Windows, and may
|
|
3567 |
be disregarded by the window manager on X11.
|
|
3568 |
|
|
3569 |
\sa size, minimumSize, maximumSize
|
|
3570 |
*/
|
|
3571 |
QSize QWidget::sizeIncrement() const
|
|
3572 |
{
|
|
3573 |
Q_D(const QWidget);
|
|
3574 |
return (d->extra && d->extra->topextra)
|
|
3575 |
? QSize(d->extra->topextra->incw, d->extra->topextra->inch)
|
|
3576 |
: QSize(0, 0);
|
|
3577 |
}
|
|
3578 |
|
|
3579 |
/*!
|
|
3580 |
\property QWidget::baseSize
|
|
3581 |
\brief the base size of the widget
|
|
3582 |
|
|
3583 |
The base size is used to calculate a proper widget size if the
|
|
3584 |
widget defines sizeIncrement().
|
|
3585 |
|
|
3586 |
By default, for a newly-created widget, this property contains a size with
|
|
3587 |
zero width and height.
|
|
3588 |
|
|
3589 |
\sa setSizeIncrement()
|
|
3590 |
*/
|
|
3591 |
|
|
3592 |
QSize QWidget::baseSize() const
|
|
3593 |
{
|
|
3594 |
Q_D(const QWidget);
|
|
3595 |
return (d->extra != 0 && d->extra->topextra != 0)
|
|
3596 |
? QSize(d->extra->topextra->basew, d->extra->topextra->baseh)
|
|
3597 |
: QSize(0, 0);
|
|
3598 |
}
|
|
3599 |
|
|
3600 |
bool QWidgetPrivate::setMinimumSize_helper(int &minw, int &minh)
|
|
3601 |
{
|
|
3602 |
Q_Q(QWidget);
|
|
3603 |
|
|
3604 |
#ifdef Q_WS_QWS
|
|
3605 |
if (q->isWindow()) {
|
|
3606 |
const QRect maxWindowRect = QApplication::desktop()->availableGeometry(QApplication::desktop()->screenNumber(q));
|
|
3607 |
if (!maxWindowRect.isEmpty()) {
|
|
3608 |
// ### This is really just a work-around. Layout shouldn't be
|
|
3609 |
// asking for minimum sizes bigger than the screen.
|
|
3610 |
if (minw > maxWindowRect.width())
|
|
3611 |
minw = maxWindowRect.width();
|
|
3612 |
if (minh > maxWindowRect.height())
|
|
3613 |
minh = maxWindowRect.height();
|
|
3614 |
}
|
|
3615 |
}
|
|
3616 |
#endif
|
|
3617 |
int mw = minw, mh = minh;
|
|
3618 |
if (mw == QWIDGETSIZE_MAX)
|
|
3619 |
mw = 0;
|
|
3620 |
if (mh == QWIDGETSIZE_MAX)
|
|
3621 |
mh = 0;
|
|
3622 |
if (minw > QWIDGETSIZE_MAX || minh > QWIDGETSIZE_MAX) {
|
|
3623 |
qWarning("QWidget::setMinimumSize: (%s/%s) "
|
|
3624 |
"The largest allowed size is (%d,%d)",
|
|
3625 |
q->objectName().toLocal8Bit().data(), q->metaObject()->className(), QWIDGETSIZE_MAX,
|
|
3626 |
QWIDGETSIZE_MAX);
|
|
3627 |
minw = mw = qMin<int>(minw, QWIDGETSIZE_MAX);
|
|
3628 |
minh = mh = qMin<int>(minh, QWIDGETSIZE_MAX);
|
|
3629 |
}
|
|
3630 |
if (minw < 0 || minh < 0) {
|
|
3631 |
qWarning("QWidget::setMinimumSize: (%s/%s) Negative sizes (%d,%d) "
|
|
3632 |
"are not possible",
|
|
3633 |
q->objectName().toLocal8Bit().data(), q->metaObject()->className(), minw, minh);
|
|
3634 |
minw = mw = qMax(minw, 0);
|
|
3635 |
minh = mh = qMax(minh, 0);
|
|
3636 |
}
|
|
3637 |
createExtra();
|
|
3638 |
if (extra->minw == mw && extra->minh == mh)
|
|
3639 |
return false;
|
|
3640 |
extra->minw = mw;
|
|
3641 |
extra->minh = mh;
|
|
3642 |
extra->explicitMinSize = (mw ? Qt::Horizontal : 0) | (mh ? Qt::Vertical : 0);
|
|
3643 |
return true;
|
|
3644 |
}
|
|
3645 |
|
|
3646 |
/*!
|
|
3647 |
\overload
|
|
3648 |
|
|
3649 |
This function corresponds to setMinimumSize(QSize(minw, minh)).
|
|
3650 |
Sets the minimum width to \a minw and the minimum height to \a
|
|
3651 |
minh.
|
|
3652 |
*/
|
|
3653 |
|
|
3654 |
void QWidget::setMinimumSize(int minw, int minh)
|
|
3655 |
{
|
|
3656 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
3657 |
if (!d->setMinimumSize_helper(minw, minh))
|
|
3658 |
return;
|
|
3659 |
|
|
3660 |
if (isWindow())
|
|
3661 |
d->setConstraints_sys();
|
|
3662 |
if (minw > width() || minh > height()) {
|
|
3663 |
bool resized = testAttribute(Qt::WA_Resized);
|
|
3664 |
bool maximized = isMaximized();
|
|
3665 |
resize(qMax(minw,width()), qMax(minh,height()));
|
|
3666 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_Resized, resized); //not a user resize
|
|
3667 |
if (maximized)
|
|
3668 |
data->window_state = data->window_state | Qt::WindowMaximized;
|
|
3669 |
}
|
|
3670 |
#ifndef QT_NO_GRAPHICSVIEW
|
|
3671 |
if (d->extra) {
|
|
3672 |
if (d->extra->proxyWidget)
|
|
3673 |
d->extra->proxyWidget->setMinimumSize(minw, minh);
|
|
3674 |
}
|
|
3675 |
#endif
|
|
3676 |
d->updateGeometry_helper(d->extra->minw == d->extra->maxw && d->extra->minh == d->extra->maxh);
|
|
3677 |
}
|
|
3678 |
|
|
3679 |
bool QWidgetPrivate::setMaximumSize_helper(int &maxw, int &maxh)
|
|
3680 |
{
|
|
3681 |
Q_Q(QWidget);
|
|
3682 |
if (maxw > QWIDGETSIZE_MAX || maxh > QWIDGETSIZE_MAX) {
|
|
3683 |
qWarning("QWidget::setMaximumSize: (%s/%s) "
|
|
3684 |
"The largest allowed size is (%d,%d)",
|
|
3685 |
q->objectName().toLocal8Bit().data(), q->metaObject()->className(), QWIDGETSIZE_MAX,
|
|
3686 |
QWIDGETSIZE_MAX);
|
|
3687 |
maxw = qMin<int>(maxw, QWIDGETSIZE_MAX);
|
|
3688 |
maxh = qMin<int>(maxh, QWIDGETSIZE_MAX);
|
|
3689 |
}
|
|
3690 |
if (maxw < 0 || maxh < 0) {
|
|
3691 |
qWarning("QWidget::setMaximumSize: (%s/%s) Negative sizes (%d,%d) "
|
|
3692 |
"are not possible",
|
|
3693 |
q->objectName().toLocal8Bit().data(), q->metaObject()->className(), maxw, maxh);
|
|
3694 |
maxw = qMax(maxw, 0);
|
|
3695 |
maxh = qMax(maxh, 0);
|
|
3696 |
}
|
|
3697 |
createExtra();
|
|
3698 |
if (extra->maxw == maxw && extra->maxh == maxh)
|
|
3699 |
return false;
|
|
3700 |
extra->maxw = maxw;
|
|
3701 |
extra->maxh = maxh;
|
|
3702 |
extra->explicitMaxSize = (maxw != QWIDGETSIZE_MAX ? Qt::Horizontal : 0) |
|
|
3703 |
(maxh != QWIDGETSIZE_MAX ? Qt::Vertical : 0);
|
|
3704 |
return true;
|
|
3705 |
}
|
|
3706 |
|
|
3707 |
/*!
|
|
3708 |
\overload
|
|
3709 |
|
|
3710 |
This function corresponds to setMaximumSize(QSize(\a maxw, \a
|
|
3711 |
maxh)). Sets the maximum width to \a maxw and the maximum height
|
|
3712 |
to \a maxh.
|
|
3713 |
*/
|
|
3714 |
void QWidget::setMaximumSize(int maxw, int maxh)
|
|
3715 |
{
|
|
3716 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
3717 |
if (!d->setMaximumSize_helper(maxw, maxh))
|
|
3718 |
return;
|
|
3719 |
|
|
3720 |
if (isWindow())
|
|
3721 |
d->setConstraints_sys();
|
|
3722 |
if (maxw < width() || maxh < height()) {
|
|
3723 |
bool resized = testAttribute(Qt::WA_Resized);
|
|
3724 |
resize(qMin(maxw,width()), qMin(maxh,height()));
|
|
3725 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_Resized, resized); //not a user resize
|
|
3726 |
}
|
|
3727 |
|
|
3728 |
#ifndef QT_NO_GRAPHICSVIEW
|
|
3729 |
if (d->extra) {
|
|
3730 |
if (d->extra->proxyWidget)
|
|
3731 |
d->extra->proxyWidget->setMaximumSize(maxw, maxh);
|
|
3732 |
}
|
|
3733 |
#endif
|
|
3734 |
|
|
3735 |
d->updateGeometry_helper(d->extra->minw == d->extra->maxw && d->extra->minh == d->extra->maxh);
|
|
3736 |
}
|
|
3737 |
|
|
3738 |
/*!
|
|
3739 |
\overload
|
|
3740 |
|
|
3741 |
Sets the x (width) size increment to \a w and the y (height) size
|
|
3742 |
increment to \a h.
|
|
3743 |
*/
|
|
3744 |
void QWidget::setSizeIncrement(int w, int h)
|
|
3745 |
{
|
|
3746 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
3747 |
d->createTLExtra();
|
|
3748 |
QTLWExtra* x = d->topData();
|
|
3749 |
if (x->incw == w && x->inch == h)
|
|
3750 |
return;
|
|
3751 |
x->incw = w;
|
|
3752 |
x->inch = h;
|
|
3753 |
if (isWindow())
|
|
3754 |
d->setConstraints_sys();
|
|
3755 |
}
|
|
3756 |
|
|
3757 |
/*!
|
|
3758 |
\overload
|
|
3759 |
|
|
3760 |
This corresponds to setBaseSize(QSize(\a basew, \a baseh)). Sets
|
|
3761 |
the widgets base size to width \a basew and height \a baseh.
|
|
3762 |
*/
|
|
3763 |
void QWidget::setBaseSize(int basew, int baseh)
|
|
3764 |
{
|
|
3765 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
3766 |
d->createTLExtra();
|
|
3767 |
QTLWExtra* x = d->topData();
|
|
3768 |
if (x->basew == basew && x->baseh == baseh)
|
|
3769 |
return;
|
|
3770 |
x->basew = basew;
|
|
3771 |
x->baseh = baseh;
|
|
3772 |
if (isWindow())
|
|
3773 |
d->setConstraints_sys();
|
|
3774 |
}
|
|
3775 |
|
|
3776 |
/*!
|
|
3777 |
Sets both the minimum and maximum sizes of the widget to \a s,
|
|
3778 |
thereby preventing it from ever growing or shrinking.
|
|
3779 |
|
|
3780 |
This will override the default size constraints set by QLayout.
|
|
3781 |
|
|
3782 |
To remove constraints, set the size to QWIDGETSIZE_MAX.
|
|
3783 |
|
|
3784 |
Alternatively, if you want the widget to have a
|
|
3785 |
fixed size based on its contents, you can call
|
|
3786 |
QLayout::setSizeConstraint(QLayout::SetFixedSize);
|
|
3787 |
|
|
3788 |
\sa maximumSize, minimumSize
|
|
3789 |
*/
|
|
3790 |
|
|
3791 |
void QWidget::setFixedSize(const QSize & s)
|
|
3792 |
{
|
|
3793 |
setFixedSize(s.width(), s.height());
|
|
3794 |
}
|
|
3795 |
|
|
3796 |
|
|
3797 |
/*!
|
|
3798 |
\fn void QWidget::setFixedSize(int w, int h)
|
|
3799 |
\overload
|
|
3800 |
|
|
3801 |
Sets the width of the widget to \a w and the height to \a h.
|
|
3802 |
*/
|
|
3803 |
|
|
3804 |
void QWidget::setFixedSize(int w, int h)
|
|
3805 |
{
|
|
3806 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
3807 |
#ifdef Q_WS_QWS
|
|
3808 |
// temporary fix for 4.3.x.
|
|
3809 |
// Should move the embedded spesific contraints in setMinimumSize_helper into QLayout
|
|
3810 |
int tmpW = w;
|
|
3811 |
int tmpH = h;
|
|
3812 |
bool minSizeSet = d->setMinimumSize_helper(tmpW, tmpH);
|
|
3813 |
#else
|
|
3814 |
bool minSizeSet = d->setMinimumSize_helper(w, h);
|
|
3815 |
#endif
|
|
3816 |
bool maxSizeSet = d->setMaximumSize_helper(w, h);
|
|
3817 |
if (!minSizeSet && !maxSizeSet)
|
|
3818 |
return;
|
|
3819 |
|
|
3820 |
if (isWindow())
|
|
3821 |
d->setConstraints_sys();
|
|
3822 |
else
|
|
3823 |
d->updateGeometry_helper(true);
|
|
3824 |
|
|
3825 |
if (w != QWIDGETSIZE_MAX || h != QWIDGETSIZE_MAX)
|
|
3826 |
resize(w, h);
|
|
3827 |
}
|
|
3828 |
|
|
3829 |
void QWidget::setMinimumWidth(int w)
|
|
3830 |
{
|
|
3831 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
3832 |
d->createExtra();
|
|
3833 |
uint expl = d->extra->explicitMinSize | (w ? Qt::Horizontal : 0);
|
|
3834 |
setMinimumSize(w, minimumSize().height());
|
|
3835 |
d->extra->explicitMinSize = expl;
|
|
3836 |
}
|
|
3837 |
|
|
3838 |
void QWidget::setMinimumHeight(int h)
|
|
3839 |
{
|
|
3840 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
3841 |
d->createExtra();
|
|
3842 |
uint expl = d->extra->explicitMinSize | (h ? Qt::Vertical : 0);
|
|
3843 |
setMinimumSize(minimumSize().width(), h);
|
|
3844 |
d->extra->explicitMinSize = expl;
|
|
3845 |
}
|
|
3846 |
|
|
3847 |
void QWidget::setMaximumWidth(int w)
|
|
3848 |
{
|
|
3849 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
3850 |
d->createExtra();
|
|
3851 |
uint expl = d->extra->explicitMaxSize | (w == QWIDGETSIZE_MAX ? 0 : Qt::Horizontal);
|
|
3852 |
setMaximumSize(w, maximumSize().height());
|
|
3853 |
d->extra->explicitMaxSize = expl;
|
|
3854 |
}
|
|
3855 |
|
|
3856 |
void QWidget::setMaximumHeight(int h)
|
|
3857 |
{
|
|
3858 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
3859 |
d->createExtra();
|
|
3860 |
uint expl = d->extra->explicitMaxSize | (h == QWIDGETSIZE_MAX ? 0 : Qt::Vertical);
|
|
3861 |
setMaximumSize(maximumSize().width(), h);
|
|
3862 |
d->extra->explicitMaxSize = expl;
|
|
3863 |
}
|
|
3864 |
|
|
3865 |
/*!
|
|
3866 |
Sets both the minimum and maximum width of the widget to \a w
|
|
3867 |
without changing the heights. Provided for convenience.
|
|
3868 |
|
|
3869 |
\sa sizeHint() minimumSize() maximumSize() setFixedSize()
|
|
3870 |
*/
|
|
3871 |
|
|
3872 |
void QWidget::setFixedWidth(int w)
|
|
3873 |
{
|
|
3874 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
3875 |
d->createExtra();
|
|
3876 |
uint explMin = d->extra->explicitMinSize | Qt::Horizontal;
|
|
3877 |
uint explMax = d->extra->explicitMaxSize | Qt::Horizontal;
|
|
3878 |
setMinimumSize(w, minimumSize().height());
|
|
3879 |
setMaximumSize(w, maximumSize().height());
|
|
3880 |
d->extra->explicitMinSize = explMin;
|
|
3881 |
d->extra->explicitMaxSize = explMax;
|
|
3882 |
}
|
|
3883 |
|
|
3884 |
|
|
3885 |
/*!
|
|
3886 |
Sets both the minimum and maximum heights of the widget to \a h
|
|
3887 |
without changing the widths. Provided for convenience.
|
|
3888 |
|
|
3889 |
\sa sizeHint() minimumSize() maximumSize() setFixedSize()
|
|
3890 |
*/
|
|
3891 |
|
|
3892 |
void QWidget::setFixedHeight(int h)
|
|
3893 |
{
|
|
3894 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
3895 |
d->createExtra();
|
|
3896 |
uint explMin = d->extra->explicitMinSize | Qt::Vertical;
|
|
3897 |
uint explMax = d->extra->explicitMaxSize | Qt::Vertical;
|
|
3898 |
setMinimumSize(minimumSize().width(), h);
|
|
3899 |
setMaximumSize(maximumSize().width(), h);
|
|
3900 |
d->extra->explicitMinSize = explMin;
|
|
3901 |
d->extra->explicitMaxSize = explMax;
|
|
3902 |
}
|
|
3903 |
|
|
3904 |
|
|
3905 |
/*!
|
|
3906 |
Translates the widget coordinate \a pos to the coordinate system
|
|
3907 |
of \a parent. The \a parent must not be 0 and must be a parent
|
|
3908 |
of the calling widget.
|
|
3909 |
|
|
3910 |
\sa mapFrom() mapToParent() mapToGlobal() underMouse()
|
|
3911 |
*/
|
|
3912 |
|
|
3913 |
QPoint QWidget::mapTo(QWidget * parent, const QPoint & pos) const
|
|
3914 |
{
|
|
3915 |
QPoint p = pos;
|
|
3916 |
if (parent) {
|
|
3917 |
const QWidget * w = this;
|
|
3918 |
while (w != parent) {
|
|
3919 |
Q_ASSERT_X(w, "QWidget::mapTo(QWidget *parent, const QPoint &pos)",
|
|
3920 |
"parent must be in parent hierarchy");
|
|
3921 |
p = w->mapToParent(p);
|
|
3922 |
w = w->parentWidget();
|
|
3923 |
}
|
|
3924 |
}
|
|
3925 |
return p;
|
|
3926 |
}
|
|
3927 |
|
|
3928 |
|
|
3929 |
/*!
|
|
3930 |
Translates the widget coordinate \a pos from the coordinate system
|
|
3931 |
of \a parent to this widget's coordinate system. The \a parent
|
|
3932 |
must not be 0 and must be a parent of the calling widget.
|
|
3933 |
|
|
3934 |
\sa mapTo() mapFromParent() mapFromGlobal() underMouse()
|
|
3935 |
*/
|
|
3936 |
|
|
3937 |
QPoint QWidget::mapFrom(QWidget * parent, const QPoint & pos) const
|
|
3938 |
{
|
|
3939 |
QPoint p(pos);
|
|
3940 |
if (parent) {
|
|
3941 |
const QWidget * w = this;
|
|
3942 |
while (w != parent) {
|
|
3943 |
Q_ASSERT_X(w, "QWidget::mapFrom(QWidget *parent, const QPoint &pos)",
|
|
3944 |
"parent must be in parent hierarchy");
|
|
3945 |
|
|
3946 |
p = w->mapFromParent(p);
|
|
3947 |
w = w->parentWidget();
|
|
3948 |
}
|
|
3949 |
}
|
|
3950 |
return p;
|
|
3951 |
}
|
|
3952 |
|
|
3953 |
|
|
3954 |
/*!
|
|
3955 |
Translates the widget coordinate \a pos to a coordinate in the
|
|
3956 |
parent widget.
|
|
3957 |
|
|
3958 |
Same as mapToGlobal() if the widget has no parent.
|
|
3959 |
|
|
3960 |
\sa mapFromParent() mapTo() mapToGlobal() underMouse()
|
|
3961 |
*/
|
|
3962 |
|
|
3963 |
QPoint QWidget::mapToParent(const QPoint &pos) const
|
|
3964 |
{
|
|
3965 |
return pos + data->crect.topLeft();
|
|
3966 |
}
|
|
3967 |
|
|
3968 |
/*!
|
|
3969 |
Translates the parent widget coordinate \a pos to widget
|
|
3970 |
coordinates.
|
|
3971 |
|
|
3972 |
Same as mapFromGlobal() if the widget has no parent.
|
|
3973 |
|
|
3974 |
\sa mapToParent() mapFrom() mapFromGlobal() underMouse()
|
|
3975 |
*/
|
|
3976 |
|
|
3977 |
QPoint QWidget::mapFromParent(const QPoint &pos) const
|
|
3978 |
{
|
|
3979 |
return pos - data->crect.topLeft();
|
|
3980 |
}
|
|
3981 |
|
|
3982 |
|
|
3983 |
/*!
|
|
3984 |
Returns the window for this widget, i.e. the next ancestor widget
|
|
3985 |
that has (or could have) a window-system frame.
|
|
3986 |
|
|
3987 |
If the widget is a window, the widget itself is returned.
|
|
3988 |
|
|
3989 |
Typical usage is changing the window title:
|
|
3990 |
|
|
3991 |
\snippet doc/src/snippets/code/src_gui_kernel_qwidget.cpp 3
|
|
3992 |
|
|
3993 |
\sa isWindow()
|
|
3994 |
*/
|
|
3995 |
|
|
3996 |
QWidget *QWidget::window() const
|
|
3997 |
{
|
|
3998 |
QWidget *w = (QWidget *)this;
|
|
3999 |
QWidget *p = w->parentWidget();
|
|
4000 |
while (!w->isWindow() && p) {
|
|
4001 |
w = p;
|
|
4002 |
p = p->parentWidget();
|
|
4003 |
}
|
|
4004 |
return w;
|
|
4005 |
}
|
|
4006 |
|
|
4007 |
/*!
|
|
4008 |
\since 4.4
|
|
4009 |
|
|
4010 |
Returns the native parent for this widget, i.e. the next ancestor widget
|
|
4011 |
that has a system identifier, or 0 if it does not have any native parent.
|
|
4012 |
|
|
4013 |
\sa effectiveWinId()
|
|
4014 |
*/
|
|
4015 |
QWidget *QWidget::nativeParentWidget() const
|
|
4016 |
{
|
|
4017 |
QWidget *parent = parentWidget();
|
|
4018 |
while (parent && !parent->internalWinId())
|
|
4019 |
parent = parent->parentWidget();
|
|
4020 |
return parent;
|
|
4021 |
}
|
|
4022 |
|
|
4023 |
/*! \fn QWidget *QWidget::topLevelWidget() const
|
|
4024 |
\obsolete
|
|
4025 |
|
|
4026 |
Use window() instead.
|
|
4027 |
*/
|
|
4028 |
|
|
4029 |
#ifdef QT3_SUPPORT
|
|
4030 |
/*!
|
|
4031 |
Returns the color role used for painting the widget's background.
|
|
4032 |
|
|
4033 |
Use QPalette(backgroundRole(()) instead.
|
|
4034 |
*/
|
|
4035 |
Qt::BackgroundMode QWidget::backgroundMode() const
|
|
4036 |
{
|
|
4037 |
if (testAttribute(Qt::WA_NoSystemBackground))
|
|
4038 |
return Qt::NoBackground;
|
|
4039 |
switch(backgroundRole()) {
|
|
4040 |
case QPalette::WindowText:
|
|
4041 |
return Qt::PaletteForeground;
|
|
4042 |
case QPalette::Button:
|
|
4043 |
return Qt::PaletteButton;
|
|
4044 |
case QPalette::Light:
|
|
4045 |
return Qt::PaletteLight;
|
|
4046 |
case QPalette::Midlight:
|
|
4047 |
return Qt::PaletteMidlight;
|
|
4048 |
case QPalette::Dark:
|
|
4049 |
return Qt::PaletteDark;
|
|
4050 |
case QPalette::Mid:
|
|
4051 |
return Qt::PaletteMid;
|
|
4052 |
case QPalette::Text:
|
|
4053 |
return Qt::PaletteText;
|
|
4054 |
case QPalette::BrightText:
|
|
4055 |
return Qt::PaletteBrightText;
|
|
4056 |
case QPalette::Base:
|
|
4057 |
return Qt::PaletteBase;
|
|
4058 |
case QPalette::Window:
|
|
4059 |
return Qt::PaletteBackground;
|
|
4060 |
case QPalette::Shadow:
|
|
4061 |
return Qt::PaletteShadow;
|
|
4062 |
case QPalette::Highlight:
|
|
4063 |
return Qt::PaletteHighlight;
|
|
4064 |
case QPalette::HighlightedText:
|
|
4065 |
return Qt::PaletteHighlightedText;
|
|
4066 |
case QPalette::ButtonText:
|
|
4067 |
return Qt::PaletteButtonText;
|
|
4068 |
case QPalette::Link:
|
|
4069 |
return Qt::PaletteLink;
|
|
4070 |
case QPalette::LinkVisited:
|
|
4071 |
return Qt::PaletteLinkVisited;
|
|
4072 |
default:
|
|
4073 |
break;
|
|
4074 |
}
|
|
4075 |
return Qt::NoBackground;
|
|
4076 |
}
|
|
4077 |
|
|
4078 |
/*!
|
|
4079 |
\fn void QWidget::setBackgroundMode(Qt::BackgroundMode
|
|
4080 |
widgetBackground, Qt::BackgroundMode paletteBackground)
|
|
4081 |
|
|
4082 |
Sets the color role used for painting the widget's background to
|
|
4083 |
background mode \a widgetBackground. The \a paletteBackground mode
|
|
4084 |
parameter is ignored.
|
|
4085 |
*/
|
|
4086 |
void QWidget::setBackgroundMode(Qt::BackgroundMode m, Qt::BackgroundMode)
|
|
4087 |
{
|
|
4088 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
4089 |
if(m == Qt::NoBackground) {
|
|
4090 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_NoSystemBackground, true);
|
|
4091 |
return;
|
|
4092 |
}
|
|
4093 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_NoSystemBackground, false);
|
|
4094 |
d->fg_role = QPalette::NoRole;
|
|
4095 |
QPalette::ColorRole role = d->bg_role;
|
|
4096 |
switch(m) {
|
|
4097 |
case Qt::FixedColor:
|
|
4098 |
case Qt::FixedPixmap:
|
|
4099 |
break;
|
|
4100 |
case Qt::PaletteForeground:
|
|
4101 |
role = QPalette::WindowText;
|
|
4102 |
break;
|
|
4103 |
case Qt::PaletteButton:
|
|
4104 |
role = QPalette::Button;
|
|
4105 |
break;
|
|
4106 |
case Qt::PaletteLight:
|
|
4107 |
role = QPalette::Light;
|
|
4108 |
break;
|
|
4109 |
case Qt::PaletteMidlight:
|
|
4110 |
role = QPalette::Midlight;
|
|
4111 |
break;
|
|
4112 |
case Qt::PaletteDark:
|
|
4113 |
role = QPalette::Dark;
|
|
4114 |
break;
|
|
4115 |
case Qt::PaletteMid:
|
|
4116 |
role = QPalette::Mid;
|
|
4117 |
break;
|
|
4118 |
case Qt::PaletteText:
|
|
4119 |
role = QPalette::Text;
|
|
4120 |
break;
|
|
4121 |
case Qt::PaletteBrightText:
|
|
4122 |
role = QPalette::BrightText;
|
|
4123 |
break;
|
|
4124 |
case Qt::PaletteBase:
|
|
4125 |
role = QPalette::Base;
|
|
4126 |
break;
|
|
4127 |
case Qt::PaletteBackground:
|
|
4128 |
role = QPalette::Window;
|
|
4129 |
break;
|
|
4130 |
case Qt::PaletteShadow:
|
|
4131 |
role = QPalette::Shadow;
|
|
4132 |
break;
|
|
4133 |
case Qt::PaletteHighlight:
|
|
4134 |
role = QPalette::Highlight;
|
|
4135 |
break;
|
|
4136 |
case Qt::PaletteHighlightedText:
|
|
4137 |
role = QPalette::HighlightedText;
|
|
4138 |
break;
|
|
4139 |
case Qt::PaletteButtonText:
|
|
4140 |
role = QPalette::ButtonText;
|
|
4141 |
break;
|
|
4142 |
case Qt::PaletteLink:
|
|
4143 |
role = QPalette::Link;
|
|
4144 |
break;
|
|
4145 |
case Qt::PaletteLinkVisited:
|
|
4146 |
role = QPalette::LinkVisited;
|
|
4147 |
break;
|
|
4148 |
case Qt::X11ParentRelative:
|
|
4149 |
d->fg_role = role = QPalette::NoRole;
|
|
4150 |
default:
|
|
4151 |
break;
|
|
4152 |
}
|
|
4153 |
setBackgroundRole(role);
|
|
4154 |
}
|
|
4155 |
|
|
4156 |
/*!
|
|
4157 |
The widget mapper is no longer part of the public API.
|
|
4158 |
*/
|
|
4159 |
QT3_SUPPORT QWidgetMapper *QWidget::wmapper() { return QWidgetPrivate::mapper; }
|
|
4160 |
|
|
4161 |
#endif
|
|
4162 |
|
|
4163 |
|
|
4164 |
/*!
|
|
4165 |
Returns the background role of the widget.
|
|
4166 |
|
|
4167 |
The background role defines the brush from the widget's \l palette that
|
|
4168 |
is used to render the background.
|
|
4169 |
|
|
4170 |
If no explicit background role is set, the widget inherts its parent
|
|
4171 |
widget's background role.
|
|
4172 |
|
|
4173 |
\sa setBackgroundRole(), foregroundRole()
|
|
4174 |
*/
|
|
4175 |
QPalette::ColorRole QWidget::backgroundRole() const
|
|
4176 |
{
|
|
4177 |
|
|
4178 |
const QWidget *w = this;
|
|
4179 |
do {
|
|
4180 |
QPalette::ColorRole role = w->d_func()->bg_role;
|
|
4181 |
if (role != QPalette::NoRole)
|
|
4182 |
return role;
|
|
4183 |
if (w->isWindow() || w->windowType() == Qt::SubWindow)
|
|
4184 |
break;
|
|
4185 |
w = w->parentWidget();
|
|
4186 |
} while (w);
|
|
4187 |
return QPalette::Window;
|
|
4188 |
}
|
|
4189 |
|
|
4190 |
/*!
|
|
4191 |
Sets the background role of the widget to \a role.
|
|
4192 |
|
|
4193 |
The background role defines the brush from the widget's \l palette that
|
|
4194 |
is used to render the background.
|
|
4195 |
|
|
4196 |
If \a role is QPalette::NoRole, then the widget inherits its
|
|
4197 |
parent's background role.
|
|
4198 |
|
|
4199 |
Note that styles are free to choose any color from the palette.
|
|
4200 |
You can modify the palette or set a style sheet if you don't
|
|
4201 |
achieve the result you want with setBackgroundRole().
|
|
4202 |
|
|
4203 |
\sa backgroundRole(), foregroundRole()
|
|
4204 |
*/
|
|
4205 |
|
|
4206 |
void QWidget::setBackgroundRole(QPalette::ColorRole role)
|
|
4207 |
{
|
|
4208 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
4209 |
d->bg_role = role;
|
|
4210 |
d->updateSystemBackground();
|
|
4211 |
d->propagatePaletteChange();
|
|
4212 |
d->updateIsOpaque();
|
|
4213 |
}
|
|
4214 |
|
|
4215 |
/*!
|
|
4216 |
Returns the foreground role.
|
|
4217 |
|
|
4218 |
The foreground role defines the color from the widget's \l palette that
|
|
4219 |
is used to draw the foreground.
|
|
4220 |
|
|
4221 |
If no explicit foreground role is set, the function returns a role
|
|
4222 |
that contrasts with the background role.
|
|
4223 |
|
|
4224 |
\sa setForegroundRole(), backgroundRole()
|
|
4225 |
*/
|
|
4226 |
QPalette::ColorRole QWidget::foregroundRole() const
|
|
4227 |
{
|
|
4228 |
Q_D(const QWidget);
|
|
4229 |
QPalette::ColorRole rl = QPalette::ColorRole(d->fg_role);
|
|
4230 |
if (rl != QPalette::NoRole)
|
|
4231 |
return rl;
|
|
4232 |
QPalette::ColorRole role = QPalette::WindowText;
|
|
4233 |
switch (backgroundRole()) {
|
|
4234 |
case QPalette::Button:
|
|
4235 |
role = QPalette::ButtonText;
|
|
4236 |
break;
|
|
4237 |
case QPalette::Base:
|
|
4238 |
role = QPalette::Text;
|
|
4239 |
break;
|
|
4240 |
case QPalette::Dark:
|
|
4241 |
case QPalette::Shadow:
|
|
4242 |
role = QPalette::Light;
|
|
4243 |
break;
|
|
4244 |
case QPalette::Highlight:
|
|
4245 |
role = QPalette::HighlightedText;
|
|
4246 |
break;
|
|
4247 |
case QPalette::ToolTipBase:
|
|
4248 |
role = QPalette::ToolTipText;
|
|
4249 |
break;
|
|
4250 |
default:
|
|
4251 |
;
|
|
4252 |
}
|
|
4253 |
return role;
|
|
4254 |
}
|
|
4255 |
|
|
4256 |
/*!
|
|
4257 |
Sets the foreground role of the widget to \a role.
|
|
4258 |
|
|
4259 |
The foreground role defines the color from the widget's \l palette that
|
|
4260 |
is used to draw the foreground.
|
|
4261 |
|
|
4262 |
If \a role is QPalette::NoRole, the widget uses a foreground role
|
|
4263 |
that contrasts with the background role.
|
|
4264 |
|
|
4265 |
Note that styles are free to choose any color from the palette.
|
|
4266 |
You can modify the palette or set a style sheet if you don't
|
|
4267 |
achieve the result you want with setForegroundRole().
|
|
4268 |
|
|
4269 |
\sa foregroundRole(), backgroundRole()
|
|
4270 |
*/
|
|
4271 |
void QWidget::setForegroundRole(QPalette::ColorRole role)
|
|
4272 |
{
|
|
4273 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
4274 |
d->fg_role = role;
|
|
4275 |
d->updateSystemBackground();
|
|
4276 |
d->propagatePaletteChange();
|
|
4277 |
}
|
|
4278 |
|
|
4279 |
/*!
|
|
4280 |
\property QWidget::palette
|
|
4281 |
\brief the widget's palette
|
|
4282 |
|
|
4283 |
This property describes the widget's palette. The palette is used by the
|
|
4284 |
widget's style when rendering standard components, and is available as a
|
|
4285 |
means to ensure that custom widgets can maintain consistency with the
|
|
4286 |
native platform's look and feel. It's common that different platforms, or
|
|
4287 |
different styles, have different palettes.
|
|
4288 |
|
|
4289 |
When you assign a new palette to a widget, the color roles from this
|
|
4290 |
palette are combined with the widget's default palette to form the
|
|
4291 |
widget's final palette. The palette entry for the widget's background role
|
|
4292 |
is used to fill the widget's background (see QWidget::autoFillBackground),
|
|
4293 |
and the foreground role initializes QPainter's pen.
|
|
4294 |
|
|
4295 |
The default depends on the system environment. QApplication maintains a
|
|
4296 |
system/theme palette which serves as a default for all widgets. There may
|
|
4297 |
also be special palette defaults for certain types of widgets (e.g., on
|
|
4298 |
Windows XP and Vista, all classes that derive from QMenuBar have a special
|
|
4299 |
default palette). You can also define default palettes for widgets
|
|
4300 |
yourself by passing a custom palette and the name of a widget to
|
|
4301 |
QApplication::setPalette(). Finally, the style always has the option of
|
|
4302 |
polishing the palette as it's assigned (see QStyle::polish()).
|
|
4303 |
|
|
4304 |
QWidget propagates explicit palette roles from parent to child. If you
|
|
4305 |
assign a brush or color to a specific role on a palette and assign that
|
|
4306 |
palette to a widget, that role will propagate to all the widget's
|
|
4307 |
children, overriding any system defaults for that role. Note that palettes
|
|
4308 |
by default don't propagate to windows (see isWindow()) unless the
|
|
4309 |
Qt::WA_WindowPropagation attribute is enabled.
|
|
4310 |
|
|
4311 |
QWidget's palette propagation is similar to its font propagation.
|
|
4312 |
|
|
4313 |
The current style, which is used to render the content of all standard Qt
|
|
4314 |
widgets, is free to choose colors and brushes from the widget palette, or
|
|
4315 |
in some cases, to ignore the palette (partially, or completely). In
|
|
4316 |
particular, certain styles like GTK style, Mac style, Windows XP, and
|
|
4317 |
Vista style, depend on third party APIs to render the content of widgets,
|
|
4318 |
and these styles typically do not follow the palette. Because of this,
|
|
4319 |
assigning roles to a widget's palette is not guaranteed to change the
|
|
4320 |
appearance of the widget. Instead, you may choose to apply a \l
|
|
4321 |
styleSheet. You can refer to our Knowledge Base article
|
|
4322 |
\l{http://qt.nokia.com/developer/knowledgebase/22}{here} for more
|
|
4323 |
information.
|
|
4324 |
|
|
4325 |
\warning Do not use this function in conjunction with \l{Qt Style Sheets}.
|
|
4326 |
When using style sheets, the palette of a widget can be customized using
|
|
4327 |
the "color", "background-color", "selection-color",
|
|
4328 |
"selection-background-color" and "alternate-background-color".
|
|
4329 |
|
|
4330 |
\sa QApplication::palette(), QWidget::font()
|
|
4331 |
*/
|
|
4332 |
const QPalette &QWidget::palette() const
|
|
4333 |
{
|
|
4334 |
if (!isEnabled()) {
|
|
4335 |
data->pal.setCurrentColorGroup(QPalette::Disabled);
|
|
4336 |
} else if ((!isVisible() || isActiveWindow())
|
|
4337 |
#if defined(Q_OS_WIN) && !defined(Q_WS_WINCE)
|
|
4338 |
&& !QApplicationPrivate::isBlockedByModal(const_cast<QWidget *>(this))
|
|
4339 |
#endif
|
|
4340 |
) {
|
|
4341 |
data->pal.setCurrentColorGroup(QPalette::Active);
|
|
4342 |
} else {
|
|
4343 |
#ifdef Q_WS_MAC
|
|
4344 |
extern bool qt_mac_can_clickThrough(const QWidget *); //qwidget_mac.cpp
|
|
4345 |
if (qt_mac_can_clickThrough(this))
|
|
4346 |
data->pal.setCurrentColorGroup(QPalette::Active);
|
|
4347 |
else
|
|
4348 |
#endif
|
|
4349 |
data->pal.setCurrentColorGroup(QPalette::Inactive);
|
|
4350 |
}
|
|
4351 |
return data->pal;
|
|
4352 |
}
|
|
4353 |
|
|
4354 |
void QWidget::setPalette(const QPalette &palette)
|
|
4355 |
{
|
|
4356 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
4357 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_SetPalette, palette.resolve() != 0);
|
|
4358 |
|
|
4359 |
// Determine which palette is inherited from this widget's ancestors and
|
|
4360 |
// QApplication::palette, resolve this against \a palette (attributes from
|
|
4361 |
// the inherited palette are copied over this widget's palette). Then
|
|
4362 |
// propagate this palette to this widget's children.
|
|
4363 |
QPalette naturalPalette = d->naturalWidgetPalette(d->inheritedPaletteResolveMask);
|
|
4364 |
QPalette resolvedPalette = palette.resolve(naturalPalette);
|
|
4365 |
d->setPalette_helper(resolvedPalette);
|
|
4366 |
}
|
|
4367 |
|
|
4368 |
/*!
|
|
4369 |
\internal
|
|
4370 |
|
|
4371 |
Returns the palette that the widget \a w inherits from its ancestors and
|
|
4372 |
QApplication::palette. \a inheritedMask is the combination of the widget's
|
|
4373 |
ancestors palette request masks (i.e., which attributes from the parent
|
|
4374 |
widget's palette are implicitly imposed on this widget by the user). Note
|
|
4375 |
that this font does not take into account the palette set on \a w itself.
|
|
4376 |
*/
|
|
4377 |
QPalette QWidgetPrivate::naturalWidgetPalette(uint inheritedMask) const
|
|
4378 |
{
|
|
4379 |
Q_Q(const QWidget);
|
|
4380 |
QPalette naturalPalette = QApplication::palette(q);
|
|
4381 |
if (!q->testAttribute(Qt::WA_StyleSheet)
|
|
4382 |
&& (!q->isWindow() || q->testAttribute(Qt::WA_WindowPropagation) || (extra && extra->proxyWidget))) {
|
|
4383 |
if (QWidget *p = q->parentWidget()) {
|
|
4384 |
if (!p->testAttribute(Qt::WA_StyleSheet)) {
|
|
4385 |
if (!naturalPalette.isCopyOf(QApplication::palette())) {
|
|
4386 |
QPalette inheritedPalette = p->palette();
|
|
4387 |
inheritedPalette.resolve(inheritedMask);
|
|
4388 |
naturalPalette = inheritedPalette.resolve(naturalPalette);
|
|
4389 |
} else {
|
|
4390 |
naturalPalette = p->palette();
|
|
4391 |
}
|
|
4392 |
}
|
|
4393 |
} else if (extra && extra->proxyWidget) {
|
|
4394 |
#ifndef QT_NO_GRAPHICSVIEW
|
|
4395 |
QPalette inheritedPalette = extra->proxyWidget->palette();
|
|
4396 |
inheritedPalette.resolve(inheritedMask);
|
|
4397 |
naturalPalette = inheritedPalette.resolve(naturalPalette);
|
|
4398 |
#endif //QT_NO_GRAPHICSVIEW
|
|
4399 |
}
|
|
4400 |
}
|
|
4401 |
naturalPalette.resolve(0);
|
|
4402 |
return naturalPalette;
|
|
4403 |
}
|
|
4404 |
/*!
|
|
4405 |
\internal
|
|
4406 |
|
|
4407 |
Determine which palette is inherited from this widget's ancestors and
|
|
4408 |
QApplication::palette, resolve this against this widget's palette
|
|
4409 |
(attributes from the inherited palette are copied over this widget's
|
|
4410 |
palette). Then propagate this palette to this widget's children.
|
|
4411 |
*/
|
|
4412 |
void QWidgetPrivate::resolvePalette()
|
|
4413 |
{
|
|
4414 |
QPalette naturalPalette = naturalWidgetPalette(inheritedPaletteResolveMask);
|
|
4415 |
QPalette resolvedPalette = data.pal.resolve(naturalPalette);
|
|
4416 |
setPalette_helper(resolvedPalette);
|
|
4417 |
}
|
|
4418 |
|
|
4419 |
void QWidgetPrivate::setPalette_helper(const QPalette &palette)
|
|
4420 |
{
|
|
4421 |
Q_Q(QWidget);
|
|
4422 |
if (data.pal == palette && data.pal.resolve() == palette.resolve())
|
|
4423 |
return;
|
|
4424 |
data.pal = palette;
|
|
4425 |
updateSystemBackground();
|
|
4426 |
propagatePaletteChange();
|
|
4427 |
updateIsOpaque();
|
|
4428 |
q->update();
|
|
4429 |
updateIsOpaque();
|
|
4430 |
}
|
|
4431 |
|
|
4432 |
/*!
|
|
4433 |
\property QWidget::font
|
|
4434 |
\brief the font currently set for the widget
|
|
4435 |
|
|
4436 |
This property describes the widget's requested font. The font is used by
|
|
4437 |
the widget's style when rendering standard components, and is available as
|
|
4438 |
a means to ensure that custom widgets can maintain consistency with the
|
|
4439 |
native platform's look and feel. It's common that different platforms, or
|
|
4440 |
different styles, define different fonts for an application.
|
|
4441 |
|
|
4442 |
When you assign a new font to a widget, the properties from this font are
|
|
4443 |
combined with the widget's default font to form the widget's final
|
|
4444 |
font. You can call fontInfo() to get a copy of the widget's final
|
|
4445 |
font. The final font is also used to initialize QPainter's font.
|
|
4446 |
|
|
4447 |
The default depends on the system environment. QApplication maintains a
|
|
4448 |
system/theme font which serves as a default for all widgets. There may
|
|
4449 |
also be special font defaults for certain types of widgets. You can also
|
|
4450 |
define default fonts for widgets yourself by passing a custom font and the
|
|
4451 |
name of a widget to QApplication::setFont(). Finally, the font is matched
|
|
4452 |
against Qt's font database to find the best match.
|
|
4453 |
|
|
4454 |
QWidget propagates explicit font properties from parent to child. If you
|
|
4455 |
change a specific property on a font and assign that font to a widget,
|
|
4456 |
that property will propagate to all the widget's children, overriding any
|
|
4457 |
system defaults for that property. Note that fonts by default don't
|
|
4458 |
propagate to windows (see isWindow()) unless the Qt::WA_WindowPropagation
|
|
4459 |
attribute is enabled.
|
|
4460 |
|
|
4461 |
QWidget's font propagation is similar to its palette propagation.
|
|
4462 |
|
|
4463 |
The current style, which is used to render the content of all standard Qt
|
|
4464 |
widgets, is free to choose to use the widget font, or in some cases, to
|
|
4465 |
ignore it (partially, or completely). In particular, certain styles like
|
|
4466 |
GTK style, Mac style, Windows XP, and Vista style, apply special
|
|
4467 |
modifications to the widget font to match the platform's native look and
|
|
4468 |
feel. Because of this, assigning properties to a widget's font is not
|
|
4469 |
guaranteed to change the appearance of the widget. Instead, you may choose
|
|
4470 |
to apply a \l styleSheet.
|
|
4471 |
|
|
4472 |
\note If \l{Qt Style Sheets} are used on the same widget as setFont(),
|
|
4473 |
style sheets will take precedence if the settings conflict.
|
|
4474 |
|
|
4475 |
\sa fontInfo(), fontMetrics()
|
|
4476 |
*/
|
|
4477 |
|
|
4478 |
void QWidget::setFont(const QFont &font)
|
|
4479 |
{
|
|
4480 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
4481 |
|
|
4482 |
#ifndef QT_NO_STYLE_STYLESHEET
|
|
4483 |
const QStyleSheetStyle* style;
|
|
4484 |
if (d->extra && (style = qobject_cast<const QStyleSheetStyle*>(d->extra->style))) {
|
|
4485 |
style->saveWidgetFont(this, font);
|
|
4486 |
}
|
|
4487 |
#endif
|
|
4488 |
|
|
4489 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_SetFont, font.resolve() != 0);
|
|
4490 |
|
|
4491 |
// Determine which font is inherited from this widget's ancestors and
|
|
4492 |
// QApplication::font, resolve this against \a font (attributes from the
|
|
4493 |
// inherited font are copied over). Then propagate this font to this
|
|
4494 |
// widget's children.
|
|
4495 |
QFont naturalFont = d->naturalWidgetFont(d->inheritedFontResolveMask);
|
|
4496 |
QFont resolvedFont = font.resolve(naturalFont);
|
|
4497 |
d->setFont_helper(resolvedFont);
|
|
4498 |
}
|
|
4499 |
|
|
4500 |
/*
|
|
4501 |
\internal
|
|
4502 |
|
|
4503 |
Returns the font that the widget \a w inherits from its ancestors and
|
|
4504 |
QApplication::font. \a inheritedMask is the combination of the widget's
|
|
4505 |
ancestors font request masks (i.e., which attributes from the parent
|
|
4506 |
widget's font are implicitly imposed on this widget by the user). Note
|
|
4507 |
that this font does not take into account the font set on \a w itself.
|
|
4508 |
|
|
4509 |
### Stylesheet has a different font propagation mechanism. When a stylesheet
|
|
4510 |
is applied, fonts are not propagated anymore
|
|
4511 |
*/
|
|
4512 |
QFont QWidgetPrivate::naturalWidgetFont(uint inheritedMask) const
|
|
4513 |
{
|
|
4514 |
Q_Q(const QWidget);
|
|
4515 |
QFont naturalFont = QApplication::font(q);
|
|
4516 |
if (!q->testAttribute(Qt::WA_StyleSheet)
|
|
4517 |
&& (!q->isWindow() || q->testAttribute(Qt::WA_WindowPropagation) || (extra && extra->proxyWidget))) {
|
|
4518 |
if (QWidget *p = q->parentWidget()) {
|
|
4519 |
if (!p->testAttribute(Qt::WA_StyleSheet)) {
|
|
4520 |
if (!naturalFont.isCopyOf(QApplication::font())) {
|
|
4521 |
QFont inheritedFont = p->font();
|
|
4522 |
inheritedFont.resolve(inheritedMask);
|
|
4523 |
naturalFont = inheritedFont.resolve(naturalFont);
|
|
4524 |
} else {
|
|
4525 |
naturalFont = p->font();
|
|
4526 |
}
|
|
4527 |
}
|
|
4528 |
} else if (extra && extra->proxyWidget) {
|
|
4529 |
#ifndef QT_NO_GRAPHICSVIEW
|
|
4530 |
QFont inheritedFont = extra->proxyWidget->font();
|
|
4531 |
inheritedFont.resolve(inheritedMask);
|
|
4532 |
naturalFont = inheritedFont.resolve(naturalFont);
|
|
4533 |
#endif //QT_NO_GRAPHICSVIEW
|
|
4534 |
}
|
|
4535 |
}
|
|
4536 |
naturalFont.resolve(0);
|
|
4537 |
return naturalFont;
|
|
4538 |
}
|
|
4539 |
|
|
4540 |
/*!
|
|
4541 |
\internal
|
|
4542 |
|
|
4543 |
Determine which font is implicitly imposed on this widget by its ancestors
|
|
4544 |
and QApplication::font, resolve this against its own font (attributes from
|
|
4545 |
the implicit font are copied over). Then propagate this font to this
|
|
4546 |
widget's children.
|
|
4547 |
*/
|
|
4548 |
void QWidgetPrivate::resolveFont()
|
|
4549 |
{
|
|
4550 |
QFont naturalFont = naturalWidgetFont(inheritedFontResolveMask);
|
|
4551 |
QFont resolvedFont = data.fnt.resolve(naturalFont);
|
|
4552 |
setFont_helper(resolvedFont);
|
|
4553 |
}
|
|
4554 |
|
|
4555 |
/*!
|
|
4556 |
\internal
|
|
4557 |
|
|
4558 |
Assign \a font to this widget, and propagate it to all children, except
|
|
4559 |
style sheet widgets (handled differently) and windows that don't enable
|
|
4560 |
window propagation. \a implicitMask is the union of all ancestor widgets'
|
|
4561 |
font request masks, and determines which attributes from this widget's
|
|
4562 |
font should propagate.
|
|
4563 |
*/
|
|
4564 |
void QWidgetPrivate::updateFont(const QFont &font)
|
|
4565 |
{
|
|
4566 |
Q_Q(QWidget);
|
|
4567 |
#ifndef QT_NO_STYLE_STYLESHEET
|
|
4568 |
const QStyleSheetStyle* cssStyle;
|
|
4569 |
cssStyle = extra ? qobject_cast<const QStyleSheetStyle*>(extra->style) : 0;
|
|
4570 |
#endif
|
|
4571 |
|
|
4572 |
#ifdef QT3_SUPPORT
|
|
4573 |
QFont old = data.fnt;
|
|
4574 |
#endif
|
|
4575 |
data.fnt = QFont(font, q);
|
|
4576 |
#if defined(Q_WS_X11)
|
|
4577 |
// make sure the font set on this widget is associated with the correct screen
|
|
4578 |
data.fnt.x11SetScreen(xinfo.screen());
|
|
4579 |
#endif
|
|
4580 |
// Combine new mask with natural mask and propagate to children.
|
|
4581 |
if (!q->parentWidget() && extra && extra->proxyWidget) {
|
|
4582 |
#ifndef QT_NO_GRAPHICSVIEW
|
|
4583 |
QGraphicsProxyWidget *p = extra->proxyWidget;
|
|
4584 |
inheritedFontResolveMask = p->d_func()->inheritedFontResolveMask | p->font().resolve();
|
|
4585 |
#endif //QT_NO_GRAPHICSVIEW
|
|
4586 |
} else if (q->isWindow() && !q->testAttribute(Qt::WA_WindowPropagation)) {
|
|
4587 |
inheritedFontResolveMask = 0;
|
|
4588 |
}
|
|
4589 |
uint newMask = data.fnt.resolve() | inheritedFontResolveMask;
|
|
4590 |
|
|
4591 |
for (int i = 0; i < children.size(); ++i) {
|
|
4592 |
QWidget *w = qobject_cast<QWidget*>(children.at(i));
|
|
4593 |
if (w) {
|
|
4594 |
if (0) {
|
|
4595 |
#ifndef QT_NO_STYLE_STYLESHEET
|
|
4596 |
} else if (w->testAttribute(Qt::WA_StyleSheet)) {
|
|
4597 |
// Style sheets follow a different font propagation scheme.
|
|
4598 |
if (cssStyle)
|
|
4599 |
cssStyle->updateStyleSheetFont(w);
|
|
4600 |
#endif
|
|
4601 |
} else if ((!w->isWindow() || w->testAttribute(Qt::WA_WindowPropagation))) {
|
|
4602 |
// Propagate font changes.
|
|
4603 |
QWidgetPrivate *wd = w->d_func();
|
|
4604 |
wd->inheritedFontResolveMask = newMask;
|
|
4605 |
wd->resolveFont();
|
|
4606 |
}
|
|
4607 |
}
|
|
4608 |
}
|
|
4609 |
|
|
4610 |
#ifndef QT_NO_STYLE_STYLESHEET
|
|
4611 |
if (cssStyle) {
|
|
4612 |
cssStyle->updateStyleSheetFont(q);
|
|
4613 |
}
|
|
4614 |
#endif
|
|
4615 |
|
|
4616 |
QEvent e(QEvent::FontChange);
|
|
4617 |
QApplication::sendEvent(q, &e);
|
|
4618 |
#ifdef QT3_SUPPORT
|
|
4619 |
q->fontChange(old);
|
|
4620 |
#endif
|
|
4621 |
}
|
|
4622 |
|
|
4623 |
void QWidgetPrivate::setLayoutDirection_helper(Qt::LayoutDirection direction)
|
|
4624 |
{
|
|
4625 |
Q_Q(QWidget);
|
|
4626 |
|
|
4627 |
if ( (direction == Qt::RightToLeft) == q->testAttribute(Qt::WA_RightToLeft))
|
|
4628 |
return;
|
|
4629 |
q->setAttribute(Qt::WA_RightToLeft, (direction == Qt::RightToLeft));
|
|
4630 |
if (!children.isEmpty()) {
|
|
4631 |
for (int i = 0; i < children.size(); ++i) {
|
|
4632 |
QWidget *w = qobject_cast<QWidget*>(children.at(i));
|
|
4633 |
if (w && !w->isWindow() && !w->testAttribute(Qt::WA_SetLayoutDirection))
|
|
4634 |
w->d_func()->setLayoutDirection_helper(direction);
|
|
4635 |
}
|
|
4636 |
}
|
|
4637 |
QEvent e(QEvent::LayoutDirectionChange);
|
|
4638 |
QApplication::sendEvent(q, &e);
|
|
4639 |
}
|
|
4640 |
|
|
4641 |
void QWidgetPrivate::resolveLayoutDirection()
|
|
4642 |
{
|
|
4643 |
Q_Q(const QWidget);
|
|
4644 |
if (!q->testAttribute(Qt::WA_SetLayoutDirection))
|
|
4645 |
setLayoutDirection_helper(q->isWindow() ? QApplication::layoutDirection() : q->parentWidget()->layoutDirection());
|
|
4646 |
}
|
|
4647 |
|
|
4648 |
/*!
|
|
4649 |
\property QWidget::layoutDirection
|
|
4650 |
|
|
4651 |
\brief the layout direction for this widget
|
|
4652 |
|
|
4653 |
By default, this property is set to Qt::LeftToRight.
|
|
4654 |
|
|
4655 |
When the layout direction is set on a widget, it will propagate to
|
|
4656 |
the widget's children. Children added after the call to \c
|
|
4657 |
setLayoutDirection() will not inherit the parent's layout
|
|
4658 |
direction.
|
|
4659 |
|
|
4660 |
\sa QApplication::layoutDirection
|
|
4661 |
*/
|
|
4662 |
void QWidget::setLayoutDirection(Qt::LayoutDirection direction)
|
|
4663 |
{
|
|
4664 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
4665 |
|
|
4666 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_SetLayoutDirection);
|
|
4667 |
d->setLayoutDirection_helper(direction);
|
|
4668 |
}
|
|
4669 |
|
|
4670 |
Qt::LayoutDirection QWidget::layoutDirection() const
|
|
4671 |
{
|
|
4672 |
return testAttribute(Qt::WA_RightToLeft) ? Qt::RightToLeft : Qt::LeftToRight;
|
|
4673 |
}
|
|
4674 |
|
|
4675 |
void QWidget::unsetLayoutDirection()
|
|
4676 |
{
|
|
4677 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
4678 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_SetLayoutDirection, false);
|
|
4679 |
d->resolveLayoutDirection();
|
|
4680 |
}
|
|
4681 |
|
|
4682 |
/*!
|
|
4683 |
\fn QFontMetrics QWidget::fontMetrics() const
|
|
4684 |
|
|
4685 |
Returns the font metrics for the widget's current font.
|
|
4686 |
Equivalent to QFontMetrics(widget->font()).
|
|
4687 |
|
|
4688 |
\sa font(), fontInfo(), setFont()
|
|
4689 |
*/
|
|
4690 |
|
|
4691 |
/*!
|
|
4692 |
\fn QFontInfo QWidget::fontInfo() const
|
|
4693 |
|
|
4694 |
Returns the font info for the widget's current font.
|
|
4695 |
Equivalent to QFontInto(widget->font()).
|
|
4696 |
|
|
4697 |
\sa font(), fontMetrics(), setFont()
|
|
4698 |
*/
|
|
4699 |
|
|
4700 |
|
|
4701 |
/*!
|
|
4702 |
\property QWidget::cursor
|
|
4703 |
\brief the cursor shape for this widget
|
|
4704 |
|
|
4705 |
The mouse cursor will assume this shape when it's over this
|
|
4706 |
widget. See the \link Qt::CursorShape list of predefined cursor
|
|
4707 |
objects\endlink for a range of useful shapes.
|
|
4708 |
|
|
4709 |
An editor widget might use an I-beam cursor:
|
|
4710 |
\snippet doc/src/snippets/code/src_gui_kernel_qwidget.cpp 6
|
|
4711 |
|
|
4712 |
If no cursor has been set, or after a call to unsetCursor(), the
|
|
4713 |
parent's cursor is used.
|
|
4714 |
|
|
4715 |
By default, this property contains a cursor with the Qt::ArrowCursor
|
|
4716 |
shape.
|
|
4717 |
|
|
4718 |
Some underlying window implementations will reset the cursor if it
|
|
4719 |
leaves a widget even if the mouse is grabbed. If you want to have
|
|
4720 |
a cursor set for all widgets, even when outside the window, consider
|
|
4721 |
QApplication::setOverrideCursor().
|
|
4722 |
|
|
4723 |
\sa QApplication::setOverrideCursor()
|
|
4724 |
*/
|
|
4725 |
|
|
4726 |
#ifndef QT_NO_CURSOR
|
|
4727 |
QCursor QWidget::cursor() const
|
|
4728 |
{
|
|
4729 |
Q_D(const QWidget);
|
|
4730 |
if (testAttribute(Qt::WA_SetCursor))
|
|
4731 |
return (d->extra && d->extra->curs)
|
|
4732 |
? *d->extra->curs
|
|
4733 |
: QCursor(Qt::ArrowCursor);
|
|
4734 |
if (isWindow() || !parentWidget())
|
|
4735 |
return QCursor(Qt::ArrowCursor);
|
|
4736 |
return parentWidget()->cursor();
|
|
4737 |
}
|
|
4738 |
|
|
4739 |
void QWidget::setCursor(const QCursor &cursor)
|
|
4740 |
{
|
|
4741 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
4742 |
// On Mac we must set the cursor even if it is the ArrowCursor.
|
|
4743 |
#if !defined(Q_WS_MAC) && !defined(Q_WS_QWS)
|
|
4744 |
if (cursor.shape() != Qt::ArrowCursor
|
|
4745 |
|| (d->extra && d->extra->curs))
|
|
4746 |
#endif
|
|
4747 |
{
|
|
4748 |
d->createExtra();
|
|
4749 |
QCursor *newCursor = new QCursor(cursor);
|
|
4750 |
delete d->extra->curs;
|
|
4751 |
d->extra->curs = newCursor;
|
|
4752 |
}
|
|
4753 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_SetCursor);
|
|
4754 |
d->setCursor_sys(cursor);
|
|
4755 |
|
|
4756 |
QEvent event(QEvent::CursorChange);
|
|
4757 |
QApplication::sendEvent(this, &event);
|
|
4758 |
}
|
|
4759 |
|
|
4760 |
void QWidget::unsetCursor()
|
|
4761 |
{
|
|
4762 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
4763 |
if (d->extra) {
|
|
4764 |
delete d->extra->curs;
|
|
4765 |
d->extra->curs = 0;
|
|
4766 |
}
|
|
4767 |
if (!isWindow())
|
|
4768 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_SetCursor, false);
|
|
4769 |
d->unsetCursor_sys();
|
|
4770 |
|
|
4771 |
QEvent event(QEvent::CursorChange);
|
|
4772 |
QApplication::sendEvent(this, &event);
|
|
4773 |
}
|
|
4774 |
|
|
4775 |
#endif
|
|
4776 |
|
|
4777 |
/*!
|
|
4778 |
\enum QWidget::RenderFlag
|
|
4779 |
|
|
4780 |
This enum describes how to render the widget when calling QWidget::render().
|
|
4781 |
|
|
4782 |
\value DrawWindowBackground If you enable this option, the widget's background
|
|
4783 |
is rendered into the target even if autoFillBackground is not set. By default,
|
|
4784 |
this option is enabled.
|
|
4785 |
|
|
4786 |
\value DrawChildren If you enable this option, the widget's children
|
|
4787 |
are rendered recursively into the target. By default, this option is enabled.
|
|
4788 |
|
|
4789 |
\value IgnoreMask If you enable this option, the widget's QWidget::mask()
|
|
4790 |
is ignored when rendering into the target. By default, this option is disabled.
|
|
4791 |
|
|
4792 |
\since 4.3
|
|
4793 |
*/
|
|
4794 |
|
|
4795 |
/*!
|
|
4796 |
\since 4.3
|
|
4797 |
|
|
4798 |
Renders the \a sourceRegion of this widget into the \a target
|
|
4799 |
using \a renderFlags to determine how to render. Rendering
|
|
4800 |
starts at \a targetOffset in the \a target. For example:
|
|
4801 |
|
|
4802 |
\snippet doc/src/snippets/code/src_gui_kernel_qwidget.cpp 7
|
|
4803 |
|
|
4804 |
If \a sourceRegion is a null region, this function will use QWidget::rect() as
|
|
4805 |
the region, i.e. the entire widget.
|
|
4806 |
|
|
4807 |
Ensure that you call QPainter::end() for the \a target device's
|
|
4808 |
active painter (if any) before rendering. For example:
|
|
4809 |
|
|
4810 |
\snippet doc/src/snippets/code/src_gui_kernel_qwidget.cpp 8
|
|
4811 |
|
|
4812 |
\note To obtain the contents of an OpenGL widget, use QGLWidget::grabFrameBuffer()
|
|
4813 |
or QGLWidget::renderPixmap() instead.
|
|
4814 |
*/
|
|
4815 |
void QWidget::render(QPaintDevice *target, const QPoint &targetOffset,
|
|
4816 |
const QRegion &sourceRegion, RenderFlags renderFlags)
|
|
4817 |
{
|
|
4818 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
4819 |
if (!target) {
|
|
4820 |
qWarning("QWidget::render: null pointer to paint device");
|
|
4821 |
return;
|
|
4822 |
}
|
|
4823 |
|
|
4824 |
const bool inRenderWithPainter = d->extra && d->extra->inRenderWithPainter;
|
|
4825 |
QRegion paintRegion = !inRenderWithPainter ? d->prepareToRender(sourceRegion, renderFlags)
|
|
4826 |
: sourceRegion;
|
|
4827 |
if (paintRegion.isEmpty())
|
|
4828 |
return;
|
|
4829 |
|
|
4830 |
#ifndef Q_WS_MAC
|
|
4831 |
QPainter *oldSharedPainter = inRenderWithPainter ? d->sharedPainter() : 0;
|
|
4832 |
|
|
4833 |
// Use the target's shared painter if set (typically set when doing
|
|
4834 |
// "other->render(widget);" in the widget's paintEvent.
|
|
4835 |
if (target->devType() == QInternal::Widget) {
|
|
4836 |
QWidgetPrivate *targetPrivate = static_cast<QWidget *>(target)->d_func();
|
|
4837 |
if (targetPrivate->extra && targetPrivate->extra->inRenderWithPainter) {
|
|
4838 |
QPainter *targetPainter = targetPrivate->sharedPainter();
|
|
4839 |
if (targetPainter && targetPainter->isActive())
|
|
4840 |
d->setSharedPainter(targetPainter);
|
|
4841 |
}
|
|
4842 |
}
|
|
4843 |
#endif
|
|
4844 |
|
|
4845 |
// Use the target's redirected device if set and adjust offset and paint
|
|
4846 |
// region accordingly. This is typically the case when people call render
|
|
4847 |
// from the paintEvent.
|
|
4848 |
QPoint offset = targetOffset;
|
|
4849 |
offset -= paintRegion.boundingRect().topLeft();
|
|
4850 |
QPoint redirectionOffset;
|
|
4851 |
QPaintDevice *redirected = 0;
|
|
4852 |
|
|
4853 |
if (target->devType() == QInternal::Widget)
|
|
4854 |
redirected = static_cast<QWidget *>(target)->d_func()->redirected(&redirectionOffset);
|
|
4855 |
if (!redirected)
|
|
4856 |
redirected = QPainter::redirected(target, &redirectionOffset);
|
|
4857 |
|
|
4858 |
if (redirected) {
|
|
4859 |
target = redirected;
|
|
4860 |
offset -= redirectionOffset;
|
|
4861 |
}
|
|
4862 |
|
|
4863 |
if (!inRenderWithPainter) { // Clip handled by shared painter (in qpainter.cpp).
|
|
4864 |
if (QPaintEngine *targetEngine = target->paintEngine()) {
|
|
4865 |
const QRegion targetSystemClip = targetEngine->systemClip();
|
|
4866 |
if (!targetSystemClip.isEmpty())
|
|
4867 |
paintRegion &= targetSystemClip.translated(-offset);
|
|
4868 |
}
|
|
4869 |
}
|
|
4870 |
|
|
4871 |
// Set backingstore flags.
|
|
4872 |
int flags = QWidgetPrivate::DrawPaintOnScreen | QWidgetPrivate::DrawInvisible;
|
|
4873 |
if (renderFlags & DrawWindowBackground)
|
|
4874 |
flags |= QWidgetPrivate::DrawAsRoot;
|
|
4875 |
|
|
4876 |
if (renderFlags & DrawChildren)
|
|
4877 |
flags |= QWidgetPrivate::DrawRecursive;
|
|
4878 |
else
|
|
4879 |
flags |= QWidgetPrivate::DontSubtractOpaqueChildren;
|
|
4880 |
|
|
4881 |
#ifdef Q_WS_QWS
|
|
4882 |
flags |= QWidgetPrivate::DontSetCompositionMode;
|
|
4883 |
#endif
|
|
4884 |
|
|
4885 |
if (target->devType() == QInternal::Printer) {
|
|
4886 |
QPainter p(target);
|
|
4887 |
d->render_helper(&p, targetOffset, paintRegion, renderFlags);
|
|
4888 |
return;
|
|
4889 |
}
|
|
4890 |
|
|
4891 |
#ifndef Q_WS_MAC
|
|
4892 |
// Render via backingstore.
|
|
4893 |
d->drawWidget(target, paintRegion, offset, flags, d->sharedPainter());
|
|
4894 |
|
|
4895 |
// Restore shared painter.
|
|
4896 |
if (oldSharedPainter)
|
|
4897 |
d->setSharedPainter(oldSharedPainter);
|
|
4898 |
#else
|
|
4899 |
// Render via backingstore (no shared painter).
|
|
4900 |
d->drawWidget(target, paintRegion, offset, flags, 0);
|
|
4901 |
#endif
|
|
4902 |
}
|
|
4903 |
|
|
4904 |
/*!
|
|
4905 |
\overload
|
|
4906 |
|
|
4907 |
Renders the widget into the \a painter's QPainter::device().
|
|
4908 |
|
|
4909 |
Transformations and settings applied to the \a painter will be used
|
|
4910 |
when rendering.
|
|
4911 |
|
|
4912 |
\note The \a painter must be active. On Mac OS X the widget will be
|
|
4913 |
rendered into a QPixmap and then drawn by the \a painter.
|
|
4914 |
|
|
4915 |
\sa QPainter::device()
|
|
4916 |
*/
|
|
4917 |
void QWidget::render(QPainter *painter, const QPoint &targetOffset,
|
|
4918 |
const QRegion &sourceRegion, RenderFlags renderFlags)
|
|
4919 |
{
|
|
4920 |
if (!painter) {
|
|
4921 |
qWarning("QWidget::render: Null pointer to painter");
|
|
4922 |
return;
|
|
4923 |
}
|
|
4924 |
|
|
4925 |
if (!painter->isActive()) {
|
|
4926 |
qWarning("QWidget::render: Cannot render with an inactive painter");
|
|
4927 |
return;
|
|
4928 |
}
|
|
4929 |
|
|
4930 |
const qreal opacity = painter->opacity();
|
|
4931 |
if (qFuzzyIsNull(opacity))
|
|
4932 |
return; // Fully transparent.
|
|
4933 |
|
|
4934 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
4935 |
const bool inRenderWithPainter = d->extra && d->extra->inRenderWithPainter;
|
|
4936 |
const QRegion toBePainted = !inRenderWithPainter ? d->prepareToRender(sourceRegion, renderFlags)
|
|
4937 |
: sourceRegion;
|
|
4938 |
if (toBePainted.isEmpty())
|
|
4939 |
return;
|
|
4940 |
|
|
4941 |
if (!d->extra)
|
|
4942 |
d->createExtra();
|
|
4943 |
d->extra->inRenderWithPainter = true;
|
|
4944 |
|
|
4945 |
#ifdef Q_WS_MAC
|
|
4946 |
d->render_helper(painter, targetOffset, toBePainted, renderFlags);
|
|
4947 |
#else
|
|
4948 |
QPaintEngine *engine = painter->paintEngine();
|
|
4949 |
Q_ASSERT(engine);
|
|
4950 |
QPaintEnginePrivate *enginePriv = engine->d_func();
|
|
4951 |
Q_ASSERT(enginePriv);
|
|
4952 |
QPaintDevice *target = engine->paintDevice();
|
|
4953 |
Q_ASSERT(target);
|
|
4954 |
|
|
4955 |
// Render via a pixmap when dealing with non-opaque painters or printers.
|
|
4956 |
if (!inRenderWithPainter && (opacity < 1.0 || (target->devType() == QInternal::Printer))) {
|
|
4957 |
d->render_helper(painter, targetOffset, toBePainted, renderFlags);
|
|
4958 |
d->extra->inRenderWithPainter = false;
|
|
4959 |
return;
|
|
4960 |
}
|
|
4961 |
|
|
4962 |
// Set new shared painter.
|
|
4963 |
QPainter *oldPainter = d->sharedPainter();
|
|
4964 |
d->setSharedPainter(painter);
|
|
4965 |
|
|
4966 |
// Save current system clip, viewport and transform,
|
|
4967 |
const QTransform oldTransform = enginePriv->systemTransform;
|
|
4968 |
const QRegion oldSystemClip = enginePriv->systemClip;
|
|
4969 |
const QRegion oldSystemViewport = enginePriv->systemViewport;
|
|
4970 |
|
|
4971 |
// This ensures that all painting triggered by render() is clipped to the current engine clip.
|
|
4972 |
if (painter->hasClipping()) {
|
|
4973 |
const QRegion painterClip = painter->deviceTransform().map(painter->clipRegion());
|
|
4974 |
enginePriv->setSystemViewport(oldSystemClip.isEmpty() ? painterClip : oldSystemClip & painterClip);
|
|
4975 |
} else {
|
|
4976 |
enginePriv->setSystemViewport(oldSystemClip);
|
|
4977 |
}
|
|
4978 |
|
|
4979 |
render(target, targetOffset, toBePainted, renderFlags);
|
|
4980 |
|
|
4981 |
// Restore system clip, viewport and transform.
|
|
4982 |
enginePriv->systemClip = oldSystemClip;
|
|
4983 |
enginePriv->setSystemViewport(oldSystemViewport);
|
|
4984 |
enginePriv->setSystemTransform(oldTransform);
|
|
4985 |
|
|
4986 |
// Restore shared painter.
|
|
4987 |
d->setSharedPainter(oldPainter);
|
|
4988 |
#endif
|
|
4989 |
|
|
4990 |
d->extra->inRenderWithPainter = false;
|
|
4991 |
}
|
|
4992 |
|
|
4993 |
/*!
|
|
4994 |
\brief The graphicsEffect function returns a pointer to the
|
|
4995 |
widget's graphics effect.
|
|
4996 |
|
|
4997 |
If the widget has no graphics effect, 0 is returned.
|
|
4998 |
|
|
4999 |
\since 4.6
|
|
5000 |
|
|
5001 |
\sa setGraphicsEffect()
|
|
5002 |
*/
|
|
5003 |
QGraphicsEffect *QWidget::graphicsEffect() const
|
|
5004 |
{
|
|
5005 |
Q_D(const QWidget);
|
|
5006 |
return d->graphicsEffect;
|
|
5007 |
}
|
|
5008 |
|
|
5009 |
/*!
|
|
5010 |
|
|
5011 |
\brief The setGraphicsEffect function is for setting the widget's graphics effect.
|
|
5012 |
|
|
5013 |
Sets \a effect as the widget's effect. If there already is an effect installed
|
|
5014 |
on this widget, QWidget will delete the existing effect before installing
|
|
5015 |
the new \a effect.
|
|
5016 |
|
|
5017 |
If \a effect is the installed on a different widget, setGraphicsEffect() will remove
|
|
5018 |
the effect from the widget and install it on this widget.
|
|
5019 |
|
|
5020 |
\note This function will apply the effect on itself and all its children.
|
|
5021 |
|
|
5022 |
\since 4.6
|
|
5023 |
|
|
5024 |
\sa graphicsEffect()
|
|
5025 |
*/
|
|
5026 |
void QWidget::setGraphicsEffect(QGraphicsEffect *effect)
|
|
5027 |
{
|
|
5028 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
5029 |
if (d->graphicsEffect == effect)
|
|
5030 |
return;
|
|
5031 |
|
|
5032 |
if (d->graphicsEffect && effect) {
|
|
5033 |
delete d->graphicsEffect;
|
|
5034 |
d->graphicsEffect = 0;
|
|
5035 |
}
|
|
5036 |
|
|
5037 |
if (!effect) {
|
|
5038 |
// Unset current effect.
|
|
5039 |
QGraphicsEffectPrivate *oldEffectPrivate = d->graphicsEffect->d_func();
|
|
5040 |
d->graphicsEffect = 0;
|
|
5041 |
if (oldEffectPrivate) {
|
|
5042 |
oldEffectPrivate->setGraphicsEffectSource(0); // deletes the current source.
|
|
5043 |
}
|
|
5044 |
} else {
|
|
5045 |
// Set new effect.
|
|
5046 |
QGraphicsEffectSourcePrivate *sourced = new QWidgetEffectSourcePrivate(this);
|
|
5047 |
QGraphicsEffectSource *source = new QGraphicsEffectSource(*sourced);
|
|
5048 |
d->graphicsEffect = effect;
|
|
5049 |
effect->d_func()->setGraphicsEffectSource(source);
|
|
5050 |
}
|
|
5051 |
|
|
5052 |
d->updateIsOpaque();
|
|
5053 |
update();
|
|
5054 |
}
|
|
5055 |
|
|
5056 |
bool QWidgetPrivate::isAboutToShow() const
|
|
5057 |
{
|
|
5058 |
if (data.in_show)
|
|
5059 |
return true;
|
|
5060 |
|
|
5061 |
Q_Q(const QWidget);
|
|
5062 |
if (q->isHidden())
|
|
5063 |
return false;
|
|
5064 |
|
|
5065 |
// The widget will be shown if any of its ancestors are about to show.
|
|
5066 |
QWidget *parent = q->parentWidget();
|
|
5067 |
return parent ? parent->d_func()->isAboutToShow() : false;
|
|
5068 |
}
|
|
5069 |
|
|
5070 |
QRegion QWidgetPrivate::prepareToRender(const QRegion ®ion, QWidget::RenderFlags renderFlags)
|
|
5071 |
{
|
|
5072 |
Q_Q(QWidget);
|
|
5073 |
const bool isVisible = q->isVisible();
|
|
5074 |
|
|
5075 |
// Make sure the widget is laid out correctly.
|
|
5076 |
if (!isVisible && !isAboutToShow()) {
|
|
5077 |
QWidget *topLevel = q->window();
|
|
5078 |
(void)topLevel->d_func()->topData(); // Make sure we at least have top-data.
|
|
5079 |
topLevel->ensurePolished();
|
|
5080 |
|
|
5081 |
// Invalidate the layout of hidden ancestors (incl. myself) and pretend
|
|
5082 |
// they're not explicitly hidden.
|
|
5083 |
QWidget *widget = q;
|
|
5084 |
QWidgetList hiddenWidgets;
|
|
5085 |
while (widget) {
|
|
5086 |
if (widget->isHidden()) {
|
|
5087 |
widget->setAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Hidden, false);
|
|
5088 |
hiddenWidgets.append(widget);
|
|
5089 |
if (!widget->isWindow() && widget->parentWidget()->d_func()->layout)
|
|
5090 |
widget->d_func()->updateGeometry_helper(true);
|
|
5091 |
}
|
|
5092 |
widget = widget->parentWidget();
|
|
5093 |
}
|
|
5094 |
|
|
5095 |
// Activate top-level layout.
|
|
5096 |
if (topLevel->d_func()->layout)
|
|
5097 |
topLevel->d_func()->layout->activate();
|
|
5098 |
|
|
5099 |
// Adjust size if necessary.
|
|
5100 |
QTLWExtra *topLevelExtra = topLevel->d_func()->maybeTopData();
|
|
5101 |
if (topLevelExtra && !topLevelExtra->sizeAdjusted
|
|
5102 |
&& !topLevel->testAttribute(Qt::WA_Resized)) {
|
|
5103 |
topLevel->adjustSize();
|
|
5104 |
topLevel->setAttribute(Qt::WA_Resized, false);
|
|
5105 |
}
|
|
5106 |
|
|
5107 |
// Activate child layouts.
|
|
5108 |
topLevel->d_func()->activateChildLayoutsRecursively();
|
|
5109 |
|
|
5110 |
// We're not cheating with WA_WState_Hidden anymore.
|
|
5111 |
for (int i = 0; i < hiddenWidgets.size(); ++i) {
|
|
5112 |
QWidget *widget = hiddenWidgets.at(i);
|
|
5113 |
widget->setAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Hidden);
|
|
5114 |
if (!widget->isWindow() && widget->parentWidget()->d_func()->layout)
|
|
5115 |
widget->parentWidget()->d_func()->layout->invalidate();
|
|
5116 |
}
|
|
5117 |
} else if (isVisible) {
|
|
5118 |
q->window()->d_func()->sendPendingMoveAndResizeEvents(true, true);
|
|
5119 |
}
|
|
5120 |
|
|
5121 |
// Calculate the region to be painted.
|
|
5122 |
QRegion toBePainted = !region.isEmpty() ? region : QRegion(q->rect());
|
|
5123 |
if (!(renderFlags & QWidget::IgnoreMask) && extra && extra->hasMask)
|
|
5124 |
toBePainted &= extra->mask;
|
|
5125 |
return toBePainted;
|
|
5126 |
}
|
|
5127 |
|
|
5128 |
void QWidgetPrivate::render_helper(QPainter *painter, const QPoint &targetOffset, const QRegion &toBePainted,
|
|
5129 |
QWidget::RenderFlags renderFlags)
|
|
5130 |
{
|
|
5131 |
Q_ASSERT(painter);
|
|
5132 |
Q_ASSERT(!toBePainted.isEmpty());
|
|
5133 |
|
|
5134 |
Q_Q(QWidget);
|
|
5135 |
#ifndef Q_WS_MAC
|
|
5136 |
const QTransform originalTransform = painter->worldTransform();
|
|
5137 |
const bool useDeviceCoordinates = originalTransform.isScaling();
|
|
5138 |
if (!useDeviceCoordinates) {
|
|
5139 |
#endif
|
|
5140 |
// Render via a pixmap.
|
|
5141 |
const QRect rect = toBePainted.boundingRect();
|
|
5142 |
const QSize size = rect.size();
|
|
5143 |
if (size.isNull())
|
|
5144 |
return;
|
|
5145 |
|
|
5146 |
QPixmap pixmap(size);
|
|
5147 |
if (!(renderFlags & QWidget::DrawWindowBackground)
|
|
5148 |
|| !q->palette().brush(q->backgroundRole()).isOpaque())
|
|
5149 |
pixmap.fill(Qt::transparent);
|
|
5150 |
q->render(&pixmap, QPoint(), toBePainted, renderFlags);
|
|
5151 |
|
|
5152 |
const bool restore = !(painter->renderHints() & QPainter::SmoothPixmapTransform);
|
|
5153 |
painter->setRenderHints(QPainter::SmoothPixmapTransform, true);
|
|
5154 |
|
|
5155 |
painter->drawPixmap(targetOffset, pixmap);
|
|
5156 |
|
|
5157 |
if (restore)
|
|
5158 |
painter->setRenderHints(QPainter::SmoothPixmapTransform, false);
|
|
5159 |
|
|
5160 |
#ifndef Q_WS_MAC
|
|
5161 |
} else {
|
|
5162 |
// Render via a pixmap in device coordinates (to avoid pixmap scaling).
|
|
5163 |
QTransform transform = originalTransform;
|
|
5164 |
transform.translate(targetOffset.x(), targetOffset.y());
|
|
5165 |
|
|
5166 |
QPaintDevice *device = painter->device();
|
|
5167 |
Q_ASSERT(device);
|
|
5168 |
|
|
5169 |
// Calculate device rect.
|
|
5170 |
const QRectF rect(toBePainted.boundingRect());
|
|
5171 |
QRect deviceRect = transform.mapRect(QRectF(0, 0, rect.width(), rect.height())).toAlignedRect();
|
|
5172 |
deviceRect &= QRect(0, 0, device->width(), device->height());
|
|
5173 |
|
|
5174 |
QPixmap pixmap(deviceRect.size());
|
|
5175 |
pixmap.fill(Qt::transparent);
|
|
5176 |
|
|
5177 |
// Create a pixmap device coordinate painter.
|
|
5178 |
QPainter pixmapPainter(&pixmap);
|
|
5179 |
pixmapPainter.setRenderHints(painter->renderHints());
|
|
5180 |
transform *= QTransform::fromTranslate(-deviceRect.x(), -deviceRect.y());
|
|
5181 |
pixmapPainter.setTransform(transform);
|
|
5182 |
|
|
5183 |
q->render(&pixmapPainter, QPoint(), toBePainted, renderFlags);
|
|
5184 |
pixmapPainter.end();
|
|
5185 |
|
|
5186 |
// And then draw the pixmap.
|
|
5187 |
painter->setTransform(QTransform());
|
|
5188 |
painter->drawPixmap(deviceRect.topLeft(), pixmap);
|
|
5189 |
painter->setTransform(originalTransform);
|
|
5190 |
}
|
|
5191 |
#endif
|
|
5192 |
}
|
|
5193 |
|
|
5194 |
void QWidgetPrivate::drawWidget(QPaintDevice *pdev, const QRegion &rgn, const QPoint &offset, int flags,
|
|
5195 |
QPainter *sharedPainter, QWidgetBackingStore *backingStore)
|
|
5196 |
{
|
|
5197 |
if (rgn.isEmpty())
|
|
5198 |
return;
|
|
5199 |
|
|
5200 |
Q_Q(QWidget);
|
|
5201 |
if (graphicsEffect && graphicsEffect->isEnabled()) {
|
|
5202 |
QGraphicsEffectSource *source = graphicsEffect->d_func()->source;
|
|
5203 |
QWidgetEffectSourcePrivate *sourced = static_cast<QWidgetEffectSourcePrivate *>
|
|
5204 |
(source->d_func());
|
|
5205 |
if (!sourced->context) {
|
|
5206 |
QWidgetPaintContext context(pdev, rgn, offset, flags, sharedPainter, backingStore);
|
|
5207 |
sourced->context = &context;
|
|
5208 |
if (!sharedPainter) {
|
|
5209 |
QPaintEngine *paintEngine = pdev->paintEngine();
|
|
5210 |
paintEngine->d_func()->systemClip = rgn.translated(offset);
|
|
5211 |
QPainter p(pdev);
|
|
5212 |
p.translate(offset);
|
|
5213 |
context.painter = &p;
|
|
5214 |
graphicsEffect->draw(&p, source);
|
|
5215 |
paintEngine->d_func()->systemClip = QRegion();
|
|
5216 |
} else {
|
|
5217 |
context.painter = sharedPainter;
|
|
5218 |
if (sharedPainter->worldTransform() != sourced->lastEffectTransform) {
|
|
5219 |
sourced->invalidateCache();
|
|
5220 |
sourced->lastEffectTransform = sharedPainter->worldTransform();
|
|
5221 |
}
|
|
5222 |
sharedPainter->save();
|
|
5223 |
sharedPainter->translate(offset);
|
|
5224 |
graphicsEffect->draw(sharedPainter, source);
|
|
5225 |
sharedPainter->restore();
|
|
5226 |
}
|
|
5227 |
sourced->context = 0;
|
|
5228 |
return;
|
|
5229 |
}
|
|
5230 |
}
|
|
5231 |
|
|
5232 |
const bool asRoot = flags & DrawAsRoot;
|
|
5233 |
const bool alsoOnScreen = flags & DrawPaintOnScreen;
|
|
5234 |
const bool recursive = flags & DrawRecursive;
|
|
5235 |
const bool alsoInvisible = flags & DrawInvisible;
|
|
5236 |
|
|
5237 |
Q_ASSERT(sharedPainter ? sharedPainter->isActive() : true);
|
|
5238 |
|
|
5239 |
QRegion toBePainted(rgn);
|
|
5240 |
if (asRoot && !alsoInvisible)
|
|
5241 |
toBePainted &= clipRect(); //(rgn & visibleRegion());
|
|
5242 |
if (!(flags & DontSubtractOpaqueChildren))
|
|
5243 |
subtractOpaqueChildren(toBePainted, q->rect());
|
|
5244 |
|
|
5245 |
if (!toBePainted.isEmpty()) {
|
|
5246 |
bool onScreen = paintOnScreen();
|
|
5247 |
if (!onScreen || alsoOnScreen) {
|
|
5248 |
//update the "in paint event" flag
|
|
5249 |
if (q->testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_InPaintEvent))
|
|
5250 |
qWarning("QWidget::repaint: Recursive repaint detected");
|
|
5251 |
q->setAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_InPaintEvent);
|
|
5252 |
|
|
5253 |
//clip away the new area
|
|
5254 |
#ifndef QT_NO_PAINT_DEBUG
|
|
5255 |
bool flushed = QWidgetBackingStore::flushPaint(q, toBePainted);
|
|
5256 |
#endif
|
|
5257 |
QPaintEngine *paintEngine = pdev->paintEngine();
|
|
5258 |
if (paintEngine) {
|
|
5259 |
setRedirected(pdev, -offset);
|
|
5260 |
|
|
5261 |
if (sharedPainter)
|
|
5262 |
paintEngine->d_func()->systemClip = toBePainted;
|
|
5263 |
else
|
|
5264 |
paintEngine->d_func()->systemRect = q->data->crect;
|
|
5265 |
|
|
5266 |
//paint the background
|
|
5267 |
if ((asRoot || q->autoFillBackground() || onScreen || q->testAttribute(Qt::WA_StyledBackground))
|
|
5268 |
&& !q->testAttribute(Qt::WA_OpaquePaintEvent) && !q->testAttribute(Qt::WA_NoSystemBackground)) {
|
|
5269 |
|
|
5270 |
QPainter p(q);
|
|
5271 |
paintBackground(&p, toBePainted, (asRoot || onScreen) ? flags | DrawAsRoot : 0);
|
|
5272 |
}
|
|
5273 |
|
|
5274 |
if (!sharedPainter)
|
|
5275 |
paintEngine->d_func()->systemClip = toBePainted.translated(offset);
|
|
5276 |
|
|
5277 |
if (!onScreen && !asRoot && !isOpaque && q->testAttribute(Qt::WA_TintedBackground)) {
|
|
5278 |
QPainter p(q);
|
|
5279 |
QColor tint = q->palette().window().color();
|
|
5280 |
tint.setAlphaF(qreal(.6));
|
|
5281 |
p.fillRect(toBePainted.boundingRect(), tint);
|
|
5282 |
}
|
|
5283 |
}
|
|
5284 |
|
|
5285 |
#if 0
|
|
5286 |
qDebug() << "painting" << q << "opaque ==" << isOpaque();
|
|
5287 |
qDebug() << "clipping to" << toBePainted << "location == " << offset
|
|
5288 |
<< "geometry ==" << QRect(q->mapTo(q->window(), QPoint(0, 0)), q->size());
|
|
5289 |
#endif
|
|
5290 |
|
|
5291 |
//actually send the paint event
|
|
5292 |
QPaintEvent e(toBePainted);
|
|
5293 |
QCoreApplication::sendSpontaneousEvent(q, &e);
|
|
5294 |
#if !defined(Q_WS_MAC) && !defined(Q_WS_QWS)
|
|
5295 |
if (backingStore && !onScreen && !asRoot && (q->internalWinId() || !q->nativeParentWidget()->isWindow()))
|
|
5296 |
backingStore->markDirtyOnScreen(toBePainted, q, offset);
|
|
5297 |
#endif
|
|
5298 |
|
|
5299 |
//restore
|
|
5300 |
if (paintEngine) {
|
|
5301 |
restoreRedirected();
|
|
5302 |
if (!sharedPainter)
|
|
5303 |
paintEngine->d_func()->systemRect = QRect();
|
|
5304 |
else
|
|
5305 |
paintEngine->d_func()->currentClipWidget = 0;
|
|
5306 |
paintEngine->d_func()->systemClip = QRegion();
|
|
5307 |
}
|
|
5308 |
q->setAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_InPaintEvent, false);
|
|
5309 |
if (q->paintingActive() && !q->testAttribute(Qt::WA_PaintOutsidePaintEvent))
|
|
5310 |
qWarning("QWidget::repaint: It is dangerous to leave painters active on a widget outside of the PaintEvent");
|
|
5311 |
|
|
5312 |
if (paintEngine && paintEngine->autoDestruct()) {
|
|
5313 |
delete paintEngine;
|
|
5314 |
}
|
|
5315 |
|
|
5316 |
#ifndef QT_NO_PAINT_DEBUG
|
|
5317 |
if (flushed)
|
|
5318 |
QWidgetBackingStore::unflushPaint(q, toBePainted);
|
|
5319 |
#endif
|
|
5320 |
} else if (q->isWindow()) {
|
|
5321 |
QPaintEngine *engine = pdev->paintEngine();
|
|
5322 |
if (engine) {
|
|
5323 |
QPainter p(pdev);
|
|
5324 |
p.setClipRegion(toBePainted);
|
|
5325 |
const QBrush bg = q->palette().brush(QPalette::Window);
|
|
5326 |
if (bg.style() == Qt::TexturePattern)
|
|
5327 |
p.drawTiledPixmap(q->rect(), bg.texture());
|
|
5328 |
else
|
|
5329 |
p.fillRect(q->rect(), bg);
|
|
5330 |
|
|
5331 |
if (engine->autoDestruct())
|
|
5332 |
delete engine;
|
|
5333 |
}
|
|
5334 |
}
|
|
5335 |
}
|
|
5336 |
|
|
5337 |
if (recursive && !children.isEmpty()) {
|
|
5338 |
paintSiblingsRecursive(pdev, children, children.size() - 1, rgn, offset, flags & ~DrawAsRoot
|
|
5339 |
#ifdef Q_BACKINGSTORE_SUBSURFACES
|
|
5340 |
, q->windowSurface()
|
|
5341 |
#endif
|
|
5342 |
, sharedPainter, backingStore);
|
|
5343 |
}
|
|
5344 |
}
|
|
5345 |
|
|
5346 |
void QWidgetPrivate::paintSiblingsRecursive(QPaintDevice *pdev, const QObjectList& siblings, int index, const QRegion &rgn,
|
|
5347 |
const QPoint &offset, int flags
|
|
5348 |
#ifdef Q_BACKINGSTORE_SUBSURFACES
|
|
5349 |
, const QWindowSurface *currentSurface
|
|
5350 |
#endif
|
|
5351 |
, QPainter *sharedPainter, QWidgetBackingStore *backingStore)
|
|
5352 |
{
|
|
5353 |
QWidget *w = 0;
|
|
5354 |
QRect boundingRect;
|
|
5355 |
bool dirtyBoundingRect = true;
|
|
5356 |
const bool exludeOpaqueChildren = (flags & DontDrawOpaqueChildren);
|
|
5357 |
|
|
5358 |
do {
|
|
5359 |
QWidget *x = qobject_cast<QWidget*>(siblings.at(index));
|
|
5360 |
if (x && !(exludeOpaqueChildren && x->d_func()->isOpaque) && !x->isHidden() && !x->isWindow()) {
|
|
5361 |
if (dirtyBoundingRect) {
|
|
5362 |
boundingRect = rgn.boundingRect();
|
|
5363 |
dirtyBoundingRect = false;
|
|
5364 |
}
|
|
5365 |
|
|
5366 |
if (qRectIntersects(boundingRect, x->d_func()->effectiveRectFor(x->data->crect))) {
|
|
5367 |
#ifdef Q_BACKINGSTORE_SUBSURFACES
|
|
5368 |
if (x->windowSurface() == currentSurface)
|
|
5369 |
#endif
|
|
5370 |
{
|
|
5371 |
w = x;
|
|
5372 |
break;
|
|
5373 |
}
|
|
5374 |
}
|
|
5375 |
}
|
|
5376 |
--index;
|
|
5377 |
} while (index >= 0);
|
|
5378 |
|
|
5379 |
if (!w)
|
|
5380 |
return;
|
|
5381 |
|
|
5382 |
QWidgetPrivate *wd = w->d_func();
|
|
5383 |
const QPoint widgetPos(w->data->crect.topLeft());
|
|
5384 |
const bool hasMask = wd->extra && wd->extra->hasMask && !wd->graphicsEffect;
|
|
5385 |
|
|
5386 |
if (index > 0) {
|
|
5387 |
QRegion wr(rgn);
|
|
5388 |
if (wd->isOpaque)
|
|
5389 |
wr -= hasMask ? wd->extra->mask.translated(widgetPos) : w->data->crect;
|
|
5390 |
paintSiblingsRecursive(pdev, siblings, --index, wr, offset, flags
|
|
5391 |
#ifdef Q_BACKINGSTORE_SUBSURFACES
|
|
5392 |
, currentSurface
|
|
5393 |
#endif
|
|
5394 |
, sharedPainter, backingStore);
|
|
5395 |
}
|
|
5396 |
|
|
5397 |
if (w->updatesEnabled() && (!w->d_func()->extra || !w->d_func()->extra->proxyWidget)) {
|
|
5398 |
QRegion wRegion(rgn);
|
|
5399 |
wRegion &= wd->effectiveRectFor(w->data->crect);
|
|
5400 |
wRegion.translate(-widgetPos);
|
|
5401 |
if (hasMask)
|
|
5402 |
wRegion &= wd->extra->mask;
|
|
5403 |
wd->drawWidget(pdev, wRegion, offset + widgetPos, flags, sharedPainter, backingStore);
|
|
5404 |
}
|
|
5405 |
}
|
|
5406 |
|
|
5407 |
QRectF QWidgetEffectSourcePrivate::boundingRect(Qt::CoordinateSystem system) const
|
|
5408 |
{
|
|
5409 |
if (system != Qt::DeviceCoordinates)
|
|
5410 |
return m_widget->rect();
|
|
5411 |
|
|
5412 |
if (!context) {
|
|
5413 |
// Device coordinates without context not yet supported.
|
|
5414 |
qWarning("QGraphicsEffectSource::boundingRect: Not yet implemented, lacking device context");
|
|
5415 |
return QRectF();
|
|
5416 |
}
|
|
5417 |
|
|
5418 |
return context->painter->worldTransform().mapRect(m_widget->rect());
|
|
5419 |
}
|
|
5420 |
|
|
5421 |
void QWidgetEffectSourcePrivate::draw(QPainter *painter)
|
|
5422 |
{
|
|
5423 |
if (!context || context->painter != painter) {
|
|
5424 |
m_widget->render(painter);
|
|
5425 |
return;
|
|
5426 |
}
|
|
5427 |
|
|
5428 |
// The region saved in the context is neither clipped to the rect
|
|
5429 |
// nor the mask, so we have to clip it here before calling drawWidget.
|
|
5430 |
QRegion toBePainted = context->rgn;
|
|
5431 |
toBePainted &= m_widget->rect();
|
|
5432 |
QWidgetPrivate *wd = qt_widget_private(m_widget);
|
|
5433 |
if (wd->extra && wd->extra->hasMask)
|
|
5434 |
toBePainted &= wd->extra->mask;
|
|
5435 |
|
|
5436 |
wd->drawWidget(context->pdev, toBePainted, context->offset, context->flags,
|
|
5437 |
context->sharedPainter, context->backingStore);
|
|
5438 |
}
|
|
5439 |
|
|
5440 |
QPixmap QWidgetEffectSourcePrivate::pixmap(Qt::CoordinateSystem system, QPoint *offset) const
|
|
5441 |
{
|
|
5442 |
const bool deviceCoordinates = (system == Qt::DeviceCoordinates);
|
|
5443 |
if (!context && deviceCoordinates) {
|
|
5444 |
// Device coordinates without context not yet supported.
|
|
5445 |
qWarning("QGraphicsEffectSource::pixmap: Not yet implemented, lacking device context");
|
|
5446 |
return QPixmap();
|
|
5447 |
}
|
|
5448 |
|
|
5449 |
QPoint pixmapOffset;
|
|
5450 |
QRectF sourceRect = m_widget->rect();
|
|
5451 |
|
|
5452 |
if (deviceCoordinates) {
|
|
5453 |
const QTransform &painterTransform = context->painter->worldTransform();
|
|
5454 |
sourceRect = painterTransform.mapRect(sourceRect);
|
|
5455 |
pixmapOffset = painterTransform.map(pixmapOffset);
|
|
5456 |
}
|
|
5457 |
|
|
5458 |
QRect effectRect = m_widget->graphicsEffect()->boundingRectFor(sourceRect).toAlignedRect();
|
|
5459 |
if (offset)
|
|
5460 |
*offset = effectRect.topLeft();
|
|
5461 |
|
|
5462 |
if (deviceCoordinates) {
|
|
5463 |
// Clip to device rect.
|
|
5464 |
int left, top, right, bottom;
|
|
5465 |
effectRect.getCoords(&left, &top, &right, &bottom);
|
|
5466 |
if (left < 0) {
|
|
5467 |
if (offset)
|
|
5468 |
offset->rx() += -left;
|
|
5469 |
effectRect.setX(0);
|
|
5470 |
}
|
|
5471 |
if (top < 0) {
|
|
5472 |
if (offset)
|
|
5473 |
offset->ry() += -top;
|
|
5474 |
effectRect.setY(0);
|
|
5475 |
}
|
|
5476 |
// NB! We use +-1 for historical reasons (see QRect documentation).
|
|
5477 |
QPaintDevice *device = context->painter->device();
|
|
5478 |
const int deviceWidth = device->width();
|
|
5479 |
const int deviceHeight = device->height();
|
|
5480 |
if (right + 1 > deviceWidth)
|
|
5481 |
effectRect.setRight(deviceWidth - 1);
|
|
5482 |
if (bottom + 1 > deviceHeight)
|
|
5483 |
effectRect.setBottom(deviceHeight -1);
|
|
5484 |
}
|
|
5485 |
|
|
5486 |
pixmapOffset -= effectRect.topLeft();
|
|
5487 |
|
|
5488 |
QPixmap pixmap(effectRect.size());
|
|
5489 |
pixmap.fill(Qt::transparent);
|
|
5490 |
m_widget->render(&pixmap, pixmapOffset);
|
|
5491 |
return pixmap;
|
|
5492 |
}
|
|
5493 |
|
|
5494 |
#ifndef QT_NO_GRAPHICSVIEW
|
|
5495 |
/*!
|
|
5496 |
\internal
|
|
5497 |
|
|
5498 |
Finds the nearest widget embedded in a graphics proxy widget along the chain formed by this
|
|
5499 |
widget and its ancestors. The search starts at \a origin (inclusive).
|
|
5500 |
If successful, the function returns the proxy that embeds the widget, or 0 if no embedded
|
|
5501 |
widget was found.
|
|
5502 |
*/
|
|
5503 |
QGraphicsProxyWidget * QWidgetPrivate::nearestGraphicsProxyWidget(const QWidget *origin)
|
|
5504 |
{
|
|
5505 |
if (origin) {
|
|
5506 |
QWExtra *extra = origin->d_func()->extra;
|
|
5507 |
if (extra && extra->proxyWidget)
|
|
5508 |
return extra->proxyWidget;
|
|
5509 |
return nearestGraphicsProxyWidget(origin->parentWidget());
|
|
5510 |
}
|
|
5511 |
return 0;
|
|
5512 |
}
|
|
5513 |
#endif
|
|
5514 |
|
|
5515 |
/*!
|
|
5516 |
\property QWidget::locale
|
|
5517 |
\brief the widget's locale
|
|
5518 |
\since 4.3
|
|
5519 |
|
|
5520 |
As long as no special locale has been set, this is either
|
|
5521 |
the parent's locale or (if this widget is a top level widget),
|
|
5522 |
the default locale.
|
|
5523 |
|
|
5524 |
If the widget displays dates or numbers, these should be formatted
|
|
5525 |
using the widget's locale.
|
|
5526 |
|
|
5527 |
\sa QLocale QLocale::setDefault()
|
|
5528 |
*/
|
|
5529 |
|
|
5530 |
void QWidgetPrivate::setLocale_helper(const QLocale &loc, bool forceUpdate)
|
|
5531 |
{
|
|
5532 |
Q_Q(QWidget);
|
|
5533 |
if (locale == loc && !forceUpdate)
|
|
5534 |
return;
|
|
5535 |
|
|
5536 |
locale = loc;
|
|
5537 |
|
|
5538 |
if (!children.isEmpty()) {
|
|
5539 |
for (int i = 0; i < children.size(); ++i) {
|
|
5540 |
QWidget *w = qobject_cast<QWidget*>(children.at(i));
|
|
5541 |
if (!w)
|
|
5542 |
continue;
|
|
5543 |
if (w->testAttribute(Qt::WA_SetLocale))
|
|
5544 |
continue;
|
|
5545 |
if (w->isWindow() && !w->testAttribute(Qt::WA_WindowPropagation))
|
|
5546 |
continue;
|
|
5547 |
w->d_func()->setLocale_helper(loc, forceUpdate);
|
|
5548 |
}
|
|
5549 |
}
|
|
5550 |
QEvent e(QEvent::LocaleChange);
|
|
5551 |
QApplication::sendEvent(q, &e);
|
|
5552 |
}
|
|
5553 |
|
|
5554 |
void QWidget::setLocale(const QLocale &locale)
|
|
5555 |
{
|
|
5556 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
5557 |
|
|
5558 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_SetLocale);
|
|
5559 |
d->setLocale_helper(locale);
|
|
5560 |
}
|
|
5561 |
|
|
5562 |
QLocale QWidget::locale() const
|
|
5563 |
{
|
|
5564 |
Q_D(const QWidget);
|
|
5565 |
|
|
5566 |
return d->locale;
|
|
5567 |
}
|
|
5568 |
|
|
5569 |
void QWidgetPrivate::resolveLocale()
|
|
5570 |
{
|
|
5571 |
Q_Q(const QWidget);
|
|
5572 |
|
|
5573 |
if (!q->testAttribute(Qt::WA_SetLocale)) {
|
|
5574 |
setLocale_helper(q->isWindow()
|
|
5575 |
? QLocale()
|
|
5576 |
: q->parentWidget()->locale());
|
|
5577 |
}
|
|
5578 |
}
|
|
5579 |
|
|
5580 |
void QWidget::unsetLocale()
|
|
5581 |
{
|
|
5582 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
5583 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_SetLocale, false);
|
|
5584 |
d->resolveLocale();
|
|
5585 |
}
|
|
5586 |
|
|
5587 |
static QString constructWindowTitleFromFilePath(const QString &filePath)
|
|
5588 |
{
|
|
5589 |
QFileInfo fi(filePath);
|
|
5590 |
QString windowTitle = fi.fileName() + QLatin1String("[*]");
|
|
5591 |
#ifndef Q_WS_MAC
|
|
5592 |
QString appName = QApplication::applicationName();
|
|
5593 |
if (!appName.isEmpty())
|
|
5594 |
windowTitle += QLatin1Char(' ') + QChar(0x2014) + QLatin1Char(' ') + appName;
|
|
5595 |
#endif
|
|
5596 |
return windowTitle;
|
|
5597 |
}
|
|
5598 |
|
|
5599 |
/*!
|
|
5600 |
\property QWidget::windowTitle
|
|
5601 |
\brief the window title (caption)
|
|
5602 |
|
|
5603 |
This property only makes sense for top-level widgets, such as
|
|
5604 |
windows and dialogs. If no caption has been set, the title is based of the
|
|
5605 |
\l windowFilePath. If neither of these is set, then the title is
|
|
5606 |
an empty string.
|
|
5607 |
|
|
5608 |
If you use the \l windowModified mechanism, the window title must
|
|
5609 |
contain a "[*]" placeholder, which indicates where the '*' should
|
|
5610 |
appear. Normally, it should appear right after the file name
|
|
5611 |
(e.g., "document1.txt[*] - Text Editor"). If the \l
|
|
5612 |
windowModified property is false (the default), the placeholder
|
|
5613 |
is simply removed.
|
|
5614 |
|
|
5615 |
\sa windowIcon, windowIconText, windowModified, windowFilePath
|
|
5616 |
*/
|
|
5617 |
QString QWidget::windowTitle() const
|
|
5618 |
{
|
|
5619 |
Q_D(const QWidget);
|
|
5620 |
if (d->extra && d->extra->topextra) {
|
|
5621 |
if (!d->extra->topextra->caption.isEmpty())
|
|
5622 |
return d->extra->topextra->caption;
|
|
5623 |
if (!d->extra->topextra->filePath.isEmpty())
|
|
5624 |
return constructWindowTitleFromFilePath(d->extra->topextra->filePath);
|
|
5625 |
}
|
|
5626 |
return QString();
|
|
5627 |
}
|
|
5628 |
|
|
5629 |
/*!
|
|
5630 |
Returns a modified window title with the [*] place holder
|
|
5631 |
replaced according to the rules described in QWidget::setWindowTitle
|
|
5632 |
|
|
5633 |
This function assumes that "[*]" can be quoted by another
|
|
5634 |
"[*]", so it will replace two place holders by one and
|
|
5635 |
a single last one by either "*" or nothing depending on
|
|
5636 |
the modified flag.
|
|
5637 |
|
|
5638 |
\internal
|
|
5639 |
*/
|
|
5640 |
QString qt_setWindowTitle_helperHelper(const QString &title, const QWidget *widget)
|
|
5641 |
{
|
|
5642 |
Q_ASSERT(widget);
|
|
5643 |
|
|
5644 |
#ifdef QT_EVAL
|
|
5645 |
extern QString qt_eval_adapt_window_title(const QString &title);
|
|
5646 |
QString cap = qt_eval_adapt_window_title(title);
|
|
5647 |
#else
|
|
5648 |
QString cap = title;
|
|
5649 |
#endif
|
|
5650 |
|
|
5651 |
if (cap.isEmpty())
|
|
5652 |
return cap;
|
|
5653 |
|
|
5654 |
QLatin1String placeHolder("[*]");
|
|
5655 |
int placeHolderLength = 3; // QLatin1String doesn't have length()
|
|
5656 |
|
|
5657 |
int index = cap.indexOf(placeHolder);
|
|
5658 |
|
|
5659 |
// here the magic begins
|
|
5660 |
while (index != -1) {
|
|
5661 |
index += placeHolderLength;
|
|
5662 |
int count = 1;
|
|
5663 |
while (cap.indexOf(placeHolder, index) == index) {
|
|
5664 |
++count;
|
|
5665 |
index += placeHolderLength;
|
|
5666 |
}
|
|
5667 |
|
|
5668 |
if (count%2) { // odd number of [*] -> replace last one
|
|
5669 |
int lastIndex = cap.lastIndexOf(placeHolder, index - 1);
|
|
5670 |
if (widget->isWindowModified()
|
|
5671 |
&& widget->style()->styleHint(QStyle::SH_TitleBar_ModifyNotification, 0, widget))
|
|
5672 |
cap.replace(lastIndex, 3, QWidget::tr("*"));
|
|
5673 |
else
|
|
5674 |
cap.remove(lastIndex, 3);
|
|
5675 |
}
|
|
5676 |
|
|
5677 |
index = cap.indexOf(placeHolder, index);
|
|
5678 |
}
|
|
5679 |
|
|
5680 |
cap.replace(QLatin1String("[*][*]"), placeHolder);
|
|
5681 |
|
|
5682 |
return cap;
|
|
5683 |
}
|
|
5684 |
|
|
5685 |
void QWidgetPrivate::setWindowTitle_helper(const QString &title)
|
|
5686 |
{
|
|
5687 |
Q_Q(QWidget);
|
|
5688 |
if (q->testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Created))
|
|
5689 |
setWindowTitle_sys(qt_setWindowTitle_helperHelper(title, q));
|
|
5690 |
}
|
|
5691 |
|
|
5692 |
void QWidgetPrivate::setWindowIconText_helper(const QString &title)
|
|
5693 |
{
|
|
5694 |
Q_Q(QWidget);
|
|
5695 |
if (q->testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Created))
|
|
5696 |
setWindowIconText_sys(qt_setWindowTitle_helperHelper(title, q));
|
|
5697 |
}
|
|
5698 |
|
|
5699 |
void QWidget::setWindowIconText(const QString &iconText)
|
|
5700 |
{
|
|
5701 |
if (QWidget::windowIconText() == iconText)
|
|
5702 |
return;
|
|
5703 |
|
|
5704 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
5705 |
d->topData()->iconText = iconText;
|
|
5706 |
d->setWindowIconText_helper(iconText);
|
|
5707 |
|
|
5708 |
QEvent e(QEvent::IconTextChange);
|
|
5709 |
QApplication::sendEvent(this, &e);
|
|
5710 |
}
|
|
5711 |
|
|
5712 |
void QWidget::setWindowTitle(const QString &title)
|
|
5713 |
{
|
|
5714 |
if (QWidget::windowTitle() == title && !title.isEmpty() && !title.isNull())
|
|
5715 |
return;
|
|
5716 |
|
|
5717 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
5718 |
d->topData()->caption = title;
|
|
5719 |
d->setWindowTitle_helper(title);
|
|
5720 |
|
|
5721 |
QEvent e(QEvent::WindowTitleChange);
|
|
5722 |
QApplication::sendEvent(this, &e);
|
|
5723 |
}
|
|
5724 |
|
|
5725 |
|
|
5726 |
/*!
|
|
5727 |
\property QWidget::windowIcon
|
|
5728 |
\brief the widget's icon
|
|
5729 |
|
|
5730 |
This property only makes sense for windows. If no icon
|
|
5731 |
has been set, windowIcon() returns the application icon
|
|
5732 |
(QApplication::windowIcon()).
|
|
5733 |
|
|
5734 |
\sa windowIconText, windowTitle
|
|
5735 |
*/
|
|
5736 |
QIcon QWidget::windowIcon() const
|
|
5737 |
{
|
|
5738 |
const QWidget *w = this;
|
|
5739 |
while (w) {
|
|
5740 |
const QWidgetPrivate *d = w->d_func();
|
|
5741 |
if (d->extra && d->extra->topextra && d->extra->topextra->icon)
|
|
5742 |
return *d->extra->topextra->icon;
|
|
5743 |
w = w->parentWidget();
|
|
5744 |
}
|
|
5745 |
return QApplication::windowIcon();
|
|
5746 |
}
|
|
5747 |
|
|
5748 |
void QWidgetPrivate::setWindowIcon_helper()
|
|
5749 |
{
|
|
5750 |
QEvent e(QEvent::WindowIconChange);
|
|
5751 |
QApplication::sendEvent(q_func(), &e);
|
|
5752 |
for (int i = 0; i < children.size(); ++i) {
|
|
5753 |
QWidget *w = qobject_cast<QWidget *>(children.at(i));
|
|
5754 |
if (w && !w->isWindow())
|
|
5755 |
QApplication::sendEvent(w, &e);
|
|
5756 |
}
|
|
5757 |
}
|
|
5758 |
|
|
5759 |
void QWidget::setWindowIcon(const QIcon &icon)
|
|
5760 |
{
|
|
5761 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
5762 |
|
|
5763 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_SetWindowIcon, !icon.isNull());
|
|
5764 |
d->createTLExtra();
|
|
5765 |
|
|
5766 |
if (!d->extra->topextra->icon)
|
|
5767 |
d->extra->topextra->icon = new QIcon();
|
|
5768 |
*d->extra->topextra->icon = icon;
|
|
5769 |
|
|
5770 |
delete d->extra->topextra->iconPixmap;
|
|
5771 |
d->extra->topextra->iconPixmap = 0;
|
|
5772 |
|
|
5773 |
d->setWindowIcon_sys();
|
|
5774 |
d->setWindowIcon_helper();
|
|
5775 |
}
|
|
5776 |
|
|
5777 |
|
|
5778 |
/*!
|
|
5779 |
\property QWidget::windowIconText
|
|
5780 |
\brief the widget's icon text
|
|
5781 |
|
|
5782 |
This property only makes sense for windows. If no icon
|
|
5783 |
text has been set, this functions returns an empty string.
|
|
5784 |
|
|
5785 |
\sa windowIcon, windowTitle
|
|
5786 |
*/
|
|
5787 |
|
|
5788 |
QString QWidget::windowIconText() const
|
|
5789 |
{
|
|
5790 |
Q_D(const QWidget);
|
|
5791 |
return (d->extra && d->extra->topextra) ? d->extra->topextra->iconText : QString();
|
|
5792 |
}
|
|
5793 |
|
|
5794 |
/*!
|
|
5795 |
\property QWidget::windowFilePath
|
|
5796 |
\since 4.4
|
|
5797 |
\brief the file path associated with a widget
|
|
5798 |
|
|
5799 |
This property only makes sense for windows. It associates a file path with
|
|
5800 |
a window. If you set the file path, but have not set the window title, Qt
|
|
5801 |
sets the window title to contain a string created using the following
|
|
5802 |
components.
|
|
5803 |
|
|
5804 |
On Mac OS X:
|
|
5805 |
|
|
5806 |
\list
|
|
5807 |
\o The file name of the specified path, obtained using QFileInfo::fileName().
|
|
5808 |
\endlist
|
|
5809 |
|
|
5810 |
On Windows and X11:
|
|
5811 |
|
|
5812 |
\list
|
|
5813 |
\o The file name of the specified path, obtained using QFileInfo::fileName().
|
|
5814 |
\o An optional \c{*} character, if the \l windowModified property is set.
|
|
5815 |
\o The \c{0x2014} unicode character, padded either side by spaces.
|
|
5816 |
\o The application name, obtained from the application's
|
|
5817 |
\l{QCoreApplication::}{applicationName} property.
|
|
5818 |
\endlist
|
|
5819 |
|
|
5820 |
If the window title is set at any point, then the window title takes precedence and
|
|
5821 |
will be shown instead of the file path string.
|
|
5822 |
|
|
5823 |
Additionally, on Mac OS X, this has an added benefit that it sets the
|
|
5824 |
\l{http://developer.apple.com/documentation/UserExperience/Conceptual/OSXHIGuidelines/XHIGWindows/chapter_17_section_3.html}{proxy icon}
|
|
5825 |
for the window, assuming that the file path exists.
|
|
5826 |
|
|
5827 |
If no file path is set, this property contains an empty string.
|
|
5828 |
|
|
5829 |
By default, this property contains an empty string.
|
|
5830 |
|
|
5831 |
\sa windowTitle, windowIcon
|
|
5832 |
*/
|
|
5833 |
|
|
5834 |
QString QWidget::windowFilePath() const
|
|
5835 |
{
|
|
5836 |
Q_D(const QWidget);
|
|
5837 |
return (d->extra && d->extra->topextra) ? d->extra->topextra->filePath : QString();
|
|
5838 |
}
|
|
5839 |
|
|
5840 |
void QWidget::setWindowFilePath(const QString &filePath)
|
|
5841 |
{
|
|
5842 |
if (filePath == windowFilePath())
|
|
5843 |
return;
|
|
5844 |
|
|
5845 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
5846 |
|
|
5847 |
d->createTLExtra();
|
|
5848 |
d->extra->topextra->filePath = filePath;
|
|
5849 |
d->setWindowFilePath_helper(filePath);
|
|
5850 |
}
|
|
5851 |
|
|
5852 |
void QWidgetPrivate::setWindowFilePath_helper(const QString &filePath)
|
|
5853 |
{
|
|
5854 |
if (extra->topextra && extra->topextra->caption.isEmpty()) {
|
|
5855 |
#ifdef Q_WS_MAC
|
|
5856 |
setWindowTitle_helper(QFileInfo(filePath).fileName());
|
|
5857 |
#else
|
|
5858 |
Q_Q(QWidget);
|
|
5859 |
Q_UNUSED(filePath);
|
|
5860 |
setWindowTitle_helper(q->windowTitle());
|
|
5861 |
#endif
|
|
5862 |
}
|
|
5863 |
#ifdef Q_WS_MAC
|
|
5864 |
setWindowFilePath_sys(filePath);
|
|
5865 |
#endif
|
|
5866 |
}
|
|
5867 |
|
|
5868 |
/*!
|
|
5869 |
Returns the window's role, or an empty string.
|
|
5870 |
|
|
5871 |
\sa windowIcon, windowTitle
|
|
5872 |
*/
|
|
5873 |
|
|
5874 |
QString QWidget::windowRole() const
|
|
5875 |
{
|
|
5876 |
Q_D(const QWidget);
|
|
5877 |
return (d->extra && d->extra->topextra) ? d->extra->topextra->role : QString();
|
|
5878 |
}
|
|
5879 |
|
|
5880 |
/*!
|
|
5881 |
Sets the window's role to \a role. This only makes sense for
|
|
5882 |
windows on X11.
|
|
5883 |
*/
|
|
5884 |
void QWidget::setWindowRole(const QString &role)
|
|
5885 |
{
|
|
5886 |
#if defined(Q_WS_X11)
|
|
5887 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
5888 |
d->topData()->role = role;
|
|
5889 |
d->setWindowRole();
|
|
5890 |
#else
|
|
5891 |
Q_UNUSED(role)
|
|
5892 |
#endif
|
|
5893 |
}
|
|
5894 |
|
|
5895 |
/*!
|
|
5896 |
\property QWidget::mouseTracking
|
|
5897 |
\brief whether mouse tracking is enabled for the widget
|
|
5898 |
|
|
5899 |
If mouse tracking is disabled (the default), the widget only
|
|
5900 |
receives mouse move events when at least one mouse button is
|
|
5901 |
pressed while the mouse is being moved.
|
|
5902 |
|
|
5903 |
If mouse tracking is enabled, the widget receives mouse move
|
|
5904 |
events even if no buttons are pressed.
|
|
5905 |
|
|
5906 |
\sa mouseMoveEvent()
|
|
5907 |
*/
|
|
5908 |
|
|
5909 |
|
|
5910 |
/*!
|
|
5911 |
Sets the widget's focus proxy to widget \a w. If \a w is 0, the
|
|
5912 |
function resets this widget to have no focus proxy.
|
|
5913 |
|
|
5914 |
Some widgets can "have focus", but create a child widget, such as
|
|
5915 |
QLineEdit, to actually handle the focus. In this case, the widget
|
|
5916 |
can set the line edit to be its focus proxy.
|
|
5917 |
|
|
5918 |
setFocusProxy() sets the widget which will actually get focus when
|
|
5919 |
"this widget" gets it. If there is a focus proxy, setFocus() and
|
|
5920 |
hasFocus() operate on the focus proxy.
|
|
5921 |
|
|
5922 |
\sa focusProxy()
|
|
5923 |
*/
|
|
5924 |
|
|
5925 |
void QWidget::setFocusProxy(QWidget * w)
|
|
5926 |
{
|
|
5927 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
5928 |
if (!w && !d->extra)
|
|
5929 |
return;
|
|
5930 |
|
|
5931 |
for (QWidget* fp = w; fp; fp = fp->focusProxy()) {
|
|
5932 |
if (fp == this) {
|
|
5933 |
qWarning("QWidget: %s (%s) already in focus proxy chain", metaObject()->className(), objectName().toLocal8Bit().constData());
|
|
5934 |
return;
|
|
5935 |
}
|
|
5936 |
}
|
|
5937 |
|
|
5938 |
d->createExtra();
|
|
5939 |
d->extra->focus_proxy = w;
|
|
5940 |
}
|
|
5941 |
|
|
5942 |
|
|
5943 |
/*!
|
|
5944 |
Returns the focus proxy, or 0 if there is no focus proxy.
|
|
5945 |
|
|
5946 |
\sa setFocusProxy()
|
|
5947 |
*/
|
|
5948 |
|
|
5949 |
QWidget * QWidget::focusProxy() const
|
|
5950 |
{
|
|
5951 |
Q_D(const QWidget);
|
|
5952 |
return d->extra ? (QWidget *)d->extra->focus_proxy : 0;
|
|
5953 |
}
|
|
5954 |
|
|
5955 |
|
|
5956 |
/*!
|
|
5957 |
\property QWidget::focus
|
|
5958 |
\brief whether this widget (or its focus proxy) has the keyboard
|
|
5959 |
input focus
|
|
5960 |
|
|
5961 |
By default, this property is false.
|
|
5962 |
|
|
5963 |
\note Obtaining the value of this property for a widget is effectively equivalent
|
|
5964 |
to checking whether QApplication::focusWidget() refers to the widget.
|
|
5965 |
|
|
5966 |
\sa setFocus(), clearFocus(), setFocusPolicy(), QApplication::focusWidget()
|
|
5967 |
*/
|
|
5968 |
bool QWidget::hasFocus() const
|
|
5969 |
{
|
|
5970 |
const QWidget* w = this;
|
|
5971 |
while (w->d_func()->extra && w->d_func()->extra->focus_proxy)
|
|
5972 |
w = w->d_func()->extra->focus_proxy;
|
|
5973 |
if (QWidget *window = w->window()) {
|
|
5974 |
#ifndef QT_NO_GRAPHICSVIEW
|
|
5975 |
QWExtra *e = window->d_func()->extra;
|
|
5976 |
if (e && e->proxyWidget && e->proxyWidget->hasFocus() && window->focusWidget() == w)
|
|
5977 |
return true;
|
|
5978 |
#endif
|
|
5979 |
}
|
|
5980 |
return (QApplication::focusWidget() == w);
|
|
5981 |
}
|
|
5982 |
|
|
5983 |
/*!
|
|
5984 |
Gives the keyboard input focus to this widget (or its focus
|
|
5985 |
proxy) if this widget or one of its parents is the \link
|
|
5986 |
isActiveWindow() active window\endlink. The \a reason argument will
|
|
5987 |
be passed into any focus event sent from this function, it is used
|
|
5988 |
to give an explanation of what caused the widget to get focus.
|
|
5989 |
If the window is not active, the widget will be given the focus when
|
|
5990 |
the window becomes active.
|
|
5991 |
|
|
5992 |
First, a focus out event is sent to the focus widget (if any) to
|
|
5993 |
tell it that it is about to lose the focus. Then a focus in event
|
|
5994 |
is sent to this widget to tell it that it just received the focus.
|
|
5995 |
(Nothing happens if the focus in and focus out widgets are the
|
|
5996 |
same.)
|
|
5997 |
|
|
5998 |
setFocus() gives focus to a widget regardless of its focus policy,
|
|
5999 |
but does not clear any keyboard grab (see grabKeyboard()).
|
|
6000 |
|
|
6001 |
Be aware that if the widget is hidden, it will not accept focus
|
|
6002 |
until it is shown.
|
|
6003 |
|
|
6004 |
\warning If you call setFocus() in a function which may itself be
|
|
6005 |
called from focusOutEvent() or focusInEvent(), you may get an
|
|
6006 |
infinite recursion.
|
|
6007 |
|
|
6008 |
\sa hasFocus(), clearFocus(), focusInEvent(), focusOutEvent(),
|
|
6009 |
setFocusPolicy(), focusWidget(), QApplication::focusWidget(), grabKeyboard(),
|
|
6010 |
grabMouse(), {Keyboard Focus}
|
|
6011 |
*/
|
|
6012 |
|
|
6013 |
void QWidget::setFocus(Qt::FocusReason reason)
|
|
6014 |
{
|
|
6015 |
if (!isEnabled())
|
|
6016 |
return;
|
|
6017 |
|
|
6018 |
QWidget *f = this;
|
|
6019 |
while (f->d_func()->extra && f->d_func()->extra->focus_proxy)
|
|
6020 |
f = f->d_func()->extra->focus_proxy;
|
|
6021 |
|
|
6022 |
if (QApplication::focusWidget() == f
|
|
6023 |
#if defined(Q_WS_WIN)
|
|
6024 |
&& GetFocus() == f->internalWinId()
|
|
6025 |
#endif
|
|
6026 |
)
|
|
6027 |
return;
|
|
6028 |
|
|
6029 |
#ifndef QT_NO_GRAPHICSVIEW
|
|
6030 |
QWidget *previousProxyFocus = 0;
|
|
6031 |
if (QWExtra *topData = window()->d_func()->extra) {
|
|
6032 |
if (topData->proxyWidget && topData->proxyWidget->hasFocus()) {
|
|
6033 |
previousProxyFocus = topData->proxyWidget->widget()->focusWidget();
|
|
6034 |
if (previousProxyFocus && previousProxyFocus->focusProxy())
|
|
6035 |
previousProxyFocus = previousProxyFocus->focusProxy();
|
|
6036 |
}
|
|
6037 |
}
|
|
6038 |
#endif
|
|
6039 |
|
|
6040 |
QWidget *w = f;
|
|
6041 |
if (isHidden()) {
|
|
6042 |
while (w && w->isHidden()) {
|
|
6043 |
w->d_func()->focus_child = f;
|
|
6044 |
w = w->isWindow() ? 0 : w->parentWidget();
|
|
6045 |
}
|
|
6046 |
} else {
|
|
6047 |
while (w) {
|
|
6048 |
w->d_func()->focus_child = f;
|
|
6049 |
w = w->isWindow() ? 0 : w->parentWidget();
|
|
6050 |
}
|
|
6051 |
}
|
|
6052 |
|
|
6053 |
#ifndef QT_NO_GRAPHICSVIEW
|
|
6054 |
// Update proxy state
|
|
6055 |
if (QWExtra *topData = window()->d_func()->extra) {
|
|
6056 |
if (topData->proxyWidget && !topData->proxyWidget->hasFocus()) {
|
|
6057 |
topData->proxyWidget->d_func()->focusFromWidgetToProxy = 1;
|
|
6058 |
topData->proxyWidget->setFocus(reason);
|
|
6059 |
topData->proxyWidget->d_func()->focusFromWidgetToProxy = 0;
|
|
6060 |
}
|
|
6061 |
}
|
|
6062 |
#endif
|
|
6063 |
|
|
6064 |
if (f->isActiveWindow()) {
|
|
6065 |
QApplicationPrivate::setFocusWidget(f, reason);
|
|
6066 |
#ifndef QT_NO_ACCESSIBILITY
|
|
6067 |
# ifdef Q_OS_WIN
|
|
6068 |
// The negation of the condition in setFocus_sys
|
|
6069 |
if (!(testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Created) && window()->windowType() != Qt::Popup && internalWinId()))
|
|
6070 |
//setFocusWidget will already post a focus event for us (that the AT client receives) on Windows
|
|
6071 |
# endif
|
|
6072 |
QAccessible::updateAccessibility(f, 0, QAccessible::Focus);
|
|
6073 |
#endif
|
|
6074 |
#ifndef QT_NO_GRAPHICSVIEW
|
|
6075 |
if (QWExtra *topData = window()->d_func()->extra) {
|
|
6076 |
if (topData->proxyWidget) {
|
|
6077 |
if (previousProxyFocus && previousProxyFocus != f) {
|
|
6078 |
// Send event to self
|
|
6079 |
QFocusEvent event(QEvent::FocusOut, reason);
|
|
6080 |
QPointer<QWidget> that = previousProxyFocus;
|
|
6081 |
QApplication::sendEvent(previousProxyFocus, &event);
|
|
6082 |
if (that)
|
|
6083 |
QApplication::sendEvent(that->style(), &event);
|
|
6084 |
}
|
|
6085 |
if (!isHidden()) {
|
|
6086 |
// Send event to self
|
|
6087 |
QFocusEvent event(QEvent::FocusIn, reason);
|
|
6088 |
QPointer<QWidget> that = f;
|
|
6089 |
QApplication::sendEvent(f, &event);
|
|
6090 |
if (that)
|
|
6091 |
QApplication::sendEvent(that->style(), &event);
|
|
6092 |
}
|
|
6093 |
}
|
|
6094 |
}
|
|
6095 |
#endif
|
|
6096 |
}
|
|
6097 |
}
|
|
6098 |
|
|
6099 |
/*!
|
|
6100 |
\fn void QWidget::setFocus()
|
|
6101 |
\overload
|
|
6102 |
|
|
6103 |
Gives the keyboard input focus to this widget (or its focus
|
|
6104 |
proxy) if this widget or one of its parents is the
|
|
6105 |
\l{isActiveWindow()}{active window}.
|
|
6106 |
*/
|
|
6107 |
|
|
6108 |
/*!
|
|
6109 |
Takes keyboard input focus from the widget.
|
|
6110 |
|
|
6111 |
If the widget has active focus, a \link focusOutEvent() focus out
|
|
6112 |
event\endlink is sent to this widget to tell it that it is about
|
|
6113 |
to lose the focus.
|
|
6114 |
|
|
6115 |
This widget must enable focus setting in order to get the keyboard
|
|
6116 |
input focus, i.e. it must call setFocusPolicy().
|
|
6117 |
|
|
6118 |
\sa hasFocus(), setFocus(), focusInEvent(), focusOutEvent(),
|
|
6119 |
setFocusPolicy(), QApplication::focusWidget()
|
|
6120 |
*/
|
|
6121 |
|
|
6122 |
void QWidget::clearFocus()
|
|
6123 |
{
|
|
6124 |
QWidget *w = this;
|
|
6125 |
while (w) {
|
|
6126 |
if (w->d_func()->focus_child == this)
|
|
6127 |
w->d_func()->focus_child = 0;
|
|
6128 |
w = w->parentWidget();
|
|
6129 |
}
|
|
6130 |
#ifndef QT_NO_GRAPHICSVIEW
|
|
6131 |
QWExtra *topData = d_func()->extra;
|
|
6132 |
if (topData && topData->proxyWidget)
|
|
6133 |
topData->proxyWidget->clearFocus();
|
|
6134 |
#endif
|
|
6135 |
|
|
6136 |
if (hasFocus()) {
|
|
6137 |
// Update proxy state
|
|
6138 |
QApplicationPrivate::setFocusWidget(0, Qt::OtherFocusReason);
|
|
6139 |
#if defined(Q_WS_WIN)
|
|
6140 |
if (!(windowType() == Qt::Popup) && GetFocus() == internalWinId())
|
|
6141 |
SetFocus(0);
|
|
6142 |
else
|
|
6143 |
#endif
|
|
6144 |
{
|
|
6145 |
#ifndef QT_NO_ACCESSIBILITY
|
|
6146 |
QAccessible::updateAccessibility(this, 0, QAccessible::Focus);
|
|
6147 |
#endif
|
|
6148 |
}
|
|
6149 |
}
|
|
6150 |
}
|
|
6151 |
|
|
6152 |
|
|
6153 |
/*!
|
|
6154 |
\fn bool QWidget::focusNextChild()
|
|
6155 |
|
|
6156 |
Finds a new widget to give the keyboard focus to, as appropriate
|
|
6157 |
for \key Tab, and returns true if it can find a new widget, or
|
|
6158 |
false if it can't.
|
|
6159 |
|
|
6160 |
\sa focusPreviousChild()
|
|
6161 |
*/
|
|
6162 |
|
|
6163 |
/*!
|
|
6164 |
\fn bool QWidget::focusPreviousChild()
|
|
6165 |
|
|
6166 |
Finds a new widget to give the keyboard focus to, as appropriate
|
|
6167 |
for \key Shift+Tab, and returns true if it can find a new widget,
|
|
6168 |
or false if it can't.
|
|
6169 |
|
|
6170 |
\sa focusNextChild()
|
|
6171 |
*/
|
|
6172 |
|
|
6173 |
/*!
|
|
6174 |
Finds a new widget to give the keyboard focus to, as appropriate
|
|
6175 |
for Tab and Shift+Tab, and returns true if it can find a new
|
|
6176 |
widget, or false if it can't.
|
|
6177 |
|
|
6178 |
If \a next is true, this function searches forward, if \a next
|
|
6179 |
is false, it searches backward.
|
|
6180 |
|
|
6181 |
Sometimes, you will want to reimplement this function. For
|
|
6182 |
example, a web browser might reimplement it to move its "current
|
|
6183 |
active link" forward or backward, and call
|
|
6184 |
focusNextPrevChild() only when it reaches the last or
|
|
6185 |
first link on the "page".
|
|
6186 |
|
|
6187 |
Child widgets call focusNextPrevChild() on their parent widgets,
|
|
6188 |
but only the window that contains the child widgets decides where
|
|
6189 |
to redirect focus. By reimplementing this function for an object,
|
|
6190 |
you thus gain control of focus traversal for all child widgets.
|
|
6191 |
|
|
6192 |
\sa focusNextChild(), focusPreviousChild()
|
|
6193 |
*/
|
|
6194 |
|
|
6195 |
bool QWidget::focusNextPrevChild(bool next)
|
|
6196 |
{
|
|
6197 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
6198 |
QWidget* p = parentWidget();
|
|
6199 |
bool isSubWindow = (windowType() == Qt::SubWindow);
|
|
6200 |
if (!isWindow() && !isSubWindow && p)
|
|
6201 |
return p->focusNextPrevChild(next);
|
|
6202 |
#ifndef QT_NO_GRAPHICSVIEW
|
|
6203 |
if (d->extra && d->extra->proxyWidget)
|
|
6204 |
return d->extra->proxyWidget->focusNextPrevChild(next);
|
|
6205 |
#endif
|
|
6206 |
QWidget *w = QApplicationPrivate::focusNextPrevChild_helper(this, next);
|
|
6207 |
if (!w) return false;
|
|
6208 |
|
|
6209 |
w->setFocus(next ? Qt::TabFocusReason : Qt::BacktabFocusReason);
|
|
6210 |
return true;
|
|
6211 |
}
|
|
6212 |
|
|
6213 |
/*!
|
|
6214 |
Returns the last child of this widget that setFocus had been
|
|
6215 |
called on. For top level widgets this is the widget that will get
|
|
6216 |
focus in case this window gets activated
|
|
6217 |
|
|
6218 |
This is not the same as QApplication::focusWidget(), which returns
|
|
6219 |
the focus widget in the currently active window.
|
|
6220 |
*/
|
|
6221 |
|
|
6222 |
QWidget *QWidget::focusWidget() const
|
|
6223 |
{
|
|
6224 |
return const_cast<QWidget *>(d_func()->focus_child);
|
|
6225 |
}
|
|
6226 |
|
|
6227 |
/*!
|
|
6228 |
Returns the next widget in this widget's focus chain.
|
|
6229 |
|
|
6230 |
\sa previousInFocusChain()
|
|
6231 |
*/
|
|
6232 |
QWidget *QWidget::nextInFocusChain() const
|
|
6233 |
{
|
|
6234 |
return const_cast<QWidget *>(d_func()->focus_next);
|
|
6235 |
}
|
|
6236 |
|
|
6237 |
/*!
|
|
6238 |
\brief The previousInFocusChain function returns the previous
|
|
6239 |
widget in this widget's focus chain.
|
|
6240 |
|
|
6241 |
\sa nextInFocusChain()
|
|
6242 |
|
|
6243 |
\since 4.6
|
|
6244 |
*/
|
|
6245 |
QWidget *QWidget::previousInFocusChain() const
|
|
6246 |
{
|
|
6247 |
return const_cast<QWidget *>(d_func()->focus_prev);
|
|
6248 |
}
|
|
6249 |
|
|
6250 |
/*!
|
|
6251 |
\property QWidget::isActiveWindow
|
|
6252 |
\brief whether this widget's window is the active window
|
|
6253 |
|
|
6254 |
The active window is the window that contains the widget that has
|
|
6255 |
keyboard focus (The window may still have focus if it has no
|
|
6256 |
widgets or none of its widgets accepts keyboard focus).
|
|
6257 |
|
|
6258 |
When popup windows are visible, this property is true for both the
|
|
6259 |
active window \e and for the popup.
|
|
6260 |
|
|
6261 |
By default, this property is false.
|
|
6262 |
|
|
6263 |
\sa activateWindow(), QApplication::activeWindow()
|
|
6264 |
*/
|
|
6265 |
bool QWidget::isActiveWindow() const
|
|
6266 |
{
|
|
6267 |
QWidget *tlw = window();
|
|
6268 |
if(tlw == QApplication::activeWindow() || (isVisible() && (tlw->windowType() == Qt::Popup)))
|
|
6269 |
return true;
|
|
6270 |
|
|
6271 |
#ifndef QT_NO_GRAPHICSVIEW
|
|
6272 |
if (QWExtra *tlwExtra = tlw->d_func()->extra) {
|
|
6273 |
if (isVisible() && tlwExtra->proxyWidget)
|
|
6274 |
return tlwExtra->proxyWidget->isActiveWindow();
|
|
6275 |
}
|
|
6276 |
#endif
|
|
6277 |
|
|
6278 |
#ifdef Q_WS_MAC
|
|
6279 |
extern bool qt_mac_is_macdrawer(const QWidget *); //qwidget_mac.cpp
|
|
6280 |
if(qt_mac_is_macdrawer(tlw) &&
|
|
6281 |
tlw->parentWidget() && tlw->parentWidget()->isActiveWindow())
|
|
6282 |
return true;
|
|
6283 |
|
|
6284 |
extern bool qt_mac_insideKeyWindow(const QWidget *); //qwidget_mac.cpp
|
|
6285 |
if (QApplication::testAttribute(Qt::AA_MacPluginApplication) && qt_mac_insideKeyWindow(tlw))
|
|
6286 |
return true;
|
|
6287 |
#endif
|
|
6288 |
if(style()->styleHint(QStyle::SH_Widget_ShareActivation, 0, this)) {
|
|
6289 |
if(tlw->windowType() == Qt::Tool &&
|
|
6290 |
!tlw->isModal() &&
|
|
6291 |
(!tlw->parentWidget() || tlw->parentWidget()->isActiveWindow()))
|
|
6292 |
return true;
|
|
6293 |
QWidget *w = QApplication::activeWindow();
|
|
6294 |
while(w && tlw->windowType() == Qt::Tool &&
|
|
6295 |
!w->isModal() && w->parentWidget()) {
|
|
6296 |
w = w->parentWidget()->window();
|
|
6297 |
if(w == tlw)
|
|
6298 |
return true;
|
|
6299 |
}
|
|
6300 |
}
|
|
6301 |
#if defined(Q_WS_WIN32)
|
|
6302 |
HWND active = GetActiveWindow();
|
|
6303 |
if (!tlw->testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Created))
|
|
6304 |
return false;
|
|
6305 |
return active == tlw->internalWinId() || ::IsChild(active, tlw->internalWinId());
|
|
6306 |
#else
|
|
6307 |
return false;
|
|
6308 |
#endif
|
|
6309 |
}
|
|
6310 |
|
|
6311 |
/*!
|
|
6312 |
Puts the \a second widget after the \a first widget in the focus order.
|
|
6313 |
|
|
6314 |
Note that since the tab order of the \a second widget is changed, you
|
|
6315 |
should order a chain like this:
|
|
6316 |
|
|
6317 |
\snippet doc/src/snippets/code/src_gui_kernel_qwidget.cpp 9
|
|
6318 |
|
|
6319 |
\e not like this:
|
|
6320 |
|
|
6321 |
\snippet doc/src/snippets/code/src_gui_kernel_qwidget.cpp 10
|
|
6322 |
|
|
6323 |
If \a first or \a second has a focus proxy, setTabOrder()
|
|
6324 |
correctly substitutes the proxy.
|
|
6325 |
|
|
6326 |
\sa setFocusPolicy(), setFocusProxy(), {Keyboard Focus}
|
|
6327 |
*/
|
|
6328 |
void QWidget::setTabOrder(QWidget* first, QWidget *second)
|
|
6329 |
{
|
|
6330 |
if (!first || !second || first->focusPolicy() == Qt::NoFocus || second->focusPolicy() == Qt::NoFocus)
|
|
6331 |
return;
|
|
6332 |
|
|
6333 |
if (first->window() != second->window()) {
|
|
6334 |
qWarning("QWidget::setTabOrder: 'first' and 'second' must be in the same window");
|
|
6335 |
return;
|
|
6336 |
}
|
|
6337 |
|
|
6338 |
QWidget *fp = first->focusProxy();
|
|
6339 |
if (fp) {
|
|
6340 |
// If first is redirected, set first to the last child of first
|
|
6341 |
// that can take keyboard focus so that second is inserted after
|
|
6342 |
// that last child, and the focus order within first is (more
|
|
6343 |
// likely to be) preserved.
|
|
6344 |
QList<QWidget *> l = qFindChildren<QWidget *>(first);
|
|
6345 |
for (int i = l.size()-1; i >= 0; --i) {
|
|
6346 |
QWidget * next = l.at(i);
|
|
6347 |
if (next->window() == fp->window()) {
|
|
6348 |
fp = next;
|
|
6349 |
if (fp->focusPolicy() != Qt::NoFocus)
|
|
6350 |
break;
|
|
6351 |
}
|
|
6352 |
}
|
|
6353 |
first = fp;
|
|
6354 |
}
|
|
6355 |
|
|
6356 |
|
|
6357 |
if (QWidget *sp = second->focusProxy())
|
|
6358 |
second = sp;
|
|
6359 |
|
|
6360 |
// QWidget *fp = first->d_func()->focus_prev;
|
|
6361 |
QWidget *fn = first->d_func()->focus_next;
|
|
6362 |
|
|
6363 |
if (fn == second)
|
|
6364 |
return;
|
|
6365 |
|
|
6366 |
QWidget *sp = second->d_func()->focus_prev;
|
|
6367 |
QWidget *sn = second->d_func()->focus_next;
|
|
6368 |
|
|
6369 |
fn->d_func()->focus_prev = second;
|
|
6370 |
first->d_func()->focus_next = second;
|
|
6371 |
|
|
6372 |
second->d_func()->focus_next = fn;
|
|
6373 |
second->d_func()->focus_prev = first;
|
|
6374 |
|
|
6375 |
sp->d_func()->focus_next = sn;
|
|
6376 |
sn->d_func()->focus_prev = sp;
|
|
6377 |
|
|
6378 |
|
|
6379 |
Q_ASSERT(first->d_func()->focus_next->d_func()->focus_prev == first);
|
|
6380 |
Q_ASSERT(first->d_func()->focus_prev->d_func()->focus_next == first);
|
|
6381 |
|
|
6382 |
Q_ASSERT(second->d_func()->focus_next->d_func()->focus_prev == second);
|
|
6383 |
Q_ASSERT(second->d_func()->focus_prev->d_func()->focus_next == second);
|
|
6384 |
}
|
|
6385 |
|
|
6386 |
/*!\internal
|
|
6387 |
|
|
6388 |
Moves the relevant subwidgets of this widget from the \a oldtlw's
|
|
6389 |
tab chain to that of the new parent, if there's anything to move and
|
|
6390 |
we're really moving
|
|
6391 |
|
|
6392 |
This function is called from QWidget::reparent() *after* the widget
|
|
6393 |
has been reparented.
|
|
6394 |
|
|
6395 |
\sa reparent()
|
|
6396 |
*/
|
|
6397 |
|
|
6398 |
void QWidgetPrivate::reparentFocusWidgets(QWidget * oldtlw)
|
|
6399 |
{
|
|
6400 |
Q_Q(QWidget);
|
|
6401 |
if (oldtlw == q->window())
|
|
6402 |
return; // nothing to do
|
|
6403 |
|
|
6404 |
if(focus_child)
|
|
6405 |
focus_child->clearFocus();
|
|
6406 |
|
|
6407 |
// separate the focus chain into new (children of myself) and old (the rest)
|
|
6408 |
QWidget *firstOld = 0;
|
|
6409 |
//QWidget *firstNew = q; //invariant
|
|
6410 |
QWidget *o = 0; // last in the old list
|
|
6411 |
QWidget *n = q; // last in the new list
|
|
6412 |
|
|
6413 |
bool prevWasNew = true;
|
|
6414 |
QWidget *w = focus_next;
|
|
6415 |
|
|
6416 |
//Note: for efficiency, we do not maintain the list invariant inside the loop
|
|
6417 |
//we append items to the relevant list, and we optimize by not changing pointers
|
|
6418 |
//when subsequent items are going into the same list.
|
|
6419 |
while (w != q) {
|
|
6420 |
bool currentIsNew = q->isAncestorOf(w);
|
|
6421 |
if (currentIsNew) {
|
|
6422 |
if (!prevWasNew) {
|
|
6423 |
//prev was old -- append to new list
|
|
6424 |
n->d_func()->focus_next = w;
|
|
6425 |
w->d_func()->focus_prev = n;
|
|
6426 |
}
|
|
6427 |
n = w;
|
|
6428 |
} else {
|
|
6429 |
if (prevWasNew) {
|
|
6430 |
//prev was new -- append to old list, if there is one
|
|
6431 |
if (o) {
|
|
6432 |
o->d_func()->focus_next = w;
|
|
6433 |
w->d_func()->focus_prev = o;
|
|
6434 |
} else {
|
|
6435 |
// "create" the old list
|
|
6436 |
firstOld = w;
|
|
6437 |
}
|
|
6438 |
}
|
|
6439 |
o = w;
|
|
6440 |
}
|
|
6441 |
w = w->d_func()->focus_next;
|
|
6442 |
prevWasNew = currentIsNew;
|
|
6443 |
}
|
|
6444 |
|
|
6445 |
//repair the old list:
|
|
6446 |
if (firstOld) {
|
|
6447 |
o->d_func()->focus_next = firstOld;
|
|
6448 |
firstOld->d_func()->focus_prev = o;
|
|
6449 |
}
|
|
6450 |
|
|
6451 |
if (!q->isWindow()) {
|
|
6452 |
QWidget *topLevel = q->window();
|
|
6453 |
//insert new chain into toplevel's chain
|
|
6454 |
|
|
6455 |
QWidget *prev = topLevel->d_func()->focus_prev;
|
|
6456 |
|
|
6457 |
topLevel->d_func()->focus_prev = n;
|
|
6458 |
prev->d_func()->focus_next = q;
|
|
6459 |
|
|
6460 |
focus_prev = prev;
|
|
6461 |
n->d_func()->focus_next = topLevel;
|
|
6462 |
} else {
|
|
6463 |
//repair the new list
|
|
6464 |
n->d_func()->focus_next = q;
|
|
6465 |
focus_prev = n;
|
|
6466 |
}
|
|
6467 |
|
|
6468 |
}
|
|
6469 |
|
|
6470 |
/*!\internal
|
|
6471 |
|
|
6472 |
Measures the shortest distance from a point to a rect.
|
|
6473 |
|
|
6474 |
This function is called from QDesktopwidget::screen(QPoint) to find the
|
|
6475 |
closest screen for a point.
|
|
6476 |
In directional KeypadNavigation, it is called to find the closest
|
|
6477 |
widget to the current focus widget center.
|
|
6478 |
*/
|
|
6479 |
int QWidgetPrivate::pointToRect(const QPoint &p, const QRect &r)
|
|
6480 |
{
|
|
6481 |
int dx = 0;
|
|
6482 |
int dy = 0;
|
|
6483 |
if (p.x() < r.left())
|
|
6484 |
dx = r.left() - p.x();
|
|
6485 |
else if (p.x() > r.right())
|
|
6486 |
dx = p.x() - r.right();
|
|
6487 |
if (p.y() < r.top())
|
|
6488 |
dy = r.top() - p.y();
|
|
6489 |
else if (p.y() > r.bottom())
|
|
6490 |
dy = p.y() - r.bottom();
|
|
6491 |
return dx + dy;
|
|
6492 |
}
|
|
6493 |
|
|
6494 |
/*!
|
|
6495 |
\property QWidget::frameSize
|
|
6496 |
\brief the size of the widget including any window frame
|
|
6497 |
|
|
6498 |
By default, this property contains a value that depends on the user's
|
|
6499 |
platform and screen geometry.
|
|
6500 |
*/
|
|
6501 |
QSize QWidget::frameSize() const
|
|
6502 |
{
|
|
6503 |
Q_D(const QWidget);
|
|
6504 |
if (isWindow() && !(windowType() == Qt::Popup)) {
|
|
6505 |
QRect fs = d->frameStrut();
|
|
6506 |
return QSize(data->crect.width() + fs.left() + fs.right(),
|
|
6507 |
data->crect.height() + fs.top() + fs.bottom());
|
|
6508 |
}
|
|
6509 |
return data->crect.size();
|
|
6510 |
}
|
|
6511 |
|
|
6512 |
/*! \fn void QWidget::move(int x, int y)
|
|
6513 |
|
|
6514 |
\overload
|
|
6515 |
|
|
6516 |
This corresponds to move(QPoint(\a x, \a y)).
|
|
6517 |
*/
|
|
6518 |
|
|
6519 |
void QWidget::move(const QPoint &p)
|
|
6520 |
{
|
|
6521 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
6522 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_Moved);
|
|
6523 |
if (isWindow())
|
|
6524 |
d->topData()->posFromMove = true;
|
|
6525 |
if (testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Created)) {
|
|
6526 |
d->setGeometry_sys(p.x() + geometry().x() - QWidget::x(),
|
|
6527 |
p.y() + geometry().y() - QWidget::y(),
|
|
6528 |
width(), height(), true);
|
|
6529 |
d->setDirtyOpaqueRegion();
|
|
6530 |
} else {
|
|
6531 |
data->crect.moveTopLeft(p); // no frame yet
|
|
6532 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_PendingMoveEvent);
|
|
6533 |
}
|
|
6534 |
}
|
|
6535 |
|
|
6536 |
/*! \fn void QWidget::resize(int w, int h)
|
|
6537 |
\overload
|
|
6538 |
|
|
6539 |
This corresponds to resize(QSize(\a w, \a h)).
|
|
6540 |
*/
|
|
6541 |
|
|
6542 |
void QWidget::resize(const QSize &s)
|
|
6543 |
{
|
|
6544 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
6545 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_Resized);
|
|
6546 |
if (testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Created)) {
|
|
6547 |
d->setGeometry_sys(geometry().x(), geometry().y(), s.width(), s.height(), false);
|
|
6548 |
d->setDirtyOpaqueRegion();
|
|
6549 |
} else {
|
|
6550 |
data->crect.setSize(s.boundedTo(maximumSize()).expandedTo(minimumSize()));
|
|
6551 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_PendingResizeEvent);
|
|
6552 |
}
|
|
6553 |
}
|
|
6554 |
|
|
6555 |
void QWidget::setGeometry(const QRect &r)
|
|
6556 |
{
|
|
6557 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
6558 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_Resized);
|
|
6559 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_Moved);
|
|
6560 |
if (isWindow())
|
|
6561 |
d->topData()->posFromMove = false;
|
|
6562 |
if (testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Created)) {
|
|
6563 |
d->setGeometry_sys(r.x(), r.y(), r.width(), r.height(), true);
|
|
6564 |
d->setDirtyOpaqueRegion();
|
|
6565 |
} else {
|
|
6566 |
data->crect.setTopLeft(r.topLeft());
|
|
6567 |
data->crect.setSize(r.size().boundedTo(maximumSize()).expandedTo(minimumSize()));
|
|
6568 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_PendingMoveEvent);
|
|
6569 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_PendingResizeEvent);
|
|
6570 |
}
|
|
6571 |
}
|
|
6572 |
|
|
6573 |
/*!
|
|
6574 |
\since 4.2
|
|
6575 |
Saves the current geometry and state for top-level widgets.
|
|
6576 |
|
|
6577 |
To save the geometry when the window closes, you can
|
|
6578 |
implement a close event like this:
|
|
6579 |
|
|
6580 |
\snippet doc/src/snippets/code/src_gui_kernel_qwidget.cpp 11
|
|
6581 |
|
|
6582 |
See the \l{Window Geometry} documentation for an overview of geometry
|
|
6583 |
issues with windows.
|
|
6584 |
|
|
6585 |
Use QMainWindow::saveState() to save the geometry and the state of
|
|
6586 |
toolbars and dock widgets.
|
|
6587 |
|
|
6588 |
\sa restoreGeometry(), QMainWindow::saveState(), QMainWindow::restoreState()
|
|
6589 |
*/
|
|
6590 |
QByteArray QWidget::saveGeometry() const
|
|
6591 |
{
|
|
6592 |
QByteArray array;
|
|
6593 |
QDataStream stream(&array, QIODevice::WriteOnly);
|
|
6594 |
stream.setVersion(QDataStream::Qt_4_0);
|
|
6595 |
const quint32 magicNumber = 0x1D9D0CB;
|
|
6596 |
quint16 majorVersion = 1;
|
|
6597 |
quint16 minorVersion = 0;
|
|
6598 |
stream << magicNumber
|
|
6599 |
<< majorVersion
|
|
6600 |
<< minorVersion
|
|
6601 |
<< frameGeometry()
|
|
6602 |
<< normalGeometry()
|
|
6603 |
<< qint32(QApplication::desktop()->screenNumber(this))
|
|
6604 |
<< quint8(windowState() & Qt::WindowMaximized)
|
|
6605 |
<< quint8(windowState() & Qt::WindowFullScreen);
|
|
6606 |
return array;
|
|
6607 |
}
|
|
6608 |
|
|
6609 |
/*!
|
|
6610 |
\since 4.2
|
|
6611 |
|
|
6612 |
Restores the geometry and state top-level widgets stored in the
|
|
6613 |
byte array \a geometry. Returns true on success; otherwise
|
|
6614 |
returns false.
|
|
6615 |
|
|
6616 |
If the restored geometry is off-screen, it will be modified to be
|
|
6617 |
inside the available screen geometry.
|
|
6618 |
|
|
6619 |
To restore geometry saved using QSettings, you can use code like
|
|
6620 |
this:
|
|
6621 |
|
|
6622 |
\snippet doc/src/snippets/code/src_gui_kernel_qwidget.cpp 12
|
|
6623 |
|
|
6624 |
See the \l{Window Geometry} documentation for an overview of geometry
|
|
6625 |
issues with windows.
|
|
6626 |
|
|
6627 |
Use QMainWindow::restoreState() to restore the geometry and the
|
|
6628 |
state of toolbars and dock widgets.
|
|
6629 |
|
|
6630 |
\sa saveGeometry(), QSettings, QMainWindow::saveState(), QMainWindow::restoreState()
|
|
6631 |
*/
|
|
6632 |
bool QWidget::restoreGeometry(const QByteArray &geometry)
|
|
6633 |
{
|
|
6634 |
if (geometry.size() < 4)
|
|
6635 |
return false;
|
|
6636 |
QDataStream stream(geometry);
|
|
6637 |
stream.setVersion(QDataStream::Qt_4_0);
|
|
6638 |
|
|
6639 |
const quint32 magicNumber = 0x1D9D0CB;
|
|
6640 |
quint32 storedMagicNumber;
|
|
6641 |
stream >> storedMagicNumber;
|
|
6642 |
if (storedMagicNumber != magicNumber)
|
|
6643 |
return false;
|
|
6644 |
|
|
6645 |
const quint16 currentMajorVersion = 1;
|
|
6646 |
quint16 majorVersion = 0;
|
|
6647 |
quint16 minorVersion = 0;
|
|
6648 |
|
|
6649 |
stream >> majorVersion >> minorVersion;
|
|
6650 |
|
|
6651 |
if (majorVersion != currentMajorVersion)
|
|
6652 |
return false;
|
|
6653 |
// (Allow all minor versions.)
|
|
6654 |
|
|
6655 |
QRect restoredFrameGeometry;
|
|
6656 |
QRect restoredNormalGeometry;
|
|
6657 |
qint32 restoredScreenNumber;
|
|
6658 |
quint8 maximized;
|
|
6659 |
quint8 fullScreen;
|
|
6660 |
|
|
6661 |
stream >> restoredFrameGeometry
|
|
6662 |
>> restoredNormalGeometry
|
|
6663 |
>> restoredScreenNumber
|
|
6664 |
>> maximized
|
|
6665 |
>> fullScreen;
|
|
6666 |
|
|
6667 |
const int frameHeight = 20;
|
|
6668 |
if (!restoredFrameGeometry.isValid())
|
|
6669 |
restoredFrameGeometry = QRect(QPoint(0,0), sizeHint());
|
|
6670 |
|
|
6671 |
if (!restoredNormalGeometry.isValid())
|
|
6672 |
restoredNormalGeometry = QRect(QPoint(0, frameHeight), sizeHint());
|
|
6673 |
if (!restoredNormalGeometry.isValid()) {
|
|
6674 |
// use the widget's adjustedSize if the sizeHint() doesn't help
|
|
6675 |
restoredNormalGeometry.setSize(restoredNormalGeometry
|
|
6676 |
.size()
|
|
6677 |
.expandedTo(d_func()->adjustedSize()));
|
|
6678 |
}
|
|
6679 |
|
|
6680 |
const QDesktopWidget * const desktop = QApplication::desktop();
|
|
6681 |
if (restoredScreenNumber >= desktop->numScreens())
|
|
6682 |
restoredScreenNumber = desktop->primaryScreen();
|
|
6683 |
|
|
6684 |
const QRect availableGeometry = desktop->availableGeometry(restoredScreenNumber);
|
|
6685 |
|
|
6686 |
// Modify the restored geometry if we are about to restore to coordinates
|
|
6687 |
// that would make the window "lost". This happens if:
|
|
6688 |
// - The restored geometry is completely oustside the available geometry
|
|
6689 |
// - The title bar is outside the available geometry.
|
|
6690 |
// - (Mac only) The window is higher than the available geometry. It must
|
|
6691 |
// be possible to bring the size grip on screen by moving the window.
|
|
6692 |
#ifdef Q_WS_MAC
|
|
6693 |
restoredFrameGeometry.setHeight(qMin(restoredFrameGeometry.height(), availableGeometry.height()));
|
|
6694 |
restoredNormalGeometry.setHeight(qMin(restoredNormalGeometry.height(), availableGeometry.height() - frameHeight));
|
|
6695 |
#endif
|
|
6696 |
|
|
6697 |
if (!restoredFrameGeometry.intersects(availableGeometry)) {
|
|
6698 |
restoredFrameGeometry.moveBottom(qMin(restoredFrameGeometry.bottom(), availableGeometry.bottom()));
|
|
6699 |
restoredFrameGeometry.moveLeft(qMax(restoredFrameGeometry.left(), availableGeometry.left()));
|
|
6700 |
restoredFrameGeometry.moveRight(qMin(restoredFrameGeometry.right(), availableGeometry.right()));
|
|
6701 |
}
|
|
6702 |
restoredFrameGeometry.moveTop(qMax(restoredFrameGeometry.top(), availableGeometry.top()));
|
|
6703 |
|
|
6704 |
if (!restoredNormalGeometry.intersects(availableGeometry)) {
|
|
6705 |
restoredNormalGeometry.moveBottom(qMin(restoredNormalGeometry.bottom(), availableGeometry.bottom()));
|
|
6706 |
restoredNormalGeometry.moveLeft(qMax(restoredNormalGeometry.left(), availableGeometry.left()));
|
|
6707 |
restoredNormalGeometry.moveRight(qMin(restoredNormalGeometry.right(), availableGeometry.right()));
|
|
6708 |
}
|
|
6709 |
restoredNormalGeometry.moveTop(qMax(restoredNormalGeometry.top(), availableGeometry.top() + frameHeight));
|
|
6710 |
|
|
6711 |
if (maximized || fullScreen) {
|
|
6712 |
// set geomerty before setting the window state to make
|
|
6713 |
// sure the window is maximized to the right screen.
|
|
6714 |
setGeometry(restoredNormalGeometry);
|
|
6715 |
Qt::WindowStates ws = windowState();
|
|
6716 |
if (maximized)
|
|
6717 |
ws |= Qt::WindowMaximized;
|
|
6718 |
if (fullScreen)
|
|
6719 |
ws |= Qt::WindowFullScreen;
|
|
6720 |
setWindowState(ws);
|
|
6721 |
d_func()->topData()->normalGeometry = restoredNormalGeometry;
|
|
6722 |
} else {
|
|
6723 |
QPoint offset;
|
|
6724 |
#ifdef Q_WS_X11
|
|
6725 |
if (isFullScreen())
|
|
6726 |
offset = d_func()->topData()->fullScreenOffset;
|
|
6727 |
#endif
|
|
6728 |
setWindowState(windowState() & ~(Qt::WindowMaximized | Qt::WindowFullScreen));
|
|
6729 |
move(restoredFrameGeometry.topLeft() + offset);
|
|
6730 |
resize(restoredNormalGeometry.size());
|
|
6731 |
}
|
|
6732 |
return true;
|
|
6733 |
}
|
|
6734 |
|
|
6735 |
/*!\fn void QWidget::setGeometry(int x, int y, int w, int h)
|
|
6736 |
\overload
|
|
6737 |
|
|
6738 |
This corresponds to setGeometry(QRect(\a x, \a y, \a w, \a h)).
|
|
6739 |
*/
|
|
6740 |
|
|
6741 |
/*!
|
|
6742 |
Sets the margins around the contents of the widget to have the sizes
|
|
6743 |
\a left, \a top, \a right, and \a bottom. The margins are used by
|
|
6744 |
the layout system, and may be used by subclasses to specify the area
|
|
6745 |
to draw in (e.g. excluding the frame).
|
|
6746 |
|
|
6747 |
Changing the margins will trigger a resizeEvent().
|
|
6748 |
|
|
6749 |
\sa contentsRect(), getContentsMargins()
|
|
6750 |
*/
|
|
6751 |
void QWidget::setContentsMargins(int left, int top, int right, int bottom)
|
|
6752 |
{
|
|
6753 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
6754 |
if (left == d->leftmargin && top == d->topmargin
|
|
6755 |
&& right == d->rightmargin && bottom == d->bottommargin)
|
|
6756 |
return;
|
|
6757 |
d->leftmargin = left;
|
|
6758 |
d->topmargin = top;
|
|
6759 |
d->rightmargin = right;
|
|
6760 |
d->bottommargin = bottom;
|
|
6761 |
|
|
6762 |
if (QLayout *l=d->layout)
|
|
6763 |
l->update(); //force activate; will do updateGeometry
|
|
6764 |
else
|
|
6765 |
updateGeometry();
|
|
6766 |
|
|
6767 |
// ### Qt 5: compat, remove
|
|
6768 |
if (isVisible()) {
|
|
6769 |
update();
|
|
6770 |
QResizeEvent e(data->crect.size(), data->crect.size());
|
|
6771 |
QApplication::sendEvent(this, &e);
|
|
6772 |
} else {
|
|
6773 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_PendingResizeEvent, true);
|
|
6774 |
}
|
|
6775 |
|
|
6776 |
QEvent e(QEvent::ContentsRectChange);
|
|
6777 |
QApplication::sendEvent(this, &e);
|
|
6778 |
}
|
|
6779 |
|
|
6780 |
/*!
|
|
6781 |
\overload
|
|
6782 |
\since 4.6
|
|
6783 |
|
|
6784 |
\brief The setContentsMargins function sets the margins around the
|
|
6785 |
widget's contents.
|
|
6786 |
|
|
6787 |
Sets the margins around the contents of the widget to have the
|
|
6788 |
sizes determined by \a margins. The margins are
|
|
6789 |
used by the layout system, and may be used by subclasses to
|
|
6790 |
specify the area to draw in (e.g. excluding the frame).
|
|
6791 |
|
|
6792 |
Changing the margins will trigger a resizeEvent().
|
|
6793 |
|
|
6794 |
\sa contentsRect(), getContentsMargins()
|
|
6795 |
*/
|
|
6796 |
void QWidget::setContentsMargins(const QMargins &margins)
|
|
6797 |
{
|
|
6798 |
setContentsMargins(margins.left(), margins.top(),
|
|
6799 |
margins.right(), margins.bottom());
|
|
6800 |
}
|
|
6801 |
|
|
6802 |
/*!
|
|
6803 |
Returns the widget's contents margins for \a left, \a top, \a
|
|
6804 |
right, and \a bottom.
|
|
6805 |
|
|
6806 |
\sa setContentsMargins(), contentsRect()
|
|
6807 |
*/
|
|
6808 |
void QWidget::getContentsMargins(int *left, int *top, int *right, int *bottom) const
|
|
6809 |
{
|
|
6810 |
Q_D(const QWidget);
|
|
6811 |
if (left)
|
|
6812 |
*left = d->leftmargin;
|
|
6813 |
if (top)
|
|
6814 |
*top = d->topmargin;
|
|
6815 |
if (right)
|
|
6816 |
*right = d->rightmargin;
|
|
6817 |
if (bottom)
|
|
6818 |
*bottom = d->bottommargin;
|
|
6819 |
}
|
|
6820 |
|
|
6821 |
/*!
|
|
6822 |
\since 4.6
|
|
6823 |
|
|
6824 |
\brief The contentsMargins function returns the widget's contents margins.
|
|
6825 |
|
|
6826 |
\sa getContentsMargins(), setContentsMargins(), contentsRect()
|
|
6827 |
*/
|
|
6828 |
QMargins QWidget::contentsMargins() const
|
|
6829 |
{
|
|
6830 |
Q_D(const QWidget);
|
|
6831 |
return QMargins(d->leftmargin, d->topmargin, d->rightmargin, d->bottommargin);
|
|
6832 |
}
|
|
6833 |
|
|
6834 |
|
|
6835 |
/*!
|
|
6836 |
Returns the area inside the widget's margins.
|
|
6837 |
|
|
6838 |
\sa setContentsMargins(), getContentsMargins()
|
|
6839 |
*/
|
|
6840 |
QRect QWidget::contentsRect() const
|
|
6841 |
{
|
|
6842 |
Q_D(const QWidget);
|
|
6843 |
return QRect(QPoint(d->leftmargin, d->topmargin),
|
|
6844 |
QPoint(data->crect.width() - 1 - d->rightmargin,
|
|
6845 |
data->crect.height() - 1 - d->bottommargin));
|
|
6846 |
|
|
6847 |
}
|
|
6848 |
|
|
6849 |
|
|
6850 |
|
|
6851 |
/*!
|
|
6852 |
\fn void QWidget::customContextMenuRequested(const QPoint &pos)
|
|
6853 |
|
|
6854 |
This signal is emitted when the widget's \l contextMenuPolicy is
|
|
6855 |
Qt::CustomContextMenu, and the user has requested a context menu on
|
|
6856 |
the widget. The position \a pos is the position of the context menu
|
|
6857 |
event that the widget receives. Normally this is in widget
|
|
6858 |
coordinates. The exception to this rule is QAbstractScrollArea and
|
|
6859 |
its subclasses that map the context menu event to coordinates of the
|
|
6860 |
\link QAbstractScrollArea::viewport() viewport() \endlink .
|
|
6861 |
|
|
6862 |
|
|
6863 |
\sa mapToGlobal() QMenu contextMenuPolicy
|
|
6864 |
*/
|
|
6865 |
|
|
6866 |
|
|
6867 |
/*!
|
|
6868 |
\property QWidget::contextMenuPolicy
|
|
6869 |
\brief how the widget shows a context menu
|
|
6870 |
|
|
6871 |
The default value of this property is Qt::DefaultContextMenu,
|
|
6872 |
which means the contextMenuEvent() handler is called. Other values
|
|
6873 |
are Qt::NoContextMenu, Qt::PreventContextMenu,
|
|
6874 |
Qt::ActionsContextMenu, and Qt::CustomContextMenu. With
|
|
6875 |
Qt::CustomContextMenu, the signal customContextMenuRequested() is
|
|
6876 |
emitted.
|
|
6877 |
|
|
6878 |
\sa contextMenuEvent(), customContextMenuRequested(), actions()
|
|
6879 |
*/
|
|
6880 |
|
|
6881 |
Qt::ContextMenuPolicy QWidget::contextMenuPolicy() const
|
|
6882 |
{
|
|
6883 |
return (Qt::ContextMenuPolicy)data->context_menu_policy;
|
|
6884 |
}
|
|
6885 |
|
|
6886 |
void QWidget::setContextMenuPolicy(Qt::ContextMenuPolicy policy)
|
|
6887 |
{
|
|
6888 |
data->context_menu_policy = (uint) policy;
|
|
6889 |
}
|
|
6890 |
|
|
6891 |
/*!
|
|
6892 |
\property QWidget::focusPolicy
|
|
6893 |
\brief the way the widget accepts keyboard focus
|
|
6894 |
|
|
6895 |
The policy is Qt::TabFocus if the widget accepts keyboard
|
|
6896 |
focus by tabbing, Qt::ClickFocus if the widget accepts
|
|
6897 |
focus by clicking, Qt::StrongFocus if it accepts both, and
|
|
6898 |
Qt::NoFocus (the default) if it does not accept focus at
|
|
6899 |
all.
|
|
6900 |
|
|
6901 |
You must enable keyboard focus for a widget if it processes
|
|
6902 |
keyboard events. This is normally done from the widget's
|
|
6903 |
constructor. For instance, the QLineEdit constructor calls
|
|
6904 |
setFocusPolicy(Qt::StrongFocus).
|
|
6905 |
|
|
6906 |
If the widget has a focus proxy, then the focus policy will
|
|
6907 |
be propagated to it.
|
|
6908 |
|
|
6909 |
\sa focusInEvent(), focusOutEvent(), keyPressEvent(), keyReleaseEvent(), enabled
|
|
6910 |
*/
|
|
6911 |
|
|
6912 |
|
|
6913 |
Qt::FocusPolicy QWidget::focusPolicy() const
|
|
6914 |
{
|
|
6915 |
return (Qt::FocusPolicy)data->focus_policy;
|
|
6916 |
}
|
|
6917 |
|
|
6918 |
void QWidget::setFocusPolicy(Qt::FocusPolicy policy)
|
|
6919 |
{
|
|
6920 |
data->focus_policy = (uint) policy;
|
|
6921 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
6922 |
if (d->extra && d->extra->focus_proxy)
|
|
6923 |
d->extra->focus_proxy->setFocusPolicy(policy);
|
|
6924 |
}
|
|
6925 |
|
|
6926 |
/*!
|
|
6927 |
\property QWidget::updatesEnabled
|
|
6928 |
\brief whether updates are enabled
|
|
6929 |
|
|
6930 |
An updates enabled widget receives paint events and has a system
|
|
6931 |
background; a disabled widget does not. This also implies that
|
|
6932 |
calling update() and repaint() has no effect if updates are
|
|
6933 |
disabled.
|
|
6934 |
|
|
6935 |
By default, this property is true.
|
|
6936 |
|
|
6937 |
setUpdatesEnabled() is normally used to disable updates for a
|
|
6938 |
short period of time, for instance to avoid screen flicker during
|
|
6939 |
large changes. In Qt, widgets normally do not generate screen
|
|
6940 |
flicker, but on X11 the server might erase regions on the screen
|
|
6941 |
when widgets get hidden before they can be replaced by other
|
|
6942 |
widgets. Disabling updates solves this.
|
|
6943 |
|
|
6944 |
Example:
|
|
6945 |
\snippet doc/src/snippets/code/src_gui_kernel_qwidget.cpp 13
|
|
6946 |
|
|
6947 |
Disabling a widget implicitly disables all its children. Enabling a widget
|
|
6948 |
enables all child widgets \e except top-level widgets or those that
|
|
6949 |
have been explicitly disabled. Re-enabling updates implicitly calls
|
|
6950 |
update() on the widget.
|
|
6951 |
|
|
6952 |
\sa paintEvent()
|
|
6953 |
*/
|
|
6954 |
void QWidget::setUpdatesEnabled(bool enable)
|
|
6955 |
{
|
|
6956 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
6957 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_ForceUpdatesDisabled, !enable);
|
|
6958 |
d->setUpdatesEnabled_helper(enable);
|
|
6959 |
}
|
|
6960 |
|
|
6961 |
/*! \fn void QWidget::show()
|
|
6962 |
|
|
6963 |
Shows the widget and its child widgets. This function is
|
|
6964 |
equivalent to setVisible(true).
|
|
6965 |
|
|
6966 |
\sa raise(), showEvent(), hide(), setVisible(), showMinimized(), showMaximized(),
|
|
6967 |
showNormal(), isVisible()
|
|
6968 |
*/
|
|
6969 |
|
|
6970 |
|
|
6971 |
/*! \internal
|
|
6972 |
|
|
6973 |
Makes the widget visible in the isVisible() meaning of the word.
|
|
6974 |
It is only called for toplevels or widgets with visible parents.
|
|
6975 |
*/
|
|
6976 |
void QWidgetPrivate::show_recursive()
|
|
6977 |
{
|
|
6978 |
Q_Q(QWidget);
|
|
6979 |
// polish if necessary
|
|
6980 |
|
|
6981 |
if (!q->testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Created))
|
|
6982 |
createRecursively();
|
|
6983 |
q->ensurePolished();
|
|
6984 |
|
|
6985 |
#ifdef QT3_SUPPORT
|
|
6986 |
if(sendChildEvents)
|
|
6987 |
QApplication::sendPostedEvents(q, QEvent::ChildInserted);
|
|
6988 |
#endif
|
|
6989 |
if (!q->isWindow() && q->parentWidget()->d_func()->layout && !q->parentWidget()->data->in_show)
|
|
6990 |
q->parentWidget()->d_func()->layout->activate();
|
|
6991 |
// activate our layout before we and our children become visible
|
|
6992 |
if (layout)
|
|
6993 |
layout->activate();
|
|
6994 |
|
|
6995 |
show_helper();
|
|
6996 |
}
|
|
6997 |
|
|
6998 |
void QWidgetPrivate::sendPendingMoveAndResizeEvents(bool recursive, bool disableUpdates)
|
|
6999 |
{
|
|
7000 |
Q_Q(QWidget);
|
|
7001 |
|
|
7002 |
disableUpdates = disableUpdates && q->updatesEnabled();
|
|
7003 |
if (disableUpdates)
|
|
7004 |
q->setAttribute(Qt::WA_UpdatesDisabled);
|
|
7005 |
|
|
7006 |
if (q->testAttribute(Qt::WA_PendingMoveEvent)) {
|
|
7007 |
QMoveEvent e(data.crect.topLeft(), data.crect.topLeft());
|
|
7008 |
QApplication::sendEvent(q, &e);
|
|
7009 |
q->setAttribute(Qt::WA_PendingMoveEvent, false);
|
|
7010 |
}
|
|
7011 |
|
|
7012 |
if (q->testAttribute(Qt::WA_PendingResizeEvent)) {
|
|
7013 |
QResizeEvent e(data.crect.size(), QSize());
|
|
7014 |
QApplication::sendEvent(q, &e);
|
|
7015 |
q->setAttribute(Qt::WA_PendingResizeEvent, false);
|
|
7016 |
}
|
|
7017 |
|
|
7018 |
if (disableUpdates)
|
|
7019 |
q->setAttribute(Qt::WA_UpdatesDisabled, false);
|
|
7020 |
|
|
7021 |
if (!recursive)
|
|
7022 |
return;
|
|
7023 |
|
|
7024 |
for (int i = 0; i < children.size(); ++i) {
|
|
7025 |
if (QWidget *child = qobject_cast<QWidget *>(children.at(i)))
|
|
7026 |
child->d_func()->sendPendingMoveAndResizeEvents(recursive, disableUpdates);
|
|
7027 |
}
|
|
7028 |
}
|
|
7029 |
|
|
7030 |
void QWidgetPrivate::activateChildLayoutsRecursively()
|
|
7031 |
{
|
|
7032 |
sendPendingMoveAndResizeEvents(false, true);
|
|
7033 |
|
|
7034 |
for (int i = 0; i < children.size(); ++i) {
|
|
7035 |
QWidget *child = qobject_cast<QWidget *>(children.at(i));
|
|
7036 |
if (!child || child->isHidden() || child->isWindow())
|
|
7037 |
continue;
|
|
7038 |
|
|
7039 |
child->ensurePolished();
|
|
7040 |
|
|
7041 |
// Activate child's layout
|
|
7042 |
QWidgetPrivate *childPrivate = child->d_func();
|
|
7043 |
if (childPrivate->layout)
|
|
7044 |
childPrivate->layout->activate();
|
|
7045 |
|
|
7046 |
// Pretend we're visible.
|
|
7047 |
const bool wasVisible = child->isVisible();
|
|
7048 |
if (!wasVisible)
|
|
7049 |
child->setAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Visible);
|
|
7050 |
|
|
7051 |
// Do the same for all my children.
|
|
7052 |
childPrivate->activateChildLayoutsRecursively();
|
|
7053 |
|
|
7054 |
// We're not cheating anymore.
|
|
7055 |
if (!wasVisible)
|
|
7056 |
child->setAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Visible, false);
|
|
7057 |
}
|
|
7058 |
}
|
|
7059 |
|
|
7060 |
void QWidgetPrivate::show_helper()
|
|
7061 |
{
|
|
7062 |
Q_Q(QWidget);
|
|
7063 |
data.in_show = true; // qws optimization
|
|
7064 |
// make sure we receive pending move and resize events
|
|
7065 |
sendPendingMoveAndResizeEvents();
|
|
7066 |
|
|
7067 |
// become visible before showing all children
|
|
7068 |
q->setAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Visible);
|
|
7069 |
|
|
7070 |
// finally show all children recursively
|
|
7071 |
showChildren(false);
|
|
7072 |
|
|
7073 |
#ifdef QT3_SUPPORT
|
|
7074 |
if (q->parentWidget() && sendChildEvents)
|
|
7075 |
QApplication::sendPostedEvents(q->parentWidget(),
|
|
7076 |
QEvent::ChildInserted);
|
|
7077 |
#endif
|
|
7078 |
|
|
7079 |
|
|
7080 |
// popup handling: new popups and tools need to be raised, and
|
|
7081 |
// existing popups must be closed. Also propagate the current
|
|
7082 |
// windows's KeyboardFocusChange status.
|
|
7083 |
if (q->isWindow()) {
|
|
7084 |
if ((q->windowType() == Qt::Tool) || (q->windowType() == Qt::Popup) || q->windowType() == Qt::ToolTip) {
|
|
7085 |
q->raise();
|
|
7086 |
if (q->parentWidget() && q->parentWidget()->window()->testAttribute(Qt::WA_KeyboardFocusChange))
|
|
7087 |
q->setAttribute(Qt::WA_KeyboardFocusChange);
|
|
7088 |
} else {
|
|
7089 |
while (QApplication::activePopupWidget()) {
|
|
7090 |
if (!QApplication::activePopupWidget()->close())
|
|
7091 |
break;
|
|
7092 |
}
|
|
7093 |
}
|
|
7094 |
}
|
|
7095 |
|
|
7096 |
// Automatic embedding of child windows of widgets already embedded into
|
|
7097 |
// QGraphicsProxyWidget when they are shown the first time.
|
|
7098 |
bool isEmbedded = false;
|
|
7099 |
#ifndef QT_NO_GRAPHICSVIEW
|
|
7100 |
if (q->isWindow()) {
|
|
7101 |
isEmbedded = q->graphicsProxyWidget() ? true : false;
|
|
7102 |
if (!isEmbedded && !bypassGraphicsProxyWidget(q)) {
|
|
7103 |
QGraphicsProxyWidget *ancestorProxy = nearestGraphicsProxyWidget(q->parentWidget());
|
|
7104 |
if (ancestorProxy) {
|
|
7105 |
isEmbedded = true;
|
|
7106 |
ancestorProxy->d_func()->embedSubWindow(q);
|
|
7107 |
}
|
|
7108 |
}
|
|
7109 |
}
|
|
7110 |
#else
|
|
7111 |
Q_UNUSED(isEmbedded);
|
|
7112 |
#endif
|
|
7113 |
|
|
7114 |
// On Windows, show the popup now so that our own focus handling
|
|
7115 |
// stores the correct old focus widget even if it's stolen in the
|
|
7116 |
// showevent
|
|
7117 |
#if defined(Q_WS_WIN) || defined(Q_WS_MAC) || defined(Q_OS_SYMBIAN)
|
|
7118 |
if (!isEmbedded && q->windowType() == Qt::Popup)
|
|
7119 |
qApp->d_func()->openPopup(q);
|
|
7120 |
#endif
|
|
7121 |
|
|
7122 |
// send the show event before showing the window
|
|
7123 |
QShowEvent showEvent;
|
|
7124 |
QApplication::sendEvent(q, &showEvent);
|
|
7125 |
|
|
7126 |
if (!isEmbedded && q->isModal() && q->isWindow())
|
|
7127 |
// QApplicationPrivate::enterModal *before* show, otherwise the initial
|
|
7128 |
// stacking might be wrong
|
|
7129 |
QApplicationPrivate::enterModal(q);
|
|
7130 |
|
|
7131 |
|
|
7132 |
show_sys();
|
|
7133 |
|
|
7134 |
#if !defined(Q_WS_WIN) && !defined(Q_WS_MAC) && !defined(Q_OS_SYMBIAN)
|
|
7135 |
if (!isEmbedded && q->windowType() == Qt::Popup)
|
|
7136 |
qApp->d_func()->openPopup(q);
|
|
7137 |
#endif
|
|
7138 |
|
|
7139 |
#ifndef QT_NO_ACCESSIBILITY
|
|
7140 |
if (q->windowType() != Qt::ToolTip) // Tooltips are read aloud twice in MS narrator.
|
|
7141 |
QAccessible::updateAccessibility(q, 0, QAccessible::ObjectShow);
|
|
7142 |
#endif
|
|
7143 |
|
|
7144 |
if (QApplicationPrivate::hidden_focus_widget == q) {
|
|
7145 |
QApplicationPrivate::hidden_focus_widget = 0;
|
|
7146 |
q->setFocus(Qt::OtherFocusReason);
|
|
7147 |
}
|
|
7148 |
|
|
7149 |
// Process events when showing a Qt::SplashScreen widget before the event loop
|
|
7150 |
// is spinnning; otherwise it might not show up on particular platforms.
|
|
7151 |
// This makes QSplashScreen behave the same on all platforms.
|
|
7152 |
if (!qApp->d_func()->in_exec && q->windowType() == Qt::SplashScreen)
|
|
7153 |
QApplication::processEvents();
|
|
7154 |
|
|
7155 |
data.in_show = false; // reset qws optimization
|
|
7156 |
}
|
|
7157 |
|
|
7158 |
/*! \fn void QWidget::hide()
|
|
7159 |
|
|
7160 |
Hides the widget. This function is equivalent to
|
|
7161 |
setVisible(false).
|
|
7162 |
|
|
7163 |
|
|
7164 |
\note If you are working with QDialog or its subclasses and you invoke
|
|
7165 |
the show() function after this function, the dialog will be displayed in
|
|
7166 |
its original position.
|
|
7167 |
|
|
7168 |
\sa hideEvent(), isHidden(), show(), setVisible(), isVisible(), close()
|
|
7169 |
*/
|
|
7170 |
|
|
7171 |
/*!\internal
|
|
7172 |
*/
|
|
7173 |
void QWidgetPrivate::hide_helper()
|
|
7174 |
{
|
|
7175 |
Q_Q(QWidget);
|
|
7176 |
|
|
7177 |
bool isEmbedded = false;
|
|
7178 |
#if !defined QT_NO_GRAPHICSVIEW
|
|
7179 |
isEmbedded = q->isWindow() && nearestGraphicsProxyWidget(q->parentWidget()) != 0;
|
|
7180 |
#else
|
|
7181 |
Q_UNUSED(isEmbedded);
|
|
7182 |
#endif
|
|
7183 |
|
|
7184 |
if (!isEmbedded && (q->windowType() == Qt::Popup))
|
|
7185 |
qApp->d_func()->closePopup(q);
|
|
7186 |
|
|
7187 |
// Move test modal here. Otherwise, a modal dialog could get
|
|
7188 |
// destroyed and we lose all access to its parent because we haven't
|
|
7189 |
// left modality. (Eg. modal Progress Dialog)
|
|
7190 |
if (!isEmbedded && q->isModal() && q->isWindow())
|
|
7191 |
QApplicationPrivate::leaveModal(q);
|
|
7192 |
|
|
7193 |
#if defined(Q_WS_WIN)
|
|
7194 |
if (q->isWindow() && !(q->windowType() == Qt::Popup) && q->parentWidget()
|
|
7195 |
&& !q->parentWidget()->isHidden() && q->isActiveWindow())
|
|
7196 |
q->parentWidget()->activateWindow(); // Activate parent
|
|
7197 |
#endif
|
|
7198 |
|
|
7199 |
q->setAttribute(Qt::WA_Mapped, false);
|
|
7200 |
hide_sys();
|
|
7201 |
|
|
7202 |
bool wasVisible = q->testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Visible);
|
|
7203 |
|
|
7204 |
if (wasVisible) {
|
|
7205 |
q->setAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Visible, false);
|
|
7206 |
|
|
7207 |
}
|
|
7208 |
|
|
7209 |
QHideEvent hideEvent;
|
|
7210 |
QApplication::sendEvent(q, &hideEvent);
|
|
7211 |
hideChildren(false);
|
|
7212 |
|
|
7213 |
// next bit tries to move the focus if the focus widget is now
|
|
7214 |
// hidden.
|
|
7215 |
if (wasVisible) {
|
|
7216 |
#if defined(Q_WS_WIN) || defined(Q_WS_X11) || defined (Q_WS_QWS)
|
|
7217 |
qApp->d_func()->sendSyntheticEnterLeave(q);
|
|
7218 |
#endif
|
|
7219 |
|
|
7220 |
QWidget *fw = QApplication::focusWidget();
|
|
7221 |
while (fw && !fw->isWindow()) {
|
|
7222 |
if (fw == q) {
|
|
7223 |
q->focusNextPrevChild(true);
|
|
7224 |
break;
|
|
7225 |
}
|
|
7226 |
fw = fw->parentWidget();
|
|
7227 |
}
|
|
7228 |
}
|
|
7229 |
|
|
7230 |
if (QWidgetBackingStore *bs = maybeBackingStore())
|
|
7231 |
bs->removeDirtyWidget(q);
|
|
7232 |
|
|
7233 |
#ifndef QT_NO_ACCESSIBILITY
|
|
7234 |
if (wasVisible)
|
|
7235 |
QAccessible::updateAccessibility(q, 0, QAccessible::ObjectHide);
|
|
7236 |
#endif
|
|
7237 |
}
|
|
7238 |
|
|
7239 |
/*!
|
|
7240 |
\fn bool QWidget::isHidden() const
|
|
7241 |
|
|
7242 |
Returns true if the widget is hidden, otherwise returns false.
|
|
7243 |
|
|
7244 |
A hidden widget will only become visible when show() is called on
|
|
7245 |
it. It will not be automatically shown when the parent is shown.
|
|
7246 |
|
|
7247 |
To check visiblity, use !isVisible() instead (notice the exclamation mark).
|
|
7248 |
|
|
7249 |
isHidden() implies !isVisible(), but a widget can be not visible
|
|
7250 |
and not hidden at the same time. This is the case for widgets that are children of
|
|
7251 |
widgets that are not visible.
|
|
7252 |
|
|
7253 |
|
|
7254 |
Widgets are hidden if:
|
|
7255 |
\list
|
|
7256 |
\o they were created as independent windows,
|
|
7257 |
\o they were created as children of visible widgets,
|
|
7258 |
\o hide() or setVisible(false) was called.
|
|
7259 |
\endlist
|
|
7260 |
*/
|
|
7261 |
|
|
7262 |
|
|
7263 |
void QWidget::setVisible(bool visible)
|
|
7264 |
{
|
|
7265 |
if (visible) { // show
|
|
7266 |
if (testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_ExplicitShowHide) && !testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Hidden))
|
|
7267 |
return;
|
|
7268 |
|
|
7269 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
7270 |
|
|
7271 |
// Designer uses a trick to make grabWidget work without showing
|
|
7272 |
if (!isWindow() && parentWidget() && parentWidget()->isVisible()
|
|
7273 |
&& !parentWidget()->testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Created))
|
|
7274 |
parentWidget()->window()->d_func()->createRecursively();
|
|
7275 |
|
|
7276 |
//we have to at least create toplevels before applyX11SpecificCommandLineArguments
|
|
7277 |
//but not children of non-visible parents
|
|
7278 |
QWidget *pw = parentWidget();
|
|
7279 |
if (!testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Created)
|
|
7280 |
&& (isWindow() || pw->testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Created))) {
|
|
7281 |
create();
|
|
7282 |
}
|
|
7283 |
|
|
7284 |
#if defined(Q_WS_X11)
|
|
7285 |
if (windowType() == Qt::Window)
|
|
7286 |
QApplicationPrivate::applyX11SpecificCommandLineArguments(this);
|
|
7287 |
#elif defined(Q_WS_QWS)
|
|
7288 |
if (windowType() == Qt::Window)
|
|
7289 |
QApplicationPrivate::applyQWSSpecificCommandLineArguments(this);
|
|
7290 |
#endif
|
|
7291 |
|
|
7292 |
bool wasResized = testAttribute(Qt::WA_Resized);
|
|
7293 |
Qt::WindowStates initialWindowState = windowState();
|
|
7294 |
|
|
7295 |
// polish if necessary
|
|
7296 |
ensurePolished();
|
|
7297 |
|
|
7298 |
// remember that show was called explicitly
|
|
7299 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_ExplicitShowHide);
|
|
7300 |
// whether we need to inform the parent widget immediately
|
|
7301 |
bool needUpdateGeometry = !isWindow() && testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Hidden);
|
|
7302 |
// we are no longer hidden
|
|
7303 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Hidden, false);
|
|
7304 |
|
|
7305 |
if (needUpdateGeometry)
|
|
7306 |
d->updateGeometry_helper(true);
|
|
7307 |
|
|
7308 |
#ifdef QT3_SUPPORT
|
|
7309 |
QApplication::sendPostedEvents(this, QEvent::ChildInserted);
|
|
7310 |
#endif
|
|
7311 |
// activate our layout before we and our children become visible
|
|
7312 |
if (d->layout)
|
|
7313 |
d->layout->activate();
|
|
7314 |
|
|
7315 |
if (!isWindow()) {
|
|
7316 |
QWidget *parent = parentWidget();
|
|
7317 |
while (parent && parent->isVisible() && parent->d_func()->layout && !parent->data->in_show) {
|
|
7318 |
parent->d_func()->layout->activate();
|
|
7319 |
if (parent->isWindow())
|
|
7320 |
break;
|
|
7321 |
parent = parent->parentWidget();
|
|
7322 |
}
|
|
7323 |
if (parent && !d->getOpaqueRegion().isEmpty())
|
|
7324 |
parent->d_func()->setDirtyOpaqueRegion();
|
|
7325 |
}
|
|
7326 |
|
|
7327 |
// adjust size if necessary
|
|
7328 |
if (!wasResized
|
|
7329 |
&& (isWindow() || !parentWidget()->d_func()->layout)) {
|
|
7330 |
if (isWindow()) {
|
|
7331 |
adjustSize();
|
|
7332 |
if (windowState() != initialWindowState)
|
|
7333 |
setWindowState(initialWindowState);
|
|
7334 |
} else {
|
|
7335 |
adjustSize();
|
|
7336 |
}
|
|
7337 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_Resized, false);
|
|
7338 |
}
|
|
7339 |
|
|
7340 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_KeyboardFocusChange, false);
|
|
7341 |
|
|
7342 |
if (isWindow() || parentWidget()->isVisible()) {
|
|
7343 |
// remove posted quit events when showing a new window
|
|
7344 |
QCoreApplication::removePostedEvents(qApp, QEvent::Quit);
|
|
7345 |
|
|
7346 |
d->show_helper();
|
|
7347 |
|
|
7348 |
#if defined(Q_WS_WIN) || defined(Q_WS_X11) || defined (Q_WS_QWS)
|
|
7349 |
qApp->d_func()->sendSyntheticEnterLeave(this);
|
|
7350 |
#endif
|
|
7351 |
}
|
|
7352 |
|
|
7353 |
QEvent showToParentEvent(QEvent::ShowToParent);
|
|
7354 |
QApplication::sendEvent(this, &showToParentEvent);
|
|
7355 |
} else { // hide
|
|
7356 |
if (testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_ExplicitShowHide) && testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Hidden))
|
|
7357 |
return;
|
|
7358 |
#if defined(Q_WS_WIN)
|
|
7359 |
// reset WS_DISABLED style in a Blocked window
|
|
7360 |
if(isWindow() && testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Created)
|
|
7361 |
&& QApplicationPrivate::isBlockedByModal(this))
|
|
7362 |
{
|
|
7363 |
LONG dwStyle = GetWindowLong(winId(), GWL_STYLE);
|
|
7364 |
dwStyle &= ~WS_DISABLED;
|
|
7365 |
SetWindowLong(winId(), GWL_STYLE, dwStyle);
|
|
7366 |
}
|
|
7367 |
#endif
|
|
7368 |
if (QApplicationPrivate::hidden_focus_widget == this)
|
|
7369 |
QApplicationPrivate::hidden_focus_widget = 0;
|
|
7370 |
|
|
7371 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
7372 |
|
|
7373 |
// hw: The test on getOpaqueRegion() needs to be more intelligent
|
|
7374 |
// currently it doesn't work if the widget is hidden (the region will
|
|
7375 |
// be clipped). The real check should be testing the cached region
|
|
7376 |
// (and dirty flag) directly.
|
|
7377 |
if (!isWindow() && parentWidget()) // && !d->getOpaqueRegion().isEmpty())
|
|
7378 |
parentWidget()->d_func()->setDirtyOpaqueRegion();
|
|
7379 |
|
|
7380 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Hidden);
|
|
7381 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_ExplicitShowHide);
|
|
7382 |
if (testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Created))
|
|
7383 |
d->hide_helper();
|
|
7384 |
|
|
7385 |
// invalidate layout similar to updateGeometry()
|
|
7386 |
if (!isWindow() && parentWidget()) {
|
|
7387 |
if (parentWidget()->d_func()->layout)
|
|
7388 |
parentWidget()->d_func()->layout->invalidate();
|
|
7389 |
else if (parentWidget()->isVisible())
|
|
7390 |
QApplication::postEvent(parentWidget(), new QEvent(QEvent::LayoutRequest));
|
|
7391 |
}
|
|
7392 |
|
|
7393 |
QEvent hideToParentEvent(QEvent::HideToParent);
|
|
7394 |
QApplication::sendEvent(this, &hideToParentEvent);
|
|
7395 |
}
|
|
7396 |
}
|
|
7397 |
|
|
7398 |
/*!\fn void QWidget::setHidden(bool hidden)
|
|
7399 |
|
|
7400 |
Convenience function, equivalent to setVisible(!\a hidden).
|
|
7401 |
*/
|
|
7402 |
|
|
7403 |
/*!\fn void QWidget::setShown(bool shown)
|
|
7404 |
|
|
7405 |
Use setVisible(\a shown) instead.
|
|
7406 |
*/
|
|
7407 |
|
|
7408 |
|
|
7409 |
void QWidgetPrivate::_q_showIfNotHidden()
|
|
7410 |
{
|
|
7411 |
Q_Q(QWidget);
|
|
7412 |
if ( !(q->isHidden() && q->testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_ExplicitShowHide)) )
|
|
7413 |
q->setVisible(true);
|
|
7414 |
}
|
|
7415 |
|
|
7416 |
void QWidgetPrivate::showChildren(bool spontaneous)
|
|
7417 |
{
|
|
7418 |
QList<QObject*> childList = children;
|
|
7419 |
for (int i = 0; i < childList.size(); ++i) {
|
|
7420 |
QWidget *widget = qobject_cast<QWidget*>(childList.at(i));
|
|
7421 |
if (!widget
|
|
7422 |
|| widget->isWindow()
|
|
7423 |
|| widget->testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Hidden))
|
|
7424 |
continue;
|
|
7425 |
if (spontaneous) {
|
|
7426 |
widget->setAttribute(Qt::WA_Mapped);
|
|
7427 |
widget->d_func()->showChildren(true);
|
|
7428 |
QShowEvent e;
|
|
7429 |
QApplication::sendSpontaneousEvent(widget, &e);
|
|
7430 |
} else {
|
|
7431 |
if (widget->testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_ExplicitShowHide))
|
|
7432 |
widget->d_func()->show_recursive();
|
|
7433 |
else
|
|
7434 |
widget->show();
|
|
7435 |
}
|
|
7436 |
}
|
|
7437 |
}
|
|
7438 |
|
|
7439 |
void QWidgetPrivate::hideChildren(bool spontaneous)
|
|
7440 |
{
|
|
7441 |
QList<QObject*> childList = children;
|
|
7442 |
for (int i = 0; i < childList.size(); ++i) {
|
|
7443 |
QWidget *widget = qobject_cast<QWidget*>(childList.at(i));
|
|
7444 |
if (!widget || widget->isWindow() || widget->testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Hidden))
|
|
7445 |
continue;
|
|
7446 |
if (spontaneous)
|
|
7447 |
widget->setAttribute(Qt::WA_Mapped, false);
|
|
7448 |
else
|
|
7449 |
widget->setAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Visible, false);
|
|
7450 |
widget->d_func()->hideChildren(spontaneous);
|
|
7451 |
QHideEvent e;
|
|
7452 |
if (spontaneous) {
|
|
7453 |
QApplication::sendSpontaneousEvent(widget, &e);
|
|
7454 |
} else {
|
|
7455 |
QApplication::sendEvent(widget, &e);
|
|
7456 |
if (widget->internalWinId()
|
|
7457 |
&& widget->testAttribute(Qt::WA_DontCreateNativeAncestors)) {
|
|
7458 |
// hide_sys() on an ancestor won't have any affect on this
|
|
7459 |
// widget, so it needs an explicit hide_sys() of its own
|
|
7460 |
widget->d_func()->hide_sys();
|
|
7461 |
}
|
|
7462 |
}
|
|
7463 |
#if defined(Q_WS_WIN) || defined(Q_WS_X11) || defined (Q_WS_QWS)
|
|
7464 |
qApp->d_func()->sendSyntheticEnterLeave(widget);
|
|
7465 |
#endif
|
|
7466 |
#ifndef QT_NO_ACCESSIBILITY
|
|
7467 |
if (!spontaneous)
|
|
7468 |
QAccessible::updateAccessibility(widget, 0, QAccessible::ObjectHide);
|
|
7469 |
#endif
|
|
7470 |
}
|
|
7471 |
}
|
|
7472 |
|
|
7473 |
bool QWidgetPrivate::close_helper(CloseMode mode)
|
|
7474 |
{
|
|
7475 |
if (data.is_closing)
|
|
7476 |
return true;
|
|
7477 |
|
|
7478 |
Q_Q(QWidget);
|
|
7479 |
data.is_closing = 1;
|
|
7480 |
|
|
7481 |
QPointer<QWidget> that = q;
|
|
7482 |
QPointer<QWidget> parentWidget = q->parentWidget();
|
|
7483 |
|
|
7484 |
#ifdef QT3_SUPPORT
|
|
7485 |
bool isMain = (QApplicationPrivate::main_widget == q);
|
|
7486 |
#endif
|
|
7487 |
bool quitOnClose = q->testAttribute(Qt::WA_QuitOnClose);
|
|
7488 |
if (mode != CloseNoEvent) {
|
|
7489 |
QCloseEvent e;
|
|
7490 |
if (mode == CloseWithSpontaneousEvent)
|
|
7491 |
QApplication::sendSpontaneousEvent(q, &e);
|
|
7492 |
else
|
|
7493 |
QApplication::sendEvent(q, &e);
|
|
7494 |
if (!that.isNull() && !e.isAccepted()) {
|
|
7495 |
data.is_closing = 0;
|
|
7496 |
return false;
|
|
7497 |
}
|
|
7498 |
}
|
|
7499 |
|
|
7500 |
if (!that.isNull() && !q->isHidden())
|
|
7501 |
q->hide();
|
|
7502 |
|
|
7503 |
#ifdef QT3_SUPPORT
|
|
7504 |
if (isMain)
|
|
7505 |
QApplication::quit();
|
|
7506 |
#endif
|
|
7507 |
// Attempt to close the application only if this widget has the
|
|
7508 |
// WA_QuitOnClose flag set set and has a non-visible parent
|
|
7509 |
quitOnClose = quitOnClose && (parentWidget.isNull() || !parentWidget->isVisible() || parentWidget->testAttribute(Qt::WA_DontShowOnScreen));
|
|
7510 |
|
|
7511 |
if (quitOnClose) {
|
|
7512 |
// If there is no non-withdrawn primary window left (except
|
|
7513 |
// the ones without QuitOnClose or with WA_DontShowOnScreen),
|
|
7514 |
// we emit the lastWindowClosed signal
|
|
7515 |
QWidgetList list = QApplication::topLevelWidgets();
|
|
7516 |
bool lastWindowClosed = true;
|
|
7517 |
for (int i = 0; i < list.size(); ++i) {
|
|
7518 |
QWidget *w = list.at(i);
|
|
7519 |
if ((w->isVisible() && !w->testAttribute(Qt::WA_DontShowOnScreen))
|
|
7520 |
&& !w->parentWidget() && w->testAttribute(Qt::WA_QuitOnClose)) {
|
|
7521 |
lastWindowClosed = false;
|
|
7522 |
break;
|
|
7523 |
}
|
|
7524 |
}
|
|
7525 |
if (lastWindowClosed)
|
|
7526 |
QApplicationPrivate::emitLastWindowClosed();
|
|
7527 |
}
|
|
7528 |
|
|
7529 |
if (!that.isNull()) {
|
|
7530 |
data.is_closing = 0;
|
|
7531 |
if (q->testAttribute(Qt::WA_DeleteOnClose)) {
|
|
7532 |
q->setAttribute(Qt::WA_DeleteOnClose, false);
|
|
7533 |
q->deleteLater();
|
|
7534 |
}
|
|
7535 |
}
|
|
7536 |
return true;
|
|
7537 |
}
|
|
7538 |
|
|
7539 |
|
|
7540 |
/*!
|
|
7541 |
Closes this widget. Returns true if the widget was closed;
|
|
7542 |
otherwise returns false.
|
|
7543 |
|
|
7544 |
First it sends the widget a QCloseEvent. The widget is \link
|
|
7545 |
hide() hidden\endlink if it \link QCloseEvent::accept()
|
|
7546 |
accepts\endlink the close event. If it \link QCloseEvent::ignore()
|
|
7547 |
ignores\endlink the event, nothing happens. The default
|
|
7548 |
implementation of QWidget::closeEvent() accepts the close event.
|
|
7549 |
|
|
7550 |
If the widget has the Qt::WA_DeleteOnClose flag, the widget
|
|
7551 |
is also deleted. A close events is delivered to the widget no
|
|
7552 |
matter if the widget is visible or not.
|
|
7553 |
|
|
7554 |
The \l QApplication::lastWindowClosed() signal is emitted when the
|
|
7555 |
last visible primary window (i.e. window with no parent) with the
|
|
7556 |
Qt::WA_QuitOnClose attribute set is closed. By default this
|
|
7557 |
attribute is set for all widgets except transient windows such as
|
|
7558 |
splash screens, tool windows, and popup menus.
|
|
7559 |
|
|
7560 |
*/
|
|
7561 |
|
|
7562 |
bool QWidget::close()
|
|
7563 |
{
|
|
7564 |
return d_func()->close_helper(QWidgetPrivate::CloseWithEvent);
|
|
7565 |
}
|
|
7566 |
|
|
7567 |
/*!
|
|
7568 |
\property QWidget::visible
|
|
7569 |
\brief whether the widget is visible
|
|
7570 |
|
|
7571 |
Calling setVisible(true) or show() sets the widget to visible
|
|
7572 |
status if all its parent widgets up to the window are visible. If
|
|
7573 |
an ancestor is not visible, the widget won't become visible until
|
|
7574 |
all its ancestors are shown. If its size or position has changed,
|
|
7575 |
Qt guarantees that a widget gets move and resize events just
|
|
7576 |
before it is shown. If the widget has not been resized yet, Qt
|
|
7577 |
will adjust the widget's size to a useful default using
|
|
7578 |
adjustSize().
|
|
7579 |
|
|
7580 |
Calling setVisible(false) or hide() hides a widget explicitly. An
|
|
7581 |
explicitly hidden widget will never become visible, even if all
|
|
7582 |
its ancestors become visible, unless you show it.
|
|
7583 |
|
|
7584 |
A widget receives show and hide events when its visibility status
|
|
7585 |
changes. Between a hide and a show event, there is no need to
|
|
7586 |
waste CPU cycles preparing or displaying information to the user.
|
|
7587 |
A video application, for example, might simply stop generating new
|
|
7588 |
frames.
|
|
7589 |
|
|
7590 |
A widget that happens to be obscured by other windows on the
|
|
7591 |
screen is considered to be visible. The same applies to iconified
|
|
7592 |
windows and windows that exist on another virtual
|
|
7593 |
desktop (on platforms that support this concept). A widget
|
|
7594 |
receives spontaneous show and hide events when its mapping status
|
|
7595 |
is changed by the window system, e.g. a spontaneous hide event
|
|
7596 |
when the user minimizes the window, and a spontaneous show event
|
|
7597 |
when the window is restored again.
|
|
7598 |
|
|
7599 |
You almost never have to reimplement the setVisible() function. If
|
|
7600 |
you need to change some settings before a widget is shown, use
|
|
7601 |
showEvent() instead. If you need to do some delayed initialization
|
|
7602 |
use the Polish event delivered to the event() function.
|
|
7603 |
|
|
7604 |
\sa show(), hide(), isHidden(), isVisibleTo(), isMinimized(),
|
|
7605 |
showEvent(), hideEvent()
|
|
7606 |
*/
|
|
7607 |
|
|
7608 |
|
|
7609 |
/*!
|
|
7610 |
Returns true if this widget would become visible if \a ancestor is
|
|
7611 |
shown; otherwise returns false.
|
|
7612 |
|
|
7613 |
The true case occurs if neither the widget itself nor any parent
|
|
7614 |
up to but excluding \a ancestor has been explicitly hidden.
|
|
7615 |
|
|
7616 |
This function will still return true if the widget is obscured by
|
|
7617 |
other windows on the screen, but could be physically visible if it
|
|
7618 |
or they were to be moved.
|
|
7619 |
|
|
7620 |
isVisibleTo(0) is identical to isVisible().
|
|
7621 |
|
|
7622 |
\sa show() hide() isVisible()
|
|
7623 |
*/
|
|
7624 |
|
|
7625 |
bool QWidget::isVisibleTo(QWidget* ancestor) const
|
|
7626 |
{
|
|
7627 |
if (!ancestor)
|
|
7628 |
return isVisible();
|
|
7629 |
const QWidget * w = this;
|
|
7630 |
while (!w->isHidden()
|
|
7631 |
&& !w->isWindow()
|
|
7632 |
&& w->parentWidget()
|
|
7633 |
&& w->parentWidget() != ancestor)
|
|
7634 |
w = w->parentWidget();
|
|
7635 |
return !w->isHidden();
|
|
7636 |
}
|
|
7637 |
|
|
7638 |
#ifdef QT3_SUPPORT
|
|
7639 |
/*!
|
|
7640 |
Use visibleRegion() instead.
|
|
7641 |
*/
|
|
7642 |
QRect QWidget::visibleRect() const
|
|
7643 |
{
|
|
7644 |
return d_func()->clipRect();
|
|
7645 |
}
|
|
7646 |
#endif
|
|
7647 |
|
|
7648 |
/*!
|
|
7649 |
Returns the unobscured region where paint events can occur.
|
|
7650 |
|
|
7651 |
For visible widgets, this is an approximation of the area not
|
|
7652 |
covered by other widgets; otherwise, this is an empty region.
|
|
7653 |
|
|
7654 |
The repaint() function calls this function if necessary, so in
|
|
7655 |
general you do not need to call it.
|
|
7656 |
|
|
7657 |
*/
|
|
7658 |
QRegion QWidget::visibleRegion() const
|
|
7659 |
{
|
|
7660 |
Q_D(const QWidget);
|
|
7661 |
|
|
7662 |
QRect clipRect = d->clipRect();
|
|
7663 |
if (clipRect.isEmpty())
|
|
7664 |
return QRegion();
|
|
7665 |
QRegion r(clipRect);
|
|
7666 |
d->subtractOpaqueChildren(r, clipRect);
|
|
7667 |
d->subtractOpaqueSiblings(r);
|
|
7668 |
#ifdef Q_WS_QWS
|
|
7669 |
const QWSWindowSurface *surface = static_cast<const QWSWindowSurface*>(windowSurface());
|
|
7670 |
if (surface) {
|
|
7671 |
const QPoint offset = mapTo(surface->window(), QPoint());
|
|
7672 |
r &= surface->clipRegion().translated(-offset);
|
|
7673 |
}
|
|
7674 |
#endif
|
|
7675 |
return r;
|
|
7676 |
}
|
|
7677 |
|
|
7678 |
|
|
7679 |
QSize QWidgetPrivate::adjustedSize() const
|
|
7680 |
{
|
|
7681 |
Q_Q(const QWidget);
|
|
7682 |
|
|
7683 |
QSize s = q->sizeHint();
|
|
7684 |
|
|
7685 |
if (q->isWindow()) {
|
|
7686 |
Qt::Orientations exp;
|
|
7687 |
if (layout) {
|
|
7688 |
if (layout->hasHeightForWidth())
|
|
7689 |
s.setHeight(layout->totalHeightForWidth(s.width()));
|
|
7690 |
exp = layout->expandingDirections();
|
|
7691 |
} else
|
|
7692 |
{
|
|
7693 |
if (q->sizePolicy().hasHeightForWidth())
|
|
7694 |
s.setHeight(q->heightForWidth(s.width()));
|
|
7695 |
exp = q->sizePolicy().expandingDirections();
|
|
7696 |
}
|
|
7697 |
if (exp & Qt::Horizontal)
|
|
7698 |
s.setWidth(qMax(s.width(), 200));
|
|
7699 |
if (exp & Qt::Vertical)
|
|
7700 |
s.setHeight(qMax(s.height(), 100));
|
|
7701 |
#if defined(Q_WS_X11)
|
|
7702 |
QRect screen = QApplication::desktop()->screenGeometry(q->x11Info().screen());
|
|
7703 |
#else // all others
|
|
7704 |
QRect screen = QApplication::desktop()->screenGeometry(q->pos());
|
|
7705 |
#endif
|
|
7706 |
#if defined (Q_WS_WINCE) || defined (Q_OS_SYMBIAN)
|
|
7707 |
s.setWidth(qMin(s.width(), screen.width()));
|
|
7708 |
s.setHeight(qMin(s.height(), screen.height()));
|
|
7709 |
#else
|
|
7710 |
s.setWidth(qMin(s.width(), screen.width()*2/3));
|
|
7711 |
s.setHeight(qMin(s.height(), screen.height()*2/3));
|
|
7712 |
#endif
|
|
7713 |
if (QTLWExtra *extra = maybeTopData())
|
|
7714 |
extra->sizeAdjusted = true;
|
|
7715 |
}
|
|
7716 |
|
|
7717 |
if (!s.isValid()) {
|
|
7718 |
QRect r = q->childrenRect(); // get children rectangle
|
|
7719 |
if (r.isNull())
|
|
7720 |
return s;
|
|
7721 |
s = r.size() + QSize(2 * r.x(), 2 * r.y());
|
|
7722 |
}
|
|
7723 |
|
|
7724 |
return s;
|
|
7725 |
}
|
|
7726 |
|
|
7727 |
/*!
|
|
7728 |
Adjusts the size of the widget to fit its contents.
|
|
7729 |
|
|
7730 |
This function uses sizeHint() if it is valid, i.e., the size hint's width
|
|
7731 |
and height are \>= 0. Otherwise, it sets the size to the children
|
|
7732 |
rectangle that covers all child widgets (the union of all child widget
|
|
7733 |
rectangles).
|
|
7734 |
|
|
7735 |
For windows, the screen size is also taken into account. If the sizeHint()
|
|
7736 |
is less than (200, 100) and the size policy is \l{QSizePolicy::Expanding}
|
|
7737 |
{expanding}, the window will be at least (200, 100). The maximum size of
|
|
7738 |
a window is 2/3 of the screen's width and height.
|
|
7739 |
|
|
7740 |
\sa sizeHint(), childrenRect()
|
|
7741 |
*/
|
|
7742 |
|
|
7743 |
void QWidget::adjustSize()
|
|
7744 |
{
|
|
7745 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
7746 |
ensurePolished();
|
|
7747 |
QSize s = d->adjustedSize();
|
|
7748 |
|
|
7749 |
if (d->layout)
|
|
7750 |
d->layout->activate();
|
|
7751 |
|
|
7752 |
if (s.isValid())
|
|
7753 |
resize(s);
|
|
7754 |
}
|
|
7755 |
|
|
7756 |
|
|
7757 |
/*!
|
|
7758 |
\property QWidget::sizeHint
|
|
7759 |
\brief the recommended size for the widget
|
|
7760 |
|
|
7761 |
If the value of this property is an invalid size, no size is
|
|
7762 |
recommended.
|
|
7763 |
|
|
7764 |
The default implementation of sizeHint() returns an invalid size
|
|
7765 |
if there is no layout for this widget, and returns the layout's
|
|
7766 |
preferred size otherwise.
|
|
7767 |
|
|
7768 |
\sa QSize::isValid(), minimumSizeHint(), sizePolicy(),
|
|
7769 |
setMinimumSize(), updateGeometry()
|
|
7770 |
*/
|
|
7771 |
|
|
7772 |
QSize QWidget::sizeHint() const
|
|
7773 |
{
|
|
7774 |
Q_D(const QWidget);
|
|
7775 |
if (d->layout)
|
|
7776 |
return d->layout->totalSizeHint();
|
|
7777 |
return QSize(-1, -1);
|
|
7778 |
}
|
|
7779 |
|
|
7780 |
/*!
|
|
7781 |
\property QWidget::minimumSizeHint
|
|
7782 |
\brief the recommended minimum size for the widget
|
|
7783 |
|
|
7784 |
If the value of this property is an invalid size, no minimum size
|
|
7785 |
is recommended.
|
|
7786 |
|
|
7787 |
The default implementation of minimumSizeHint() returns an invalid
|
|
7788 |
size if there is no layout for this widget, and returns the
|
|
7789 |
layout's minimum size otherwise. Most built-in widgets reimplement
|
|
7790 |
minimumSizeHint().
|
|
7791 |
|
|
7792 |
\l QLayout will never resize a widget to a size smaller than the
|
|
7793 |
minimum size hint unless minimumSize() is set or the size policy is
|
|
7794 |
set to QSizePolicy::Ignore. If minimumSize() is set, the minimum
|
|
7795 |
size hint will be ignored.
|
|
7796 |
|
|
7797 |
\sa QSize::isValid(), resize(), setMinimumSize(), sizePolicy()
|
|
7798 |
*/
|
|
7799 |
QSize QWidget::minimumSizeHint() const
|
|
7800 |
{
|
|
7801 |
Q_D(const QWidget);
|
|
7802 |
if (d->layout)
|
|
7803 |
return d->layout->totalMinimumSize();
|
|
7804 |
return QSize(-1, -1);
|
|
7805 |
}
|
|
7806 |
|
|
7807 |
|
|
7808 |
/*!
|
|
7809 |
\fn QWidget *QWidget::parentWidget() const
|
|
7810 |
|
|
7811 |
Returns the parent of this widget, or 0 if it does not have any
|
|
7812 |
parent widget.
|
|
7813 |
*/
|
|
7814 |
|
|
7815 |
|
|
7816 |
/*!
|
|
7817 |
Returns true if this widget is a parent, (or grandparent and so on
|
|
7818 |
to any level), of the given \a child, and both widgets are within
|
|
7819 |
the same window; otherwise returns false.
|
|
7820 |
*/
|
|
7821 |
|
|
7822 |
bool QWidget::isAncestorOf(const QWidget *child) const
|
|
7823 |
{
|
|
7824 |
while (child) {
|
|
7825 |
if (child == this)
|
|
7826 |
return true;
|
|
7827 |
if (child->isWindow())
|
|
7828 |
return false;
|
|
7829 |
child = child->parentWidget();
|
|
7830 |
}
|
|
7831 |
return false;
|
|
7832 |
}
|
|
7833 |
|
|
7834 |
#if defined(Q_WS_WIN)
|
|
7835 |
inline void setDisabledStyle(QWidget *w, bool setStyle)
|
|
7836 |
{
|
|
7837 |
// set/reset WS_DISABLED style.
|
|
7838 |
if(w && w->isWindow() && w->isVisible() && w->isEnabled()) {
|
|
7839 |
LONG dwStyle = GetWindowLong(w->winId(), GWL_STYLE);
|
|
7840 |
if (setStyle)
|
|
7841 |
dwStyle |= WS_DISABLED;
|
|
7842 |
else
|
|
7843 |
dwStyle &= ~WS_DISABLED;
|
|
7844 |
SetWindowLong(w->winId(), GWL_STYLE, dwStyle);
|
|
7845 |
// we might need to repaint in some situations (eg. menu)
|
|
7846 |
w->repaint();
|
|
7847 |
}
|
|
7848 |
}
|
|
7849 |
#endif
|
|
7850 |
|
|
7851 |
/*****************************************************************************
|
|
7852 |
QWidget event handling
|
|
7853 |
*****************************************************************************/
|
|
7854 |
|
|
7855 |
/*!
|
|
7856 |
This is the main event handler; it handles event \a event. You can
|
|
7857 |
reimplement this function in a subclass, but we recommend using
|
|
7858 |
one of the specialized event handlers instead.
|
|
7859 |
|
|
7860 |
Key press and release events are treated differently from other
|
|
7861 |
events. event() checks for Tab and Shift+Tab and tries to move the
|
|
7862 |
focus appropriately. If there is no widget to move the focus to
|
|
7863 |
(or the key press is not Tab or Shift+Tab), event() calls
|
|
7864 |
keyPressEvent().
|
|
7865 |
|
|
7866 |
Mouse and tablet event handling is also slightly special: only
|
|
7867 |
when the widget is \l enabled, event() will call the specialized
|
|
7868 |
handlers such as mousePressEvent(); otherwise it will discard the
|
|
7869 |
event.
|
|
7870 |
|
|
7871 |
This function returns true if the event was recognized, otherwise
|
|
7872 |
it returns false. If the recognized event was accepted (see \l
|
|
7873 |
QEvent::accepted), any further processing such as event
|
|
7874 |
propagation to the parent widget stops.
|
|
7875 |
|
|
7876 |
\sa closeEvent(), focusInEvent(), focusOutEvent(), enterEvent(),
|
|
7877 |
keyPressEvent(), keyReleaseEvent(), leaveEvent(),
|
|
7878 |
mouseDoubleClickEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), mousePressEvent(),
|
|
7879 |
mouseReleaseEvent(), moveEvent(), paintEvent(), resizeEvent(),
|
|
7880 |
QObject::event(), QObject::timerEvent()
|
|
7881 |
*/
|
|
7882 |
|
|
7883 |
bool QWidget::event(QEvent *event)
|
|
7884 |
{
|
|
7885 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
7886 |
|
|
7887 |
// ignore mouse events when disabled
|
|
7888 |
if (!isEnabled()) {
|
|
7889 |
switch(event->type()) {
|
|
7890 |
case QEvent::TabletPress:
|
|
7891 |
case QEvent::TabletRelease:
|
|
7892 |
case QEvent::TabletMove:
|
|
7893 |
case QEvent::MouseButtonPress:
|
|
7894 |
case QEvent::MouseButtonRelease:
|
|
7895 |
case QEvent::MouseButtonDblClick:
|
|
7896 |
case QEvent::MouseMove:
|
|
7897 |
case QEvent::TouchBegin:
|
|
7898 |
case QEvent::TouchUpdate:
|
|
7899 |
case QEvent::TouchEnd:
|
|
7900 |
case QEvent::ContextMenu:
|
|
7901 |
#ifndef QT_NO_WHEELEVENT
|
|
7902 |
case QEvent::Wheel:
|
|
7903 |
#endif
|
|
7904 |
return false;
|
|
7905 |
default:
|
|
7906 |
break;
|
|
7907 |
}
|
|
7908 |
}
|
|
7909 |
switch (event->type()) {
|
|
7910 |
case QEvent::MouseMove:
|
|
7911 |
mouseMoveEvent((QMouseEvent*)event);
|
|
7912 |
break;
|
|
7913 |
|
|
7914 |
case QEvent::MouseButtonPress:
|
|
7915 |
// Don't reset input context here. Whether reset or not is
|
|
7916 |
// a responsibility of input method. reset() will be
|
|
7917 |
// called by mouseHandler() of input method if necessary
|
|
7918 |
// via mousePressEvent() of text widgets.
|
|
7919 |
#if 0
|
|
7920 |
resetInputContext();
|
|
7921 |
#endif
|
|
7922 |
mousePressEvent((QMouseEvent*)event);
|
|
7923 |
break;
|
|
7924 |
|
|
7925 |
case QEvent::MouseButtonRelease:
|
|
7926 |
mouseReleaseEvent((QMouseEvent*)event);
|
|
7927 |
break;
|
|
7928 |
|
|
7929 |
case QEvent::MouseButtonDblClick:
|
|
7930 |
mouseDoubleClickEvent((QMouseEvent*)event);
|
|
7931 |
break;
|
|
7932 |
#ifndef QT_NO_WHEELEVENT
|
|
7933 |
case QEvent::Wheel:
|
|
7934 |
wheelEvent((QWheelEvent*)event);
|
|
7935 |
break;
|
|
7936 |
#endif
|
|
7937 |
#ifndef QT_NO_TABLETEVENT
|
|
7938 |
case QEvent::TabletMove:
|
|
7939 |
case QEvent::TabletPress:
|
|
7940 |
case QEvent::TabletRelease:
|
|
7941 |
tabletEvent((QTabletEvent*)event);
|
|
7942 |
break;
|
|
7943 |
#endif
|
|
7944 |
#ifdef QT3_SUPPORT
|
|
7945 |
case QEvent::Accel:
|
|
7946 |
event->ignore();
|
|
7947 |
return false;
|
|
7948 |
#endif
|
|
7949 |
case QEvent::KeyPress: {
|
|
7950 |
QKeyEvent *k = (QKeyEvent *)event;
|
|
7951 |
bool res = false;
|
|
7952 |
if (!(k->modifiers() & (Qt::ControlModifier | Qt::AltModifier))) { //### Add MetaModifier?
|
|
7953 |
if (k->key() == Qt::Key_Backtab
|
|
7954 |
|| (k->key() == Qt::Key_Tab && (k->modifiers() & Qt::ShiftModifier)))
|
|
7955 |
res = focusNextPrevChild(false);
|
|
7956 |
else if (k->key() == Qt::Key_Tab)
|
|
7957 |
res = focusNextPrevChild(true);
|
|
7958 |
if (res)
|
|
7959 |
break;
|
|
7960 |
}
|
|
7961 |
keyPressEvent(k);
|
|
7962 |
#ifdef QT_KEYPAD_NAVIGATION
|
|
7963 |
if (!k->isAccepted() && QApplication::keypadNavigationEnabled()
|
|
7964 |
&& !(k->modifiers() & (Qt::ControlModifier | Qt::AltModifier | Qt::ShiftModifier))) {
|
|
7965 |
if (QApplication::navigationMode() == Qt::NavigationModeKeypadTabOrder) {
|
|
7966 |
if (k->key() == Qt::Key_Up)
|
|
7967 |
res = focusNextPrevChild(false);
|
|
7968 |
else if (k->key() == Qt::Key_Down)
|
|
7969 |
res = focusNextPrevChild(true);
|
|
7970 |
} else if (QApplication::navigationMode() == Qt::NavigationModeKeypadDirectional) {
|
|
7971 |
if (k->key() == Qt::Key_Up)
|
|
7972 |
res = QWidgetPrivate::navigateToDirection(QWidgetPrivate::DirectionNorth);
|
|
7973 |
else if (k->key() == Qt::Key_Right)
|
|
7974 |
res = QWidgetPrivate::navigateToDirection(QWidgetPrivate::DirectionEast);
|
|
7975 |
else if (k->key() == Qt::Key_Down)
|
|
7976 |
res = QWidgetPrivate::navigateToDirection(QWidgetPrivate::DirectionSouth);
|
|
7977 |
else if (k->key() == Qt::Key_Left)
|
|
7978 |
res = QWidgetPrivate::navigateToDirection(QWidgetPrivate::DirectionWest);
|
|
7979 |
}
|
|
7980 |
if (res) {
|
|
7981 |
k->accept();
|
|
7982 |
break;
|
|
7983 |
}
|
|
7984 |
}
|
|
7985 |
#endif
|
|
7986 |
#ifndef QT_NO_WHATSTHIS
|
|
7987 |
if (!k->isAccepted()
|
|
7988 |
&& k->modifiers() & Qt::ShiftModifier && k->key() == Qt::Key_F1
|
|
7989 |
&& d->whatsThis.size()) {
|
|
7990 |
QWhatsThis::showText(mapToGlobal(inputMethodQuery(Qt::ImMicroFocus).toRect().center()), d->whatsThis, this);
|
|
7991 |
k->accept();
|
|
7992 |
}
|
|
7993 |
#endif
|
|
7994 |
}
|
|
7995 |
break;
|
|
7996 |
|
|
7997 |
case QEvent::KeyRelease:
|
|
7998 |
keyReleaseEvent((QKeyEvent*)event);
|
|
7999 |
// fall through
|
|
8000 |
case QEvent::ShortcutOverride:
|
|
8001 |
break;
|
|
8002 |
|
|
8003 |
case QEvent::InputMethod:
|
|
8004 |
inputMethodEvent((QInputMethodEvent *) event);
|
|
8005 |
break;
|
|
8006 |
|
|
8007 |
case QEvent::PolishRequest:
|
|
8008 |
ensurePolished();
|
|
8009 |
break;
|
|
8010 |
|
|
8011 |
case QEvent::Polish: {
|
|
8012 |
style()->polish(this);
|
|
8013 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Polished);
|
|
8014 |
if (!QApplication::font(this).isCopyOf(QApplication::font()))
|
|
8015 |
d->resolveFont();
|
|
8016 |
if (!QApplication::palette(this).isCopyOf(QApplication::palette()))
|
|
8017 |
d->resolvePalette();
|
|
8018 |
#ifdef QT3_SUPPORT
|
|
8019 |
if(d->sendChildEvents)
|
|
8020 |
QApplication::sendPostedEvents(this, QEvent::ChildInserted);
|
|
8021 |
#endif
|
|
8022 |
}
|
|
8023 |
break;
|
|
8024 |
|
|
8025 |
case QEvent::ApplicationWindowIconChange:
|
|
8026 |
if (isWindow() && !testAttribute(Qt::WA_SetWindowIcon)) {
|
|
8027 |
d->setWindowIcon_sys();
|
|
8028 |
d->setWindowIcon_helper();
|
|
8029 |
}
|
|
8030 |
break;
|
|
8031 |
case QEvent::FocusIn:
|
|
8032 |
#ifdef QT_SOFTKEYS_ENABLED
|
|
8033 |
QSoftKeyManager::updateSoftKeys();
|
|
8034 |
#endif
|
|
8035 |
focusInEvent((QFocusEvent*)event);
|
|
8036 |
break;
|
|
8037 |
|
|
8038 |
case QEvent::FocusOut:
|
|
8039 |
focusOutEvent((QFocusEvent*)event);
|
|
8040 |
break;
|
|
8041 |
|
|
8042 |
case QEvent::Enter:
|
|
8043 |
#ifndef QT_NO_STATUSTIP
|
|
8044 |
if (d->statusTip.size()) {
|
|
8045 |
QStatusTipEvent tip(d->statusTip);
|
|
8046 |
QApplication::sendEvent(const_cast<QWidget *>(this), &tip);
|
|
8047 |
}
|
|
8048 |
#endif
|
|
8049 |
enterEvent(event);
|
|
8050 |
break;
|
|
8051 |
|
|
8052 |
case QEvent::Leave:
|
|
8053 |
#ifndef QT_NO_STATUSTIP
|
|
8054 |
if (d->statusTip.size()) {
|
|
8055 |
QString empty;
|
|
8056 |
QStatusTipEvent tip(empty);
|
|
8057 |
QApplication::sendEvent(const_cast<QWidget *>(this), &tip);
|
|
8058 |
}
|
|
8059 |
#endif
|
|
8060 |
leaveEvent(event);
|
|
8061 |
break;
|
|
8062 |
|
|
8063 |
case QEvent::HoverEnter:
|
|
8064 |
case QEvent::HoverLeave:
|
|
8065 |
update();
|
|
8066 |
break;
|
|
8067 |
|
|
8068 |
case QEvent::Paint:
|
|
8069 |
// At this point the event has to be delivered, regardless
|
|
8070 |
// whether the widget isVisible() or not because it
|
|
8071 |
// already went through the filters
|
|
8072 |
paintEvent((QPaintEvent*)event);
|
|
8073 |
break;
|
|
8074 |
|
|
8075 |
case QEvent::Move:
|
|
8076 |
moveEvent((QMoveEvent*)event);
|
|
8077 |
break;
|
|
8078 |
|
|
8079 |
case QEvent::Resize:
|
|
8080 |
resizeEvent((QResizeEvent*)event);
|
|
8081 |
break;
|
|
8082 |
|
|
8083 |
case QEvent::Close:
|
|
8084 |
closeEvent((QCloseEvent *)event);
|
|
8085 |
break;
|
|
8086 |
|
|
8087 |
#ifndef QT_NO_CONTEXTMENU
|
|
8088 |
case QEvent::ContextMenu:
|
|
8089 |
switch (data->context_menu_policy) {
|
|
8090 |
case Qt::PreventContextMenu:
|
|
8091 |
break;
|
|
8092 |
case Qt::DefaultContextMenu:
|
|
8093 |
contextMenuEvent(static_cast<QContextMenuEvent *>(event));
|
|
8094 |
break;
|
|
8095 |
case Qt::CustomContextMenu:
|
|
8096 |
emit customContextMenuRequested(static_cast<QContextMenuEvent *>(event)->pos());
|
|
8097 |
break;
|
|
8098 |
#ifndef QT_NO_MENU
|
|
8099 |
case Qt::ActionsContextMenu:
|
|
8100 |
if (d->actions.count()) {
|
|
8101 |
QMenu::exec(d->actions, static_cast<QContextMenuEvent *>(event)->globalPos(),
|
|
8102 |
0, this);
|
|
8103 |
break;
|
|
8104 |
}
|
|
8105 |
// fall through
|
|
8106 |
#endif
|
|
8107 |
default:
|
|
8108 |
event->ignore();
|
|
8109 |
break;
|
|
8110 |
}
|
|
8111 |
break;
|
|
8112 |
#endif // QT_NO_CONTEXTMENU
|
|
8113 |
|
|
8114 |
#ifndef QT_NO_DRAGANDDROP
|
|
8115 |
case QEvent::Drop:
|
|
8116 |
dropEvent((QDropEvent*) event);
|
|
8117 |
break;
|
|
8118 |
|
|
8119 |
case QEvent::DragEnter:
|
|
8120 |
dragEnterEvent((QDragEnterEvent*) event);
|
|
8121 |
break;
|
|
8122 |
|
|
8123 |
case QEvent::DragMove:
|
|
8124 |
dragMoveEvent((QDragMoveEvent*) event);
|
|
8125 |
break;
|
|
8126 |
|
|
8127 |
case QEvent::DragLeave:
|
|
8128 |
dragLeaveEvent((QDragLeaveEvent*) event);
|
|
8129 |
break;
|
|
8130 |
#endif
|
|
8131 |
|
|
8132 |
case QEvent::Show:
|
|
8133 |
showEvent((QShowEvent*) event);
|
|
8134 |
break;
|
|
8135 |
|
|
8136 |
case QEvent::Hide:
|
|
8137 |
hideEvent((QHideEvent*) event);
|
|
8138 |
break;
|
|
8139 |
|
|
8140 |
case QEvent::ShowWindowRequest:
|
|
8141 |
if (!isHidden())
|
|
8142 |
d->show_sys();
|
|
8143 |
break;
|
|
8144 |
|
|
8145 |
case QEvent::ApplicationFontChange:
|
|
8146 |
d->resolveFont();
|
|
8147 |
break;
|
|
8148 |
case QEvent::ApplicationPaletteChange:
|
|
8149 |
if (!(windowType() == Qt::Desktop))
|
|
8150 |
d->resolvePalette();
|
|
8151 |
break;
|
|
8152 |
|
|
8153 |
case QEvent::ToolBarChange:
|
|
8154 |
case QEvent::ActivationChange:
|
|
8155 |
case QEvent::EnabledChange:
|
|
8156 |
case QEvent::FontChange:
|
|
8157 |
case QEvent::StyleChange:
|
|
8158 |
case QEvent::PaletteChange:
|
|
8159 |
case QEvent::WindowTitleChange:
|
|
8160 |
case QEvent::IconTextChange:
|
|
8161 |
case QEvent::ModifiedChange:
|
|
8162 |
case QEvent::MouseTrackingChange:
|
|
8163 |
case QEvent::ParentChange:
|
|
8164 |
case QEvent::WindowStateChange:
|
|
8165 |
case QEvent::LocaleChange:
|
|
8166 |
case QEvent::MacSizeChange:
|
|
8167 |
case QEvent::ContentsRectChange:
|
|
8168 |
changeEvent(event);
|
|
8169 |
break;
|
|
8170 |
|
|
8171 |
case QEvent::WindowActivate:
|
|
8172 |
case QEvent::WindowDeactivate: {
|
|
8173 |
#ifdef QT3_SUPPORT
|
|
8174 |
windowActivationChange(event->type() != QEvent::WindowActivate);
|
|
8175 |
#endif
|
|
8176 |
if (isVisible() && !palette().isEqual(QPalette::Active, QPalette::Inactive))
|
|
8177 |
update();
|
|
8178 |
QList<QObject*> childList = d->children;
|
|
8179 |
for (int i = 0; i < childList.size(); ++i) {
|
|
8180 |
QWidget *w = qobject_cast<QWidget *>(childList.at(i));
|
|
8181 |
if (w && w->isVisible() && !w->isWindow())
|
|
8182 |
QApplication::sendEvent(w, event);
|
|
8183 |
}
|
|
8184 |
|
|
8185 |
#ifdef QT_SOFTKEYS_ENABLED
|
|
8186 |
if (isWindow() && isActiveWindow())
|
|
8187 |
QSoftKeyManager::updateSoftKeys();
|
|
8188 |
#endif
|
|
8189 |
|
|
8190 |
break; }
|
|
8191 |
|
|
8192 |
case QEvent::LanguageChange:
|
|
8193 |
#ifdef QT3_SUPPORT
|
|
8194 |
languageChange();
|
|
8195 |
#endif
|
|
8196 |
changeEvent(event);
|
|
8197 |
{
|
|
8198 |
QList<QObject*> childList = d->children;
|
|
8199 |
for (int i = 0; i < childList.size(); ++i) {
|
|
8200 |
QObject *o = childList.at(i);
|
|
8201 |
QApplication::sendEvent(o, event);
|
|
8202 |
}
|
|
8203 |
}
|
|
8204 |
update();
|
|
8205 |
break;
|
|
8206 |
|
|
8207 |
case QEvent::ApplicationLayoutDirectionChange:
|
|
8208 |
d->resolveLayoutDirection();
|
|
8209 |
break;
|
|
8210 |
|
|
8211 |
case QEvent::LayoutDirectionChange:
|
|
8212 |
if (d->layout)
|
|
8213 |
d->layout->invalidate();
|
|
8214 |
update();
|
|
8215 |
changeEvent(event);
|
|
8216 |
break;
|
|
8217 |
case QEvent::UpdateRequest:
|
|
8218 |
d->syncBackingStore();
|
|
8219 |
break;
|
|
8220 |
case QEvent::UpdateLater:
|
|
8221 |
update(static_cast<QUpdateLaterEvent*>(event)->region());
|
|
8222 |
break;
|
|
8223 |
|
|
8224 |
case QEvent::WindowBlocked:
|
|
8225 |
case QEvent::WindowUnblocked:
|
|
8226 |
{
|
|
8227 |
QList<QObject*> childList = d->children;
|
|
8228 |
for (int i = 0; i < childList.size(); ++i) {
|
|
8229 |
QObject *o = childList.at(i);
|
|
8230 |
if (o != QApplication::activeModalWidget()) {
|
|
8231 |
if (qobject_cast<QWidget *>(o) && static_cast<QWidget *>(o)->isWindow()) {
|
|
8232 |
// do not forward the event to child windows,
|
|
8233 |
// QApplication does this for us
|
|
8234 |
continue;
|
|
8235 |
}
|
|
8236 |
QApplication::sendEvent(o, event);
|
|
8237 |
}
|
|
8238 |
}
|
|
8239 |
#if defined(Q_WS_WIN)
|
|
8240 |
setDisabledStyle(this, (event->type() == QEvent::WindowBlocked));
|
|
8241 |
#endif
|
|
8242 |
}
|
|
8243 |
break;
|
|
8244 |
#ifndef QT_NO_TOOLTIP
|
|
8245 |
case QEvent::ToolTip:
|
|
8246 |
if (!d->toolTip.isEmpty())
|
|
8247 |
QToolTip::showText(static_cast<QHelpEvent*>(event)->globalPos(), d->toolTip, this);
|
|
8248 |
else
|
|
8249 |
event->ignore();
|
|
8250 |
break;
|
|
8251 |
#endif
|
|
8252 |
#ifndef QT_NO_WHATSTHIS
|
|
8253 |
case QEvent::WhatsThis:
|
|
8254 |
if (d->whatsThis.size())
|
|
8255 |
QWhatsThis::showText(static_cast<QHelpEvent *>(event)->globalPos(), d->whatsThis, this);
|
|
8256 |
else
|
|
8257 |
event->ignore();
|
|
8258 |
break;
|
|
8259 |
case QEvent::QueryWhatsThis:
|
|
8260 |
if (d->whatsThis.isEmpty())
|
|
8261 |
event->ignore();
|
|
8262 |
break;
|
|
8263 |
#endif
|
|
8264 |
#ifndef QT_NO_ACCESSIBILITY
|
|
8265 |
case QEvent::AccessibilityDescription:
|
|
8266 |
case QEvent::AccessibilityHelp: {
|
|
8267 |
QAccessibleEvent *ev = static_cast<QAccessibleEvent *>(event);
|
|
8268 |
if (ev->child())
|
|
8269 |
return false;
|
|
8270 |
switch (ev->type()) {
|
|
8271 |
#ifndef QT_NO_TOOLTIP
|
|
8272 |
case QEvent::AccessibilityDescription:
|
|
8273 |
ev->setValue(d->toolTip);
|
|
8274 |
break;
|
|
8275 |
#endif
|
|
8276 |
#ifndef QT_NO_WHATSTHIS
|
|
8277 |
case QEvent::AccessibilityHelp:
|
|
8278 |
ev->setValue(d->whatsThis);
|
|
8279 |
break;
|
|
8280 |
#endif
|
|
8281 |
default:
|
|
8282 |
return false;
|
|
8283 |
}
|
|
8284 |
break; }
|
|
8285 |
#endif
|
|
8286 |
case QEvent::EmbeddingControl:
|
|
8287 |
d->topData()->frameStrut.setCoords(0 ,0, 0, 0);
|
|
8288 |
data->fstrut_dirty = false;
|
|
8289 |
#if defined(Q_WS_WIN) || defined(Q_WS_X11)
|
|
8290 |
d->topData()->embedded = 1;
|
|
8291 |
#endif
|
|
8292 |
break;
|
|
8293 |
#ifndef QT_NO_ACTION
|
|
8294 |
case QEvent::ActionAdded:
|
|
8295 |
case QEvent::ActionRemoved:
|
|
8296 |
case QEvent::ActionChanged:
|
|
8297 |
#ifdef QT_SOFTKEYS_ENABLED
|
|
8298 |
QSoftKeyManager::updateSoftKeys();
|
|
8299 |
#endif
|
|
8300 |
actionEvent((QActionEvent*)event);
|
|
8301 |
break;
|
|
8302 |
#endif
|
|
8303 |
|
|
8304 |
case QEvent::KeyboardLayoutChange:
|
|
8305 |
{
|
|
8306 |
changeEvent(event);
|
|
8307 |
|
|
8308 |
// inform children of the change
|
|
8309 |
QList<QObject*> childList = d->children;
|
|
8310 |
for (int i = 0; i < childList.size(); ++i) {
|
|
8311 |
QWidget *w = qobject_cast<QWidget *>(childList.at(i));
|
|
8312 |
if (w && w->isVisible() && !w->isWindow())
|
|
8313 |
QApplication::sendEvent(w, event);
|
|
8314 |
}
|
|
8315 |
break;
|
|
8316 |
}
|
|
8317 |
#ifdef Q_WS_MAC
|
|
8318 |
case QEvent::MacGLWindowChange:
|
|
8319 |
d->needWindowChange = false;
|
|
8320 |
break;
|
|
8321 |
#endif
|
|
8322 |
case QEvent::TouchBegin:
|
|
8323 |
case QEvent::TouchUpdate:
|
|
8324 |
case QEvent::TouchEnd:
|
|
8325 |
{
|
|
8326 |
QTouchEvent *touchEvent = static_cast<QTouchEvent *>(event);
|
|
8327 |
const QTouchEvent::TouchPoint &touchPoint = touchEvent->touchPoints().first();
|
|
8328 |
if (touchPoint.isPrimary())
|
|
8329 |
break;
|
|
8330 |
|
|
8331 |
// fake a mouse event!
|
|
8332 |
QEvent::Type eventType = QEvent::None;
|
|
8333 |
switch (touchEvent->type()) {
|
|
8334 |
case QEvent::TouchBegin:
|
|
8335 |
eventType = QEvent::MouseButtonPress;
|
|
8336 |
break;
|
|
8337 |
case QEvent::TouchUpdate:
|
|
8338 |
eventType = QEvent::MouseMove;
|
|
8339 |
break;
|
|
8340 |
case QEvent::TouchEnd:
|
|
8341 |
eventType = QEvent::MouseButtonRelease;
|
|
8342 |
break;
|
|
8343 |
default:
|
|
8344 |
Q_ASSERT(!true);
|
|
8345 |
break;
|
|
8346 |
}
|
|
8347 |
if (eventType == QEvent::None)
|
|
8348 |
break;
|
|
8349 |
|
|
8350 |
QMouseEvent mouseEvent(eventType,
|
|
8351 |
touchPoint.pos().toPoint(),
|
|
8352 |
touchPoint.screenPos().toPoint(),
|
|
8353 |
Qt::LeftButton,
|
|
8354 |
Qt::LeftButton,
|
|
8355 |
touchEvent->modifiers());
|
|
8356 |
(void) QApplication::sendEvent(this, &mouseEvent);
|
|
8357 |
break;
|
|
8358 |
}
|
|
8359 |
case QEvent::Gesture:
|
|
8360 |
event->ignore();
|
|
8361 |
break;
|
|
8362 |
#ifndef QT_NO_PROPERTIES
|
|
8363 |
case QEvent::DynamicPropertyChange: {
|
|
8364 |
const QByteArray &propName = static_cast<QDynamicPropertyChangeEvent *>(event)->propertyName();
|
|
8365 |
if (!qstrncmp(propName, "_q_customDpi", 12) && propName.length() == 13) {
|
|
8366 |
uint value = property(propName.constData()).toUInt();
|
|
8367 |
if (!d->extra)
|
|
8368 |
d->createExtra();
|
|
8369 |
const char axis = propName.at(12);
|
|
8370 |
if (axis == 'X')
|
|
8371 |
d->extra->customDpiX = value;
|
|
8372 |
else if (axis == 'Y')
|
|
8373 |
d->extra->customDpiY = value;
|
|
8374 |
d->updateFont(d->data.fnt);
|
|
8375 |
}
|
|
8376 |
// fall through
|
|
8377 |
}
|
|
8378 |
#endif
|
|
8379 |
default:
|
|
8380 |
return QObject::event(event);
|
|
8381 |
}
|
|
8382 |
return true;
|
|
8383 |
}
|
|
8384 |
|
|
8385 |
/*!
|
|
8386 |
This event handler can be reimplemented to handle state changes.
|
|
8387 |
|
|
8388 |
The state being changed in this event can be retrieved through event \a
|
|
8389 |
event.
|
|
8390 |
|
|
8391 |
Change events include: QEvent::ToolBarChange,
|
|
8392 |
QEvent::ActivationChange, QEvent::EnabledChange, QEvent::FontChange,
|
|
8393 |
QEvent::StyleChange, QEvent::PaletteChange,
|
|
8394 |
QEvent::WindowTitleChange, QEvent::IconTextChange,
|
|
8395 |
QEvent::ModifiedChange, QEvent::MouseTrackingChange,
|
|
8396 |
QEvent::ParentChange, QEvent::WindowStateChange,
|
|
8397 |
QEvent::LanguageChange, QEvent::LocaleChange,
|
|
8398 |
QEvent::LayoutDirectionChange.
|
|
8399 |
|
|
8400 |
*/
|
|
8401 |
void QWidget::changeEvent(QEvent * event)
|
|
8402 |
{
|
|
8403 |
switch(event->type()) {
|
|
8404 |
case QEvent::EnabledChange:
|
|
8405 |
update();
|
|
8406 |
#ifndef QT_NO_ACCESSIBILITY
|
|
8407 |
QAccessible::updateAccessibility(this, 0, QAccessible::StateChanged);
|
|
8408 |
#endif
|
|
8409 |
break;
|
|
8410 |
|
|
8411 |
case QEvent::FontChange:
|
|
8412 |
case QEvent::StyleChange: {
|
|
8413 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
8414 |
update();
|
|
8415 |
updateGeometry();
|
|
8416 |
if (d->layout)
|
|
8417 |
d->layout->invalidate();
|
|
8418 |
#ifdef Q_WS_QWS
|
|
8419 |
if (isWindow())
|
|
8420 |
d->data.fstrut_dirty = true;
|
|
8421 |
#endif
|
|
8422 |
break;
|
|
8423 |
}
|
|
8424 |
|
|
8425 |
case QEvent::PaletteChange:
|
|
8426 |
update();
|
|
8427 |
break;
|
|
8428 |
|
|
8429 |
#ifdef Q_WS_MAC
|
|
8430 |
case QEvent::MacSizeChange:
|
|
8431 |
updateGeometry();
|
|
8432 |
break;
|
|
8433 |
case QEvent::ToolTipChange:
|
|
8434 |
case QEvent::MouseTrackingChange:
|
|
8435 |
qt_mac_update_mouseTracking(this);
|
|
8436 |
break;
|
|
8437 |
#endif
|
|
8438 |
|
|
8439 |
default:
|
|
8440 |
break;
|
|
8441 |
}
|
|
8442 |
}
|
|
8443 |
|
|
8444 |
/*!
|
|
8445 |
This event handler, for event \a event, can be reimplemented in a
|
|
8446 |
subclass to receive mouse move events for the widget.
|
|
8447 |
|
|
8448 |
If mouse tracking is switched off, mouse move events only occur if
|
|
8449 |
a mouse button is pressed while the mouse is being moved. If mouse
|
|
8450 |
tracking is switched on, mouse move events occur even if no mouse
|
|
8451 |
button is pressed.
|
|
8452 |
|
|
8453 |
QMouseEvent::pos() reports the position of the mouse cursor,
|
|
8454 |
relative to this widget. For press and release events, the
|
|
8455 |
position is usually the same as the position of the last mouse
|
|
8456 |
move event, but it might be different if the user's hand shakes.
|
|
8457 |
This is a feature of the underlying window system, not Qt.
|
|
8458 |
|
|
8459 |
If you want to show a tooltip immediately, while the mouse is
|
|
8460 |
moving (e.g., to get the mouse coordinates with QMouseEvent::pos()
|
|
8461 |
and show them as a tooltip), you must first enable mouse tracking
|
|
8462 |
as described above. Then, to ensure that the tooltip is updated
|
|
8463 |
immediately, you must call QToolTip::showText() instead of
|
|
8464 |
setToolTip() in your implementation of mouseMoveEvent().
|
|
8465 |
|
|
8466 |
\sa setMouseTracking(), mousePressEvent(), mouseReleaseEvent(),
|
|
8467 |
mouseDoubleClickEvent(), event(), QMouseEvent, {Scribble Example}
|
|
8468 |
*/
|
|
8469 |
|
|
8470 |
void QWidget::mouseMoveEvent(QMouseEvent *event)
|
|
8471 |
{
|
|
8472 |
event->ignore();
|
|
8473 |
}
|
|
8474 |
|
|
8475 |
/*!
|
|
8476 |
This event handler, for event \a event, can be reimplemented in a
|
|
8477 |
subclass to receive mouse press events for the widget.
|
|
8478 |
|
|
8479 |
If you create new widgets in the mousePressEvent() the
|
|
8480 |
mouseReleaseEvent() may not end up where you expect, depending on
|
|
8481 |
the underlying window system (or X11 window manager), the widgets'
|
|
8482 |
location and maybe more.
|
|
8483 |
|
|
8484 |
The default implementation implements the closing of popup widgets
|
|
8485 |
when you click outside the window. For other widget types it does
|
|
8486 |
nothing.
|
|
8487 |
|
|
8488 |
\sa mouseReleaseEvent(), mouseDoubleClickEvent(),
|
|
8489 |
mouseMoveEvent(), event(), QMouseEvent, {Scribble Example}
|
|
8490 |
*/
|
|
8491 |
|
|
8492 |
void QWidget::mousePressEvent(QMouseEvent *event)
|
|
8493 |
{
|
|
8494 |
event->ignore();
|
|
8495 |
if ((windowType() == Qt::Popup)) {
|
|
8496 |
event->accept();
|
|
8497 |
QWidget* w;
|
|
8498 |
while ((w = QApplication::activePopupWidget()) && w != this){
|
|
8499 |
w->close();
|
|
8500 |
if (QApplication::activePopupWidget() == w) // widget does not want to dissappear
|
|
8501 |
w->hide(); // hide at least
|
|
8502 |
}
|
|
8503 |
if (!rect().contains(event->pos())){
|
|
8504 |
close();
|
|
8505 |
}
|
|
8506 |
}
|
|
8507 |
}
|
|
8508 |
|
|
8509 |
/*!
|
|
8510 |
This event handler, for event \a event, can be reimplemented in a
|
|
8511 |
subclass to receive mouse release events for the widget.
|
|
8512 |
|
|
8513 |
\sa mousePressEvent(), mouseDoubleClickEvent(),
|
|
8514 |
mouseMoveEvent(), event(), QMouseEvent, {Scribble Example}
|
|
8515 |
*/
|
|
8516 |
|
|
8517 |
void QWidget::mouseReleaseEvent(QMouseEvent *event)
|
|
8518 |
{
|
|
8519 |
event->ignore();
|
|
8520 |
}
|
|
8521 |
|
|
8522 |
/*!
|
|
8523 |
This event handler, for event \a event, can be reimplemented in a
|
|
8524 |
subclass to receive mouse double click events for the widget.
|
|
8525 |
|
|
8526 |
The default implementation generates a normal mouse press event.
|
|
8527 |
|
|
8528 |
\note The widget will also receive mouse press and mouse release
|
|
8529 |
events in addition to the double click event. It is up to the
|
|
8530 |
developer to ensure that the application interprets these events
|
|
8531 |
correctly.
|
|
8532 |
|
|
8533 |
\sa mousePressEvent(), mouseReleaseEvent() mouseMoveEvent(),
|
|
8534 |
event(), QMouseEvent
|
|
8535 |
*/
|
|
8536 |
|
|
8537 |
void QWidget::mouseDoubleClickEvent(QMouseEvent *event)
|
|
8538 |
{
|
|
8539 |
mousePressEvent(event); // try mouse press event
|
|
8540 |
}
|
|
8541 |
|
|
8542 |
#ifndef QT_NO_WHEELEVENT
|
|
8543 |
/*!
|
|
8544 |
This event handler, for event \a event, can be reimplemented in a
|
|
8545 |
subclass to receive wheel events for the widget.
|
|
8546 |
|
|
8547 |
If you reimplement this handler, it is very important that you
|
|
8548 |
\link QWheelEvent ignore()\endlink the event if you do not handle
|
|
8549 |
it, so that the widget's parent can interpret it.
|
|
8550 |
|
|
8551 |
The default implementation ignores the event.
|
|
8552 |
|
|
8553 |
\sa QWheelEvent::ignore(), QWheelEvent::accept(), event(),
|
|
8554 |
QWheelEvent
|
|
8555 |
*/
|
|
8556 |
|
|
8557 |
void QWidget::wheelEvent(QWheelEvent *event)
|
|
8558 |
{
|
|
8559 |
event->ignore();
|
|
8560 |
}
|
|
8561 |
#endif // QT_NO_WHEELEVENT
|
|
8562 |
|
|
8563 |
#ifndef QT_NO_TABLETEVENT
|
|
8564 |
/*!
|
|
8565 |
This event handler, for event \a event, can be reimplemented in a
|
|
8566 |
subclass to receive tablet events for the widget.
|
|
8567 |
|
|
8568 |
If you reimplement this handler, it is very important that you
|
|
8569 |
\link QTabletEvent ignore()\endlink the event if you do not handle
|
|
8570 |
it, so that the widget's parent can interpret it.
|
|
8571 |
|
|
8572 |
The default implementation ignores the event.
|
|
8573 |
|
|
8574 |
\sa QTabletEvent::ignore(), QTabletEvent::accept(), event(),
|
|
8575 |
QTabletEvent
|
|
8576 |
*/
|
|
8577 |
|
|
8578 |
void QWidget::tabletEvent(QTabletEvent *event)
|
|
8579 |
{
|
|
8580 |
event->ignore();
|
|
8581 |
}
|
|
8582 |
#endif // QT_NO_TABLETEVENT
|
|
8583 |
|
|
8584 |
/*!
|
|
8585 |
This event handler, for event \a event, can be reimplemented in a
|
|
8586 |
subclass to receive key press events for the widget.
|
|
8587 |
|
|
8588 |
A widget must call setFocusPolicy() to accept focus initially and
|
|
8589 |
have focus in order to receive a key press event.
|
|
8590 |
|
|
8591 |
If you reimplement this handler, it is very important that you
|
|
8592 |
call the base class implementation if you do not act upon the key.
|
|
8593 |
|
|
8594 |
The default implementation closes popup widgets if the user
|
|
8595 |
presses Esc. Otherwise the event is ignored, so that the widget's
|
|
8596 |
parent can interpret it.
|
|
8597 |
|
|
8598 |
Note that QKeyEvent starts with isAccepted() == true, so you do not
|
|
8599 |
need to call QKeyEvent::accept() - just do not call the base class
|
|
8600 |
implementation if you act upon the key.
|
|
8601 |
|
|
8602 |
\sa keyReleaseEvent(), setFocusPolicy(),
|
|
8603 |
focusInEvent(), focusOutEvent(), event(), QKeyEvent, {Tetrix Example}
|
|
8604 |
*/
|
|
8605 |
|
|
8606 |
void QWidget::keyPressEvent(QKeyEvent *event)
|
|
8607 |
{
|
|
8608 |
if ((windowType() == Qt::Popup) && event->key() == Qt::Key_Escape) {
|
|
8609 |
event->accept();
|
|
8610 |
close();
|
|
8611 |
} else {
|
|
8612 |
event->ignore();
|
|
8613 |
}
|
|
8614 |
}
|
|
8615 |
|
|
8616 |
/*!
|
|
8617 |
This event handler, for event \a event, can be reimplemented in a
|
|
8618 |
subclass to receive key release events for the widget.
|
|
8619 |
|
|
8620 |
A widget must \link setFocusPolicy() accept focus\endlink
|
|
8621 |
initially and \link hasFocus() have focus\endlink in order to
|
|
8622 |
receive a key release event.
|
|
8623 |
|
|
8624 |
If you reimplement this handler, it is very important that you
|
|
8625 |
call the base class implementation if you do not act upon the key.
|
|
8626 |
|
|
8627 |
The default implementation ignores the event, so that the widget's
|
|
8628 |
parent can interpret it.
|
|
8629 |
|
|
8630 |
Note that QKeyEvent starts with isAccepted() == true, so you do not
|
|
8631 |
need to call QKeyEvent::accept() - just do not call the base class
|
|
8632 |
implementation if you act upon the key.
|
|
8633 |
|
|
8634 |
\sa keyPressEvent(), QKeyEvent::ignore(), setFocusPolicy(),
|
|
8635 |
focusInEvent(), focusOutEvent(), event(), QKeyEvent
|
|
8636 |
*/
|
|
8637 |
|
|
8638 |
void QWidget::keyReleaseEvent(QKeyEvent *event)
|
|
8639 |
{
|
|
8640 |
event->ignore();
|
|
8641 |
}
|
|
8642 |
|
|
8643 |
/*!
|
|
8644 |
\fn void QWidget::focusInEvent(QFocusEvent *event)
|
|
8645 |
|
|
8646 |
This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive
|
|
8647 |
keyboard focus events (focus received) for the widget. The event
|
|
8648 |
is passed in the \a event parameter
|
|
8649 |
|
|
8650 |
A widget normally must setFocusPolicy() to something other than
|
|
8651 |
Qt::NoFocus in order to receive focus events. (Note that the
|
|
8652 |
application programmer can call setFocus() on any widget, even
|
|
8653 |
those that do not normally accept focus.)
|
|
8654 |
|
|
8655 |
The default implementation updates the widget (except for windows
|
|
8656 |
that do not specify a focusPolicy()).
|
|
8657 |
|
|
8658 |
\sa focusOutEvent(), setFocusPolicy(), keyPressEvent(),
|
|
8659 |
keyReleaseEvent(), event(), QFocusEvent
|
|
8660 |
*/
|
|
8661 |
|
|
8662 |
void QWidget::focusInEvent(QFocusEvent *)
|
|
8663 |
{
|
|
8664 |
if (focusPolicy() != Qt::NoFocus || !isWindow()) {
|
|
8665 |
update();
|
|
8666 |
}
|
|
8667 |
}
|
|
8668 |
|
|
8669 |
/*!
|
|
8670 |
\fn void QWidget::focusOutEvent(QFocusEvent *event)
|
|
8671 |
|
|
8672 |
This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive
|
|
8673 |
keyboard focus events (focus lost) for the widget. The events is
|
|
8674 |
passed in the \a event parameter.
|
|
8675 |
|
|
8676 |
A widget normally must setFocusPolicy() to something other than
|
|
8677 |
Qt::NoFocus in order to receive focus events. (Note that the
|
|
8678 |
application programmer can call setFocus() on any widget, even
|
|
8679 |
those that do not normally accept focus.)
|
|
8680 |
|
|
8681 |
The default implementation updates the widget (except for windows
|
|
8682 |
that do not specify a focusPolicy()).
|
|
8683 |
|
|
8684 |
\sa focusInEvent(), setFocusPolicy(), keyPressEvent(),
|
|
8685 |
keyReleaseEvent(), event(), QFocusEvent
|
|
8686 |
*/
|
|
8687 |
|
|
8688 |
void QWidget::focusOutEvent(QFocusEvent *)
|
|
8689 |
{
|
|
8690 |
if (focusPolicy() != Qt::NoFocus || !isWindow())
|
|
8691 |
update();
|
|
8692 |
}
|
|
8693 |
|
|
8694 |
/*!
|
|
8695 |
\fn void QWidget::enterEvent(QEvent *event)
|
|
8696 |
|
|
8697 |
This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive
|
|
8698 |
widget enter events which are passed in the \a event parameter.
|
|
8699 |
|
|
8700 |
An event is sent to the widget when the mouse cursor enters the
|
|
8701 |
widget.
|
|
8702 |
|
|
8703 |
\sa leaveEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), event()
|
|
8704 |
*/
|
|
8705 |
|
|
8706 |
void QWidget::enterEvent(QEvent *)
|
|
8707 |
{
|
|
8708 |
}
|
|
8709 |
|
|
8710 |
/*!
|
|
8711 |
\fn void QWidget::leaveEvent(QEvent *event)
|
|
8712 |
|
|
8713 |
This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive
|
|
8714 |
widget leave events which are passed in the \a event parameter.
|
|
8715 |
|
|
8716 |
A leave event is sent to the widget when the mouse cursor leaves
|
|
8717 |
the widget.
|
|
8718 |
|
|
8719 |
\sa enterEvent(), mouseMoveEvent(), event()
|
|
8720 |
*/
|
|
8721 |
|
|
8722 |
void QWidget::leaveEvent(QEvent *)
|
|
8723 |
{
|
|
8724 |
}
|
|
8725 |
|
|
8726 |
/*!
|
|
8727 |
\fn void QWidget::paintEvent(QPaintEvent *event)
|
|
8728 |
|
|
8729 |
This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive paint
|
|
8730 |
events passed in \a event.
|
|
8731 |
|
|
8732 |
A paint event is a request to repaint all or part of a widget. It can
|
|
8733 |
happen for one of the following reasons:
|
|
8734 |
|
|
8735 |
\list
|
|
8736 |
\o repaint() or update() was invoked,
|
|
8737 |
\o the widget was obscured and has now been uncovered, or
|
|
8738 |
\o many other reasons.
|
|
8739 |
\endlist
|
|
8740 |
|
|
8741 |
Many widgets can simply repaint their entire surface when asked to, but
|
|
8742 |
some slow widgets need to optimize by painting only the requested region:
|
|
8743 |
QPaintEvent::region(). This speed optimization does not change the result,
|
|
8744 |
as painting is clipped to that region during event processing. QListView
|
|
8745 |
and QTableView do this, for example.
|
|
8746 |
|
|
8747 |
Qt also tries to speed up painting by merging multiple paint events into
|
|
8748 |
one. When update() is called several times or the window system sends
|
|
8749 |
several paint events, Qt merges these events into one event with a larger
|
|
8750 |
region (see QRegion::united()). The repaint() function does not permit this
|
|
8751 |
optimization, so we suggest using update() whenever possible.
|
|
8752 |
|
|
8753 |
When the paint event occurs, the update region has normally been erased, so
|
|
8754 |
you are painting on the widget's background.
|
|
8755 |
|
|
8756 |
The background can be set using setBackgroundRole() and setPalette().
|
|
8757 |
|
|
8758 |
Since Qt 4.0, QWidget automatically double-buffers its painting, so there
|
|
8759 |
is no need to write double-buffering code in paintEvent() to avoid flicker.
|
|
8760 |
|
|
8761 |
\bold{Note for the X11 platform}: It is possible to toggle global double
|
|
8762 |
buffering by calling \c qt_x11_set_global_double_buffer(). For example,
|
|
8763 |
|
|
8764 |
\snippet doc/src/snippets/code/src_gui_kernel_qwidget.cpp 14
|
|
8765 |
|
|
8766 |
\note Generally, you should refrain from calling update() or repaint()
|
|
8767 |
\bold{inside} a paintEvent(). For example, calling update() or repaint() on
|
|
8768 |
children inside a paintevent() results in undefined behavior; the child may
|
|
8769 |
or may not get a paint event.
|
|
8770 |
|
|
8771 |
\warning If you are using a custom paint engine without Qt's backingstore,
|
|
8772 |
Qt::WA_PaintOnScreen must be set. Otherwise, QWidget::paintEngine() will
|
|
8773 |
never be called; the backingstore will be used instead.
|
|
8774 |
|
|
8775 |
\sa event(), repaint(), update(), QPainter, QPixmap, QPaintEvent,
|
|
8776 |
{Analog Clock Example}
|
|
8777 |
*/
|
|
8778 |
|
|
8779 |
void QWidget::paintEvent(QPaintEvent *)
|
|
8780 |
{
|
|
8781 |
}
|
|
8782 |
|
|
8783 |
|
|
8784 |
/*!
|
|
8785 |
\fn void QWidget::moveEvent(QMoveEvent *event)
|
|
8786 |
|
|
8787 |
This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive
|
|
8788 |
widget move events which are passed in the \a event parameter.
|
|
8789 |
When the widget receives this event, it is already at the new
|
|
8790 |
position.
|
|
8791 |
|
|
8792 |
The old position is accessible through QMoveEvent::oldPos().
|
|
8793 |
|
|
8794 |
\sa resizeEvent(), event(), move(), QMoveEvent
|
|
8795 |
*/
|
|
8796 |
|
|
8797 |
void QWidget::moveEvent(QMoveEvent *)
|
|
8798 |
{
|
|
8799 |
}
|
|
8800 |
|
|
8801 |
|
|
8802 |
/*!
|
|
8803 |
This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive
|
|
8804 |
widget resize events which are passed in the \a event parameter.
|
|
8805 |
When resizeEvent() is called, the widget already has its new
|
|
8806 |
geometry. The old size is accessible through
|
|
8807 |
QResizeEvent::oldSize().
|
|
8808 |
|
|
8809 |
The widget will be erased and receive a paint event immediately
|
|
8810 |
after processing the resize event. No drawing need be (or should
|
|
8811 |
be) done inside this handler.
|
|
8812 |
|
|
8813 |
|
|
8814 |
\sa moveEvent(), event(), resize(), QResizeEvent, paintEvent(),
|
|
8815 |
{Scribble Example}
|
|
8816 |
*/
|
|
8817 |
|
|
8818 |
void QWidget::resizeEvent(QResizeEvent * /* event */)
|
|
8819 |
{
|
|
8820 |
}
|
|
8821 |
|
|
8822 |
#ifndef QT_NO_ACTION
|
|
8823 |
/*!
|
|
8824 |
\fn void QWidget::actionEvent(QActionEvent *event)
|
|
8825 |
|
|
8826 |
This event handler is called with the given \a event whenever the
|
|
8827 |
widget's actions are changed.
|
|
8828 |
|
|
8829 |
\sa addAction(), insertAction(), removeAction(), actions(), QActionEvent
|
|
8830 |
*/
|
|
8831 |
void QWidget::actionEvent(QActionEvent *)
|
|
8832 |
{
|
|
8833 |
|
|
8834 |
}
|
|
8835 |
#endif
|
|
8836 |
|
|
8837 |
/*!
|
|
8838 |
This event handler is called with the given \a event when Qt receives a window
|
|
8839 |
close request for a top-level widget from the window system.
|
|
8840 |
|
|
8841 |
By default, the event is accepted and the widget is closed. You can reimplement
|
|
8842 |
this function to change the way the widget responds to window close requests.
|
|
8843 |
For example, you can prevent the window from closing by calling \l{QEvent::}{ignore()}
|
|
8844 |
on all events.
|
|
8845 |
|
|
8846 |
Main window applications typically use reimplementations of this function to check
|
|
8847 |
whether the user's work has been saved and ask for permission before closing.
|
|
8848 |
For example, the \l{Application Example} uses a helper function to determine whether
|
|
8849 |
or not to close the window:
|
|
8850 |
|
|
8851 |
\snippet mainwindows/application/mainwindow.cpp 3
|
|
8852 |
\snippet mainwindows/application/mainwindow.cpp 4
|
|
8853 |
|
|
8854 |
\sa event(), hide(), close(), QCloseEvent, {Application Example}
|
|
8855 |
*/
|
|
8856 |
|
|
8857 |
void QWidget::closeEvent(QCloseEvent *event)
|
|
8858 |
{
|
|
8859 |
event->accept();
|
|
8860 |
}
|
|
8861 |
|
|
8862 |
#ifndef QT_NO_CONTEXTMENU
|
|
8863 |
/*!
|
|
8864 |
This event handler, for event \a event, can be reimplemented in a
|
|
8865 |
subclass to receive widget context menu events.
|
|
8866 |
|
|
8867 |
The handler is called when the widget's \l contextMenuPolicy is
|
|
8868 |
Qt::DefaultContextMenu.
|
|
8869 |
|
|
8870 |
The default implementation ignores the context event.
|
|
8871 |
See the \l QContextMenuEvent documentation for more details.
|
|
8872 |
|
|
8873 |
\sa event(), QContextMenuEvent customContextMenuRequested()
|
|
8874 |
*/
|
|
8875 |
|
|
8876 |
void QWidget::contextMenuEvent(QContextMenuEvent *event)
|
|
8877 |
{
|
|
8878 |
event->ignore();
|
|
8879 |
}
|
|
8880 |
#endif // QT_NO_CONTEXTMENU
|
|
8881 |
|
|
8882 |
|
|
8883 |
/*!
|
|
8884 |
This event handler, for event \a event, can be reimplemented in a
|
|
8885 |
subclass to receive Input Method composition events. This handler
|
|
8886 |
is called when the state of the input method changes.
|
|
8887 |
|
|
8888 |
Note that when creating custom text editing widgets, the
|
|
8889 |
Qt::WA_InputMethodEnabled window attribute must be set explicitly
|
|
8890 |
(using the setAttribute() function) in order to receive input
|
|
8891 |
method events.
|
|
8892 |
|
|
8893 |
The default implementation calls event->ignore(), which rejects the
|
|
8894 |
Input Method event. See the \l QInputMethodEvent documentation for more
|
|
8895 |
details.
|
|
8896 |
|
|
8897 |
\sa event(), QInputMethodEvent
|
|
8898 |
*/
|
|
8899 |
void QWidget::inputMethodEvent(QInputMethodEvent *event)
|
|
8900 |
{
|
|
8901 |
event->ignore();
|
|
8902 |
}
|
|
8903 |
|
|
8904 |
/*!
|
|
8905 |
This method is only relevant for input widgets. It is used by the
|
|
8906 |
input method to query a set of properties of the widget to be
|
|
8907 |
able to support complex input method operations as support for
|
|
8908 |
surrounding text and reconversions.
|
|
8909 |
|
|
8910 |
\a query specifies which property is queried.
|
|
8911 |
|
|
8912 |
\sa inputMethodEvent(), QInputMethodEvent, QInputContext, inputMethodHints
|
|
8913 |
*/
|
|
8914 |
QVariant QWidget::inputMethodQuery(Qt::InputMethodQuery query) const
|
|
8915 |
{
|
|
8916 |
switch(query) {
|
|
8917 |
case Qt::ImMicroFocus:
|
|
8918 |
return QRect(width()/2, 0, 1, height());
|
|
8919 |
case Qt::ImFont:
|
|
8920 |
return font();
|
|
8921 |
case Qt::ImAnchorPosition:
|
|
8922 |
// Fallback.
|
|
8923 |
return inputMethodQuery(Qt::ImCursorPosition);
|
|
8924 |
default:
|
|
8925 |
return QVariant();
|
|
8926 |
}
|
|
8927 |
}
|
|
8928 |
|
|
8929 |
/*!
|
|
8930 |
\property QWidget::inputMethodHints
|
|
8931 |
\brief What input method specific hints the widget has.
|
|
8932 |
|
|
8933 |
This is only relevant for input widgets. It is used by
|
|
8934 |
the input method to retrieve hints as to how the input method
|
|
8935 |
should operate. For example, if the Qt::ImhFormattedNumbersOnly flag
|
|
8936 |
is set, the input method may change its visual components to reflect
|
|
8937 |
that only numbers can be entered.
|
|
8938 |
|
|
8939 |
\note The flags are only hints, so the particular input method
|
|
8940 |
implementation is free to ignore them. If you want to be
|
|
8941 |
sure that a certain type of characters are entered,
|
|
8942 |
you should also set a QValidator on the widget.
|
|
8943 |
|
|
8944 |
The default value is Qt::ImhNone.
|
|
8945 |
|
|
8946 |
\since 4.6
|
|
8947 |
|
|
8948 |
\sa inputMethodQuery(), QInputContext
|
|
8949 |
*/
|
|
8950 |
Qt::InputMethodHints QWidget::inputMethodHints() const
|
|
8951 |
{
|
|
8952 |
Q_D(const QWidget);
|
|
8953 |
return d->imHints;
|
|
8954 |
}
|
|
8955 |
|
|
8956 |
void QWidget::setInputMethodHints(Qt::InputMethodHints hints)
|
|
8957 |
{
|
|
8958 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
8959 |
d->imHints = hints;
|
|
8960 |
// Optimisation to update input context only it has already been created.
|
|
8961 |
if (d->ic || qApp->d_func()->inputContext) {
|
|
8962 |
QInputContext *ic = inputContext();
|
|
8963 |
if (ic)
|
|
8964 |
ic->update();
|
|
8965 |
}
|
|
8966 |
}
|
|
8967 |
|
|
8968 |
|
|
8969 |
#ifndef QT_NO_DRAGANDDROP
|
|
8970 |
|
|
8971 |
/*!
|
|
8972 |
\fn void QWidget::dragEnterEvent(QDragEnterEvent *event)
|
|
8973 |
|
|
8974 |
This event handler is called when a drag is in progress and the
|
|
8975 |
mouse enters this widget. The event is passed in the \a event parameter.
|
|
8976 |
|
|
8977 |
If the event is ignored, the widget won't receive any \l{dragMoveEvent()}{drag
|
|
8978 |
move events}.
|
|
8979 |
|
|
8980 |
See the \link dnd.html Drag-and-drop documentation\endlink for an
|
|
8981 |
overview of how to provide drag-and-drop in your application.
|
|
8982 |
|
|
8983 |
\sa QDrag, QDragEnterEvent
|
|
8984 |
*/
|
|
8985 |
void QWidget::dragEnterEvent(QDragEnterEvent *)
|
|
8986 |
{
|
|
8987 |
}
|
|
8988 |
|
|
8989 |
/*!
|
|
8990 |
\fn void QWidget::dragMoveEvent(QDragMoveEvent *event)
|
|
8991 |
|
|
8992 |
This event handler is called if a drag is in progress, and when
|
|
8993 |
any of the following conditions occur: the cursor enters this widget,
|
|
8994 |
the cursor moves within this widget, or a modifier key is pressed on
|
|
8995 |
the keyboard while this widget has the focus. The event is passed
|
|
8996 |
in the \a event parameter.
|
|
8997 |
|
|
8998 |
See the \link dnd.html Drag-and-drop documentation\endlink for an
|
|
8999 |
overview of how to provide drag-and-drop in your application.
|
|
9000 |
|
|
9001 |
\sa QDrag, QDragMoveEvent
|
|
9002 |
*/
|
|
9003 |
void QWidget::dragMoveEvent(QDragMoveEvent *)
|
|
9004 |
{
|
|
9005 |
}
|
|
9006 |
|
|
9007 |
/*!
|
|
9008 |
\fn void QWidget::dragLeaveEvent(QDragLeaveEvent *event)
|
|
9009 |
|
|
9010 |
This event handler is called when a drag is in progress and the
|
|
9011 |
mouse leaves this widget. The event is passed in the \a event
|
|
9012 |
parameter.
|
|
9013 |
|
|
9014 |
See the \link dnd.html Drag-and-drop documentation\endlink for an
|
|
9015 |
overview of how to provide drag-and-drop in your application.
|
|
9016 |
|
|
9017 |
\sa QDrag, QDragLeaveEvent
|
|
9018 |
*/
|
|
9019 |
void QWidget::dragLeaveEvent(QDragLeaveEvent *)
|
|
9020 |
{
|
|
9021 |
}
|
|
9022 |
|
|
9023 |
/*!
|
|
9024 |
\fn void QWidget::dropEvent(QDropEvent *event)
|
|
9025 |
|
|
9026 |
This event handler is called when the drag is dropped on this
|
|
9027 |
widget. The event is passed in the \a event parameter.
|
|
9028 |
|
|
9029 |
See the \link dnd.html Drag-and-drop documentation\endlink for an
|
|
9030 |
overview of how to provide drag-and-drop in your application.
|
|
9031 |
|
|
9032 |
\sa QDrag, QDropEvent
|
|
9033 |
*/
|
|
9034 |
void QWidget::dropEvent(QDropEvent *)
|
|
9035 |
{
|
|
9036 |
}
|
|
9037 |
|
|
9038 |
#endif // QT_NO_DRAGANDDROP
|
|
9039 |
|
|
9040 |
/*!
|
|
9041 |
\fn void QWidget::showEvent(QShowEvent *event)
|
|
9042 |
|
|
9043 |
This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive
|
|
9044 |
widget show events which are passed in the \a event parameter.
|
|
9045 |
|
|
9046 |
Non-spontaneous show events are sent to widgets immediately
|
|
9047 |
before they are shown. The spontaneous show events of windows are
|
|
9048 |
delivered afterwards.
|
|
9049 |
|
|
9050 |
Note: A widget receives spontaneous show and hide events when its
|
|
9051 |
mapping status is changed by the window system, e.g. a spontaneous
|
|
9052 |
hide event when the user minimizes the window, and a spontaneous
|
|
9053 |
show event when the window is restored again. After receiving a
|
|
9054 |
spontaneous hide event, a widget is still considered visible in
|
|
9055 |
the sense of isVisible().
|
|
9056 |
|
|
9057 |
\sa visible, event(), QShowEvent
|
|
9058 |
*/
|
|
9059 |
void QWidget::showEvent(QShowEvent *)
|
|
9060 |
{
|
|
9061 |
}
|
|
9062 |
|
|
9063 |
/*!
|
|
9064 |
\fn void QWidget::hideEvent(QHideEvent *event)
|
|
9065 |
|
|
9066 |
This event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive
|
|
9067 |
widget hide events. The event is passed in the \a event parameter.
|
|
9068 |
|
|
9069 |
Hide events are sent to widgets immediately after they have been
|
|
9070 |
hidden.
|
|
9071 |
|
|
9072 |
Note: A widget receives spontaneous show and hide events when its
|
|
9073 |
mapping status is changed by the window system, e.g. a spontaneous
|
|
9074 |
hide event when the user minimizes the window, and a spontaneous
|
|
9075 |
show event when the window is restored again. After receiving a
|
|
9076 |
spontaneous hide event, a widget is still considered visible in
|
|
9077 |
the sense of isVisible().
|
|
9078 |
|
|
9079 |
\sa visible, event(), QHideEvent
|
|
9080 |
*/
|
|
9081 |
void QWidget::hideEvent(QHideEvent *)
|
|
9082 |
{
|
|
9083 |
}
|
|
9084 |
|
|
9085 |
/*
|
|
9086 |
\fn QWidget::x11Event(MSG *)
|
|
9087 |
|
|
9088 |
This special event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive
|
|
9089 |
native X11 events.
|
|
9090 |
|
|
9091 |
In your reimplementation of this function, if you want to stop Qt from
|
|
9092 |
handling the event, return true. If you return false, this native event
|
|
9093 |
is passed back to Qt, which translates it into a Qt event and sends it to
|
|
9094 |
the widget.
|
|
9095 |
|
|
9096 |
\note Events are only delivered to this event handler if the widget is
|
|
9097 |
native.
|
|
9098 |
|
|
9099 |
\warning This function is not portable.
|
|
9100 |
|
|
9101 |
\sa QApplication::x11EventFilter(), QWidget::winId()
|
|
9102 |
*/
|
|
9103 |
|
|
9104 |
|
|
9105 |
#if defined(Q_WS_MAC)
|
|
9106 |
|
|
9107 |
/*!
|
|
9108 |
\fn bool QWidget::macEvent(EventHandlerCallRef caller, EventRef event)
|
|
9109 |
|
|
9110 |
This special event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to
|
|
9111 |
receive native Macintosh events.
|
|
9112 |
|
|
9113 |
The parameters are a bit different depending if Qt is build against Carbon
|
|
9114 |
or Cocoa. In Carbon, \a caller and \a event are the corresponding
|
|
9115 |
EventHandlerCallRef and EventRef that correspond to the Carbon event
|
|
9116 |
handlers that are installed. In Cocoa, \a caller is always 0 and the
|
|
9117 |
EventRef is the EventRef generated from the NSEvent.
|
|
9118 |
|
|
9119 |
In your reimplementation of this function, if you want to stop the
|
|
9120 |
event being handled by Qt, return true. If you return false, this
|
|
9121 |
native event is passed back to Qt, which translates the event into
|
|
9122 |
a Qt event and sends it to the widget.
|
|
9123 |
|
|
9124 |
\warning This function is not portable.
|
|
9125 |
|
|
9126 |
\warning This function was not called inside of Qt until Qt 4.4.
|
|
9127 |
If you need compatibility with earlier versions of Qt, consider QApplication::macEventFilter() instead.
|
|
9128 |
|
|
9129 |
\sa QApplication::macEventFilter()
|
|
9130 |
*/
|
|
9131 |
|
|
9132 |
bool QWidget::macEvent(EventHandlerCallRef, EventRef)
|
|
9133 |
{
|
|
9134 |
return false;
|
|
9135 |
}
|
|
9136 |
|
|
9137 |
#endif
|
|
9138 |
#if defined(Q_WS_WIN)
|
|
9139 |
|
|
9140 |
/*!
|
|
9141 |
This special event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to
|
|
9142 |
receive native Windows events which are passed in the \a message
|
|
9143 |
parameter.
|
|
9144 |
|
|
9145 |
In your reimplementation of this function, if you want to stop the
|
|
9146 |
event being handled by Qt, return true and set \a result to the value
|
|
9147 |
that the window procedure should return. If you return false, this
|
|
9148 |
native event is passed back to Qt, which translates the event into
|
|
9149 |
a Qt event and sends it to the widget.
|
|
9150 |
|
|
9151 |
\warning This function is not portable.
|
|
9152 |
|
|
9153 |
\sa QApplication::winEventFilter()
|
|
9154 |
*/
|
|
9155 |
bool QWidget::winEvent(MSG *message, long *result)
|
|
9156 |
{
|
|
9157 |
Q_UNUSED(message);
|
|
9158 |
Q_UNUSED(result);
|
|
9159 |
return false;
|
|
9160 |
}
|
|
9161 |
|
|
9162 |
#endif
|
|
9163 |
#if defined(Q_WS_X11)
|
|
9164 |
|
|
9165 |
/*!
|
|
9166 |
\fn bool QWidget::x11Event(XEvent *event)
|
|
9167 |
|
|
9168 |
This special event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to receive
|
|
9169 |
native X11 events passed in the \a event parameter.
|
|
9170 |
|
|
9171 |
In your reimplementation of this function, if you want to stop Qt from
|
|
9172 |
handling the event, return true. If you return false, this native event
|
|
9173 |
is passed back to Qt, which translates it into a Qt event and sends it to
|
|
9174 |
the widget.
|
|
9175 |
|
|
9176 |
\note Events are only delivered to this event handler if the widget is
|
|
9177 |
native.
|
|
9178 |
|
|
9179 |
\warning This function is not portable.
|
|
9180 |
|
|
9181 |
\sa QApplication::x11EventFilter(), QWidget::winId()
|
|
9182 |
*/
|
|
9183 |
bool QWidget::x11Event(XEvent *)
|
|
9184 |
{
|
|
9185 |
return false;
|
|
9186 |
}
|
|
9187 |
|
|
9188 |
#endif
|
|
9189 |
#if defined(Q_WS_QWS)
|
|
9190 |
|
|
9191 |
/*!
|
|
9192 |
\fn bool QWidget::qwsEvent(QWSEvent *event)
|
|
9193 |
|
|
9194 |
This special event handler can be reimplemented in a subclass to
|
|
9195 |
receive native Qt for Embedded Linux events which are passed in the
|
|
9196 |
\a event parameter.
|
|
9197 |
|
|
9198 |
In your reimplementation of this function, if you want to stop the
|
|
9199 |
event being handled by Qt, return true. If you return false, this
|
|
9200 |
native event is passed back to Qt, which translates the event into
|
|
9201 |
a Qt event and sends it to the widget.
|
|
9202 |
|
|
9203 |
\warning This function is not portable.
|
|
9204 |
|
|
9205 |
\sa QApplication::qwsEventFilter()
|
|
9206 |
*/
|
|
9207 |
bool QWidget::qwsEvent(QWSEvent *)
|
|
9208 |
{
|
|
9209 |
return false;
|
|
9210 |
}
|
|
9211 |
|
|
9212 |
#endif
|
|
9213 |
|
|
9214 |
|
|
9215 |
/*!
|
|
9216 |
Ensures that the widget has been polished by QStyle (i.e., has a
|
|
9217 |
proper font and palette).
|
|
9218 |
|
|
9219 |
QWidget calls this function after it has been fully constructed
|
|
9220 |
but before it is shown the very first time. You can call this
|
|
9221 |
function if you want to ensure that the widget is polished before
|
|
9222 |
doing an operation, e.g., the correct font size might be needed in
|
|
9223 |
the widget's sizeHint() reimplementation. Note that this function
|
|
9224 |
\e is called from the default implementation of sizeHint().
|
|
9225 |
|
|
9226 |
Polishing is useful for final initialization that must happen after
|
|
9227 |
all constructors (from base classes as well as from subclasses)
|
|
9228 |
have been called.
|
|
9229 |
|
|
9230 |
If you need to change some settings when a widget is polished,
|
|
9231 |
reimplement event() and handle the QEvent::Polish event type.
|
|
9232 |
|
|
9233 |
\bold{Note:} The function is declared const so that it can be called from
|
|
9234 |
other const functions (e.g., sizeHint()).
|
|
9235 |
|
|
9236 |
\sa event()
|
|
9237 |
*/
|
|
9238 |
void QWidget::ensurePolished() const
|
|
9239 |
{
|
|
9240 |
Q_D(const QWidget);
|
|
9241 |
|
|
9242 |
const QMetaObject *m = metaObject();
|
|
9243 |
if (m == d->polished)
|
|
9244 |
return;
|
|
9245 |
d->polished = m;
|
|
9246 |
|
|
9247 |
QEvent e(QEvent::Polish);
|
|
9248 |
QCoreApplication::sendEvent(const_cast<QWidget *>(this), &e);
|
|
9249 |
|
|
9250 |
// polish children after 'this'
|
|
9251 |
QList<QObject*> children = d->children;
|
|
9252 |
for (int i = 0; i < children.size(); ++i) {
|
|
9253 |
QObject *o = children.at(i);
|
|
9254 |
if(!o->isWidgetType())
|
|
9255 |
continue;
|
|
9256 |
if (QWidget *w = qobject_cast<QWidget *>(o))
|
|
9257 |
w->ensurePolished();
|
|
9258 |
}
|
|
9259 |
|
|
9260 |
if (d->parent && d->sendChildEvents) {
|
|
9261 |
QChildEvent e(QEvent::ChildPolished, const_cast<QWidget *>(this));
|
|
9262 |
QCoreApplication::sendEvent(d->parent, &e);
|
|
9263 |
}
|
|
9264 |
}
|
|
9265 |
|
|
9266 |
/*!
|
|
9267 |
Returns the mask currently set on a widget. If no mask is set the
|
|
9268 |
return value will be an empty region.
|
|
9269 |
|
|
9270 |
\sa setMask(), clearMask(), QRegion::isEmpty(), {Shaped Clock Example}
|
|
9271 |
*/
|
|
9272 |
QRegion QWidget::mask() const
|
|
9273 |
{
|
|
9274 |
Q_D(const QWidget);
|
|
9275 |
return d->extra ? d->extra->mask : QRegion();
|
|
9276 |
}
|
|
9277 |
|
|
9278 |
/*!
|
|
9279 |
Returns the layout manager that is installed on this widget, or 0
|
|
9280 |
if no layout manager is installed.
|
|
9281 |
|
|
9282 |
The layout manager sets the geometry of the widget's children
|
|
9283 |
that have been added to the layout.
|
|
9284 |
|
|
9285 |
\sa setLayout(), sizePolicy(), {Layout Management}
|
|
9286 |
*/
|
|
9287 |
QLayout *QWidget::layout() const
|
|
9288 |
{
|
|
9289 |
return d_func()->layout;
|
|
9290 |
}
|
|
9291 |
|
|
9292 |
|
|
9293 |
/*!
|
|
9294 |
\fn void QWidget::setLayout(QLayout *layout)
|
|
9295 |
|
|
9296 |
Sets the layout manager for this widget to \a layout.
|
|
9297 |
|
|
9298 |
If there already is a layout manager installed on this widget,
|
|
9299 |
QWidget won't let you install another. You must first delete the
|
|
9300 |
existing layout manager (returned by layout()) before you can
|
|
9301 |
call setLayout() with the new layout.
|
|
9302 |
|
|
9303 |
If \a layout is the layout manger on a different widget, setLayout()
|
|
9304 |
will reparent the layout and make it the layout manager for this widget.
|
|
9305 |
|
|
9306 |
Example:
|
|
9307 |
|
|
9308 |
\snippet examples/uitools/textfinder/textfinder.cpp 3b
|
|
9309 |
|
|
9310 |
An alternative to calling this function is to pass this widget to
|
|
9311 |
the layout's constructor.
|
|
9312 |
|
|
9313 |
The QWidget will take ownership of \a layout.
|
|
9314 |
|
|
9315 |
\sa layout(), {Layout Management}
|
|
9316 |
*/
|
|
9317 |
|
|
9318 |
void QWidget::setLayout(QLayout *l)
|
|
9319 |
{
|
|
9320 |
if (!l) {
|
|
9321 |
qWarning("QWidget::setLayout: Cannot set layout to 0");
|
|
9322 |
return;
|
|
9323 |
}
|
|
9324 |
if (layout()) {
|
|
9325 |
if (layout() != l)
|
|
9326 |
qWarning("QWidget::setLayout: Attempting to set QLayout \"%s\" on %s \"%s\", which already has a"
|
|
9327 |
" layout", l->objectName().toLocal8Bit().data(), metaObject()->className(),
|
|
9328 |
objectName().toLocal8Bit().data());
|
|
9329 |
return;
|
|
9330 |
}
|
|
9331 |
|
|
9332 |
QObject *oldParent = l->parent();
|
|
9333 |
if (oldParent && oldParent != this) {
|
|
9334 |
if (oldParent->isWidgetType()) {
|
|
9335 |
// Steal the layout off a widget parent. Takes effect when
|
|
9336 |
// morphing laid-out container widgets in Designer.
|
|
9337 |
QWidget *oldParentWidget = static_cast<QWidget *>(oldParent);
|
|
9338 |
oldParentWidget->takeLayout();
|
|
9339 |
} else {
|
|
9340 |
qWarning("QWidget::setLayout: Attempting to set QLayout \"%s\" on %s \"%s\", when the QLayout already has a parent",
|
|
9341 |
l->objectName().toLocal8Bit().data(), metaObject()->className(),
|
|
9342 |
objectName().toLocal8Bit().data());
|
|
9343 |
return;
|
|
9344 |
}
|
|
9345 |
}
|
|
9346 |
|
|
9347 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
9348 |
l->d_func()->topLevel = true;
|
|
9349 |
d->layout = l;
|
|
9350 |
if (oldParent != this) {
|
|
9351 |
l->setParent(this);
|
|
9352 |
l->d_func()->reparentChildWidgets(this);
|
|
9353 |
l->invalidate();
|
|
9354 |
}
|
|
9355 |
|
|
9356 |
if (isWindow() && d->maybeTopData())
|
|
9357 |
d->topData()->sizeAdjusted = false;
|
|
9358 |
}
|
|
9359 |
|
|
9360 |
/*!
|
|
9361 |
\fn QLayout *QWidget::takeLayout()
|
|
9362 |
|
|
9363 |
Remove the layout from the widget.
|
|
9364 |
\since 4.5
|
|
9365 |
*/
|
|
9366 |
|
|
9367 |
QLayout *QWidget::takeLayout()
|
|
9368 |
{
|
|
9369 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
9370 |
QLayout *l = layout();
|
|
9371 |
if (!l)
|
|
9372 |
return 0;
|
|
9373 |
d->layout = 0;
|
|
9374 |
l->setParent(0);
|
|
9375 |
return l;
|
|
9376 |
}
|
|
9377 |
|
|
9378 |
/*!
|
|
9379 |
\property QWidget::sizePolicy
|
|
9380 |
\brief the default layout behavior of the widget
|
|
9381 |
|
|
9382 |
If there is a QLayout that manages this widget's children, the
|
|
9383 |
size policy specified by that layout is used. If there is no such
|
|
9384 |
QLayout, the result of this function is used.
|
|
9385 |
|
|
9386 |
The default policy is Preferred/Preferred, which means that the
|
|
9387 |
widget can be freely resized, but prefers to be the size
|
|
9388 |
sizeHint() returns. Button-like widgets set the size policy to
|
|
9389 |
specify that they may stretch horizontally, but are fixed
|
|
9390 |
vertically. The same applies to lineedit controls (such as
|
|
9391 |
QLineEdit, QSpinBox or an editable QComboBox) and other
|
|
9392 |
horizontally orientated widgets (such as QProgressBar).
|
|
9393 |
QToolButton's are normally square, so they allow growth in both
|
|
9394 |
directions. Widgets that support different directions (such as
|
|
9395 |
QSlider, QScrollBar or QHeader) specify stretching in the
|
|
9396 |
respective direction only. Widgets that can provide scroll bars
|
|
9397 |
(usually subclasses of QScrollArea) tend to specify that they can
|
|
9398 |
use additional space, and that they can make do with less than
|
|
9399 |
sizeHint().
|
|
9400 |
|
|
9401 |
\sa sizeHint() QLayout QSizePolicy updateGeometry()
|
|
9402 |
*/
|
|
9403 |
QSizePolicy QWidget::sizePolicy() const
|
|
9404 |
{
|
|
9405 |
Q_D(const QWidget);
|
|
9406 |
return d->size_policy;
|
|
9407 |
}
|
|
9408 |
|
|
9409 |
void QWidget::setSizePolicy(QSizePolicy policy)
|
|
9410 |
{
|
|
9411 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
9412 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_OwnSizePolicy);
|
|
9413 |
if (policy == d->size_policy)
|
|
9414 |
return;
|
|
9415 |
d->size_policy = policy;
|
|
9416 |
|
|
9417 |
#ifndef QT_NO_GRAPHICSVIEW
|
|
9418 |
if (QWExtra *extra = d->extra) {
|
|
9419 |
if (extra->proxyWidget)
|
|
9420 |
extra->proxyWidget->setSizePolicy(policy);
|
|
9421 |
}
|
|
9422 |
#endif
|
|
9423 |
|
|
9424 |
updateGeometry();
|
|
9425 |
|
|
9426 |
if (isWindow() && d->maybeTopData())
|
|
9427 |
d->topData()->sizeAdjusted = false;
|
|
9428 |
}
|
|
9429 |
|
|
9430 |
/*!
|
|
9431 |
\fn void QWidget::setSizePolicy(QSizePolicy::Policy horizontal, QSizePolicy::Policy vertical)
|
|
9432 |
\overload
|
|
9433 |
|
|
9434 |
Sets the size policy of the widget to \a horizontal and \a
|
|
9435 |
vertical, with standard stretch and no height-for-width.
|
|
9436 |
|
|
9437 |
\sa QSizePolicy::QSizePolicy()
|
|
9438 |
*/
|
|
9439 |
|
|
9440 |
/*!
|
|
9441 |
Returns the preferred height for this widget, given the width \a w.
|
|
9442 |
|
|
9443 |
If this widget has a layout, the default implementation returns
|
|
9444 |
the layout's preferred height. if there is no layout, the default
|
|
9445 |
implementation returns -1 indicating that the preferred height
|
|
9446 |
does not depend on the width.
|
|
9447 |
*/
|
|
9448 |
|
|
9449 |
int QWidget::heightForWidth(int w) const
|
|
9450 |
{
|
|
9451 |
if (layout() && layout()->hasHeightForWidth())
|
|
9452 |
return layout()->totalHeightForWidth(w);
|
|
9453 |
return -1;
|
|
9454 |
}
|
|
9455 |
|
|
9456 |
/*!
|
|
9457 |
\fn QWidget *QWidget::childAt(int x, int y) const
|
|
9458 |
|
|
9459 |
Returns the visible child widget at the position (\a{x}, \a{y})
|
|
9460 |
in the widget's coordinate system. If there is no visible child
|
|
9461 |
widget at the specified position, the function returns 0.
|
|
9462 |
*/
|
|
9463 |
|
|
9464 |
/*!
|
|
9465 |
\overload
|
|
9466 |
|
|
9467 |
Returns the visible child widget at point \a p in the widget's own
|
|
9468 |
coordinate system.
|
|
9469 |
*/
|
|
9470 |
|
|
9471 |
QWidget *QWidget::childAt(const QPoint &p) const
|
|
9472 |
{
|
|
9473 |
return d_func()->childAt_helper(p, false);
|
|
9474 |
}
|
|
9475 |
|
|
9476 |
QWidget *QWidgetPrivate::childAt_helper(const QPoint &p, bool ignoreChildrenInDestructor) const
|
|
9477 |
{
|
|
9478 |
Q_Q(const QWidget);
|
|
9479 |
#ifdef Q_WS_MAC
|
|
9480 |
bool includeFrame = q->isWindow() && qobject_cast<const QMainWindow *>(q)
|
|
9481 |
&& static_cast<const QMainWindow *>(q)->unifiedTitleAndToolBarOnMac();
|
|
9482 |
#endif
|
|
9483 |
|
|
9484 |
if (
|
|
9485 |
#ifdef Q_WS_MAC
|
|
9486 |
!includeFrame &&
|
|
9487 |
#endif
|
|
9488 |
!q->rect().contains(p))
|
|
9489 |
return 0;
|
|
9490 |
|
|
9491 |
for (int i = children.size(); i > 0 ;) {
|
|
9492 |
--i;
|
|
9493 |
QWidget *w = qobject_cast<QWidget *>(children.at(i));
|
|
9494 |
if (w && !w->isWindow() && !w->isHidden()
|
|
9495 |
&& (w->geometry().contains(p)
|
|
9496 |
#ifdef Q_WS_MAC
|
|
9497 |
|| (includeFrame && w->geometry().contains(qt_mac_nativeMapFromParent(w, p)))
|
|
9498 |
#endif
|
|
9499 |
)) {
|
|
9500 |
if (ignoreChildrenInDestructor && w->data->in_destructor)
|
|
9501 |
continue;
|
|
9502 |
if (w->testAttribute(Qt::WA_TransparentForMouseEvents))
|
|
9503 |
continue;
|
|
9504 |
QPoint childPoint = w->mapFromParent(p);
|
|
9505 |
#ifdef Q_WS_MAC
|
|
9506 |
if (includeFrame && !w->geometry().contains(p))
|
|
9507 |
childPoint = qt_mac_nativeMapFromParent(w, p);
|
|
9508 |
#endif
|
|
9509 |
if (QWidget *t = w->d_func()->childAt_helper(childPoint, ignoreChildrenInDestructor))
|
|
9510 |
return t;
|
|
9511 |
// if WMouseNoMask is set the widget mask is ignored, if
|
|
9512 |
// the widget has no mask then the WMouseNoMask flag has no
|
|
9513 |
// effect
|
|
9514 |
if (w->testAttribute(Qt::WA_MouseNoMask) || w->mask().contains(childPoint)
|
|
9515 |
|| w->mask().isEmpty())
|
|
9516 |
return w;
|
|
9517 |
}
|
|
9518 |
}
|
|
9519 |
return 0;
|
|
9520 |
}
|
|
9521 |
|
|
9522 |
void QWidgetPrivate::updateGeometry_helper(bool forceUpdate)
|
|
9523 |
{
|
|
9524 |
Q_Q(QWidget);
|
|
9525 |
if (widgetItem)
|
|
9526 |
widgetItem->invalidateSizeCache();
|
|
9527 |
QWidget *parent;
|
|
9528 |
if (forceUpdate || !extra || extra->minw != extra->maxw || extra->minh != extra->maxh) {
|
|
9529 |
if (!q->isWindow() && !q->isHidden() && (parent = q->parentWidget())) {
|
|
9530 |
if (parent->d_func()->layout)
|
|
9531 |
parent->d_func()->layout->invalidate();
|
|
9532 |
else if (parent->isVisible())
|
|
9533 |
QApplication::postEvent(parent, new QEvent(QEvent::LayoutRequest));
|
|
9534 |
}
|
|
9535 |
}
|
|
9536 |
}
|
|
9537 |
|
|
9538 |
/*!
|
|
9539 |
Notifies the layout system that this widget has changed and may
|
|
9540 |
need to change geometry.
|
|
9541 |
|
|
9542 |
Call this function if the sizeHint() or sizePolicy() have changed.
|
|
9543 |
|
|
9544 |
For explicitly hidden widgets, updateGeometry() is a no-op. The
|
|
9545 |
layout system will be notified as soon as the widget is shown.
|
|
9546 |
*/
|
|
9547 |
|
|
9548 |
void QWidget::updateGeometry()
|
|
9549 |
{
|
|
9550 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
9551 |
d->updateGeometry_helper(false);
|
|
9552 |
}
|
|
9553 |
|
|
9554 |
/*! \property QWidget::windowFlags
|
|
9555 |
|
|
9556 |
Window flags are a combination of a type (e.g. Qt::Dialog) and
|
|
9557 |
zero or more hints to the window system (e.g.
|
|
9558 |
Qt::FramelessWindowHint).
|
|
9559 |
|
|
9560 |
If the widget had type Qt::Widget or Qt::SubWindow and becomes a
|
|
9561 |
window (Qt::Window, Qt::Dialog, etc.), it is put at position (0,
|
|
9562 |
0) on the desktop. If the widget is a window and becomes a
|
|
9563 |
Qt::Widget or Qt::SubWindow, it is put at position (0, 0)
|
|
9564 |
relative to its parent widget.
|
|
9565 |
|
|
9566 |
\note This function calls setParent() when changing the flags for
|
|
9567 |
a window, causing the widget to be hidden. You must call show() to make
|
|
9568 |
the widget visible again..
|
|
9569 |
|
|
9570 |
\sa windowType(), {Window Flags Example}
|
|
9571 |
*/
|
|
9572 |
void QWidget::setWindowFlags(Qt::WindowFlags flags)
|
|
9573 |
{
|
|
9574 |
if (data->window_flags == flags)
|
|
9575 |
return;
|
|
9576 |
|
|
9577 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
9578 |
|
|
9579 |
if ((data->window_flags | flags) & Qt::Window) {
|
|
9580 |
// the old type was a window and/or the new type is a window
|
|
9581 |
QPoint oldPos = pos();
|
|
9582 |
bool visible = isVisible();
|
|
9583 |
setParent(parentWidget(), flags);
|
|
9584 |
|
|
9585 |
// if both types are windows or neither of them are, we restore
|
|
9586 |
// the old position
|
|
9587 |
if (!((data->window_flags ^ flags) & Qt::Window)
|
|
9588 |
&& (visible || testAttribute(Qt::WA_Moved))) {
|
|
9589 |
move(oldPos);
|
|
9590 |
}
|
|
9591 |
// for backward-compatibility we change Qt::WA_QuitOnClose attribute value only when the window was recreated.
|
|
9592 |
d->adjustQuitOnCloseAttribute();
|
|
9593 |
} else {
|
|
9594 |
data->window_flags = flags;
|
|
9595 |
}
|
|
9596 |
}
|
|
9597 |
|
|
9598 |
/*!
|
|
9599 |
Sets the window flags for the widget to \a flags,
|
|
9600 |
\e without telling the window system.
|
|
9601 |
|
|
9602 |
\warning Do not call this function unless you really know what
|
|
9603 |
you're doing.
|
|
9604 |
|
|
9605 |
\sa setWindowFlags()
|
|
9606 |
*/
|
|
9607 |
void QWidget::overrideWindowFlags(Qt::WindowFlags flags)
|
|
9608 |
{
|
|
9609 |
data->window_flags = flags;
|
|
9610 |
}
|
|
9611 |
|
|
9612 |
/*!
|
|
9613 |
\fn Qt::WindowType QWidget::windowType() const
|
|
9614 |
|
|
9615 |
Returns the window type of this widget. This is identical to
|
|
9616 |
windowFlags() & Qt::WindowType_Mask.
|
|
9617 |
|
|
9618 |
\sa windowFlags
|
|
9619 |
*/
|
|
9620 |
|
|
9621 |
/*!
|
|
9622 |
Sets the parent of the widget to \a parent, and resets the window
|
|
9623 |
flags. The widget is moved to position (0, 0) in its new parent.
|
|
9624 |
|
|
9625 |
If the new parent widget is in a different window, the
|
|
9626 |
reparented widget and its children are appended to the end of the
|
|
9627 |
\l{setFocusPolicy()}{tab chain} of the new parent
|
|
9628 |
widget, in the same internal order as before. If one of the moved
|
|
9629 |
widgets had keyboard focus, setParent() calls clearFocus() for that
|
|
9630 |
widget.
|
|
9631 |
|
|
9632 |
If the new parent widget is in the same window as the
|
|
9633 |
old parent, setting the parent doesn't change the tab order or
|
|
9634 |
keyboard focus.
|
|
9635 |
|
|
9636 |
If the "new" parent widget is the old parent widget, this function
|
|
9637 |
does nothing.
|
|
9638 |
|
|
9639 |
\note The widget becomes invisible as part of changing its parent,
|
|
9640 |
even if it was previously visible. You must call show() to make the
|
|
9641 |
widget visible again.
|
|
9642 |
|
|
9643 |
\warning It is very unlikely that you will ever need this
|
|
9644 |
function. If you have a widget that changes its content
|
|
9645 |
dynamically, it is far easier to use \l QStackedWidget.
|
|
9646 |
|
|
9647 |
\sa setWindowFlags()
|
|
9648 |
*/
|
|
9649 |
void QWidget::setParent(QWidget *parent)
|
|
9650 |
{
|
|
9651 |
if (parent == parentWidget())
|
|
9652 |
return;
|
|
9653 |
setParent((QWidget*)parent, windowFlags() & ~Qt::WindowType_Mask);
|
|
9654 |
}
|
|
9655 |
|
|
9656 |
/*!
|
|
9657 |
\overload
|
|
9658 |
|
|
9659 |
This function also takes widget flags, \a f as an argument.
|
|
9660 |
*/
|
|
9661 |
|
|
9662 |
void QWidget::setParent(QWidget *parent, Qt::WindowFlags f)
|
|
9663 |
{
|
|
9664 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
9665 |
bool resized = testAttribute(Qt::WA_Resized);
|
|
9666 |
bool wasCreated = testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Created);
|
|
9667 |
QWidget *oldtlw = window();
|
|
9668 |
|
|
9669 |
QWidget *desktopWidget = 0;
|
|
9670 |
if (parent && parent->windowType() == Qt::Desktop)
|
|
9671 |
desktopWidget = parent;
|
|
9672 |
bool newParent = (parent != parentWidget()) || !wasCreated || desktopWidget;
|
|
9673 |
|
|
9674 |
#if defined(Q_WS_X11) || defined(Q_WS_WIN)
|
|
9675 |
if (newParent && parent && !desktopWidget) {
|
|
9676 |
if (testAttribute(Qt::WA_NativeWindow) && !qApp->testAttribute(Qt::AA_DontCreateNativeWidgetSiblings))
|
|
9677 |
parent->d_func()->enforceNativeChildren();
|
|
9678 |
else if (parent->d_func()->nativeChildrenForced() || parent->testAttribute(Qt::WA_PaintOnScreen))
|
|
9679 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_NativeWindow);
|
|
9680 |
}
|
|
9681 |
#endif
|
|
9682 |
|
|
9683 |
if (wasCreated) {
|
|
9684 |
if (!testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Hidden)) {
|
|
9685 |
hide();
|
|
9686 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_ExplicitShowHide, false);
|
|
9687 |
}
|
|
9688 |
if (newParent) {
|
|
9689 |
QEvent e(QEvent::ParentAboutToChange);
|
|
9690 |
QApplication::sendEvent(this, &e);
|
|
9691 |
}
|
|
9692 |
}
|
|
9693 |
if (newParent && isAncestorOf(focusWidget()))
|
|
9694 |
focusWidget()->clearFocus();
|
|
9695 |
|
|
9696 |
d->setParent_sys(parent, f);
|
|
9697 |
if (desktopWidget)
|
|
9698 |
parent = 0;
|
|
9699 |
|
|
9700 |
#ifdef Q_BACKINGSTORE_SUBSURFACES
|
|
9701 |
QTLWExtra *extra = d->maybeTopData();
|
|
9702 |
QWindowSurface *windowSurface = (extra ? extra->windowSurface : 0);
|
|
9703 |
if (newParent && windowSurface) {
|
|
9704 |
QWidgetBackingStore *oldBs = oldtlw->d_func()->maybeBackingStore();
|
|
9705 |
if (oldBs)
|
|
9706 |
oldBs->subSurfaces.removeAll(windowSurface);
|
|
9707 |
|
|
9708 |
if (parent) {
|
|
9709 |
QWidgetBackingStore *newBs = parent->d_func()->maybeBackingStore();
|
|
9710 |
if (newBs)
|
|
9711 |
newBs->subSurfaces.append(windowSurface);
|
|
9712 |
}
|
|
9713 |
}
|
|
9714 |
#endif
|
|
9715 |
|
|
9716 |
if (newParent) {
|
|
9717 |
if (QWidgetBackingStore *oldBs = oldtlw->d_func()->maybeBackingStore()) {
|
|
9718 |
oldBs->removeDirtyWidget(this);
|
|
9719 |
// Move the widget and all its static children from
|
|
9720 |
// the old backing store to the new one.
|
|
9721 |
oldBs->moveStaticWidgets(this);
|
|
9722 |
}
|
|
9723 |
}
|
|
9724 |
|
|
9725 |
if ((QApplicationPrivate::app_compile_version < 0x040200
|
|
9726 |
|| QApplicationPrivate::testAttribute(Qt::AA_ImmediateWidgetCreation))
|
|
9727 |
&& !testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Created))
|
|
9728 |
create();
|
|
9729 |
|
|
9730 |
d->reparentFocusWidgets(oldtlw);
|
|
9731 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_Resized, resized);
|
|
9732 |
if (!testAttribute(Qt::WA_StyleSheet)
|
|
9733 |
&& (!parent || !parent->testAttribute(Qt::WA_StyleSheet))) {
|
|
9734 |
d->resolveFont();
|
|
9735 |
d->resolvePalette();
|
|
9736 |
}
|
|
9737 |
d->resolveLayoutDirection();
|
|
9738 |
d->resolveLocale();
|
|
9739 |
|
|
9740 |
// Note: GL widgets under WGL or EGL will always need a ParentChange
|
|
9741 |
// event to handle recreation/rebinding of the GL context, hence the
|
|
9742 |
// (f & Qt::MSWindowsOwnDC) clause (which is set on QGLWidgets on all
|
|
9743 |
// platforms).
|
|
9744 |
if (newParent
|
|
9745 |
#if defined(Q_WS_WIN) || defined(QT_OPENGL_ES)
|
|
9746 |
|| (f & Qt::MSWindowsOwnDC)
|
|
9747 |
#endif
|
|
9748 |
) {
|
|
9749 |
// propagate enabled updates enabled state to non-windows
|
|
9750 |
if (!isWindow()) {
|
|
9751 |
if (!testAttribute(Qt::WA_ForceDisabled))
|
|
9752 |
d->setEnabled_helper(parent ? parent->isEnabled() : true);
|
|
9753 |
if (!testAttribute(Qt::WA_ForceUpdatesDisabled))
|
|
9754 |
d->setUpdatesEnabled_helper(parent ? parent->updatesEnabled() : true);
|
|
9755 |
}
|
|
9756 |
d->inheritStyle();
|
|
9757 |
|
|
9758 |
// send and post remaining QObject events
|
|
9759 |
if (parent && d->sendChildEvents) {
|
|
9760 |
QChildEvent e(QEvent::ChildAdded, this);
|
|
9761 |
QApplication::sendEvent(parent, &e);
|
|
9762 |
#ifdef QT3_SUPPORT
|
|
9763 |
if (parent->d_func()->pendingChildInsertedEvents.isEmpty()) {
|
|
9764 |
QApplication::postEvent(parent,
|
|
9765 |
new QEvent(QEvent::ChildInsertedRequest),
|
|
9766 |
Qt::HighEventPriority);
|
|
9767 |
}
|
|
9768 |
parent->d_func()->pendingChildInsertedEvents.append(this);
|
|
9769 |
#endif
|
|
9770 |
}
|
|
9771 |
|
|
9772 |
//### already hidden above ---> must probably do something smart on the mac
|
|
9773 |
// #ifdef Q_WS_MAC
|
|
9774 |
// extern bool qt_mac_is_macdrawer(const QWidget *); //qwidget_mac.cpp
|
|
9775 |
// if(!qt_mac_is_macdrawer(q)) //special case
|
|
9776 |
// q->setAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Hidden);
|
|
9777 |
// #else
|
|
9778 |
// q->setAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Hidden);
|
|
9779 |
//#endif
|
|
9780 |
|
|
9781 |
if (parent && d->sendChildEvents && d->polished) {
|
|
9782 |
QChildEvent e(QEvent::ChildPolished, this);
|
|
9783 |
QCoreApplication::sendEvent(parent, &e);
|
|
9784 |
}
|
|
9785 |
|
|
9786 |
QEvent e(QEvent::ParentChange);
|
|
9787 |
QApplication::sendEvent(this, &e);
|
|
9788 |
}
|
|
9789 |
|
|
9790 |
if (!wasCreated) {
|
|
9791 |
if (isWindow() || parentWidget()->isVisible())
|
|
9792 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Hidden, true);
|
|
9793 |
else if (!testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_ExplicitShowHide))
|
|
9794 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Hidden, false);
|
|
9795 |
}
|
|
9796 |
|
|
9797 |
d->updateIsOpaque();
|
|
9798 |
|
|
9799 |
#ifndef QT_NO_GRAPHICSVIEW
|
|
9800 |
// Embed the widget into a proxy if the parent is embedded.
|
|
9801 |
// ### Doesn't handle reparenting out of an embedded widget.
|
|
9802 |
if (oldtlw->graphicsProxyWidget()) {
|
|
9803 |
if (QGraphicsProxyWidget *ancestorProxy = d->nearestGraphicsProxyWidget(oldtlw))
|
|
9804 |
ancestorProxy->d_func()->unembedSubWindow(this);
|
|
9805 |
}
|
|
9806 |
if (isWindow() && parent && !graphicsProxyWidget() && !bypassGraphicsProxyWidget(this)) {
|
|
9807 |
if (QGraphicsProxyWidget *ancestorProxy = d->nearestGraphicsProxyWidget(parent))
|
|
9808 |
ancestorProxy->d_func()->embedSubWindow(this);
|
|
9809 |
}
|
|
9810 |
#endif
|
|
9811 |
}
|
|
9812 |
|
|
9813 |
/*!
|
|
9814 |
Scrolls the widget including its children \a dx pixels to the
|
|
9815 |
right and \a dy downward. Both \a dx and \a dy may be negative.
|
|
9816 |
|
|
9817 |
After scrolling, the widgets will receive paint events for
|
|
9818 |
the areas that need to be repainted. For widgets that Qt knows to
|
|
9819 |
be opaque, this is only the newly exposed parts.
|
|
9820 |
For example, if an opaque widget is scrolled 8 pixels to the left,
|
|
9821 |
only an 8-pixel wide stripe at the right edge needs updating.
|
|
9822 |
|
|
9823 |
Since widgets propagate the contents of their parents by default,
|
|
9824 |
you need to set the \l autoFillBackground property, or use
|
|
9825 |
setAttribute() to set the Qt::WA_OpaquePaintEvent attribute, to make
|
|
9826 |
a widget opaque.
|
|
9827 |
|
|
9828 |
For widgets that use contents propagation, a scroll will cause an
|
|
9829 |
update of the entire scroll area.
|
|
9830 |
|
|
9831 |
\sa {Transparency and Double Buffering}
|
|
9832 |
*/
|
|
9833 |
|
|
9834 |
void QWidget::scroll(int dx, int dy)
|
|
9835 |
{
|
|
9836 |
if ((!updatesEnabled() && children().size() == 0) || !isVisible())
|
|
9837 |
return;
|
|
9838 |
if (dx == 0 && dy == 0)
|
|
9839 |
return;
|
|
9840 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
9841 |
#ifndef QT_NO_GRAPHICSVIEW
|
|
9842 |
if (QGraphicsProxyWidget *proxy = QWidgetPrivate::nearestGraphicsProxyWidget(this)) {
|
|
9843 |
// Graphics View maintains its own dirty region as a list of rects;
|
|
9844 |
// until we can connect item updates directly to the view, we must
|
|
9845 |
// separately add a translated dirty region.
|
|
9846 |
if (!d->dirty.isEmpty()) {
|
|
9847 |
foreach (const QRect &rect, (d->dirty.translated(dx, dy)).rects())
|
|
9848 |
proxy->update(rect);
|
|
9849 |
}
|
|
9850 |
proxy->scroll(dx, dy, proxy->subWidgetRect(this));
|
|
9851 |
return;
|
|
9852 |
}
|
|
9853 |
#endif
|
|
9854 |
d->setDirtyOpaqueRegion();
|
|
9855 |
d->scroll_sys(dx, dy);
|
|
9856 |
}
|
|
9857 |
|
|
9858 |
/*!
|
|
9859 |
\overload
|
|
9860 |
|
|
9861 |
This version only scrolls \a r and does not move the children of
|
|
9862 |
the widget.
|
|
9863 |
|
|
9864 |
If \a r is empty or invalid, the result is undefined.
|
|
9865 |
|
|
9866 |
\sa QScrollArea
|
|
9867 |
*/
|
|
9868 |
void QWidget::scroll(int dx, int dy, const QRect &r)
|
|
9869 |
{
|
|
9870 |
|
|
9871 |
if ((!updatesEnabled() && children().size() == 0) || !isVisible())
|
|
9872 |
return;
|
|
9873 |
if (dx == 0 && dy == 0)
|
|
9874 |
return;
|
|
9875 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
9876 |
#ifndef QT_NO_GRAPHICSVIEW
|
|
9877 |
if (QGraphicsProxyWidget *proxy = QWidgetPrivate::nearestGraphicsProxyWidget(this)) {
|
|
9878 |
// Graphics View maintains its own dirty region as a list of rects;
|
|
9879 |
// until we can connect item updates directly to the view, we must
|
|
9880 |
// separately add a translated dirty region.
|
|
9881 |
if (!d->dirty.isEmpty()) {
|
|
9882 |
foreach (const QRect &rect, (d->dirty.translated(dx, dy) & r).rects())
|
|
9883 |
proxy->update(rect);
|
|
9884 |
}
|
|
9885 |
proxy->scroll(dx, dy, r.translated(proxy->subWidgetRect(this).topLeft().toPoint()));
|
|
9886 |
return;
|
|
9887 |
}
|
|
9888 |
#endif
|
|
9889 |
d->scroll_sys(dx, dy, r);
|
|
9890 |
}
|
|
9891 |
|
|
9892 |
/*!
|
|
9893 |
Repaints the widget directly by calling paintEvent() immediately,
|
|
9894 |
unless updates are disabled or the widget is hidden.
|
|
9895 |
|
|
9896 |
We suggest only using repaint() if you need an immediate repaint,
|
|
9897 |
for example during animation. In almost all circumstances update()
|
|
9898 |
is better, as it permits Qt to optimize for speed and minimize
|
|
9899 |
flicker.
|
|
9900 |
|
|
9901 |
\warning If you call repaint() in a function which may itself be
|
|
9902 |
called from paintEvent(), you may get infinite recursion. The
|
|
9903 |
update() function never causes recursion.
|
|
9904 |
|
|
9905 |
\sa update(), paintEvent(), setUpdatesEnabled()
|
|
9906 |
*/
|
|
9907 |
|
|
9908 |
void QWidget::repaint()
|
|
9909 |
{
|
|
9910 |
repaint(rect());
|
|
9911 |
}
|
|
9912 |
|
|
9913 |
/*! \overload
|
|
9914 |
|
|
9915 |
This version repaints a rectangle (\a x, \a y, \a w, \a h) inside
|
|
9916 |
the widget.
|
|
9917 |
|
|
9918 |
If \a w is negative, it is replaced with \c{width() - x}, and if
|
|
9919 |
\a h is negative, it is replaced width \c{height() - y}.
|
|
9920 |
*/
|
|
9921 |
void QWidget::repaint(int x, int y, int w, int h)
|
|
9922 |
{
|
|
9923 |
if (x > data->crect.width() || y > data->crect.height())
|
|
9924 |
return;
|
|
9925 |
|
|
9926 |
if (w < 0)
|
|
9927 |
w = data->crect.width() - x;
|
|
9928 |
if (h < 0)
|
|
9929 |
h = data->crect.height() - y;
|
|
9930 |
|
|
9931 |
repaint(QRect(x, y, w, h));
|
|
9932 |
}
|
|
9933 |
|
|
9934 |
/*! \overload
|
|
9935 |
|
|
9936 |
This version repaints a rectangle \a rect inside the widget.
|
|
9937 |
*/
|
|
9938 |
void QWidget::repaint(const QRect &rect)
|
|
9939 |
{
|
|
9940 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
9941 |
|
|
9942 |
if (testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_ConfigPending)) {
|
|
9943 |
update(rect);
|
|
9944 |
return;
|
|
9945 |
}
|
|
9946 |
|
|
9947 |
if (!isVisible() || !updatesEnabled() || rect.isEmpty())
|
|
9948 |
return;
|
|
9949 |
|
|
9950 |
if (hasBackingStoreSupport()) {
|
|
9951 |
QTLWExtra *tlwExtra = window()->d_func()->maybeTopData();
|
|
9952 |
if (tlwExtra && !tlwExtra->inTopLevelResize && tlwExtra->backingStore) {
|
|
9953 |
tlwExtra->inRepaint = true;
|
|
9954 |
tlwExtra->backingStore->markDirty(rect, this, true);
|
|
9955 |
tlwExtra->inRepaint = false;
|
|
9956 |
}
|
|
9957 |
} else {
|
|
9958 |
d->repaint_sys(rect);
|
|
9959 |
}
|
|
9960 |
}
|
|
9961 |
|
|
9962 |
/*!
|
|
9963 |
\overload
|
|
9964 |
|
|
9965 |
This version repaints a region \a rgn inside the widget.
|
|
9966 |
*/
|
|
9967 |
void QWidget::repaint(const QRegion &rgn)
|
|
9968 |
{
|
|
9969 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
9970 |
|
|
9971 |
if (testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_ConfigPending)) {
|
|
9972 |
update(rgn);
|
|
9973 |
return;
|
|
9974 |
}
|
|
9975 |
|
|
9976 |
if (!isVisible() || !updatesEnabled() || rgn.isEmpty())
|
|
9977 |
return;
|
|
9978 |
|
|
9979 |
if (hasBackingStoreSupport()) {
|
|
9980 |
QTLWExtra *tlwExtra = window()->d_func()->maybeTopData();
|
|
9981 |
if (tlwExtra && !tlwExtra->inTopLevelResize && tlwExtra->backingStore) {
|
|
9982 |
tlwExtra->inRepaint = true;
|
|
9983 |
tlwExtra->backingStore->markDirty(rgn, this, true);
|
|
9984 |
tlwExtra->inRepaint = false;
|
|
9985 |
}
|
|
9986 |
} else {
|
|
9987 |
d->repaint_sys(rgn);
|
|
9988 |
}
|
|
9989 |
}
|
|
9990 |
|
|
9991 |
/*!
|
|
9992 |
Updates the widget unless updates are disabled or the widget is
|
|
9993 |
hidden.
|
|
9994 |
|
|
9995 |
This function does not cause an immediate repaint; instead it
|
|
9996 |
schedules a paint event for processing when Qt returns to the main
|
|
9997 |
event loop. This permits Qt to optimize for more speed and less
|
|
9998 |
flicker than a call to repaint() does.
|
|
9999 |
|
|
10000 |
Calling update() several times normally results in just one
|
|
10001 |
paintEvent() call.
|
|
10002 |
|
|
10003 |
Qt normally erases the widget's area before the paintEvent() call.
|
|
10004 |
If the Qt::WA_OpaquePaintEvent widget attribute is set, the widget is
|
|
10005 |
responsible for painting all its pixels with an opaque color.
|
|
10006 |
|
|
10007 |
\sa repaint() paintEvent(), setUpdatesEnabled(), {Analog Clock Example}
|
|
10008 |
*/
|
|
10009 |
void QWidget::update()
|
|
10010 |
{
|
|
10011 |
update(rect());
|
|
10012 |
}
|
|
10013 |
|
|
10014 |
/*! \fn void QWidget::update(int x, int y, int w, int h)
|
|
10015 |
\overload
|
|
10016 |
|
|
10017 |
This version updates a rectangle (\a x, \a y, \a w, \a h) inside
|
|
10018 |
the widget.
|
|
10019 |
*/
|
|
10020 |
|
|
10021 |
/*!
|
|
10022 |
\overload
|
|
10023 |
|
|
10024 |
This version updates a rectangle \a rect inside the widget.
|
|
10025 |
*/
|
|
10026 |
void QWidget::update(const QRect &rect)
|
|
10027 |
{
|
|
10028 |
if (!isVisible() || !updatesEnabled() || rect.isEmpty())
|
|
10029 |
return;
|
|
10030 |
|
|
10031 |
if (testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_InPaintEvent)) {
|
|
10032 |
QApplication::postEvent(this, new QUpdateLaterEvent(rect));
|
|
10033 |
return;
|
|
10034 |
}
|
|
10035 |
|
|
10036 |
if (hasBackingStoreSupport()) {
|
|
10037 |
QTLWExtra *tlwExtra = window()->d_func()->maybeTopData();
|
|
10038 |
if (tlwExtra && !tlwExtra->inTopLevelResize && tlwExtra->backingStore)
|
|
10039 |
tlwExtra->backingStore->markDirty(rect, this);
|
|
10040 |
} else {
|
|
10041 |
d_func()->repaint_sys(rect);
|
|
10042 |
}
|
|
10043 |
}
|
|
10044 |
|
|
10045 |
/*!
|
|
10046 |
\overload
|
|
10047 |
|
|
10048 |
This version repaints a region \a rgn inside the widget.
|
|
10049 |
*/
|
|
10050 |
void QWidget::update(const QRegion &rgn)
|
|
10051 |
{
|
|
10052 |
if (!isVisible() || !updatesEnabled() || rgn.isEmpty())
|
|
10053 |
return;
|
|
10054 |
|
|
10055 |
if (testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_InPaintEvent)) {
|
|
10056 |
QApplication::postEvent(this, new QUpdateLaterEvent(rgn));
|
|
10057 |
return;
|
|
10058 |
}
|
|
10059 |
|
|
10060 |
if (hasBackingStoreSupport()) {
|
|
10061 |
QTLWExtra *tlwExtra = window()->d_func()->maybeTopData();
|
|
10062 |
if (tlwExtra && !tlwExtra->inTopLevelResize && tlwExtra->backingStore)
|
|
10063 |
tlwExtra->backingStore->markDirty(rgn, this);
|
|
10064 |
} else {
|
|
10065 |
d_func()->repaint_sys(rgn);
|
|
10066 |
}
|
|
10067 |
}
|
|
10068 |
|
|
10069 |
#ifdef QT3_SUPPORT
|
|
10070 |
/*!
|
|
10071 |
Clear the rectangle at point (\a x, \a y) of width \a w and height
|
|
10072 |
\a h.
|
|
10073 |
|
|
10074 |
\warning This is best done in a paintEvent().
|
|
10075 |
*/
|
|
10076 |
void QWidget::erase_helper(int x, int y, int w, int h)
|
|
10077 |
{
|
|
10078 |
if (testAttribute(Qt::WA_NoSystemBackground) || testAttribute(Qt::WA_UpdatesDisabled) || !testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Visible))
|
|
10079 |
return;
|
|
10080 |
if (w < 0)
|
|
10081 |
w = data->crect.width() - x;
|
|
10082 |
if (h < 0)
|
|
10083 |
h = data->crect.height() - y;
|
|
10084 |
if (w != 0 && h != 0) {
|
|
10085 |
QPainter p(this);
|
|
10086 |
p.eraseRect(QRect(x, y, w, h));
|
|
10087 |
}
|
|
10088 |
}
|
|
10089 |
|
|
10090 |
/*!
|
|
10091 |
\overload
|
|
10092 |
|
|
10093 |
Clear the given region, \a rgn.
|
|
10094 |
|
|
10095 |
Drawing may only take place in a QPaintEvent. Overload
|
|
10096 |
paintEvent() to do your erasing and call update() to schedule a
|
|
10097 |
replaint whenever necessary. See also QPainter.
|
|
10098 |
*/
|
|
10099 |
void QWidget::erase(const QRegion& rgn)
|
|
10100 |
{
|
|
10101 |
if (testAttribute(Qt::WA_NoSystemBackground) || testAttribute(Qt::WA_UpdatesDisabled) || !testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Visible))
|
|
10102 |
return;
|
|
10103 |
|
|
10104 |
QPainter p(this);
|
|
10105 |
p.setClipRegion(rgn);
|
|
10106 |
p.eraseRect(rgn.boundingRect());
|
|
10107 |
}
|
|
10108 |
|
|
10109 |
void QWidget::drawText_helper(int x, int y, const QString &str)
|
|
10110 |
{
|
|
10111 |
if(!testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Visible))
|
|
10112 |
return;
|
|
10113 |
QPainter paint(this);
|
|
10114 |
paint.drawText(x, y, str);
|
|
10115 |
}
|
|
10116 |
|
|
10117 |
|
|
10118 |
/*!
|
|
10119 |
Closes the widget.
|
|
10120 |
|
|
10121 |
Use the no-argument overload instead.
|
|
10122 |
*/
|
|
10123 |
bool QWidget::close(bool alsoDelete)
|
|
10124 |
{
|
|
10125 |
QPointer<QWidget> that = this;
|
|
10126 |
bool accepted = close();
|
|
10127 |
if (alsoDelete && accepted && that)
|
|
10128 |
deleteLater();
|
|
10129 |
return accepted;
|
|
10130 |
}
|
|
10131 |
|
|
10132 |
void QWidget::setIcon(const QPixmap &i)
|
|
10133 |
{
|
|
10134 |
setWindowIcon(i);
|
|
10135 |
}
|
|
10136 |
|
|
10137 |
/*!
|
|
10138 |
Return's the widget's icon.
|
|
10139 |
|
|
10140 |
Use windowIcon() instead.
|
|
10141 |
*/
|
|
10142 |
const QPixmap *QWidget::icon() const
|
|
10143 |
{
|
|
10144 |
Q_D(const QWidget);
|
|
10145 |
return (d->extra && d->extra->topextra) ? d->extra->topextra->iconPixmap : 0;
|
|
10146 |
}
|
|
10147 |
|
|
10148 |
#endif // QT3_SUPPORT
|
|
10149 |
|
|
10150 |
/*!
|
|
10151 |
Sets the attribute \a attribute on this widget if \a on is true;
|
|
10152 |
otherwise clears the attribute.
|
|
10153 |
|
|
10154 |
\sa testAttribute()
|
|
10155 |
*/
|
|
10156 |
void QWidget::setAttribute(Qt::WidgetAttribute attribute, bool on)
|
|
10157 |
{
|
|
10158 |
if (testAttribute(attribute) == on)
|
|
10159 |
return;
|
|
10160 |
|
|
10161 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
10162 |
Q_ASSERT_X(sizeof(d->high_attributes)*8 >= (Qt::WA_AttributeCount - sizeof(uint)*8),
|
|
10163 |
"QWidget::setAttribute(WidgetAttribute, bool)",
|
|
10164 |
"QWidgetPrivate::high_attributes[] too small to contain all attributes in WidgetAttribute");
|
|
10165 |
|
|
10166 |
#ifdef Q_WS_WIN
|
|
10167 |
// ### Don't use PaintOnScreen+paintEngine() to do native painting in 5.0
|
|
10168 |
if (attribute == Qt::WA_PaintOnScreen && on && !inherits("QGLWidget")) {
|
|
10169 |
// see qwidget_win.cpp, ::paintEngine for details
|
|
10170 |
paintEngine();
|
|
10171 |
if (d->noPaintOnScreen)
|
|
10172 |
return;
|
|
10173 |
}
|
|
10174 |
#endif
|
|
10175 |
|
|
10176 |
if (attribute < int(8*sizeof(uint))) {
|
|
10177 |
if (on)
|
|
10178 |
data->widget_attributes |= (1<<attribute);
|
|
10179 |
else
|
|
10180 |
data->widget_attributes &= ~(1<<attribute);
|
|
10181 |
} else {
|
|
10182 |
const int x = attribute - 8*sizeof(uint);
|
|
10183 |
const int int_off = x / (8*sizeof(uint));
|
|
10184 |
if (on)
|
|
10185 |
d->high_attributes[int_off] |= (1<<(x-(int_off*8*sizeof(uint))));
|
|
10186 |
else
|
|
10187 |
d->high_attributes[int_off] &= ~(1<<(x-(int_off*8*sizeof(uint))));
|
|
10188 |
}
|
|
10189 |
|
|
10190 |
switch (attribute) {
|
|
10191 |
|
|
10192 |
#ifndef QT_NO_DRAGANDDROP
|
|
10193 |
case Qt::WA_AcceptDrops: {
|
|
10194 |
if (on && !testAttribute(Qt::WA_DropSiteRegistered))
|
|
10195 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_DropSiteRegistered, true);
|
|
10196 |
else if (!on && (isWindow() || !parentWidget() || !parentWidget()->testAttribute(Qt::WA_DropSiteRegistered)))
|
|
10197 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_DropSiteRegistered, false);
|
|
10198 |
QEvent e(QEvent::AcceptDropsChange);
|
|
10199 |
QApplication::sendEvent(this, &e);
|
|
10200 |
break;
|
|
10201 |
}
|
|
10202 |
case Qt::WA_DropSiteRegistered: {
|
|
10203 |
d->registerDropSite(on);
|
|
10204 |
for (int i = 0; i < d->children.size(); ++i) {
|
|
10205 |
QWidget *w = qobject_cast<QWidget *>(d->children.at(i));
|
|
10206 |
if (w && !w->isWindow() && !w->testAttribute(Qt::WA_AcceptDrops) && w->testAttribute(Qt::WA_DropSiteRegistered) != on)
|
|
10207 |
w->setAttribute(Qt::WA_DropSiteRegistered, on);
|
|
10208 |
}
|
|
10209 |
break;
|
|
10210 |
}
|
|
10211 |
#endif
|
|
10212 |
|
|
10213 |
case Qt::WA_NoChildEventsForParent:
|
|
10214 |
d->sendChildEvents = !on;
|
|
10215 |
break;
|
|
10216 |
case Qt::WA_NoChildEventsFromChildren:
|
|
10217 |
d->receiveChildEvents = !on;
|
|
10218 |
break;
|
|
10219 |
case Qt::WA_MacBrushedMetal:
|
|
10220 |
#ifdef Q_WS_MAC
|
|
10221 |
d->setStyle_helper(style(), false, true); // Make sure things get unpolished/polished correctly.
|
|
10222 |
// fall through since changing the metal attribute affects the opaque size grip.
|
|
10223 |
case Qt::WA_MacOpaqueSizeGrip:
|
|
10224 |
d->macUpdateOpaqueSizeGrip();
|
|
10225 |
break;
|
|
10226 |
case Qt::WA_MacShowFocusRect:
|
|
10227 |
if (hasFocus()) {
|
|
10228 |
clearFocus();
|
|
10229 |
setFocus();
|
|
10230 |
}
|
|
10231 |
break;
|
|
10232 |
case Qt::WA_Hover:
|
|
10233 |
qt_mac_update_mouseTracking(this);
|
|
10234 |
break;
|
|
10235 |
#endif
|
|
10236 |
case Qt::WA_MacAlwaysShowToolWindow:
|
|
10237 |
#ifdef Q_WS_MAC
|
|
10238 |
d->macUpdateHideOnSuspend();
|
|
10239 |
#endif
|
|
10240 |
break;
|
|
10241 |
case Qt::WA_MacNormalSize:
|
|
10242 |
case Qt::WA_MacSmallSize:
|
|
10243 |
case Qt::WA_MacMiniSize:
|
|
10244 |
#ifdef Q_WS_MAC
|
|
10245 |
{
|
|
10246 |
// We can only have one of these set at a time
|
|
10247 |
static const int MacSizes[] = { Qt::WA_MacNormalSize, Qt::WA_MacSmallSize,
|
|
10248 |
Qt::WA_MacMiniSize, 0 };
|
|
10249 |
for (int i = 0; MacSizes[i] != 0; ++i) {
|
|
10250 |
if (MacSizes[i] == attribute)
|
|
10251 |
continue;
|
|
10252 |
int macsize_x = MacSizes[i] - 8*sizeof(uint);
|
|
10253 |
int macsize_int_off = macsize_x / (8*sizeof(uint));
|
|
10254 |
d->high_attributes[macsize_int_off] &= ~(1<<(macsize_x-(macsize_int_off*8*sizeof(uint))));
|
|
10255 |
}
|
|
10256 |
d->macUpdateSizeAttribute();
|
|
10257 |
}
|
|
10258 |
#endif
|
|
10259 |
break;
|
|
10260 |
case Qt::WA_ShowModal:
|
|
10261 |
if (!on) {
|
|
10262 |
if (isVisible())
|
|
10263 |
QApplicationPrivate::leaveModal(this);
|
|
10264 |
// reset modality type to Modeless when clearing WA_ShowModal
|
|
10265 |
data->window_modality = Qt::NonModal;
|
|
10266 |
} else if (data->window_modality == Qt::NonModal) {
|
|
10267 |
// determine the modality type if it hasn't been set prior
|
|
10268 |
// to setting WA_ShowModal. set the default to WindowModal
|
|
10269 |
// if we are the child of a group leader; otherwise use
|
|
10270 |
// ApplicationModal.
|
|
10271 |
QWidget *w = parentWidget();
|
|
10272 |
if (w)
|
|
10273 |
w = w->window();
|
|
10274 |
while (w && !w->testAttribute(Qt::WA_GroupLeader)) {
|
|
10275 |
w = w->parentWidget();
|
|
10276 |
if (w)
|
|
10277 |
w = w->window();
|
|
10278 |
}
|
|
10279 |
data->window_modality = (w && w->testAttribute(Qt::WA_GroupLeader))
|
|
10280 |
? Qt::WindowModal
|
|
10281 |
: Qt::ApplicationModal;
|
|
10282 |
// Some window managers does not allow us to enter modal after the
|
|
10283 |
// window is showing. Therefore, to be consistent, we cannot call
|
|
10284 |
// QApplicationPrivate::enterModal(this) here. The window must be
|
|
10285 |
// hidden before changing modality.
|
|
10286 |
}
|
|
10287 |
if (testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Created)) {
|
|
10288 |
// don't call setModal_sys() before create_sys()
|
|
10289 |
d->setModal_sys();
|
|
10290 |
}
|
|
10291 |
break;
|
|
10292 |
case Qt::WA_MouseTracking: {
|
|
10293 |
QEvent e(QEvent::MouseTrackingChange);
|
|
10294 |
QApplication::sendEvent(this, &e);
|
|
10295 |
break; }
|
|
10296 |
case Qt::WA_NativeWindow: {
|
|
10297 |
QInputContext *ic = 0;
|
|
10298 |
if (on && !internalWinId() && testAttribute(Qt::WA_InputMethodEnabled) && hasFocus()) {
|
|
10299 |
ic = d->inputContext();
|
|
10300 |
ic->reset();
|
|
10301 |
ic->setFocusWidget(0);
|
|
10302 |
}
|
|
10303 |
if (!qApp->testAttribute(Qt::AA_DontCreateNativeWidgetSiblings) && parentWidget())
|
|
10304 |
parentWidget()->d_func()->enforceNativeChildren();
|
|
10305 |
if (on && !internalWinId() && testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Created))
|
|
10306 |
d->createWinId();
|
|
10307 |
if (ic && isEnabled())
|
|
10308 |
ic->setFocusWidget(this);
|
|
10309 |
break;
|
|
10310 |
}
|
|
10311 |
case Qt::WA_PaintOnScreen:
|
|
10312 |
d->updateIsOpaque();
|
|
10313 |
#if defined(Q_WS_WIN) || defined(Q_WS_X11)
|
|
10314 |
// Recreate the widget if it's already created as an alien widget and
|
|
10315 |
// WA_PaintOnScreen is enabled. Paint on screen widgets must have win id.
|
|
10316 |
// So must their children.
|
|
10317 |
if (on) {
|
|
10318 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_NativeWindow);
|
|
10319 |
d->enforceNativeChildren();
|
|
10320 |
}
|
|
10321 |
#endif
|
|
10322 |
// fall through
|
|
10323 |
case Qt::WA_OpaquePaintEvent:
|
|
10324 |
d->updateIsOpaque();
|
|
10325 |
break;
|
|
10326 |
case Qt::WA_NoSystemBackground:
|
|
10327 |
d->updateIsOpaque();
|
|
10328 |
// fall through...
|
|
10329 |
case Qt::WA_UpdatesDisabled:
|
|
10330 |
d->updateSystemBackground();
|
|
10331 |
break;
|
|
10332 |
case Qt::WA_TransparentForMouseEvents:
|
|
10333 |
#ifdef Q_WS_MAC
|
|
10334 |
d->macUpdateIgnoreMouseEvents();
|
|
10335 |
#endif
|
|
10336 |
break;
|
|
10337 |
case Qt::WA_InputMethodEnabled: {
|
|
10338 |
QInputContext *ic = d->ic;
|
|
10339 |
if (!ic && (!on || hasFocus()))
|
|
10340 |
ic = d->inputContext();
|
|
10341 |
if (ic) {
|
|
10342 |
if (on && hasFocus() && ic->focusWidget() != this && isEnabled()) {
|
|
10343 |
ic->setFocusWidget(this);
|
|
10344 |
} else if (!on && ic->focusWidget() == this) {
|
|
10345 |
ic->reset();
|
|
10346 |
ic->setFocusWidget(0);
|
|
10347 |
}
|
|
10348 |
}
|
|
10349 |
break;
|
|
10350 |
}
|
|
10351 |
case Qt::WA_WindowPropagation:
|
|
10352 |
d->resolvePalette();
|
|
10353 |
d->resolveFont();
|
|
10354 |
d->resolveLocale();
|
|
10355 |
break;
|
|
10356 |
#ifdef Q_WS_X11
|
|
10357 |
case Qt::WA_NoX11EventCompression:
|
|
10358 |
if (!d->extra)
|
|
10359 |
d->createExtra();
|
|
10360 |
d->extra->compress_events = on;
|
|
10361 |
break;
|
|
10362 |
case Qt::WA_X11OpenGLOverlay:
|
|
10363 |
d->updateIsOpaque();
|
|
10364 |
break;
|
|
10365 |
#endif
|
|
10366 |
case Qt::WA_DontShowOnScreen: {
|
|
10367 |
if (on && isVisible()) {
|
|
10368 |
// Make sure we keep the current state and only hide the widget
|
|
10369 |
// from the desktop. show_sys will only update platform specific
|
|
10370 |
// attributes at this point.
|
|
10371 |
d->hide_sys();
|
|
10372 |
#ifdef Q_WS_QWS
|
|
10373 |
// Release the region for this window from qws if the widget has
|
|
10374 |
// been shown before the attribute was set.
|
|
10375 |
if (QWSWindowSurface *surface = static_cast<QWSWindowSurface *>(windowSurface())) {
|
|
10376 |
QWidget::qwsDisplay()->requestRegion(surface->winId(), surface->key(),
|
|
10377 |
surface->permanentState(), QRegion());
|
|
10378 |
}
|
|
10379 |
#endif
|
|
10380 |
d->show_sys();
|
|
10381 |
}
|
|
10382 |
break;
|
|
10383 |
}
|
|
10384 |
|
|
10385 |
#ifdef Q_WS_X11
|
|
10386 |
case Qt::WA_X11NetWmWindowTypeDesktop:
|
|
10387 |
case Qt::WA_X11NetWmWindowTypeDock:
|
|
10388 |
case Qt::WA_X11NetWmWindowTypeToolBar:
|
|
10389 |
case Qt::WA_X11NetWmWindowTypeMenu:
|
|
10390 |
case Qt::WA_X11NetWmWindowTypeUtility:
|
|
10391 |
case Qt::WA_X11NetWmWindowTypeSplash:
|
|
10392 |
case Qt::WA_X11NetWmWindowTypeDialog:
|
|
10393 |
case Qt::WA_X11NetWmWindowTypeDropDownMenu:
|
|
10394 |
case Qt::WA_X11NetWmWindowTypePopupMenu:
|
|
10395 |
case Qt::WA_X11NetWmWindowTypeToolTip:
|
|
10396 |
case Qt::WA_X11NetWmWindowTypeNotification:
|
|
10397 |
case Qt::WA_X11NetWmWindowTypeCombo:
|
|
10398 |
case Qt::WA_X11NetWmWindowTypeDND:
|
|
10399 |
if (testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Created))
|
|
10400 |
d->setNetWmWindowTypes();
|
|
10401 |
break;
|
|
10402 |
#endif
|
|
10403 |
|
|
10404 |
case Qt::WA_StaticContents:
|
|
10405 |
if (QWidgetBackingStore *bs = d->maybeBackingStore()) {
|
|
10406 |
if (on)
|
|
10407 |
bs->addStaticWidget(this);
|
|
10408 |
else
|
|
10409 |
bs->removeStaticWidget(this);
|
|
10410 |
}
|
|
10411 |
break;
|
|
10412 |
case Qt::WA_TranslucentBackground:
|
|
10413 |
if (on) {
|
|
10414 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_NoSystemBackground);
|
|
10415 |
d->updateIsTranslucent();
|
|
10416 |
}
|
|
10417 |
|
|
10418 |
break;
|
|
10419 |
case Qt::WA_AcceptTouchEvents:
|
|
10420 |
#if defined(Q_WS_WIN) || defined(Q_WS_MAC) || defined(Q_WS_S60)
|
|
10421 |
if (on)
|
|
10422 |
d->registerTouchWindow();
|
|
10423 |
#endif
|
|
10424 |
break;
|
|
10425 |
default:
|
|
10426 |
break;
|
|
10427 |
}
|
|
10428 |
}
|
|
10429 |
|
|
10430 |
/*! \fn bool QWidget::testAttribute(Qt::WidgetAttribute attribute) const
|
|
10431 |
|
|
10432 |
Returns true if attribute \a attribute is set on this widget;
|
|
10433 |
otherwise returns false.
|
|
10434 |
|
|
10435 |
\sa setAttribute()
|
|
10436 |
*/
|
|
10437 |
bool QWidget::testAttribute_helper(Qt::WidgetAttribute attribute) const
|
|
10438 |
{
|
|
10439 |
Q_D(const QWidget);
|
|
10440 |
const int x = attribute - 8*sizeof(uint);
|
|
10441 |
const int int_off = x / (8*sizeof(uint));
|
|
10442 |
return (d->high_attributes[int_off] & (1<<(x-(int_off*8*sizeof(uint)))));
|
|
10443 |
}
|
|
10444 |
|
|
10445 |
/*!
|
|
10446 |
\property QWidget::windowOpacity
|
|
10447 |
|
|
10448 |
\brief The level of opacity for the window.
|
|
10449 |
|
|
10450 |
The valid range of opacity is from 1.0 (completely opaque) to
|
|
10451 |
0.0 (completely transparent).
|
|
10452 |
|
|
10453 |
By default the value of this property is 1.0.
|
|
10454 |
|
|
10455 |
This feature is available on Embedded Linux, Mac OS X, Windows,
|
|
10456 |
and X11 platforms that support the Composite extension.
|
|
10457 |
|
|
10458 |
This feature is not available on Windows CE.
|
|
10459 |
|
|
10460 |
Note that under X11 you need to have a composite manager running,
|
|
10461 |
and the X11 specific _NET_WM_WINDOW_OPACITY atom needs to be
|
|
10462 |
supported by the window manager you are using.
|
|
10463 |
|
|
10464 |
\warning Changing this property from opaque to transparent might issue a
|
|
10465 |
paint event that needs to be processed before the window is displayed
|
|
10466 |
correctly. This affects mainly the use of QPixmap::grabWindow(). Also note
|
|
10467 |
that semi-transparent windows update and resize significantly slower than
|
|
10468 |
opaque windows.
|
|
10469 |
|
|
10470 |
\sa setMask()
|
|
10471 |
*/
|
|
10472 |
qreal QWidget::windowOpacity() const
|
|
10473 |
{
|
|
10474 |
Q_D(const QWidget);
|
|
10475 |
return (isWindow() && d->maybeTopData()) ? d->maybeTopData()->opacity / 255. : 1.0;
|
|
10476 |
}
|
|
10477 |
|
|
10478 |
void QWidget::setWindowOpacity(qreal opacity)
|
|
10479 |
{
|
|
10480 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
10481 |
if (!isWindow())
|
|
10482 |
return;
|
|
10483 |
|
|
10484 |
opacity = qBound(qreal(0.0), opacity, qreal(1.0));
|
|
10485 |
QTLWExtra *extra = d->topData();
|
|
10486 |
extra->opacity = uint(opacity * 255);
|
|
10487 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_WindowOpacitySet);
|
|
10488 |
|
|
10489 |
#ifndef Q_WS_QWS
|
|
10490 |
if (!testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Created))
|
|
10491 |
return;
|
|
10492 |
#endif
|
|
10493 |
|
|
10494 |
#ifndef QT_NO_GRAPHICSVIEW
|
|
10495 |
if (QGraphicsProxyWidget *proxy = graphicsProxyWidget()) {
|
|
10496 |
// Avoid invalidating the cache if set.
|
|
10497 |
if (proxy->cacheMode() == QGraphicsItem::NoCache)
|
|
10498 |
proxy->update();
|
|
10499 |
else if (QGraphicsScene *scene = proxy->scene())
|
|
10500 |
scene->update(proxy->sceneBoundingRect());
|
|
10501 |
return;
|
|
10502 |
}
|
|
10503 |
#endif
|
|
10504 |
|
|
10505 |
d->setWindowOpacity_sys(opacity);
|
|
10506 |
}
|
|
10507 |
|
|
10508 |
/*!
|
|
10509 |
\property QWidget::windowModified
|
|
10510 |
\brief whether the document shown in the window has unsaved changes
|
|
10511 |
|
|
10512 |
A modified window is a window whose content has changed but has
|
|
10513 |
not been saved to disk. This flag will have different effects
|
|
10514 |
varied by the platform. On Mac OS X the close button will have a
|
|
10515 |
modified look; on other platforms, the window title will have an
|
|
10516 |
'*' (asterisk).
|
|
10517 |
|
|
10518 |
The window title must contain a "[*]" placeholder, which
|
|
10519 |
indicates where the '*' should appear. Normally, it should appear
|
|
10520 |
right after the file name (e.g., "document1.txt[*] - Text
|
|
10521 |
Editor"). If the window isn't modified, the placeholder is simply
|
|
10522 |
removed.
|
|
10523 |
|
|
10524 |
Note that if a widget is set as modified, all its ancestors will
|
|
10525 |
also be set as modified. However, if you call \c
|
|
10526 |
{setWindowModified(false)} on a widget, this will not propagate to
|
|
10527 |
its parent because other children of the parent might have been
|
|
10528 |
modified.
|
|
10529 |
|
|
10530 |
\sa windowTitle, {Application Example}, {SDI Example}, {MDI Example}
|
|
10531 |
*/
|
|
10532 |
bool QWidget::isWindowModified() const
|
|
10533 |
{
|
|
10534 |
return testAttribute(Qt::WA_WindowModified);
|
|
10535 |
}
|
|
10536 |
|
|
10537 |
void QWidget::setWindowModified(bool mod)
|
|
10538 |
{
|
|
10539 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
10540 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_WindowModified, mod);
|
|
10541 |
|
|
10542 |
#ifndef Q_WS_MAC
|
|
10543 |
if (!windowTitle().contains(QLatin1String("[*]")) && mod)
|
|
10544 |
qWarning("QWidget::setWindowModified: The window title does not contain a '[*]' placeholder");
|
|
10545 |
#endif
|
|
10546 |
d->setWindowTitle_helper(windowTitle());
|
|
10547 |
d->setWindowIconText_helper(windowIconText());
|
|
10548 |
#ifdef Q_WS_MAC
|
|
10549 |
d->setWindowModified_sys(mod);
|
|
10550 |
#endif
|
|
10551 |
|
|
10552 |
QEvent e(QEvent::ModifiedChange);
|
|
10553 |
QApplication::sendEvent(this, &e);
|
|
10554 |
}
|
|
10555 |
|
|
10556 |
#ifndef QT_NO_TOOLTIP
|
|
10557 |
/*!
|
|
10558 |
\property QWidget::toolTip
|
|
10559 |
|
|
10560 |
\brief the widget's tooltip
|
|
10561 |
|
|
10562 |
Note that by default tooltips are only shown for widgets that are
|
|
10563 |
children of the active window. You can change this behavior by
|
|
10564 |
setting the attribute Qt::WA_AlwaysShowToolTips on the \e window,
|
|
10565 |
not on the widget with the tooltip.
|
|
10566 |
|
|
10567 |
If you want to control a tooltip's behavior, you can intercept the
|
|
10568 |
event() function and catch the QEvent::ToolTip event (e.g., if you
|
|
10569 |
want to customize the area for which the tooltip should be shown).
|
|
10570 |
|
|
10571 |
By default, this property contains an empty string.
|
|
10572 |
|
|
10573 |
\sa QToolTip statusTip whatsThis
|
|
10574 |
*/
|
|
10575 |
void QWidget::setToolTip(const QString &s)
|
|
10576 |
{
|
|
10577 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
10578 |
d->toolTip = s;
|
|
10579 |
|
|
10580 |
QEvent event(QEvent::ToolTipChange);
|
|
10581 |
QApplication::sendEvent(this, &event);
|
|
10582 |
}
|
|
10583 |
|
|
10584 |
QString QWidget::toolTip() const
|
|
10585 |
{
|
|
10586 |
Q_D(const QWidget);
|
|
10587 |
return d->toolTip;
|
|
10588 |
}
|
|
10589 |
#endif // QT_NO_TOOLTIP
|
|
10590 |
|
|
10591 |
|
|
10592 |
#ifndef QT_NO_STATUSTIP
|
|
10593 |
/*!
|
|
10594 |
\property QWidget::statusTip
|
|
10595 |
\brief the widget's status tip
|
|
10596 |
|
|
10597 |
By default, this property contains an empty string.
|
|
10598 |
|
|
10599 |
\sa toolTip whatsThis
|
|
10600 |
*/
|
|
10601 |
void QWidget::setStatusTip(const QString &s)
|
|
10602 |
{
|
|
10603 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
10604 |
d->statusTip = s;
|
|
10605 |
}
|
|
10606 |
|
|
10607 |
QString QWidget::statusTip() const
|
|
10608 |
{
|
|
10609 |
Q_D(const QWidget);
|
|
10610 |
return d->statusTip;
|
|
10611 |
}
|
|
10612 |
#endif // QT_NO_STATUSTIP
|
|
10613 |
|
|
10614 |
#ifndef QT_NO_WHATSTHIS
|
|
10615 |
/*!
|
|
10616 |
\property QWidget::whatsThis
|
|
10617 |
|
|
10618 |
\brief the widget's What's This help text.
|
|
10619 |
|
|
10620 |
By default, this property contains an empty string.
|
|
10621 |
|
|
10622 |
\sa QWhatsThis QWidget::toolTip QWidget::statusTip
|
|
10623 |
*/
|
|
10624 |
void QWidget::setWhatsThis(const QString &s)
|
|
10625 |
{
|
|
10626 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
10627 |
d->whatsThis = s;
|
|
10628 |
}
|
|
10629 |
|
|
10630 |
QString QWidget::whatsThis() const
|
|
10631 |
{
|
|
10632 |
Q_D(const QWidget);
|
|
10633 |
return d->whatsThis;
|
|
10634 |
}
|
|
10635 |
#endif // QT_NO_WHATSTHIS
|
|
10636 |
|
|
10637 |
#ifndef QT_NO_ACCESSIBILITY
|
|
10638 |
/*!
|
|
10639 |
\property QWidget::accessibleName
|
|
10640 |
|
|
10641 |
\brief the widget's name as seen by assistive technologies
|
|
10642 |
|
|
10643 |
This property is used by accessible clients to identify, find, or announce
|
|
10644 |
the widget for accessible clients.
|
|
10645 |
|
|
10646 |
By default, this property contains an empty string.
|
|
10647 |
|
|
10648 |
\sa QAccessibleInterface::text()
|
|
10649 |
*/
|
|
10650 |
void QWidget::setAccessibleName(const QString &name)
|
|
10651 |
{
|
|
10652 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
10653 |
d->accessibleName = name;
|
|
10654 |
}
|
|
10655 |
|
|
10656 |
QString QWidget::accessibleName() const
|
|
10657 |
{
|
|
10658 |
Q_D(const QWidget);
|
|
10659 |
return d->accessibleName;
|
|
10660 |
}
|
|
10661 |
|
|
10662 |
/*!
|
|
10663 |
\property QWidget::accessibleDescription
|
|
10664 |
|
|
10665 |
\brief the widget's description as seen by assistive technologies
|
|
10666 |
|
|
10667 |
By default, this property contains an empty string.
|
|
10668 |
|
|
10669 |
\sa QAccessibleInterface::text()
|
|
10670 |
*/
|
|
10671 |
void QWidget::setAccessibleDescription(const QString &description)
|
|
10672 |
{
|
|
10673 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
10674 |
d->accessibleDescription = description;
|
|
10675 |
}
|
|
10676 |
|
|
10677 |
QString QWidget::accessibleDescription() const
|
|
10678 |
{
|
|
10679 |
Q_D(const QWidget);
|
|
10680 |
return d->accessibleDescription;
|
|
10681 |
}
|
|
10682 |
#endif // QT_NO_ACCESSIBILITY
|
|
10683 |
|
|
10684 |
#ifndef QT_NO_SHORTCUT
|
|
10685 |
/*!
|
|
10686 |
Adds a shortcut to Qt's shortcut system that watches for the given
|
|
10687 |
\a key sequence in the given \a context. If the \a context is
|
|
10688 |
Qt::ApplicationShortcut, the shortcut applies to the application as a
|
|
10689 |
whole. Otherwise, it is either local to this widget, Qt::WidgetShortcut,
|
|
10690 |
or to the window itself, Qt::WindowShortcut.
|
|
10691 |
|
|
10692 |
If the same \a key sequence has been grabbed by several widgets,
|
|
10693 |
when the \a key sequence occurs a QEvent::Shortcut event is sent
|
|
10694 |
to all the widgets to which it applies in a non-deterministic
|
|
10695 |
order, but with the ``ambiguous'' flag set to true.
|
|
10696 |
|
|
10697 |
\warning You should not normally need to use this function;
|
|
10698 |
instead create \l{QAction}s with the shortcut key sequences you
|
|
10699 |
require (if you also want equivalent menu options and toolbar
|
|
10700 |
buttons), or create \l{QShortcut}s if you just need key sequences.
|
|
10701 |
Both QAction and QShortcut handle all the event filtering for you,
|
|
10702 |
and provide signals which are triggered when the user triggers the
|
|
10703 |
key sequence, so are much easier to use than this low-level
|
|
10704 |
function.
|
|
10705 |
|
|
10706 |
\sa releaseShortcut() setShortcutEnabled()
|
|
10707 |
*/
|
|
10708 |
int QWidget::grabShortcut(const QKeySequence &key, Qt::ShortcutContext context)
|
|
10709 |
{
|
|
10710 |
Q_ASSERT(qApp);
|
|
10711 |
if (key.isEmpty())
|
|
10712 |
return 0;
|
|
10713 |
setAttribute(Qt::WA_GrabbedShortcut);
|
|
10714 |
return qApp->d_func()->shortcutMap.addShortcut(this, key, context);
|
|
10715 |
}
|
|
10716 |
|
|
10717 |
/*!
|
|
10718 |
Removes the shortcut with the given \a id from Qt's shortcut
|
|
10719 |
system. The widget will no longer receive QEvent::Shortcut events
|
|
10720 |
for the shortcut's key sequence (unless it has other shortcuts
|
|
10721 |
with the same key sequence).
|
|
10722 |
|
|
10723 |
\warning You should not normally need to use this function since
|
|
10724 |
Qt's shortcut system removes shortcuts automatically when their
|
|
10725 |
parent widget is destroyed. It is best to use QAction or
|
|
10726 |
QShortcut to handle shortcuts, since they are easier to use than
|
|
10727 |
this low-level function. Note also that this is an expensive
|
|
10728 |
operation.
|
|
10729 |
|
|
10730 |
\sa grabShortcut() setShortcutEnabled()
|
|
10731 |
*/
|
|
10732 |
void QWidget::releaseShortcut(int id)
|
|
10733 |
{
|
|
10734 |
Q_ASSERT(qApp);
|
|
10735 |
if (id)
|
|
10736 |
qApp->d_func()->shortcutMap.removeShortcut(id, this, 0);
|
|
10737 |
}
|
|
10738 |
|
|
10739 |
/*!
|
|
10740 |
If \a enable is true, the shortcut with the given \a id is
|
|
10741 |
enabled; otherwise the shortcut is disabled.
|
|
10742 |
|
|
10743 |
\warning You should not normally need to use this function since
|
|
10744 |
Qt's shortcut system enables/disables shortcuts automatically as
|
|
10745 |
widgets become hidden/visible and gain or lose focus. It is best
|
|
10746 |
to use QAction or QShortcut to handle shortcuts, since they are
|
|
10747 |
easier to use than this low-level function.
|
|
10748 |
|
|
10749 |
\sa grabShortcut() releaseShortcut()
|
|
10750 |
*/
|
|
10751 |
void QWidget::setShortcutEnabled(int id, bool enable)
|
|
10752 |
{
|
|
10753 |
Q_ASSERT(qApp);
|
|
10754 |
if (id)
|
|
10755 |
qApp->d_func()->shortcutMap.setShortcutEnabled(enable, id, this, 0);
|
|
10756 |
}
|
|
10757 |
|
|
10758 |
/*!
|
|
10759 |
\since 4.2
|
|
10760 |
|
|
10761 |
If \a enable is true, auto repeat of the shortcut with the
|
|
10762 |
given \a id is enabled; otherwise it is disabled.
|
|
10763 |
|
|
10764 |
\sa grabShortcut() releaseShortcut()
|
|
10765 |
*/
|
|
10766 |
void QWidget::setShortcutAutoRepeat(int id, bool enable)
|
|
10767 |
{
|
|
10768 |
Q_ASSERT(qApp);
|
|
10769 |
if (id)
|
|
10770 |
qApp->d_func()->shortcutMap.setShortcutAutoRepeat(enable, id, this, 0);
|
|
10771 |
}
|
|
10772 |
#endif // QT_NO_SHORTCUT
|
|
10773 |
/*!
|
|
10774 |
Updates the widget's micro focus.
|
|
10775 |
|
|
10776 |
\sa QInputContext
|
|
10777 |
*/
|
|
10778 |
void QWidget::updateMicroFocus()
|
|
10779 |
{
|
|
10780 |
#if !defined(QT_NO_IM) && (defined(Q_WS_X11) || defined(Q_WS_QWS) || defined(Q_OS_SYMBIAN))
|
|
10781 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
10782 |
// and optimisation to update input context only it has already been created.
|
|
10783 |
if (d->ic || qApp->d_func()->inputContext) {
|
|
10784 |
QInputContext *ic = inputContext();
|
|
10785 |
if (ic)
|
|
10786 |
ic->update();
|
|
10787 |
}
|
|
10788 |
#endif
|
|
10789 |
#ifndef QT_NO_ACCESSIBILITY
|
|
10790 |
// ##### is this correct
|
|
10791 |
QAccessible::updateAccessibility(this, 0, QAccessible::StateChanged);
|
|
10792 |
#endif
|
|
10793 |
}
|
|
10794 |
|
|
10795 |
|
|
10796 |
#if defined (Q_WS_WIN)
|
|
10797 |
/*!
|
|
10798 |
Returns the window system handle of the widget, for low-level
|
|
10799 |
access. Using this function is not portable.
|
|
10800 |
|
|
10801 |
An HDC acquired with getDC() has to be released with releaseDC().
|
|
10802 |
|
|
10803 |
\warning Using this function is not portable.
|
|
10804 |
*/
|
|
10805 |
HDC QWidget::getDC() const
|
|
10806 |
{
|
|
10807 |
Q_D(const QWidget);
|
|
10808 |
if (d->hd)
|
|
10809 |
return (HDC) d->hd;
|
|
10810 |
return GetDC(winId());
|
|
10811 |
}
|
|
10812 |
|
|
10813 |
/*!
|
|
10814 |
Releases the HDC \a hdc acquired by a previous call to getDC().
|
|
10815 |
|
|
10816 |
\warning Using this function is not portable.
|
|
10817 |
*/
|
|
10818 |
void QWidget::releaseDC(HDC hdc) const
|
|
10819 |
{
|
|
10820 |
Q_D(const QWidget);
|
|
10821 |
// If its the widgets own dc, it will be released elsewhere. If
|
|
10822 |
// its a different HDC we release it and issue a warning if it
|
|
10823 |
// fails.
|
|
10824 |
if (hdc != d->hd && !ReleaseDC(winId(), hdc))
|
|
10825 |
qErrnoWarning("QWidget::releaseDC(): failed to release HDC");
|
|
10826 |
}
|
|
10827 |
#else
|
|
10828 |
/*!
|
|
10829 |
Returns the window system handle of the widget, for low-level
|
|
10830 |
access. Using this function is not portable.
|
|
10831 |
|
|
10832 |
The HANDLE type varies with platform; see \c qwindowdefs.h for
|
|
10833 |
details.
|
|
10834 |
*/
|
|
10835 |
Qt::HANDLE QWidget::handle() const
|
|
10836 |
{
|
|
10837 |
Q_D(const QWidget);
|
|
10838 |
if (!internalWinId() && testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Created))
|
|
10839 |
(void)winId(); // enforce native window
|
|
10840 |
return d->hd;
|
|
10841 |
}
|
|
10842 |
#endif
|
|
10843 |
|
|
10844 |
|
|
10845 |
/*!
|
|
10846 |
Raises this widget to the top of the parent widget's stack.
|
|
10847 |
|
|
10848 |
After this call the widget will be visually in front of any
|
|
10849 |
overlapping sibling widgets.
|
|
10850 |
|
|
10851 |
\note When using activateWindow(), you can call this function to
|
|
10852 |
ensure that the window is stacked on top.
|
|
10853 |
|
|
10854 |
\sa lower(), stackUnder()
|
|
10855 |
*/
|
|
10856 |
|
|
10857 |
void QWidget::raise()
|
|
10858 |
{
|
|
10859 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
10860 |
if (!isWindow()) {
|
|
10861 |
QWidget *p = parentWidget();
|
|
10862 |
const int parentChildCount = p->d_func()->children.size();
|
|
10863 |
if (parentChildCount < 2)
|
|
10864 |
return;
|
|
10865 |
const int from = p->d_func()->children.indexOf(this);
|
|
10866 |
Q_ASSERT(from >= 0);
|
|
10867 |
// Do nothing if the widget is already in correct stacking order _and_ created.
|
|
10868 |
if (from != parentChildCount -1)
|
|
10869 |
p->d_func()->children.move(from, parentChildCount - 1);
|
|
10870 |
if (!testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Created) && p->testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Created))
|
|
10871 |
create();
|
|
10872 |
else if (from == parentChildCount - 1)
|
|
10873 |
return;
|
|
10874 |
|
|
10875 |
QRegion region(rect());
|
|
10876 |
d->subtractOpaqueSiblings(region);
|
|
10877 |
d->invalidateBuffer(region);
|
|
10878 |
}
|
|
10879 |
if (testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Created))
|
|
10880 |
d->raise_sys();
|
|
10881 |
|
|
10882 |
QEvent e(QEvent::ZOrderChange);
|
|
10883 |
QApplication::sendEvent(this, &e);
|
|
10884 |
}
|
|
10885 |
|
|
10886 |
/*!
|
|
10887 |
Lowers the widget to the bottom of the parent widget's stack.
|
|
10888 |
|
|
10889 |
After this call the widget will be visually behind (and therefore
|
|
10890 |
obscured by) any overlapping sibling widgets.
|
|
10891 |
|
|
10892 |
\sa raise(), stackUnder()
|
|
10893 |
*/
|
|
10894 |
|
|
10895 |
void QWidget::lower()
|
|
10896 |
{
|
|
10897 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
10898 |
if (!isWindow()) {
|
|
10899 |
QWidget *p = parentWidget();
|
|
10900 |
const int parentChildCount = p->d_func()->children.size();
|
|
10901 |
if (parentChildCount < 2)
|
|
10902 |
return;
|
|
10903 |
const int from = p->d_func()->children.indexOf(this);
|
|
10904 |
Q_ASSERT(from >= 0);
|
|
10905 |
// Do nothing if the widget is already in correct stacking order _and_ created.
|
|
10906 |
if (from != 0)
|
|
10907 |
p->d_func()->children.move(from, 0);
|
|
10908 |
if (!testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Created) && p->testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Created))
|
|
10909 |
create();
|
|
10910 |
else if (from == 0)
|
|
10911 |
return;
|
|
10912 |
}
|
|
10913 |
if (testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Created))
|
|
10914 |
d->lower_sys();
|
|
10915 |
|
|
10916 |
QEvent e(QEvent::ZOrderChange);
|
|
10917 |
QApplication::sendEvent(this, &e);
|
|
10918 |
}
|
|
10919 |
|
|
10920 |
|
|
10921 |
/*!
|
|
10922 |
Places the widget under \a w in the parent widget's stack.
|
|
10923 |
|
|
10924 |
To make this work, the widget itself and \a w must be siblings.
|
|
10925 |
|
|
10926 |
\sa raise(), lower()
|
|
10927 |
*/
|
|
10928 |
void QWidget::stackUnder(QWidget* w)
|
|
10929 |
{
|
|
10930 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
10931 |
QWidget *p = parentWidget();
|
|
10932 |
if (!w || isWindow() || p != w->parentWidget() || this == w)
|
|
10933 |
return;
|
|
10934 |
if (p) {
|
|
10935 |
int from = p->d_func()->children.indexOf(this);
|
|
10936 |
int to = p->d_func()->children.indexOf(w);
|
|
10937 |
Q_ASSERT(from >= 0);
|
|
10938 |
Q_ASSERT(to >= 0);
|
|
10939 |
if (from < to)
|
|
10940 |
--to;
|
|
10941 |
// Do nothing if the widget is already in correct stacking order _and_ created.
|
|
10942 |
if (from != to)
|
|
10943 |
p->d_func()->children.move(from, to);
|
|
10944 |
if (!testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Created) && p->testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Created))
|
|
10945 |
create();
|
|
10946 |
else if (from == to)
|
|
10947 |
return;
|
|
10948 |
}
|
|
10949 |
if (testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Created))
|
|
10950 |
d->stackUnder_sys(w);
|
|
10951 |
|
|
10952 |
QEvent e(QEvent::ZOrderChange);
|
|
10953 |
QApplication::sendEvent(this, &e);
|
|
10954 |
}
|
|
10955 |
|
|
10956 |
void QWidget::styleChange(QStyle&) { }
|
|
10957 |
void QWidget::enabledChange(bool) { } // compat
|
|
10958 |
void QWidget::paletteChange(const QPalette &) { } // compat
|
|
10959 |
void QWidget::fontChange(const QFont &) { } // compat
|
|
10960 |
void QWidget::windowActivationChange(bool) { } // compat
|
|
10961 |
void QWidget::languageChange() { } // compat
|
|
10962 |
|
|
10963 |
|
|
10964 |
/*!
|
|
10965 |
\enum QWidget::BackgroundOrigin
|
|
10966 |
|
|
10967 |
\compat
|
|
10968 |
|
|
10969 |
\value WidgetOrigin
|
|
10970 |
\value ParentOrigin
|
|
10971 |
\value WindowOrigin
|
|
10972 |
\value AncestorOrigin
|
|
10973 |
|
|
10974 |
*/
|
|
10975 |
|
|
10976 |
/*!
|
|
10977 |
\fn bool QWidget::isVisibleToTLW() const
|
|
10978 |
|
|
10979 |
Use isVisible() instead.
|
|
10980 |
*/
|
|
10981 |
|
|
10982 |
/*!
|
|
10983 |
\fn void QWidget::iconify()
|
|
10984 |
|
|
10985 |
Use showMinimized() instead.
|
|
10986 |
*/
|
|
10987 |
|
|
10988 |
/*!
|
|
10989 |
\fn void QWidget::constPolish() const
|
|
10990 |
|
|
10991 |
Use ensurePolished() instead.
|
|
10992 |
*/
|
|
10993 |
|
|
10994 |
/*!
|
|
10995 |
\fn void QWidget::reparent(QWidget *parent, Qt::WindowFlags f, const QPoint &p, bool showIt)
|
|
10996 |
|
|
10997 |
Use setParent() to change the parent or the widget's widget flags;
|
|
10998 |
use move() to move the widget, and use show() to show the widget.
|
|
10999 |
*/
|
|
11000 |
|
|
11001 |
/*!
|
|
11002 |
\fn void QWidget::reparent(QWidget *parent, const QPoint &p, bool showIt)
|
|
11003 |
|
|
11004 |
Use setParent() to change the parent; use move() to move the
|
|
11005 |
widget, and use show() to show the widget.
|
|
11006 |
*/
|
|
11007 |
|
|
11008 |
/*!
|
|
11009 |
\fn void QWidget::recreate(QWidget *parent, Qt::WindowFlags f, const QPoint & p, bool showIt)
|
|
11010 |
|
|
11011 |
Use setParent() to change the parent or the widget's widget flags;
|
|
11012 |
use move() to move the widget, and use show() to show the widget.
|
|
11013 |
*/
|
|
11014 |
|
|
11015 |
/*!
|
|
11016 |
\fn bool QWidget::hasMouse() const
|
|
11017 |
|
|
11018 |
Use testAttribute(Qt::WA_UnderMouse) instead.
|
|
11019 |
*/
|
|
11020 |
|
|
11021 |
/*!
|
|
11022 |
\fn bool QWidget::ownCursor() const
|
|
11023 |
|
|
11024 |
Use testAttribute(Qt::WA_SetCursor) instead.
|
|
11025 |
*/
|
|
11026 |
|
|
11027 |
/*!
|
|
11028 |
\fn bool QWidget::ownFont() const
|
|
11029 |
|
|
11030 |
Use testAttribute(Qt::WA_SetFont) instead.
|
|
11031 |
*/
|
|
11032 |
|
|
11033 |
/*!
|
|
11034 |
\fn void QWidget::unsetFont()
|
|
11035 |
|
|
11036 |
Use setFont(QFont()) instead.
|
|
11037 |
*/
|
|
11038 |
|
|
11039 |
/*!
|
|
11040 |
\fn bool QWidget::ownPalette() const
|
|
11041 |
|
|
11042 |
Use testAttribute(Qt::WA_SetPalette) instead.
|
|
11043 |
*/
|
|
11044 |
|
|
11045 |
/*!
|
|
11046 |
\fn void QWidget::unsetPalette()
|
|
11047 |
|
|
11048 |
Use setPalette(QPalette()) instead.
|
|
11049 |
*/
|
|
11050 |
|
|
11051 |
/*!
|
|
11052 |
\fn void QWidget::setEraseColor(const QColor &color)
|
|
11053 |
|
|
11054 |
Use the palette instead.
|
|
11055 |
|
|
11056 |
\oldcode
|
|
11057 |
widget->setEraseColor(color);
|
|
11058 |
\newcode
|
|
11059 |
QPalette palette;
|
|
11060 |
palette.setColor(widget->backgroundRole(), color);
|
|
11061 |
widget->setPalette(palette);
|
|
11062 |
\endcode
|
|
11063 |
*/
|
|
11064 |
|
|
11065 |
/*!
|
|
11066 |
\fn void QWidget::setErasePixmap(const QPixmap &pixmap)
|
|
11067 |
|
|
11068 |
Use the palette instead.
|
|
11069 |
|
|
11070 |
\oldcode
|
|
11071 |
widget->setErasePixmap(pixmap);
|
|
11072 |
\newcode
|
|
11073 |
QPalette palette;
|
|
11074 |
palette.setBrush(widget->backgroundRole(), QBrush(pixmap));
|
|
11075 |
widget->setPalette(palette);
|
|
11076 |
\endcode
|
|
11077 |
*/
|
|
11078 |
|
|
11079 |
/*!
|
|
11080 |
\fn void QWidget::setPaletteForegroundColor(const QColor &color)
|
|
11081 |
|
|
11082 |
Use the palette directly.
|
|
11083 |
|
|
11084 |
\oldcode
|
|
11085 |
widget->setPaletteForegroundColor(color);
|
|
11086 |
\newcode
|
|
11087 |
QPalette palette;
|
|
11088 |
palette.setColor(widget->foregroundRole(), color);
|
|
11089 |
widget->setPalette(palette);
|
|
11090 |
\endcode
|
|
11091 |
*/
|
|
11092 |
|
|
11093 |
/*!
|
|
11094 |
\fn void QWidget::setPaletteBackgroundColor(const QColor &color)
|
|
11095 |
|
|
11096 |
Use the palette directly.
|
|
11097 |
|
|
11098 |
\oldcode
|
|
11099 |
widget->setPaletteBackgroundColor(color);
|
|
11100 |
\newcode
|
|
11101 |
QPalette palette;
|
|
11102 |
palette.setColor(widget->backgroundRole(), color);
|
|
11103 |
widget->setPalette(palette);
|
|
11104 |
\endcode
|
|
11105 |
*/
|
|
11106 |
|
|
11107 |
/*!
|
|
11108 |
\fn void QWidget::setPaletteBackgroundPixmap(const QPixmap &pixmap)
|
|
11109 |
|
|
11110 |
Use the palette directly.
|
|
11111 |
|
|
11112 |
\oldcode
|
|
11113 |
widget->setPaletteBackgroundPixmap(pixmap);
|
|
11114 |
\newcode
|
|
11115 |
QPalette palette;
|
|
11116 |
palette.setBrush(widget->backgroundRole(), QBrush(pixmap));
|
|
11117 |
widget->setPalette(palette);
|
|
11118 |
\endcode
|
|
11119 |
*/
|
|
11120 |
|
|
11121 |
/*!
|
|
11122 |
\fn void QWidget::setBackgroundPixmap(const QPixmap &pixmap)
|
|
11123 |
|
|
11124 |
Use the palette instead.
|
|
11125 |
|
|
11126 |
\oldcode
|
|
11127 |
widget->setBackgroundPixmap(pixmap);
|
|
11128 |
\newcode
|
|
11129 |
QPalette palette;
|
|
11130 |
palette.setBrush(widget->backgroundRole(), QBrush(pixmap));
|
|
11131 |
widget->setPalette(palette);
|
|
11132 |
\endcode
|
|
11133 |
*/
|
|
11134 |
|
|
11135 |
/*!
|
|
11136 |
\fn void QWidget::setBackgroundColor(const QColor &color)
|
|
11137 |
|
|
11138 |
Use the palette instead.
|
|
11139 |
|
|
11140 |
\oldcode
|
|
11141 |
widget->setBackgroundColor(color);
|
|
11142 |
\newcode
|
|
11143 |
QPalette palette;
|
|
11144 |
palette.setColor(widget->backgroundRole(), color);
|
|
11145 |
widget->setPalette(palette);
|
|
11146 |
\endcode
|
|
11147 |
*/
|
|
11148 |
|
|
11149 |
/*!
|
|
11150 |
\fn QColorGroup QWidget::colorGroup() const
|
|
11151 |
|
|
11152 |
Use QColorGroup(palette()) instead.
|
|
11153 |
*/
|
|
11154 |
|
|
11155 |
/*!
|
|
11156 |
\fn QWidget *QWidget::parentWidget(bool sameWindow) const
|
|
11157 |
|
|
11158 |
Use the no-argument overload instead.
|
|
11159 |
*/
|
|
11160 |
|
|
11161 |
/*!
|
|
11162 |
\fn void QWidget::setKeyCompression(bool b)
|
|
11163 |
|
|
11164 |
Use setAttribute(Qt::WA_KeyCompression, b) instead.
|
|
11165 |
*/
|
|
11166 |
|
|
11167 |
/*!
|
|
11168 |
\fn void QWidget::setFont(const QFont &f, bool b)
|
|
11169 |
|
|
11170 |
Use the single-argument overload instead.
|
|
11171 |
*/
|
|
11172 |
|
|
11173 |
/*!
|
|
11174 |
\fn void QWidget::setPalette(const QPalette &p, bool b)
|
|
11175 |
|
|
11176 |
Use the single-argument overload instead.
|
|
11177 |
*/
|
|
11178 |
|
|
11179 |
/*!
|
|
11180 |
\fn void QWidget::setBackgroundOrigin(BackgroundOrigin background)
|
|
11181 |
|
|
11182 |
\obsolete
|
|
11183 |
*/
|
|
11184 |
|
|
11185 |
/*!
|
|
11186 |
\fn BackgroundOrigin QWidget::backgroundOrigin() const
|
|
11187 |
|
|
11188 |
\obsolete
|
|
11189 |
|
|
11190 |
Always returns \c WindowOrigin.
|
|
11191 |
*/
|
|
11192 |
|
|
11193 |
/*!
|
|
11194 |
\fn QPoint QWidget::backgroundOffset() const
|
|
11195 |
|
|
11196 |
\obsolete
|
|
11197 |
|
|
11198 |
Always returns QPoint().
|
|
11199 |
*/
|
|
11200 |
|
|
11201 |
/*!
|
|
11202 |
\fn void QWidget::repaint(bool b)
|
|
11203 |
|
|
11204 |
The boolean parameter \a b is ignored. Use the no-argument overload instead.
|
|
11205 |
*/
|
|
11206 |
|
|
11207 |
/*!
|
|
11208 |
\fn void QWidget::repaint(int x, int y, int w, int h, bool b)
|
|
11209 |
|
|
11210 |
The boolean parameter \a b is ignored. Use the four-argument overload instead.
|
|
11211 |
*/
|
|
11212 |
|
|
11213 |
/*!
|
|
11214 |
\fn void QWidget::repaint(const QRect &r, bool b)
|
|
11215 |
|
|
11216 |
The boolean parameter \a b is ignored. Use the single rect-argument overload instead.
|
|
11217 |
*/
|
|
11218 |
|
|
11219 |
/*!
|
|
11220 |
\fn void QWidget::repaint(const QRegion &rgn, bool b)
|
|
11221 |
|
|
11222 |
The boolean parameter \a b is ignored. Use the single region-argument overload instead.
|
|
11223 |
*/
|
|
11224 |
|
|
11225 |
/*!
|
|
11226 |
\fn void QWidget::erase()
|
|
11227 |
|
|
11228 |
Drawing may only take place in a QPaintEvent. Overload
|
|
11229 |
paintEvent() to do your erasing and call update() to schedule a
|
|
11230 |
replaint whenever necessary. See also QPainter.
|
|
11231 |
*/
|
|
11232 |
|
|
11233 |
/*!
|
|
11234 |
\fn void QWidget::erase(int x, int y, int w, int h)
|
|
11235 |
|
|
11236 |
Drawing may only take place in a QPaintEvent. Overload
|
|
11237 |
paintEvent() to do your erasing and call update() to schedule a
|
|
11238 |
replaint whenever necessary. See also QPainter.
|
|
11239 |
*/
|
|
11240 |
|
|
11241 |
/*!
|
|
11242 |
\fn void QWidget::erase(const QRect &rect)
|
|
11243 |
|
|
11244 |
Drawing may only take place in a QPaintEvent. Overload
|
|
11245 |
paintEvent() to do your erasing and call update() to schedule a
|
|
11246 |
replaint whenever necessary. See also QPainter.
|
|
11247 |
*/
|
|
11248 |
|
|
11249 |
/*!
|
|
11250 |
\fn void QWidget::drawText(const QPoint &p, const QString &s)
|
|
11251 |
|
|
11252 |
Drawing may only take place in a QPaintEvent. Overload
|
|
11253 |
paintEvent() to do your drawing and call update() to schedule a
|
|
11254 |
replaint whenever necessary. See also QPainter.
|
|
11255 |
*/
|
|
11256 |
|
|
11257 |
/*!
|
|
11258 |
\fn void QWidget::drawText(int x, int y, const QString &s)
|
|
11259 |
|
|
11260 |
Drawing may only take place in a QPaintEvent. Overload
|
|
11261 |
paintEvent() to do your drawing and call update() to schedule a
|
|
11262 |
replaint whenever necessary. See also QPainter.
|
|
11263 |
*/
|
|
11264 |
|
|
11265 |
/*!
|
|
11266 |
\fn QWidget *QWidget::childAt(const QPoint &p, bool includeThis) const
|
|
11267 |
|
|
11268 |
Use the single point argument overload instead.
|
|
11269 |
*/
|
|
11270 |
|
|
11271 |
/*!
|
|
11272 |
\fn void QWidget::setCaption(const QString &c)
|
|
11273 |
|
|
11274 |
Use setWindowTitle() instead.
|
|
11275 |
*/
|
|
11276 |
|
|
11277 |
/*!
|
|
11278 |
\fn void QWidget::setIcon(const QPixmap &i)
|
|
11279 |
|
|
11280 |
Use setWindowIcon() instead.
|
|
11281 |
*/
|
|
11282 |
|
|
11283 |
/*!
|
|
11284 |
\fn void QWidget::setIconText(const QString &it)
|
|
11285 |
|
|
11286 |
Use setWindowIconText() instead.
|
|
11287 |
*/
|
|
11288 |
|
|
11289 |
/*!
|
|
11290 |
\fn QString QWidget::caption() const
|
|
11291 |
|
|
11292 |
Use windowTitle() instead.
|
|
11293 |
*/
|
|
11294 |
|
|
11295 |
/*!
|
|
11296 |
\fn QString QWidget::iconText() const
|
|
11297 |
|
|
11298 |
Use windowIconText() instead.
|
|
11299 |
*/
|
|
11300 |
|
|
11301 |
/*!
|
|
11302 |
\fn bool QWidget::isTopLevel() const
|
|
11303 |
\obsolete
|
|
11304 |
|
|
11305 |
Use isWindow() instead.
|
|
11306 |
*/
|
|
11307 |
|
|
11308 |
/*!
|
|
11309 |
\fn bool QWidget::isRightToLeft() const
|
|
11310 |
\internal
|
|
11311 |
*/
|
|
11312 |
|
|
11313 |
/*!
|
|
11314 |
\fn bool QWidget::isLeftToRight() const
|
|
11315 |
\internal
|
|
11316 |
*/
|
|
11317 |
|
|
11318 |
/*!
|
|
11319 |
\fn void QWidget::setInputMethodEnabled(bool enabled)
|
|
11320 |
|
|
11321 |
Use setAttribute(Qt::WA_InputMethodEnabled, \a enabled) instead.
|
|
11322 |
*/
|
|
11323 |
|
|
11324 |
/*!
|
|
11325 |
\fn bool QWidget::isInputMethodEnabled() const
|
|
11326 |
|
|
11327 |
Use testAttribute(Qt::WA_InputMethodEnabled) instead.
|
|
11328 |
*/
|
|
11329 |
|
|
11330 |
/*!
|
|
11331 |
\fn void QWidget::setActiveWindow()
|
|
11332 |
|
|
11333 |
Use activateWindow() instead.
|
|
11334 |
*/
|
|
11335 |
|
|
11336 |
/*!
|
|
11337 |
\fn bool QWidget::isShown() const
|
|
11338 |
|
|
11339 |
Use !isHidden() instead (notice the exclamation mark), or use isVisible() to check whether the widget is visible.
|
|
11340 |
*/
|
|
11341 |
|
|
11342 |
/*!
|
|
11343 |
\fn bool QWidget::isDialog() const
|
|
11344 |
|
|
11345 |
Use windowType() == Qt::Dialog instead.
|
|
11346 |
*/
|
|
11347 |
|
|
11348 |
/*!
|
|
11349 |
\fn bool QWidget::isPopup() const
|
|
11350 |
|
|
11351 |
Use windowType() == Qt::Popup instead.
|
|
11352 |
*/
|
|
11353 |
|
|
11354 |
/*!
|
|
11355 |
\fn bool QWidget::isDesktop() const
|
|
11356 |
|
|
11357 |
Use windowType() == Qt::Desktop instead.
|
|
11358 |
*/
|
|
11359 |
|
|
11360 |
/*!
|
|
11361 |
\fn void QWidget::polish()
|
|
11362 |
|
|
11363 |
Use ensurePolished() instead.
|
|
11364 |
*/
|
|
11365 |
|
|
11366 |
/*!
|
|
11367 |
\fn QWidget *QWidget::childAt(int x, int y, bool includeThis) const
|
|
11368 |
|
|
11369 |
Use the childAt() overload that doesn't have an \a includeThis parameter.
|
|
11370 |
|
|
11371 |
\oldcode
|
|
11372 |
return widget->childAt(x, y, true);
|
|
11373 |
\newcode
|
|
11374 |
QWidget *child = widget->childAt(x, y, true);
|
|
11375 |
if (child)
|
|
11376 |
return child;
|
|
11377 |
if (widget->rect().contains(x, y))
|
|
11378 |
return widget;
|
|
11379 |
\endcode
|
|
11380 |
*/
|
|
11381 |
|
|
11382 |
/*!
|
|
11383 |
\fn void QWidget::setSizePolicy(QSizePolicy::Policy hor, QSizePolicy::Policy ver, bool hfw)
|
|
11384 |
\compat
|
|
11385 |
|
|
11386 |
Use the \l sizePolicy property and heightForWidth() function instead.
|
|
11387 |
*/
|
|
11388 |
|
|
11389 |
/*!
|
|
11390 |
\fn bool QWidget::isUpdatesEnabled() const
|
|
11391 |
\compat
|
|
11392 |
|
|
11393 |
Use the \l updatesEnabled property instead.
|
|
11394 |
*/
|
|
11395 |
|
|
11396 |
/*!
|
|
11397 |
\macro QWIDGETSIZE_MAX
|
|
11398 |
\relates QWidget
|
|
11399 |
|
|
11400 |
Defines the maximum size for a QWidget object.
|
|
11401 |
|
|
11402 |
The largest allowed size for a widget is QSize(QWIDGETSIZE_MAX,
|
|
11403 |
QWIDGETSIZE_MAX), i.e. QSize (16777215,16777215).
|
|
11404 |
|
|
11405 |
\sa QWidget::setMaximumSize()
|
|
11406 |
*/
|
|
11407 |
|
|
11408 |
QRect QWidgetPrivate::frameStrut() const
|
|
11409 |
{
|
|
11410 |
Q_Q(const QWidget);
|
|
11411 |
if (!q->isWindow() || (q->windowType() == Qt::Desktop) || q->testAttribute(Qt::WA_DontShowOnScreen)) {
|
|
11412 |
// x2 = x1 + w - 1, so w/h = 1
|
|
11413 |
return QRect(0, 0, 1, 1);
|
|
11414 |
}
|
|
11415 |
|
|
11416 |
if (data.fstrut_dirty
|
|
11417 |
#ifndef Q_WS_WIN
|
|
11418 |
// ### Fix properly for 4.3
|
|
11419 |
&& q->isVisible()
|
|
11420 |
#endif
|
|
11421 |
&& q->testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Created))
|
|
11422 |
const_cast<QWidgetPrivate *>(this)->updateFrameStrut();
|
|
11423 |
|
|
11424 |
return maybeTopData() ? maybeTopData()->frameStrut : QRect();
|
|
11425 |
}
|
|
11426 |
|
|
11427 |
#ifdef QT_KEYPAD_NAVIGATION
|
|
11428 |
/*!
|
|
11429 |
\internal
|
|
11430 |
|
|
11431 |
Changes the focus from the current focusWidget to a widget in
|
|
11432 |
the \a direction.
|
|
11433 |
|
|
11434 |
Returns true, if there was a widget in that direction
|
|
11435 |
*/
|
|
11436 |
bool QWidgetPrivate::navigateToDirection(Direction direction)
|
|
11437 |
{
|
|
11438 |
QWidget *targetWidget = widgetInNavigationDirection(direction);
|
|
11439 |
if (targetWidget)
|
|
11440 |
targetWidget->setFocus();
|
|
11441 |
return (targetWidget != 0);
|
|
11442 |
}
|
|
11443 |
|
|
11444 |
/*!
|
|
11445 |
\internal
|
|
11446 |
|
|
11447 |
Searches for a widget that is positioned in the \a direction, starting
|
|
11448 |
from the current focusWidget.
|
|
11449 |
|
|
11450 |
Returns the pointer to a found widget or 0, if there was no widget in
|
|
11451 |
that direction.
|
|
11452 |
*/
|
|
11453 |
QWidget *QWidgetPrivate::widgetInNavigationDirection(Direction direction)
|
|
11454 |
{
|
|
11455 |
const QWidget *sourceWidget = QApplication::focusWidget();
|
|
11456 |
if (!sourceWidget)
|
|
11457 |
return 0;
|
|
11458 |
const QRect sourceRect = sourceWidget->rect().translated(sourceWidget->mapToGlobal(QPoint()));
|
|
11459 |
const int sourceX =
|
|
11460 |
(direction == DirectionNorth || direction == DirectionSouth) ?
|
|
11461 |
(sourceRect.left() + (sourceRect.right() - sourceRect.left()) / 2)
|
|
11462 |
:(direction == DirectionEast ? sourceRect.right() : sourceRect.left());
|
|
11463 |
const int sourceY =
|
|
11464 |
(direction == DirectionEast || direction == DirectionWest) ?
|
|
11465 |
(sourceRect.top() + (sourceRect.bottom() - sourceRect.top()) / 2)
|
|
11466 |
:(direction == DirectionSouth ? sourceRect.bottom() : sourceRect.top());
|
|
11467 |
const QPoint sourcePoint(sourceX, sourceY);
|
|
11468 |
const QPoint sourceCenter = sourceRect.center();
|
|
11469 |
const QWidget *sourceWindow = sourceWidget->window();
|
|
11470 |
|
|
11471 |
QWidget *targetWidget = 0;
|
|
11472 |
int shortestDistance = INT_MAX;
|
|
11473 |
foreach(QWidget *targetCandidate, QApplication::allWidgets()) {
|
|
11474 |
|
|
11475 |
const QRect targetCandidateRect = targetCandidate->rect().translated(targetCandidate->mapToGlobal(QPoint()));
|
|
11476 |
|
|
11477 |
// For focus proxies, the child widget handling the focus can have keypad navigation focus,
|
|
11478 |
// but the owner of the proxy cannot.
|
|
11479 |
// Additionally, empty widgets should be ignored.
|
|
11480 |
if (targetCandidate->focusProxy() || targetCandidateRect.isEmpty())
|
|
11481 |
continue;
|
|
11482 |
|
|
11483 |
// Only navigate to a target widget that...
|
|
11484 |
if ( targetCandidate != sourceWidget
|
|
11485 |
// ...takes the focus,
|
|
11486 |
&& targetCandidate->focusPolicy() & Qt::TabFocus
|
|
11487 |
// ...is above if DirectionNorth,
|
|
11488 |
&& !(direction == DirectionNorth && targetCandidateRect.bottom() > sourceRect.top())
|
|
11489 |
// ...is on the right if DirectionEast,
|
|
11490 |
&& !(direction == DirectionEast && targetCandidateRect.left() < sourceRect.right())
|
|
11491 |
// ...is below if DirectionSouth,
|
|
11492 |
&& !(direction == DirectionSouth && targetCandidateRect.top() < sourceRect.bottom())
|
|
11493 |
// ...is on the left if DirectionWest,
|
|
11494 |
&& !(direction == DirectionWest && targetCandidateRect.right() > sourceRect.left())
|
|
11495 |
// ...is enabled,
|
|
11496 |
&& targetCandidate->isEnabled()
|
|
11497 |
// ...is visible,
|
|
11498 |
&& targetCandidate->isVisible()
|
|
11499 |
// ...is in the same window,
|
|
11500 |
&& targetCandidate->window() == sourceWindow) {
|
|
11501 |
const int targetCandidateDistance = pointToRect(sourcePoint, targetCandidateRect);
|
|
11502 |
if (targetCandidateDistance < shortestDistance) {
|
|
11503 |
shortestDistance = targetCandidateDistance;
|
|
11504 |
targetWidget = targetCandidate;
|
|
11505 |
}
|
|
11506 |
}
|
|
11507 |
}
|
|
11508 |
return targetWidget;
|
|
11509 |
}
|
|
11510 |
#endif
|
|
11511 |
|
|
11512 |
/*!
|
|
11513 |
\preliminary
|
|
11514 |
\since 4.2
|
|
11515 |
\obsolete
|
|
11516 |
|
|
11517 |
Sets the window surface to be the \a surface specified.
|
|
11518 |
The QWidget takes will ownership of the \a surface.
|
|
11519 |
widget itself is deleted.
|
|
11520 |
*/
|
|
11521 |
void QWidget::setWindowSurface(QWindowSurface *surface)
|
|
11522 |
{
|
|
11523 |
// ### createWinId() ??
|
|
11524 |
|
|
11525 |
#ifndef Q_BACKINGSTORE_SUBSURFACES
|
|
11526 |
if (!isTopLevel())
|
|
11527 |
return;
|
|
11528 |
#endif
|
|
11529 |
|
|
11530 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
11531 |
|
|
11532 |
QTLWExtra *topData = d->topData();
|
|
11533 |
if (topData->windowSurface == surface)
|
|
11534 |
return;
|
|
11535 |
|
|
11536 |
QWindowSurface *oldSurface = topData->windowSurface;
|
|
11537 |
delete topData->windowSurface;
|
|
11538 |
topData->windowSurface = surface;
|
|
11539 |
|
|
11540 |
QWidgetBackingStore *bs = d->maybeBackingStore();
|
|
11541 |
if (!bs)
|
|
11542 |
return;
|
|
11543 |
|
|
11544 |
if (isTopLevel()) {
|
|
11545 |
if (bs->windowSurface != oldSurface && bs->windowSurface != surface)
|
|
11546 |
delete bs->windowSurface;
|
|
11547 |
bs->windowSurface = surface;
|
|
11548 |
}
|
|
11549 |
#ifdef Q_BACKINGSTORE_SUBSURFACES
|
|
11550 |
else {
|
|
11551 |
bs->subSurfaces.append(surface);
|
|
11552 |
}
|
|
11553 |
bs->subSurfaces.removeOne(oldSurface);
|
|
11554 |
#endif
|
|
11555 |
}
|
|
11556 |
|
|
11557 |
/*!
|
|
11558 |
\preliminary
|
|
11559 |
\since 4.2
|
|
11560 |
|
|
11561 |
Returns the QWindowSurface this widget will be drawn into.
|
|
11562 |
*/
|
|
11563 |
QWindowSurface *QWidget::windowSurface() const
|
|
11564 |
{
|
|
11565 |
Q_D(const QWidget);
|
|
11566 |
QTLWExtra *extra = d->maybeTopData();
|
|
11567 |
if (extra && extra->windowSurface)
|
|
11568 |
return extra->windowSurface;
|
|
11569 |
|
|
11570 |
QWidgetBackingStore *bs = d->maybeBackingStore();
|
|
11571 |
|
|
11572 |
#ifdef Q_BACKINGSTORE_SUBSURFACES
|
|
11573 |
if (bs && bs->subSurfaces.isEmpty())
|
|
11574 |
return bs->windowSurface;
|
|
11575 |
|
|
11576 |
if (!isTopLevel()) {
|
|
11577 |
const QWidget *w = parentWidget();
|
|
11578 |
while (w) {
|
|
11579 |
QTLWExtra *extra = w->d_func()->maybeTopData();
|
|
11580 |
if (extra && extra->windowSurface)
|
|
11581 |
return extra->windowSurface;
|
|
11582 |
if (w->isTopLevel())
|
|
11583 |
break;
|
|
11584 |
w = w->parentWidget();
|
|
11585 |
}
|
|
11586 |
}
|
|
11587 |
#endif // Q_BACKINGSTORE_SUBSURFACES
|
|
11588 |
|
|
11589 |
return bs ? bs->windowSurface : 0;
|
|
11590 |
}
|
|
11591 |
|
|
11592 |
void QWidgetPrivate::getLayoutItemMargins(int *left, int *top, int *right, int *bottom) const
|
|
11593 |
{
|
|
11594 |
if (left)
|
|
11595 |
*left = (int)leftLayoutItemMargin;
|
|
11596 |
if (top)
|
|
11597 |
*top = (int)topLayoutItemMargin;
|
|
11598 |
if (right)
|
|
11599 |
*right = (int)rightLayoutItemMargin;
|
|
11600 |
if (bottom)
|
|
11601 |
*bottom = (int)bottomLayoutItemMargin;
|
|
11602 |
}
|
|
11603 |
|
|
11604 |
void QWidgetPrivate::setLayoutItemMargins(int left, int top, int right, int bottom)
|
|
11605 |
{
|
|
11606 |
if (leftLayoutItemMargin == left
|
|
11607 |
&& topLayoutItemMargin == top
|
|
11608 |
&& rightLayoutItemMargin == right
|
|
11609 |
&& bottomLayoutItemMargin == bottom)
|
|
11610 |
return;
|
|
11611 |
|
|
11612 |
Q_Q(QWidget);
|
|
11613 |
leftLayoutItemMargin = (signed char)left;
|
|
11614 |
topLayoutItemMargin = (signed char)top;
|
|
11615 |
rightLayoutItemMargin = (signed char)right;
|
|
11616 |
bottomLayoutItemMargin = (signed char)bottom;
|
|
11617 |
q->updateGeometry();
|
|
11618 |
}
|
|
11619 |
|
|
11620 |
void QWidgetPrivate::setLayoutItemMargins(QStyle::SubElement element, const QStyleOption *opt)
|
|
11621 |
{
|
|
11622 |
Q_Q(QWidget);
|
|
11623 |
QStyleOption myOpt;
|
|
11624 |
if (!opt) {
|
|
11625 |
myOpt.initFrom(q);
|
|
11626 |
myOpt.rect.setRect(0, 0, 32768, 32768); // arbitrary
|
|
11627 |
opt = &myOpt;
|
|
11628 |
}
|
|
11629 |
|
|
11630 |
QRect liRect = q->style()->subElementRect(element, opt, q);
|
|
11631 |
if (liRect.isValid()) {
|
|
11632 |
leftLayoutItemMargin = (signed char)(opt->rect.left() - liRect.left());
|
|
11633 |
topLayoutItemMargin = (signed char)(opt->rect.top() - liRect.top());
|
|
11634 |
rightLayoutItemMargin = (signed char)(liRect.right() - opt->rect.right());
|
|
11635 |
bottomLayoutItemMargin = (signed char)(liRect.bottom() - opt->rect.bottom());
|
|
11636 |
} else {
|
|
11637 |
leftLayoutItemMargin = 0;
|
|
11638 |
topLayoutItemMargin = 0;
|
|
11639 |
rightLayoutItemMargin = 0;
|
|
11640 |
bottomLayoutItemMargin = 0;
|
|
11641 |
}
|
|
11642 |
}
|
|
11643 |
// resets the Qt::WA_QuitOnClose attribute to the default value for transient widgets.
|
|
11644 |
void QWidgetPrivate::adjustQuitOnCloseAttribute()
|
|
11645 |
{
|
|
11646 |
Q_Q(QWidget);
|
|
11647 |
|
|
11648 |
if (!q->parentWidget()) {
|
|
11649 |
Qt::WindowType type = q->windowType();
|
|
11650 |
if (type == Qt::Widget || type == Qt::SubWindow)
|
|
11651 |
type = Qt::Window;
|
|
11652 |
if (type != Qt::Widget && type != Qt::Window && type != Qt::Dialog)
|
|
11653 |
q->setAttribute(Qt::WA_QuitOnClose, false);
|
|
11654 |
}
|
|
11655 |
}
|
|
11656 |
|
|
11657 |
|
|
11658 |
|
|
11659 |
Q_GUI_EXPORT QWidgetData *qt_qwidget_data(QWidget *widget)
|
|
11660 |
{
|
|
11661 |
return widget->data;
|
|
11662 |
}
|
|
11663 |
|
|
11664 |
Q_GUI_EXPORT QWidgetPrivate *qt_widget_private(QWidget *widget)
|
|
11665 |
{
|
|
11666 |
return widget->d_func();
|
|
11667 |
}
|
|
11668 |
|
|
11669 |
|
|
11670 |
#ifndef QT_NO_GRAPHICSVIEW
|
|
11671 |
/*!
|
|
11672 |
\since 4.5
|
|
11673 |
|
|
11674 |
Returns the proxy widget for the corresponding embedded widget in a graphics
|
|
11675 |
view; otherwise returns 0.
|
|
11676 |
|
|
11677 |
\sa QGraphicsProxyWidget::createProxyForChildWidget(),
|
|
11678 |
QGraphicsScene::addWidget()
|
|
11679 |
*/
|
|
11680 |
QGraphicsProxyWidget *QWidget::graphicsProxyWidget() const
|
|
11681 |
{
|
|
11682 |
Q_D(const QWidget);
|
|
11683 |
if (d->extra) {
|
|
11684 |
return d->extra->proxyWidget;
|
|
11685 |
}
|
|
11686 |
return 0;
|
|
11687 |
}
|
|
11688 |
#endif
|
|
11689 |
|
|
11690 |
|
|
11691 |
/*!
|
|
11692 |
\typedef QWidgetList
|
|
11693 |
\relates QWidget
|
|
11694 |
|
|
11695 |
Synonym for QList<QWidget *>.
|
|
11696 |
*/
|
|
11697 |
|
|
11698 |
/*!
|
|
11699 |
Subscribes the widget to a given \a gesture with a \a context.
|
|
11700 |
|
|
11701 |
\sa QGestureEvent
|
|
11702 |
\since 4.6
|
|
11703 |
*/
|
|
11704 |
void QWidget::grabGesture(Qt::GestureType gesture, Qt::GestureContext context)
|
|
11705 |
{
|
|
11706 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
11707 |
d->gestureContext.insert(gesture, context);
|
|
11708 |
(void)QGestureManager::instance(); // create a gesture manager
|
|
11709 |
}
|
|
11710 |
|
|
11711 |
QT_END_NAMESPACE
|
|
11712 |
|
|
11713 |
#include "moc_qwidget.cpp"
|
|
11714 |
|
|
11715 |
/*!
|
|
11716 |
\typedef WId
|
|
11717 |
\relates QWidget
|
|
11718 |
|
|
11719 |
Platform dependent window identifier.
|
|
11720 |
*/
|
|
11721 |
|
|
11722 |
/*!
|
|
11723 |
\fn void QWidget::destroy(bool destroyWindow, bool destroySubWindows)
|
|
11724 |
|
|
11725 |
Frees up window system resources. Destroys the widget window if \a
|
|
11726 |
destroyWindow is true.
|
|
11727 |
|
|
11728 |
destroy() calls itself recursively for all the child widgets,
|
|
11729 |
passing \a destroySubWindows for the \a destroyWindow parameter.
|
|
11730 |
To have more control over destruction of subwidgets, destroy
|
|
11731 |
subwidgets selectively first.
|
|
11732 |
|
|
11733 |
This function is usually called from the QWidget destructor.
|
|
11734 |
*/
|
|
11735 |
|
|
11736 |
/*!
|
|
11737 |
\fn QPaintEngine *QWidget::paintEngine() const
|
|
11738 |
|
|
11739 |
Returns the widget's paint engine.
|
|
11740 |
|
|
11741 |
Note that this function should not be called explicitly by the
|
|
11742 |
user, since it's meant for reimplementation purposes only. The
|
|
11743 |
function is called by Qt internally, and the default
|
|
11744 |
implementation may not always return a valid pointer.
|
|
11745 |
*/
|
|
11746 |
|
|
11747 |
/*!
|
|
11748 |
\fn QPoint QWidget::mapToGlobal(const QPoint &pos) const
|
|
11749 |
|
|
11750 |
Translates the widget coordinate \a pos to global screen
|
|
11751 |
coordinates. For example, \c{mapToGlobal(QPoint(0,0))} would give
|
|
11752 |
the global coordinates of the top-left pixel of the widget.
|
|
11753 |
|
|
11754 |
\sa mapFromGlobal() mapTo() mapToParent()
|
|
11755 |
*/
|
|
11756 |
|
|
11757 |
/*!
|
|
11758 |
\fn QPoint QWidget::mapFromGlobal(const QPoint &pos) const
|
|
11759 |
|
|
11760 |
Translates the global screen coordinate \a pos to widget
|
|
11761 |
coordinates.
|
|
11762 |
|
|
11763 |
\sa mapToGlobal() mapFrom() mapFromParent()
|
|
11764 |
*/
|
|
11765 |
|
|
11766 |
/*!
|
|
11767 |
\fn void QWidget::grabMouse()
|
|
11768 |
|
|
11769 |
Grabs the mouse input.
|
|
11770 |
|
|
11771 |
This widget receives all mouse events until releaseMouse() is
|
|
11772 |
called; other widgets get no mouse events at all. Keyboard
|
|
11773 |
events are not affected. Use grabKeyboard() if you want to grab
|
|
11774 |
that.
|
|
11775 |
|
|
11776 |
\warning Bugs in mouse-grabbing applications very often lock the
|
|
11777 |
terminal. Use this function with extreme caution, and consider
|
|
11778 |
using the \c -nograb command line option while debugging.
|
|
11779 |
|
|
11780 |
It is almost never necessary to grab the mouse when using Qt, as
|
|
11781 |
Qt grabs and releases it sensibly. In particular, Qt grabs the
|
|
11782 |
mouse when a mouse button is pressed and keeps it until the last
|
|
11783 |
button is released.
|
|
11784 |
|
|
11785 |
Note that only visible widgets can grab mouse input. If
|
|
11786 |
isVisible() returns false for a widget, that widget cannot call
|
|
11787 |
grabMouse().
|
|
11788 |
|
|
11789 |
\sa releaseMouse() grabKeyboard() releaseKeyboard() grabKeyboard()
|
|
11790 |
focusWidget()
|
|
11791 |
*/
|
|
11792 |
|
|
11793 |
/*!
|
|
11794 |
\fn void QWidget::grabMouse(const QCursor &cursor)
|
|
11795 |
\overload
|
|
11796 |
|
|
11797 |
Grabs the mouse input and changes the cursor shape.
|
|
11798 |
|
|
11799 |
The cursor will assume shape \a cursor (for as long as the mouse
|
|
11800 |
focus is grabbed) and this widget will be the only one to receive
|
|
11801 |
mouse events until releaseMouse() is called().
|
|
11802 |
|
|
11803 |
\warning Grabbing the mouse might lock the terminal.
|
|
11804 |
|
|
11805 |
\sa releaseMouse(), grabKeyboard(), releaseKeyboard(), setCursor()
|
|
11806 |
*/
|
|
11807 |
|
|
11808 |
/*!
|
|
11809 |
\fn void QWidget::releaseMouse()
|
|
11810 |
|
|
11811 |
Releases the mouse grab.
|
|
11812 |
|
|
11813 |
\sa grabMouse(), grabKeyboard(), releaseKeyboard()
|
|
11814 |
*/
|
|
11815 |
|
|
11816 |
/*!
|
|
11817 |
\fn void QWidget::grabKeyboard()
|
|
11818 |
|
|
11819 |
Grabs the keyboard input.
|
|
11820 |
|
|
11821 |
This widget receives all keyboard events until releaseKeyboard()
|
|
11822 |
is called; other widgets get no keyboard events at all. Mouse
|
|
11823 |
events are not affected. Use grabMouse() if you want to grab that.
|
|
11824 |
|
|
11825 |
The focus widget is not affected, except that it doesn't receive
|
|
11826 |
any keyboard events. setFocus() moves the focus as usual, but the
|
|
11827 |
new focus widget receives keyboard events only after
|
|
11828 |
releaseKeyboard() is called.
|
|
11829 |
|
|
11830 |
If a different widget is currently grabbing keyboard input, that
|
|
11831 |
widget's grab is released first.
|
|
11832 |
|
|
11833 |
\sa releaseKeyboard() grabMouse() releaseMouse() focusWidget()
|
|
11834 |
*/
|
|
11835 |
|
|
11836 |
/*!
|
|
11837 |
\fn void QWidget::releaseKeyboard()
|
|
11838 |
|
|
11839 |
Releases the keyboard grab.
|
|
11840 |
|
|
11841 |
\sa grabKeyboard(), grabMouse(), releaseMouse()
|
|
11842 |
*/
|
|
11843 |
|
|
11844 |
/*!
|
|
11845 |
\fn QWidget *QWidget::mouseGrabber()
|
|
11846 |
|
|
11847 |
Returns the widget that is currently grabbing the mouse input.
|
|
11848 |
|
|
11849 |
If no widget in this application is currently grabbing the mouse,
|
|
11850 |
0 is returned.
|
|
11851 |
|
|
11852 |
\sa grabMouse(), keyboardGrabber()
|
|
11853 |
*/
|
|
11854 |
|
|
11855 |
/*!
|
|
11856 |
\fn QWidget *QWidget::keyboardGrabber()
|
|
11857 |
|
|
11858 |
Returns the widget that is currently grabbing the keyboard input.
|
|
11859 |
|
|
11860 |
If no widget in this application is currently grabbing the
|
|
11861 |
keyboard, 0 is returned.
|
|
11862 |
|
|
11863 |
\sa grabMouse(), mouseGrabber()
|
|
11864 |
*/
|
|
11865 |
|
|
11866 |
/*!
|
|
11867 |
\fn void QWidget::activateWindow()
|
|
11868 |
|
|
11869 |
Sets the top-level widget containing this widget to be the active
|
|
11870 |
window.
|
|
11871 |
|
|
11872 |
An active window is a visible top-level window that has the
|
|
11873 |
keyboard input focus.
|
|
11874 |
|
|
11875 |
This function performs the same operation as clicking the mouse on
|
|
11876 |
the title bar of a top-level window. On X11, the result depends on
|
|
11877 |
the Window Manager. If you want to ensure that the window is
|
|
11878 |
stacked on top as well you should also call raise(). Note that the
|
|
11879 |
window must be visible, otherwise activateWindow() has no effect.
|
|
11880 |
|
|
11881 |
On Windows, if you are calling this when the application is not
|
|
11882 |
currently the active one then it will not make it the active
|
|
11883 |
window. It will change the color of the taskbar entry to indicate
|
|
11884 |
that the window has changed in some way. This is because Microsoft
|
|
11885 |
does not allow an application to interrupt what the user is currently
|
|
11886 |
doing in another application.
|
|
11887 |
|
|
11888 |
\sa isActiveWindow(), window(), show()
|
|
11889 |
*/
|
|
11890 |
|
|
11891 |
/*!
|
|
11892 |
\fn int QWidget::metric(PaintDeviceMetric m) const
|
|
11893 |
|
|
11894 |
Internal implementation of the virtual QPaintDevice::metric()
|
|
11895 |
function.
|
|
11896 |
|
|
11897 |
\a m is the metric to get.
|
|
11898 |
*/
|
|
11899 |
|
|
11900 |
/*!
|
|
11901 |
\fn void QWidget::setMask(const QRegion ®ion)
|
|
11902 |
\overload
|
|
11903 |
|
|
11904 |
Causes only the parts of the widget which overlap \a region to be
|
|
11905 |
visible. If the region includes pixels outside the rect() of the
|
|
11906 |
widget, window system controls in that area may or may not be
|
|
11907 |
visible, depending on the platform.
|
|
11908 |
|
|
11909 |
Note that this effect can be slow if the region is particularly
|
|
11910 |
complex.
|
|
11911 |
|
|
11912 |
\sa windowOpacity
|
|
11913 |
*/
|
|
11914 |
void QWidget::setMask(const QRegion &newMask)
|
|
11915 |
{
|
|
11916 |
Q_D(QWidget);
|
|
11917 |
|
|
11918 |
d->createExtra();
|
|
11919 |
if (newMask == d->extra->mask)
|
|
11920 |
return;
|
|
11921 |
|
|
11922 |
#ifndef QT_NO_BACKINGSTORE
|
|
11923 |
const QRegion oldMask(d->extra->mask);
|
|
11924 |
#endif
|
|
11925 |
|
|
11926 |
d->extra->mask = newMask;
|
|
11927 |
d->extra->hasMask = !newMask.isEmpty();
|
|
11928 |
|
|
11929 |
#ifndef QT_MAC_USE_COCOA
|
|
11930 |
if (!testAttribute(Qt::WA_WState_Created))
|
|
11931 |
return;
|
|
11932 |
#endif
|
|
11933 |
|
|
11934 |
d->setMask_sys(newMask);
|
|
11935 |
|
|
11936 |
#ifndef QT_NO_BACKINGSTORE
|
|
11937 |
if (!isVisible())
|
|
11938 |
return;
|
|
11939 |
|
|
11940 |
if (!d->extra->hasMask) {
|
|
11941 |
// Mask was cleared; update newly exposed area.
|
|
11942 |
QRegion expose(rect());
|
|
11943 |
expose -= oldMask;
|
|
11944 |
if (!expose.isEmpty()) {
|
|
11945 |
d->setDirtyOpaqueRegion();
|
|
11946 |
update(expose);
|
|
11947 |
}
|
|
11948 |
return;
|
|
11949 |
}
|
|
11950 |
|
|
11951 |
if (!isWindow()) {
|
|
11952 |
// Update newly exposed area on the parent widget.
|
|
11953 |
QRegion parentExpose(rect());
|
|
11954 |
parentExpose -= newMask;
|
|
11955 |
if (!parentExpose.isEmpty()) {
|
|
11956 |
d->setDirtyOpaqueRegion();
|
|
11957 |
parentExpose.translate(data->crect.topLeft());
|
|
11958 |
parentWidget()->update(parentExpose);
|
|
11959 |
}
|
|
11960 |
|
|
11961 |
// Update newly exposed area on this widget
|
|
11962 |
if (!oldMask.isEmpty())
|
|
11963 |
update(newMask - oldMask);
|
|
11964 |
}
|
|
11965 |
#endif
|
|
11966 |
}
|
|
11967 |
|
|
11968 |
/*!
|
|
11969 |
\fn void QWidget::setMask(const QBitmap &bitmap)
|
|
11970 |
|
|
11971 |
Causes only the pixels of the widget for which \a bitmap has a
|
|
11972 |
corresponding 1 bit to be visible. If the region includes pixels
|
|
11973 |
outside the rect() of the widget, window system controls in that
|
|
11974 |
area may or may not be visible, depending on the platform.
|
|
11975 |
|
|
11976 |
Note that this effect can be slow if the region is particularly
|
|
11977 |
complex.
|
|
11978 |
|
|
11979 |
The following code shows how an image with an alpha channel can be
|
|
11980 |
used to generate a mask for a widget:
|
|
11981 |
|
|
11982 |
\snippet doc/src/snippets/widget-mask/main.cpp 0
|
|
11983 |
|
|
11984 |
The label shown by this code is masked using the image it contains,
|
|
11985 |
giving the appearance that an irregularly-shaped image is being drawn
|
|
11986 |
directly onto the screen.
|
|
11987 |
|
|
11988 |
Masked widgets receive mouse events only on their visible
|
|
11989 |
portions.
|
|
11990 |
|
|
11991 |
\sa clearMask(), windowOpacity(), {Shaped Clock Example}
|
|
11992 |
*/
|
|
11993 |
void QWidget::setMask(const QBitmap &bitmap)
|
|
11994 |
{
|
|
11995 |
setMask(QRegion(bitmap));
|
|
11996 |
}
|
|
11997 |
|
|
11998 |
/*!
|
|
11999 |
\fn void QWidget::clearMask()
|
|
12000 |
|
|
12001 |
Removes any mask set by setMask().
|
|
12002 |
|
|
12003 |
\sa setMask()
|
|
12004 |
*/
|
|
12005 |
void QWidget::clearMask()
|
|
12006 |
{
|
|
12007 |
setMask(QRegion());
|
|
12008 |
}
|
|
12009 |
|
|
12010 |
/*! \fn const QX11Info &QWidget::x11Info() const
|
|
12011 |
Returns information about the configuration of the X display used to display
|
|
12012 |
the widget.
|
|
12013 |
|
|
12014 |
\warning This function is only available on X11.
|
|
12015 |
*/
|
|
12016 |
|
|
12017 |
/*! \fn Qt::HANDLE QWidget::x11PictureHandle() const
|
|
12018 |
Returns the X11 Picture handle of the widget for XRender
|
|
12019 |
support. Use of this function is not portable. This function will
|
|
12020 |
return 0 if XRender support is not compiled into Qt, if the
|
|
12021 |
XRender extension is not supported on the X11 display, or if the
|
|
12022 |
handle could not be created.
|
|
12023 |
*/
|
|
12024 |
|
|
12025 |
#ifdef Q_OS_SYMBIAN
|
|
12026 |
void QWidgetPrivate::_q_delayedDestroy(WId winId)
|
|
12027 |
{
|
|
12028 |
delete winId;
|
|
12029 |
}
|
|
12030 |
#endif
|